Stair #5 29 Edward A. LeLacheur Park

27

B

28

29

30

CD A.8

10'-6

"

30'-0

"

30'-0

"

30'-0

"

Slope

Slope

Up

1A7

XAX

Stair #

5

Stair #6

2A7

Right Field Concourse ExtensionEdward A. LeLacheur ParkOctober 24, 2018 - FOR CONSTRUCTION

D'AGOSTINO IZZO QUIRK ARCHITECTS, INC. 1310 BROADWAY SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS

DAIQ 17021.00 Edward A. LeLacheur Park Right Field Concourse Extension October 24, 2018 Lowell, Massachusetts

PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 01 02 - page 1 of 1

PROJECT DIRECTORY

OWNER City of Lowell 375 Merrimack Street Lowell, Massachusetts 01852

ARCHITECT D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Architects, Inc. 1310 Broadway Somerville, Massachusetts 02144 _____________________________________________________________________________

CONSULTANTS

CIVIL ENGINEERING Green International Affiliates, Incl. 239 Littleton Road, Suite 3 Westford, Massachusetts 01886

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING McNamara Salvia Structural Engineers Inc. 101 Federal Street, 11th Floor Boston, Massachusetts 02110

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, AND FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING AHA Consulting Engineers 24 Hartwell Avenue, 3rd. Floor Lexington, Massachusetts 02421

SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT Wil-Spec LLC Lynnfield Medical Office Building 15 Post Office Square Lynnfield, Massachusetts 01940

End of Directory

DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - page 1 of 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 01 01 Project Title Page Document 00 01 02 Project Directory Document 00 01 10 Table of Contents City of Lowell Contract Documents Form NC-1 Notice to Contractors Form I-1 Information for Bidders Form BP-1 Bid Proposal – General Bid Form BP-2 Basis of Award Form C-1 Contract Form PRB-1 Performance Bond Form PAB-1 Payment Bond Form COA-1 Certificate of Grantee/Borrower’s Attorney Form GC-1 General Conditions Form SC-1 Special Conditions Document 00 62 12 Product Submittal Form Document 00 63 15 Request for Interpretation (RFI) Form Document 00 63 25 Substitution Request Form

DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 Summary Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 41 17 Utilities Notification Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 73 00 Execution Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching Section 01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals Section 01 78 36 Warranties Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE Section 03 05 13 Concrete Sealers Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete

(Not Bound herewith, refer to notes on Drawings)



DIVISION 04 — MASONRY Section 04 20 00 Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 — METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing

(Not Bound herewith, refer to notes on Drawings) Section 05 31 00 Steel Decking

(Not Bound herewith, refer to notes on Drawings) Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05 50 00 * Metal Fabrications (* Filed Sub-Bid Required)

DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Section 07 53 23 Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) Roofing Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 84 00 Firestopping Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware

(Not Bound herewith, refer to notes on Drawings)

DIVISION 09 — FINISHES Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Tile Ceilings Section 09 91 00 Painting

DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES Section 10 14 00 Signage Section 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories

DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT Section 11 68 40 Exterior Safety Padding

DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 00 00 Fire Protection

DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING Section 22 00 00 * Plumbing Filed Sub-Bid Requirements (* Filed Sub-Bid Required) Section 22 00 01 * Plumbing (* Filed Sub-Bid Required as part of Section 22 00 00)

DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 00 00 HVAC (Not Bound herewith, refer to notes on Drawings)

DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 * Electrical Filed Sub-Bid Requirements) (*Filed Sub-Bid Required) Section 26 00 01 * Electrical (*Filed Sub-Bid Required as part of Section 26 00 00)



DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 31 00 * Fire Alarm (*Filed Sub-Bid Required as part of Section 26 00 00)

DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities

End - Table of Contents


CITY OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS

INFORMATION TO BIDDERS

BID PROPOSAL, CONTRACT

GENERAL CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS

AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

LeLACHEUR PARK RIGHT FIELD

CONCOURSE EXTENSION

CITY MANAGER – EILEEN DONOGHUE

October 24, 2018


LeLacheur Right Field Concourse Extension

INDEX

PAGE OR FORM NO. NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS NC - 1 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS I - 1 BID PROPOSAL - GENERAL BID BP -1 BP - 2 Basis of Award CONTRACT C-1 PERFORMANCE BOND PRB - 1 PAYMENT BOND PAB - 1 CERTIFICATE OF GRANTEE/BORROWER’S ATTORNEY COA - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS GC - 1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TS - 1 APPENDIX

NC-1

LeLACHEUR PARK RIGHT FIELD CONCOURSE EXTENSION CITY OF LOWELL

LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS

The City of Lowell, hereinafter called the Owner, invites sealed proposals from Contractors for the Edward A. LeLacheur Park Concourse Project, 450 Aiken Street, Lowell Massachusetts 01854 DUE DATE – General Bids Sealed bids will be publicly opened December 5, 2018 at City Hall in the Purchasing Department, Room 60, 375 Merrimack Street, Lowell, MA 01852, at 11:00 AM, EST/EDST, for the work described herein. BIDDERS ARE REQUIRED TO SUBMIT A BID INCLUDING ALL BID FORMS CONTAINED IN THIS PACKAGE. DO NOT REMOVE PAGES. DUE DATE – Filed SubBids Sealed bids will be publicly opened on November 21, 2018 at City Hall in the Purchasing Department, Room 60, 375 Merrimack Street, Lowell, MA 01852, at 11:00 AM, EST/EDST, for the work described herein. BIDDERS ARE REQUIRED TO SUBMIT A BID INCLUDING ALL BID FORMS CONTAINED IN THIS PACKAGE. DO NOT REMOVE PAGES.

PREBID/SITE INSPECTION Pre-Bid Conference and Site Visit will be held at the Edward A. LeLacheur Park, 450 Aiken Street, Lowell Massachusetts 01854 on November 15, 2018 at 9:00 AM. It is recommended that all prospective bidders have a representative in attendance. Meet at the main entrance to the park. BID AND PAYMENT BONDS A certified check made payable to the “City of Lowell” in the amount of 5% must accompany this bid. Bid bonds are acceptable. A payment bond in the amount of 100% of the total dollar award is required prior to contract execution. A performance bond in the amount of 100% of the total dollar award is required prior to contract execution. PREVAILING WAGE Attention of the Bidders is particularly called to the requirements of the conditions of employment to be observed and the prevailing wage rates to be paid on this project, as determined by the State Department of Labor and Industries. The City of Lowell, acting through its Chief Procurement Officer, reserves the right to waive any informality in, to reject any or all bids or to accept the one which appears in the best interest of the City of Lowell. MBE’s and WBE’s are encouraged to submit proposals. EOE/AA.

I - 2

Attention of all bidders and sub-bidders is specifically directed to the construction scheduling requirements and to the requirements of the Supplemental General Conditions concerning Equal Employment Opportunity, Anti-Discrimination, and Affirmative Action Program of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, pursuant to M.G.L. c151B, as well as the requirement of prevailing wages, which is incorporated in the Contract Documents. All bids for this project are subject to the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30, Section 39M as amended and Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 149, Section 26 - 27b inclusive and Section 44A - 44I inclusive. Attention is directed to the minimum wage rates to be paid on the work as determined by the Commissioner of Labor and Workforce Development. All bid deposits will be returned in accordance with applicable statutory provisions. The bidder agrees that its bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of the bids. The Awarding Authority will reject general bids and filed sub-bids when required to do so by the above-referenced General Laws. In addition, the Awarding Authority reserves the right to waive any informalities in bidding and to reject any and all general bids if it deems it to be in the public interest to do so. Also, the Awarding Authority reserves the right to reject any sub-bid if it determines that such sub-bid does not represent the bid of a person competent to perform the work as specified or that less than three such sub-bids were received and that the prices are not reasonable for acceptance without further competition.

I - 1

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

SUBSECTION 1. Receipt and Opening of Bids 2. Preparation of Bid 3. Pre-Bid Conference 4. Surveys 5. Qualifications of Bidder 6. Bid Security 7. Damages for Failure to Enter into Contract 8. Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages 9. Conditions of Work 10. Addenda and Interpretations 11. Security for Faithful Performance 12. Power of Attorney 13. Notice of Special Conditions 14. Laws and Regulations 15. Method of Award - Lowest Qualified Bidder 16. Obligation of Bidder 17. List of Utilities in the Area 18. Soil Conditions 19. Nondiscrimination in Employment 20. Blank 21. Sales Tax 22. Borings 23. Compliance with Air and Water Acts 24. Interest of Members, Officers, as Employees of the Owner, Members of Local Governing Body, or other Public Officials

I - 2

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

1. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS

The City of Lowell herein called the “Owner” invites sealed bids on the separate copies of Bid Forms furnished for that purpose, all blanks of which must be appropriately filled in. The bound-in Bid Forms in the Contract Documents are for continuity and the convenience of Bidders and are not to be detached from the Contract Documents, filled out or executed. DUE DATE – General Bids Sealed bids will be publicly opened December 5, 2018 at City Hall in the Purchasing Department, Room 60, 375 Merrimack Street, Lowell, MA 01852, at 11:00 AM, EST/EDST, for the work described herein. BIDDERS ARE REQUIRED TO SUBMIT A BID INCLUDING ALL BID FORMS CONTAINED IN THIS PACKAGE. DO NOT REMOVE PAGES. DUE DATE – Filed SubBids Sealed bids will be publicly opened on November 21, 2018 at City Hall in the Purchasing Department, Room 60, 375 Merrimack Street, Lowell, MA 01852, at 11:00 AM, EST/EDST, for the work described herein. BIDDERS ARE REQUIRED TO SUBMIT A BID INCLUDING ALL BID FORMS CONTAINED IN THIS PACKAGE. DO NOT REMOVE PAGES.

The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof and may waive any informalities or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No bidder may withdraw a bid within 60 days after the actual date of the opening thereof. 2. PREPARATION OF BID

Each bid for the LeLacheur Concourse Project shall be submitted on the prescribed bid forms. The City will conduct a both price analysis and budget considerations to determine which option to award.

All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, with ink or typewriter, in both words and figures, and both of the foregoing Certifications must be fully completed and executed when submitted.

Each bid for the LeLacheur Concourse Project must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his address, and the name of the project for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed as specified above.

I - 3

3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER

The OWNER may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the OWNER all such information and data for this purpose as the OWNER may request. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the OWNER that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids will not be accepted. A. DCAM CERTIFICATION IS REQUIRED B. Each bid must include evidence of the Bidder’s ability to complete the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents. Each bid must include the name of the Superintendent who is to be used on this project, and his/her experience.

C. Each bid must include :

1. DCAM Certificate of Eligibility and Update Statement

2. A comprehensive list of any and all citations and /or violations issued by regulatory agencies and/or judgments against bidder from a court of law.

3. All assessed penalties or liquidated damages, and the project in which they

occurred. 4. Any and all contract terminations.

4. BID SECURITY Each bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified check, treasurer’s check, or cashier’s check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, made payable to the City of Lowell in the amount of 5% of the bid or a bid bond prepared in the form of bid bond attached hereto, duly executed by the bidder as principal and having as surety thereon a surety company, licensed to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, approved by the OWNER, in the amount of 5% of the bid, but in no event less than one hundred dollars not more than fifty thousand dollars. All bid deposits of general bidders, except those of the three lowest responsible and eligible bidders, will be returned within five (5) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of the general bids. The bid deposits of the three lowest responsible and eligible bidders shall be returned upon the execution and delivery of the Contract, or if no award is made, upon the expiration of 60 days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, except that, if any bidder fails to perform his agreement to execute a Contract and furnish a Performance Bond and also a Labor and Materials Payment Bond as stated in his bid, his bid deposit shall become and be the property of the City of Lowell as liquidated damages; provided that the amount of the bid deposit which becomes the property of the City of Lowell shall not, in any event, exceed the

I - 4

difference between his bid price and the bid price of the next lowest responsible and eligible bidder; and provided further that, in case of death, disability or other unforeseen circumstances affecting the bidder, his bid deposit may be returned. The sixty day time limit shall not be applicable to the next lowest eligible bidder, with his and his sub-bidder’s consent, if the original award made within the time limit is invalidated. All bid deposits of sub-bidders, except (a) of the sub-bidders named in the general bids of the three lowest responsible and eligible general bidders, and (b) those of the three lowest responsible and eligible sub-bidders for each sub-trade, will be returned within five days (Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded), after the execution of the general contract; except that, if a selected sub-bidder fails to perform his agreement to execute a subcontract with the general bidder selected as the general contractor contingent upon the execution of the general contract and if requested to do so in the general bid by such a general bidder, to furnish a Performance and Payment Bond as stated in his sub-bid, the bid deposit which becomes the property of the City of Lowell shall not, in any event, exceed the difference between his sub-bid price and the sub-bid price of the next lowest responsible and eligible sub-bidder; and provided further that, in case of death, disability or other unforeseen circumstances affection any such sub-bidder, his bid deposit may be returned to him. 5. DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT The successful bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the contract and bonds required within 10 days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his bid, shall forfeit to the OWNER, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid. 6. DURATION, TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The Contractor shall commence work within five (5) days of the date specified in a written Notice to Proceed of the OWNER and to fully complete the Contract within time period stipulated in the specifications. Bidder must agree also to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $500.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in the Special Conditions.

Schedule: January 1, 2019 – September 1, 2019 7. CONDITIONS OF WORK Each bidder must inform himself fully of the conditions relating to the construction of the project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of his contract insofar as possible the contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other contractor. 8. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any bidder orally.

I - 5

Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to Chief Procurement Officer, City Hall, 375 Merrimack Street, Room 60, Lowell, MA 01852 and to be given consideration must be received at least five days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be mailed by certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than three days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligations under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the contract documents. 9. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE Simultaneously with his delivery of the executed Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for faithful performance of this Contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract, as specified in the General Conditions included herein. The surety on such bond or bonds shall be a duly authorized surety company, licensed to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and satisfactory to the OWNER. 10. POWER OF ATTORNEY Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.

11. NOTICE OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS Attention is particularly called to those parts of the contract documents and specifications, which deal with the following: (a) Inspection and testing of materials (b) Insurance requirements (c) Wage rates

(d) Stated Allowances (e) Non-discrimination in employment

12. LAWS AND REGULATIONS The bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State Laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as through herein written out in full. 13. METHOD OF AWARD - LOWEST QUALIFIED BIDDER If at the time this contract is to be awarded, the lowest base bid submitted by a responsible bidder does not exceed the amount of funds then estimated by the OWNER as

I - 6

available to finance the Project, the Contract will be awarded on the base bid and any or all accepted alternatives. If such bid exceeds such amount, the OWNER may reject all bids. 14. OBLIGATION OF BIDDER At the time of the opening of bids it is presumed that each bidder has inspected the site and has read and is thoroughly familiar with the plans and contract documents (including all addenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect to his bid. 15. LIST OF UTILITIES IN THE AREA: Attention is called to the fact that the following Utility Companies have facilities in the area: Lowell Water Utility 978-674-4242 Lowell Regional Wastewater Utility 978-674-4248 Lowell Engineering Department 978-674-4070 National Grid - Gas 800-548-8000 National Grid - Electric 978-459-2600 Verizon Telephone Company 978-275-1292 Comcast Communications 978-685-0258 Lowell Fire Alarm 978-674-1813 The Contractor shall notify the controlling utility agency at least 72 hours in advance of its intent to excavate in any way or manner, within six feet of any existing utility agency owned pole, anchor guy, underground duct, conduit, pipe, valve or manhole. No excavation shall take place within six feet of any existing utility agency owned pole, anchor guy, underground duct, conduit, pipe, valve or manhole owned by a utility agency without this notification. In addition, Dig Safe must be notified 72 hours prior to commencing excavation. 16. NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT Contracts for work under this proposal will obligate the Contractors and subcontractors not to discriminate in employment practices. Bidders must, if requested, submit a compliance report concerning their employment practices and policies in order to maintain their eligibility to receive the award of the Contract. The successful bidder must be prepared to comply in all respects with the Contract Provisions regarding Equal Employment Opportunity which are located in the Special Conditions Section of these Specifications. 17. SALES TAX Materials and equipment purchased for permanent installation in this project will be exempt from the Massachusetts Sales and Use Tax. The exemption certificate number will

I - 7

be furnished to the Contractor. Each bidder shall take this exemption into account in calculating his bid for the work. 18. BORINGS No soil borings have been performed in conjunction with this project. 19. COMPLIANCE WITH AIR AND WATER ACTS This contract is subject to the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 1857 et. seq., the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et. seq. and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, 40 CFR Part 15, as amended from time to time, the major provisions of same being located in the special conditions of these specifications. 20. INTEREST OF MEMBERS, OFFICERS, or EMPLOYEES of the OWNER,

MEMBERS of LOCAL GOVERNING BODY, or OTHER PUBLIC OFFICIALS

No member, officer, or employee of the OWNER, or its designees or agents, no member of the governing body of the locality in which the program is situated, and no other public official of such locality or localities who exercises any functions or responsibilities with respect to the program during his tenure of for one year thereafter, shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in any contract or subcontract, or the proceeds thereof, for work to be performed in connection with this Contract.

BP - 1

BID FORM

Project: LeLacheur Concourse Project To the City of Lowell, Massachusetts (hereinafter called OWNER) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the demolition of the proposed project having examined the plans and specifications with related documents as prepared, and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies, and to construct the project in accordance with the contract documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is a part. Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specified in a written “notice to proceed” of the OWNER and to fully complete the Contract as stipulated in the specifications. Bidder further agrees to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $ 500.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided. Bidder understands that the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this bid, bidder will execute the formal contract within 10 days and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds as required. The Bid Security attached in the sum of _______________________________________ ($______________________________________________________________________ is to become the property of the OWNER in the event the contract and bonds are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the OWNER caused thereby. Bidder agrees to perform all the work described in the specifications and shown on the plans for the following unit prices: NOTE: All prices should be written in ink, in words as well as figures, for the entire proposal. In case of discrepancy the amount shown in words will govern. The CONTRACTOR agrees that its attention has been called to the provisions of the

BP - 2

“Reserve System” Ordinance of the City of Lowell, which is now incorporated in “The Code of the City of Lowell, Massachusetts”, passed by the City Council on April 26, 1988 and amendments thereto and that each purchase order, so-called, issued in accordance with Section 7 - 76 of Said Code to cover the services to be rendered under this contract shall be made a part hereof by reference. It is further agreed that no obligation shall be considered to have been incurred under this Contract unless and until a purchase order shall have been issued and approved. And further, that the obligation incurred shall be limited to the amount set forth in each purchase order, or purchase orders, duly issued and approved. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that his attention has been called to the time for completion and liquidated damages on Pages 16 of this Contract.

BP - 3

BASIS OF AWARD

LeLacheur Concourse Project

IFB 19-31

GENERAL CONTRACTOR

In accordance with the Specifications, and under the terms and conditions mentioned above, I (We) hereby offer to furnish and deliver to departments described above the following materials which shall in all respects meet the attached specifications, as required during the terms mentioned above for the following prices: Bidder must provide on separate spreadsheet a detailed breakdown of their total costs.

ALL PEOPLE ENTERING SCHOOL PROPERTY MUST BE CORI CHECKED

TOTAL COST: ________________________________ IN WORDS: ____________________________________________________

Signature of Bidder ___________________________________________________

Print Name and Title __________________________________________________

Company Name and Address __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Telephone Number ______________________________________________________ Email _____________________________________________________________

BP - 4

BASIS OF AWARD


IFB 19-31 ELECTRICAL SUB BID


TOTAL COST: ________________________________ IN WORDS: ____________________________________________________ Exclusions: __________________________________________________

Restricted to: __________________________________________________




______________________________________________________________________


BP - 5

BASIS OF AWARD


IFB 19-31 PLUMBING SUB BID


TOTAL COST: ________________________________ IN WORDS: ____________________________________________________ Exclusions: __________________________________________________

Restricted to: __________________________________________________




______________________________________________________________________


BP - 6

The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of his qualifications to perform the work as bid upon according to all requirements of the Plans and Specifications. 1. Have been in business under present business name of ______________________ _______________________________________________________________________ for __________________________years. 2. Ever failed to complete any work?______________________________________ 3. List one or more recent projects with names of Community and Engineer on which you served as general contractor similar to work required for this project. Project and Engineer Community Date Amount a)______________________________________________________________________ b)______________________________________________________________________ c)______________________________________________________________________ 4. Bank Reference_____________________________________________________ The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as general contractor, he will within ten (10) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the awarding authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of the general bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond, each of a Surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority and each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the general contractor and are included in the contract price. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor and can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work. Date:_______________________ ____________________________________ (Name of General Bidder) BY ____________________________________ (Signature) ____________________________________ (Title of Signer) ____________________________________ (Business Address) ____________________________________ (City and State) ____________________________________ (Phone Number)

BP - 7

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA The Bidder acknowledges all addenda.

ADDENDA NUMBER DATE ISSUED

______________________ ______________________

______________________ ______________________

______________________ ______________________

______________________ ______________________

BP - 8

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of ______________________________) ss County of ____________________________) _________________________________________________________being duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He is (owner, partner, office representative or agent) of _____________________ _____________________________________________the Bidder that has submitted the attached bid; (2) He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such bid; (3) Such bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham bid; (4) Neither the said bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached bid has been submitted, or to refrain from bidding in connection with such contract, or has in any manner directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached bid, or of any other Bidder; or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price, or the bid price of any other Bidder; or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the CITY OF LOWELL or any person interested in the proposed Contract; LeLacheur Concourse Project (5) The price or prices quoted in the attached bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. ____________________________________ (Signed) ____________________________________ (Title) Subscribed and sworn to before me on this _____________day of ___________, 20___ _______________________________________ _______________________________________ Title My commission expires ___________________

BP - 9

A. Contractors’ Certification A contractor will not be eligible for award of a contract unless such contractor has submitted the following certification, which is deemed a part of the resulting contract:

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION _________________________________________________________________ certifies that: Contractor 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the contract ________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________; and 2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained herein; and 3. Will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or administering agency prior to the award of any subcontract under this contract the subcontractor certification required by these bid conditions. __________________________________________________________ (Signature of authorized representative of contractor) B. Subcontractors’ Certification Prior to the award of any subcontract, regardless of tier, the prospective subcontractor must execute and submit to the Prime Contractor the following certification, which will be deemed a part of the resulting subcontract:

SUBCONTRACTORS’ CERTIFICATION __________________________________________________________________ certifies that: Subcontractor 1. It tends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the subcontract ________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________; and 2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained herein; and

BP - 10

3. Will obtain from each of the subcontractors prior to the award of any subcontract under this subcontract the subcontractor certification required by these bid conditions. ____________________________________________________ (Signature of authorized representative of subcontractor) In order to ensure that the said subcontractors’ certification becomes a part of all subcontractors under the prime contract, no subcontract shall be executed until an authorized representative of the state agency (or agencies) administering this project has determined, in writing, that the said certification has been incorporated in such subcontract, regardless of tier. Any subcontract executed without such written approval shall be void.

BP - 11

MINIMUM MINORITY PERCENTAGES TO BE APPLIED TO

STATE AND STATE ASSISTED CONTRACTS WITHIN THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS

The following percentages shall apply: No less than Boston: Impact Area (Jamaica Plain (part), 30% Mattapan, South Cove, Chinatown, Bay Village, Roxbury, Dorchester, South End) Others 10% Cambridge 12% New Bedford 18% Springfield 10% All other cities and towns 5%

BP - 12

CITY OF LOWELL

AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTORS’ CERTIFICATION

NAME OF PROJECT: LeLacheur Concourse Project A contractor will not be eligible for award of a contract unless such contractor has submitted the following certification, which is deemed a part of the resulting contract:

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION

___________________________________________________certifies that 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the contract__________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________; and, 2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained herein; and 3. Will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit the contracting or administering agency prior to the award of any subcontract under this contract the subcontractor certification required by these bid conditions. ________________________________________________________ (Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor)

BP - 13

CITY OF LOWELL AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

SUBCONTRACTORS’ CERTIFICATION NAME OF PROJECT: LeLacheur Concourse Project Prior to the award of any subcontract, regardless of tier, the prospective subcontractor must execute and submit to the Prime Contractor the following certification, which will be deemed a part of the resulting subcontract:

SUBCONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION

___________________________________________________certifies that 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the subcontract___________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________; and, 2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained herein; and 3. Will obtain from each of the subcontractors prior to the award subcontract under this subcontract, the subcontractor certification required by these bid conditions. ________________________________________________________ (Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor) In order to ensure that the said subcontractor’s certification becomes a part of all subcontracts under the Prime Contract, no subcontract shall be executed until an authorized representative of the City administering this project has determined, in writing, that the said certification has been incorporated in such subcontract, regardless of tier. Any subcontract executed without such written approval shall be void.

BP - 14

CITY OF LOWELL AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

BIDDERS’ CERTIFICATION The bidder hereby certifies he shall comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific action steps contained in the Appendix EEO attached hereto, including compliance with the minority contractor compliance specified in Section V of said Appendix. The contractor receiving the award of the contract shall be required to obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or administering agency prior to the performance of any work under said contract a certification by said subcontractor, regardless of tier, that it will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained in the Appendix EEO. ________________________________ Signature of Bidder ________________________________ Name of Firm ________________________________ Title ________________________________ Date

C - 1

CONTRACT

THIS AGREEMENT, made this the _____________day of _______________________, 20___, by and between the City of Lowell, Massachusetts acting herein through its Purchasing Department, hereinafter called “OWNER” and *(1)____________________________________________________________________ an individual doing business as, a partnership, a corporation of the __________________ ________________________________________________________________________ hereinafter called “Contractor”. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the OWNER to commence and complete the construction of Contract described as follows: LeLacheur Concourse Project hereinafter called the Project for the sum of _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________Dollars ($)__________________ and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General and Special Conditions of the Contract; and at his/her (its or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said Project in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal, the General and Special Conditions of the Contract, the Plans, which include all maps, plates, blue prints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, the Specifications and contract documents therefore as prepared by City of Lowell, City Engineer herein entitled “Engineer”, and as herein enumerated all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the contract. The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specified in a written “Notice to Proceed” of the OWNER and to fully complete the project within 60 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the Contract, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract, and to make payments on account thereof as provided in Paragraph 25, “Progress Payments”, of the General Conditions.

C - 2

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Contract in five (5) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first above mentioned. ATTEST: ___________________________ CITY OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS Secretary ___________________________ BY___________________________________ Witness City Manager, Eileen Donoghue ___________________________ ____________________________________ Secretary Contractor ___________________________ BY___________________________________ Witness ____________________________________ Address ____________________________________ ____________________________________ APPROVED AS TO FORM ___________________________ BY___________________________________ City Solicitor Chief Procurement Officer APPROVED AS TO AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS ___________________________ City Auditor (1) Strike out inapplicable terms. Secretary of the OWNER should attest. If Contractor is corporation, Secretary should attest. Give proper title of each person executing Contract.

PRB -1

PERFORMANCE BOND


KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we ___________________________ Name of Contractor ___________________________________a____________________________________ (Corporation, Partnership or Individual) hereinafter called “Principal” and ____________________________________________ (Surety) of _____________________________________, State of ________________________ hereinafter called the “Surety”, are held and firmly bound unto the Lowell Schools of the City of Lowell, Massachusetts, hereinafter called “Owner”, in the penal sum (City) (State) of _____________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($____________________) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the ________day of _______________, 20__, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants terms, conditions, and agreements of said contract during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, and make at its own cost and expense any and all defects and deficiencies in materials or workmanship which may appear in the work provided for in said contract within the period of one year from the date of approval and acceptance of all work under said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

PRB -2

PROVIDED, FURTHER that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. AND PROVIDED, however, that the Surety and Sureties, for value received, hereby stipulate and agree to fully perform and complete the work mentioned and described in said contract and specifications, or cause said work to be performed and completed pursuant to the terms, conditions, and covenants thereof, it for any cause, said Principal fails or neglects to fully perform and complete said work; and the Surety or Sureties further agree to commence said work of completion or cause said work of completion to commence within twenty (20) days of notice thereof from the Owner and to complete same or cause same to be completed within (20) days of the time allowed, said Principal, in said contract and specifications for the completion of said work. AND PROVIDED, THAT THE SAID Surety and Sureties, for value received hereby further stipulate that should the Principal for any reason terminate the Contract and have the Contract terminated, the Owner shall have the right to complete the Contract under the direction of its own Engineer with all rules, regulations, clauses, etc., of the original Contract and specification in full effect. AND FURTHER PROVIDED, that no suit, action or proceeding by reason of any default whatever shall be brought on this bond after twenty-four (24) months from the date on which the final payment under the contract falls due. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any claimant thereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.

PRB -3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six (6) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the ____________day of ________________ 20____. ATTEST: ___________________________ _____________________________ (Principal Secretary) (Principal) (SEAL) By__________________________(S) ___________________________ ______________________________ (Witness as to Principal) (Address-zip Code) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) ATTEST: ___________________________ (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) ______________________________ (Surety) By_____________________________ (Attorney-in-Fact) ___________________________ (Witness as to Surety) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.

PAB -1

PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we___________________________ (Name of Contractor) ____________________ a __________________________________________________ (Corporation, Partnership or Individual) hereinafter called “Principal” and ____________________________________________ (Surety) of __________________________, State of ___________________________________ hereinafter called the “Surety”, are held and firmly bound unto the Lowell Schools of the City of Lowell, Massachusetts, hereinafter called “Owner”, in the penal (City) (State) sum of ________________________________________________ _____________________________Dollars ($_________________________________) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the __________day of ________________, 20____, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of:

LeLacheur Concourse Project NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal promptly make payment to all persons, firms, sub-contractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such work, and all telephone, electric, water or other utility service, or rental of equipment directly applicable to the contract, and all insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor, performed in such work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the specifications.

PAB -2

PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any claimant hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the above name Principal, and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Owner that every claimant who has not been paid in full may sue in this bond for the use of such claimant in the name of the Owner, prosecute the suit to final judgement for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon, provided, however, that the Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no suit, action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant as follows: A. After the expiration of two (2) years following the date on which Principal ceased work on said CONTRACT. B. Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated and not elsewhere. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics’ liens which may be filed or recorded against such improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond.

PAB -3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six (6) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the _________day of ___________ 20______. ATTEST: ___________________________ _____________________________ (Principal Secretary) (Principal) (SEAL) By__________________________(S)

___________________________ ______________________________ (Witness as to Principal) (Address-zip Code) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) ATTEST: ___________________________ (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) ______________________________ (Surety) By_____________________________ (Attorney-in-Fact) ___________________________ (Witness as to Surety) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) ______________________________ (Address-zip Code) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.

COA -1

CONTRACT

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY

I, the undersigned the duly authorized and acting legal representative, of the City of Lowell, Massachusetts, do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the foregoing Contract and surety bonds and the manner of

execution thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements has been

duly executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized

representatives; that said representatives have full power and authority to execute said

agreements on behalf of the respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing

agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations and provisions thereof.

____________________________________ Date:__________________________

GC - 1

GENERAL CONDITIONS SUBSECTION 1. Definitions 2. Notice 3. Intent 4. Codes, Regulations and Issue Date of Standard Specifications 5. Drawings and Specifications 6. Conflicting Conditions 7. Samples 8. Quality of Equipment and Materials 9. Shop Drawings 10. Equipment and Material Approval 11. Rejected Work and Materials 12. Separate Contracts 13. Rights of Various Interests 14. Notice to proceed 15. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages 16. The Contractor’s Duties and Rights 17. The Engineer’s Authority 18. The Owner’s Duties and Rights 19. Assignment 20. Oral Agreements 21. Insurance 22. Contract Security 23. Extra Work 24. Extension of Contract Time 25. Progress Payments 26. Acceptance and Final Payment 27. Correction of Faulty Work After Final Payment 28. Substitutions and Deletions 29. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 30. Protection of Lives and Health 31. Obstructions Encountered 32. Standard Specifications

GC - 2

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. DEFINITIONS 1. CONTRACT AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract comprises the following documents, including all additions, deletions and modifications incorporated therein before the execution of the Contract: a. Legal and Procedural Documents 1) Advertisement for Bids 2) Information for Bidders 3) Bid Proposal 4) Certifications of Bidders 5) Contract Agreement 6) Performance Bond 7) Payment Bond 8) Certificate of OWNER’S Attorney 9) Form for Sub-bid (when required) b. General Conditions c. Special Conditions d. Technical Specifications, Drawings, and Addenda as enumerated in the Special Conditions 2. ENGINEER: City of Lowell, City Engineer or his designated representative. 3. STATE: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts 4. OWNER, AWARDING AUTHORITY OR MUNICIPALITY: The party of the first part designated in the Contract or any board, officer or agent duly authorized to act for the said party of the first part in the matter covered by the Contract. The OWNER is the City of Lowell, acting through its Division of Planning & Development. 5. CONTRACTOR: The General Contractor, and is the CONTRACTOR, and is the CONTRACTOR named in the Contract Documents. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR: Any person, firm or corporation with a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR who acts for or in behalf of the CONTRACTOR in executing any part of the Contract, but does not include one who merely furnishes material. 7. WORK ON (AT) THE PROJECT: Work to be performed at the location of the project, including the transportation of materials and supplies to or from the location of the project by employees of the CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor.

GC - 3

8. DIRECTED, REQUIRED APPROVED, ACCEPTABLE: Whenever they refer to the work or its performance, “Directed”, “Required”, “Permitted”, “Ordered”, “Designated”, “Prescribed” and words of like import shall imply the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the ENGINEER, and “Approved”, “Acceptable”, “Satisfactory”, “In the Judgement of” and words of like import shall mean approval by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to or in the judgement of the ENGINEER. 9. PROPOSAL: The offer of a bidder to perform the work described by the Contract Documents when made out and submitted on the prescribed form properly signed and guaranteed. 10. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: The bid deposit accompanying the proposal submitted by the bidder, as a guaranty that the bidder will enter into a Contract with the OWNER for the construction of the work if the Contract is awarded to him. 11. CONTRACT: The agreement covering the performance of the work described in the Contract Documents and Plans including all supplemental agreements thereto and all general and special provisions pertaining to the work or materials therefor. 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: the approved forms of security furnished by the CONTRACTOR and his Surety as a guaranty of good faith on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 13. SURETY: The person, firm or corporation who executes the CONTRACTOR’S Performance and Payment Bonds. 14. SPECIFICATIONS: The Legal and Procedural Documents, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Technical Specifications with all addenda thereto. 15. DRAWINGS: Those listed herein in the Special Conditions. 16. PROVIDE: Furnish and install. 17. SHOP DRAWINGS: Fabrication and erection drawings and instructions. 18. ACT OF GOD: An earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. Rain, wind, flood, or other natural phenomenon of normal intensity for the locality shall not be construed as and Act of God and no reparation shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for damages to the work resulting therefrom. 19. EXTRA WORK: Work other than that required either expressed or implied by the Contract in its present form. 20. SITE: The area upon or in which the CONTRACTOR’S operations are carried on and such other areas adjacent thereto as may be designated as such by the ENGINEER.

GC - 4

21. CHANGE ORDER: A written order issued by the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR directing certain changes, additions, or reductions in the work or in the materials or methods to be used. 2. NOTICE Written notice shall be considered as served when delivered in person or sent by certified mail to the individual, firm or corporation or to the last business address known to him who serves the Notice. It shall be the duty of each party to advise the other parties to the Contract as to any change in his business address until completion of the Contract. 3. INTENT 1. The intent of the Contract Documents is that the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all police details, materials, labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute, complete, and deliver the work within the specified time. 2. Any work performed after regular working hours, on Sundays or Legal Holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the OWNER. 4. CODES, REGULATIONS AND ISSUE DATE OF STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS. 1. Where standard specifications, codes, regulations and similar publications of governmental agencies, technical societies, manufacturer’s associations and regulatory groups or bureaus are referred to in these specifications, the applicable portion thereof shall be of the same effect as if fully printed herein, and the work done in full accordance therewith. The edition current as of the date of issue of this specification shall be used except where publication date is specifically stated. 5. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1. Except as provided for otherwise, all required copies of Drawings and Specifications necessary for the execution of the work shall be furnished to the CONTRACTOR without charge. One complete set of all Drawings and Specifications shall be maintained at the job site and shall be available to the ENGINEER at all times. 2. All Drawings and Specifications and other data prepared by the ENGINEER shall remain the property of the ENGINEER, and they shall not be re-used on other work. 3. Figured dimensions on the Plans will be used in preference to scaling the Drawings. Where the work of the CONTRACTOR is affected by finish dimensions, these shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR at the site, and he shall assume the responsibility therefor. 4. Any discrepancies found between the Drawings and Specifications and site conditions of any errors or omissions in the Drawings and Specifications shall be

GC - 5

immediately reported to the ENGINEER, who shall promptly correct such error or omission in writing. Any work done by the CONTRACTOR after his discovery of such discrepancies, errors or omissions without notifying the ENGINEER shall be done at the CONTRACTOR’S risk. 6. CONFLICTING CONDITIONS 1. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the Specifications, or mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned respectively on both. On the Plans, the dimensions shown shall govern in case of any discrepancy between a scaled distance and the figures shown. Either party shall take advantage of any obvious error or omission in the contract documents. Any apparent discrepancies shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for determination. The decision of the ENGINEER thereupon shall be conclusive. 2. The fact that specific mention of a fixture, or any part of the work is omitted in the Specifications, whether intentionally or otherwise, when the same is clearly shown or indicated on the Plans, or is usually and customarily required to complete fully such work as is specified herein, will not entitle the CONTRACTOR to consider action in the manner of any claim for extra compensation, but the same fixtures or work, or both, must be installed or done the same as if called for by both the Plans and Specifications. 7. SAMPLES All samples called for in the Specifications or required by the ENGINEER shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR at his expense and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for his approval. Samples shall be furnished so as not to delay fabrication, allowing the ENGINEER reasonable time for the consideration of the samples submitted. CONTRACTOR shall furnish such samples of materials, and workmanship shall be in accordance with approved samples. 8. QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 1. Everything furnished and provided shall be new and all materials and equipment shall be of the quality specified. All unspecified materials and equipment shall be equal in grade and quality to specified materials. 2. In order to establish standards of quality, ENGINEER has, in the detailed Specifications, referred to certain products by name and catalog number. This procedure is not to be construed as eliminating from competition other products of equal or better quality by other manufacturers where fully suitable in design. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish one complete list of proposed desired substitutions prior to signing of the Contract, together with such engineering catalog data and sketches the ENGINEER may require. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by the ENGINEER’S judgement when proposed substitute materials or items or equipment are judged to be unacceptable and shall furnish the specified materials or item of equipment in such cases. All proposals for

GC - 6

substitutions shall be submitted in writing by the General CONTRACTOR and not by individual trades or material suppliers. The ENGINEER will approve or disapprove proposed substitutions in writing within a reasonable time. No substitute materials shall be used unless approved in writing. 9. DRAWINGS – attached 10. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL 1. As soon as practical and within fifteen (15) days after date of award of Contract and before any materials, fixtures or equipment are purchased, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish three copies of complete catalog data for every manufactured item of equipment and all components to be used in the work, including specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, working pressure and general type. This submittal shall be compiled by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER before any of the equipment is ordered. Each data sheet or catalog in the submittal shall be indexed according to specifications section and paragraph for easy reference. 2. If prior to the expiration of the above specified period or of any authorized extension thereof, the CONTRACTOR fails to submit a list of materials, fixtures and equipment as specified above, the selection made by the ENGINEER shall be final and binding and all items shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR without change in contract price or time of completion. 3. Where conformance to any standard is specified, the catalog data for that item shall state that the item conforms to that standard; or after the ENGINEER’S approval of the item subject to conformance to the standard, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a notarized affidavit on the manufacturer’s letterhead signed by an officer certifying compliance to the standard. The CONTRACTOR shall stamp all such affidavits by which it is understood that the item certified is the item provided. 4. The name and address of and organization authorized by the manufacturer to service each item of equipment shall be included with the submittal. Proof of authorization shall be furnished on request. If the ENGINEER decides that the service organization is too far distant for practical servicing, such equipment shall be rejected. 5. After written approval, this submission shall become a part of the Contract, and may not be deviated from except upon written approval of the ENGINEER. 6. Catalog data for equipment approved by the ENGINEER does not in any case supersede the ENGINEER’S Contract Documents. The approval of the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has in writing called to the ENGINEER’S attention such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any in the items submitted. The CONTRACTOR shall check the work described by the catalog data with the ENGINEER’S Contract Documents for deviations and errors. 7. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that items to be furnished fit the space available. He shall make necessary field measurements to ascertain

GC - 7

space requirements, including those for connections, and shall order such sizes and shapes of equipment that the final installation shall suit the true intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specifications. 8. Where equipment requiring different arrangement of connections from those shown is approved, it shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, and to make all changes in the work required by the different arrangement of connections. 9. Manufactured articles, material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. 10. After the execution of the Contract, substitution of equipment of makes other than those named in the Contract will be considered only if the equipment proposed for substitution is equal in construction and/or efficiency to that named in the Contract. It will be assumed that the cost to the CONTRACTOR of the equipment proposed to be substituted is less than the equipment named in the Contract and if the substitution is approved, the Contract Price shall be reduced a corresponding amount. To receive consideration, requests for substitution must be accompanied by documentary proof of the actual difference in cost to the CONTRACTOR in the form of certified copies of equipment company’s quotation to the CONTRACTOR covering the original equipment and also equipment proposed for substitution or other proof satisfactory to the OWNER. It is the intention that the OWNER shall receive the full benefit of the savings in cost involved in any substitution. In all cases the burden of proof that the equipment offered for substitution is equal or superior in construction and/or efficiency to that named in the Contract shall rest on the CONTRACTOR, and unless the proof is satisfactory to the OWNER, the substitution will not be approved. Requests for substitution on the grounds that better delivery can be obtained on the equipment proposed for substitution will not be approved for it will be assured that the CONTRACTOR in his proposal has named equipment on which he has received proposals from equipment manufacturers giving a delivery time which will permit completion of the project within the contract time. Requests for substitution of equipment which the CONTRACTOR can not prove to the satisfaction of the OWNER to be equal or superior in construction and/or efficiency to that so named in the Contract will not be approved. In the event that the CONTRACTOR obtains the ENGINEER’S approval on equipment other than that which is shown on the Plans and specified herein, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, make any changes in the structures, buildings or piping necessary to accommodate the equipment. 11. REJECTED WORK AND MATERIALS 1. All materials which do not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, are not equal to samples approved by the ENGINEER, or are in any way unsatisfactory or unsuitable for the purpose for which they are intended, shall be rejected. Any defective work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective materials,

GC - 8

damage through carelessness or any other cause, shall be removed within ten (10) days after written notice is given by the ENGINEER, and the work shall be re-executed by the CONTRACTOR. The fact that such defective work may not have been reported on previous inspections shall not constitute an acceptance of any part of it. 2. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to remove rejected work or materials within ten (10) days after written notice to do so, the OWNER may remove the rejected work and then may store the materials. 3. The removal of rejected work or materials and storage of materials by the OWNER shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) days after the written notice to pay is given by the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR does not pay the expense of such removal and after ten (10) days written notice being given by the OWNER of his intent to sell the materials, the OWNER may sell the materials at auction or at a private sale and shall pay to the CONTRACTOR the net proceeds therefrom after deducting all the costs and expenses that should have been borne by the CONTRACTOR. 12. SEPARATE CONTRACTS The OWNER may let other contracts in connection with the work of the CONTRACTOR. The Contractor shall cooperate with other CONTRACTORS with regard to storage of materials and execution of their work. It shall be the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to inspect all work by other CONTRACTORS affecting his work and to report to the ENGINEER any irregularities which will not permit him to complete his work in a satisfactory manner. His failure to notify the ENGINEER of such irregularities shall indicate the work of other CONTRACTORS has been satisfactorily completed to receive his work. The CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for defects of which he could not have known which develop in the work of others after the work is completed. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to measure the completed work in place and report to the ENGINEER immediately any difference between completed work by others and the Drawings. 13. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS Whenever work being done by the OWNER’S forces or by other contractors is contiguous to work covered by this Contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the ENGINEER, to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 14. NOTICE TO PROCEED Following the execution of the Contract by the OWNER, Written Notice to Proceed with the work shall be given to the CONTRACTOR. Computation of Contract Time shall commence on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed and every calendar day following, except as herein provided, shall be counted in the time for completion.

GC - 9

15. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 1. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the date of beginning and the time for completion as specified in the Information to Bidders of the Work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this Contract shall commence on a date to be specified in the “NOTICE TO PROCEED”. 2. The CONTRACTOR agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. 3. If the said CONTRACTOR shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extensions thereof granted by the OWNER, then the CONTRACTOR does hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding of this Contract, to pay to the OWNER the amount specified in the information for Bidders, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the CONTRACTOR shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract for completing the work. 4. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the OWNER would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the OWNER would sustain and said amount shall be retained from time to time by the OWNER from current periodic estimates. 5. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract and of the specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract and additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this Contract. Provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the OWNER determines that the CONTRACTOR is without fault and the CONTRACTOR’S reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the OWNER: provided, further, that the CONTRACTOR shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is due; (a) To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government; (b) To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence

of the CONTRACTOR, including, but not restricted to Acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the OWNER, acts of another CONTRACTOR in the performance of a contract with the OWNER, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and severe weather.

GC - 10

6. The CONTRACTOR shall begin within ten (10) days from the beginning of any such delay, unless the OWNER shall grant a further period of time prior to the date of final settlement of the Contract, notify the OWNER, in writing, of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain the facts and extent of the delay and notify the CONTRACTOR within a reasonable time of its decision in the matter. 16. THE CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES AND RIGHTS 1. The CONTRACTOR shall begin and shall prosecute the work regularly and uninterruptedly after Notice to Proceed has been given (unless otherwise directed in writing by the OWNER) with such force as to secure the completion of the work, in and acceptable manner, within the time stated in the Proposal. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit at such times as may reasonably be requested by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 3. On Lump Sum Contracts the CONTRACTOR shall within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit a complete breakdown of the Contract Amount showing the value assigned to each part of the work, including an allowance for profit and overhead. Upon approval of the breakdown of the Contract Amount by the Engineer, it shall be used as the basis for all Requests for Payments. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize the services of specialty subcontractors on those parts of the work which under normal contracting practices are performed by specialty subcontractors; provided that if the ENGINEER shall determine that the specialty work in question has been customarily performed by the CONTRACTOR’S own organization and that such organization is presently competent to perform such work, the CONTRACTOR shall be permitted to do so; provided further that, if the ENGINEER shall determine that the performance of any specialty work by specialty subcontractors will result in materially increased costs or inordinate delays, the requirements of this paragraph shall not apply. At the time specified by the Contract Documents or when requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall submit in writing to the OWNER for the ENGINEER, the names of the subcontractors proposed for the work. Subcontractors may not be changed except at the request of the CONTRACTOR with the approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR is responsible to the OWNER for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of their direct and indirect employees to the same extent as he is responsible for the acts and omissions of his employees. The Contract Documents shall not be construed as creating any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall bind every subcontractor by the terms of the Contract Documents. For convenience of reference the Specifications are separated into titled sections. Such separations shall not, however, operate to make the ENGINEER an arbiter to establish limits to the contracts between CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. The CONTRACTOR shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the CONTRACTOR by the terms of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give the

GC - 11

CONTRACTOR the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the OWNER may exercise over the CONTRACTOR under any provision of the Contract Documents. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall develop and make all detail surveys necessary for construction, including slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations and other working points, lines and elevations. The ENGINEER will establish reference base lines and bench marks for the use of the CONTRACTOR in laying out the work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of all lines and levels and of the work as built in accordance therewith. The CONTRACTOR shall have the responsibility to carefully preserve bench marks, reference points and stakes established by the ENGINEER and in the case of destruction thereof by the CONTRACTOR or resulting from his negligence, resulting therefrom and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by the unnecessary loss or disturbance of such bench marks, reference points and stakes. 6. The CONTRACTOR, if required, shall employ at his own expense a competent surveyor or engineer registered in the STATE as a Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor, and necessary assistants who shall stake out all structures and other parts of the work, using as reference the base lines and bench marks established by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of all levels of the work as built in accordance therewith. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall secure and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the prosecution of the work. 8. The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Federal, State and Local laws, or ordinances and regulations in any manner affecting the conduct of the work, and all such orders and decrees as exist, or may be enacted by bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority over the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER against any claim or liability arising from or based on, the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order or decree, whether by himself or his employee. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees for any design, device, material or process covered by letters, patent or copyright by legal agreement with the owner of the patent or a duly authorized licensee of such owner, and shall save harmless the OWNER from any and all loss or expense on account thereof, including its use by the OWNER. 10. The CONTRACTOR shall confine his apparatus and storage of materials and operation of his workmen to those areas described in the Drawings and Specifications and such additional areas which he may provide as approved by the ENGINEER. 11. The CONTRACTOR shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without obtaining permission, and he shall be responsible for the preservation of all public property, trees, monuments, etc., along and adjacent to the street and/or right -of-way, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage or injury thereto. He shall use suitable precautions to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, and other underground structures, and shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all monuments and property marks until an authorized agent has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location and shall not remove them until directed.

GC - 12

12. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate signs, barricades, red lights and watchman and take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and the safety of the public. All barricades and obstructions shall be protected at night by red signal lights which shall be of substantial construction and shall be painted white or whitewashed to increase their visibility at night. Suitable warning signs shall be so placed and illuminated at night as to show in advance where construction, barricades, or detours exist. 13. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct his work at all times to ensure the least possible obstruction to traffic and inconvenience to the general public and the residents in the vicinity of the work, and to ensure the protection of persons and property in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. No road or street shall be closed to the public except with the permission of the ENGINEER and proper governmental authority. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to fire fighting equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to ensure the use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, sewer inlets, drainage ditches, and irrigation ditches, which shall not be obstructed except as approved by the ENGINEER. 14. The CONTRACTOR shall secure written permission from the proper authority before executing new construction when such new construction crosses highways, railroad, streets or utilities under jurisdiction of State, County, or other public agency, public utility or private entity. A copy of this written permission must be filed with the ENGINEER or OWNER before any work is done. The CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish a release from the proper authority before final acceptance of the work. 15. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain such sanitary accommodations for the use of his employees and those of his subcontractors as may be necessary to comply with the requirements and regulations of the Local and State Departments of Health and as directed by the ENGINEER. 16. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain on the work a qualified superintendent who is acceptable to the ENGINEER, and who shall give efficient supervision to the work until its completion. The Superintendent shall have full authority to act in behalf of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to the Superintendent shall be considered given to the CONTRACTOR. In general, the ENGINEER’S instructions shall be confirmed in writing and always upon written request from the CONTRACTOR. 17. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the conduct and discipline of his employees and/or any subcontractor or persons employed by subcontractors. All workmen must have sufficient knowledge, skill, and experience to perform properly the work assigned to them. Any foreman or workman employed by the CONTRACTOR or subcontractor who, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, does not perform his work, in a skillful manner or appears to be incompetent or to act in a disorderly or intemperate manner shall, at the written request of the ENGINEER, be discharged immediately and shall not be employed again in any portion of the work without approval of the ENGINEER.

GC - 13

18. The CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable on-site storage for all equipment and materials necessary for use in construction of the project. All materials improperly stored shall be subject to rejection by the ENGINEER. Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without the written permission of the owner or lessee. 19. The CONTRACTOR shall perform any work and shall furnish and install any materials and equipment necessary during an emergency endangering life or property. In all cases he shall notify the ENGINEER of the emergency as soon as practical but he shall not wait for instructions before proceeding to properly protect both life and property. 20. The CONTRACTOR shall do all necessary cutting and patching of the work that may be required to properly receive the work of the various trades or as required by the Drawings and Specifications to complete the structure. He shall restore all such cuts or patch work as directed by the ENGINEER. Cutting of existing structures that shall endanger the work, adjacent property, workmen or the public shall not be done unless approved by the ENGINEER and under his direction. 21. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER’S property free at all times from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish and shall remove from the OWNER’S property, and from all public and private property, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operation or caused by his employees, and remove all surplus materials resulting from his operation or caused by his employees, leaving the site smooth, clean and true to line and grade. 22. The CONTRACTOR shall pay for all transportation and utility services not later than the twentieth day of the calendar month following that in which such services are rendered; pay for all materials, tools and other expendable equipment to the extent of 90 percent of the cost thereof, not later than the twentieth day of the calendar month following that in which such materials, tools and equipment are delivered at the site of the project, and the balance of the cost thereof not later than the thirtieth day following the completion of that part of the work in or on which such materials, tools and equipment are incorporated or used; and pay to each of his subcontractors not later than the fifth day following each payment to the CONTRACTOR, the respective amounts allowed to CONTRACTOR on account of the work performed by his subcontractors, to the extent of each subcontractor’s interest therein. 23. The CONTRACTOR shall at the termination of this Contract before acceptance of the work by the ENGINEER, remove all his equipment, tools and supplies from the property of the OWNER. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to remove such equipment, tools and supplies, the OWNER shall have the right to remove them, and the CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs incurred by the OWNER in removing them. 24. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract before the retained percentage or before the final Request for Payment is paid. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the CONTRACTOR shall refund to the OWNER such amounts as the OWNER may have been compelled to pay in discharging such liens including all costs and a reasonable attorney’s fee. 25. The CONTRACTOR shall warrant all material and equipment furnished and work performed by him for a period of one year from the date of written acceptance of the

GC - 14

work, and furnish all guarantees applicable to definite parts of the work as stipulated in the sections of the Technical Provisions. 26. The CONTRACTOR shall have the right to suspend work or terminate the Contract upon ten (10) days written notice to the OWNER and the ENGINEER, for any of the following reasons: a. If an order of any court, or other public authority caused the work to be

stopped or suspended for a period of ninety (90) days through no act of the CONTRACTOR or his employees.

b. If the ENGINEER should fail to act upon any Request for Payment within

fifteen (15) days after it is presented in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

c. If the OWNER should fail to act upon any Request for Payment within thirty

(30) days after its approval by the ENGINEER. 27. Blank 28. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain at the site a set of drawings on which shall be accurately shown the actual installation of all work under each section, indicating thereon any variations from the Contract Drawings, including changes in sites, locations and dimensions. For this purpose the ENGINEER will furnish two sets of black or blue line on white drawings. At the conclusion of the work, both sets of prints showing the entire work as actually installed shall be delivered to the ENGINEER for approval and shall become property of the OWNER.

GC - 15

17. THE ENGINEER’S AUTHORITY 1. The ENGINEER shall have general supervision and direction of the work. The ENGINEER shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, rate of progress of work, interpretation of Drawings and Specifications and all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract on the part of CONTRACTOR. All claims of the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR shall be presented to the ENGINEER for decision which shall be made in writing within a reasonable time. All decisions of the ENGINEER shall be final. 2. The ENGINEER shall have the authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods, as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for prosecution of the work, or failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to carry out the provisions of the Contract or to supply materials meeting the requirements of the Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall not suspend operations due to unsuitable weather without the ENGINEER’S permission. 3. In the event of temporary suspension of work or during inclement weather or whenever the ENGINEER shall direct, the CONTRACTOR will and will cause his subcontractors to protect carefully his and their work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, any work or materials shall have been damaged or injured from the weather, by reason of failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors so to protect his work, such materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. 4. The ENGINEER shall have the authority at all times to inspect all materials and each part or detail of the work and the CONTRACTOR will be held strictly to the true intent of the Specifications in regard to quality of materials, workmanship and the diligent execution of the Contract. Such inspection may include mill, plant or shop inspection, and any material furnished under these Specifications is subject to such inspections. The ENGINEER shall be allowed access to all parts of the work and shall be furnished with such information and assistance by the CONTRACTOR as is required to make a complete detailed inspection. 5. The ENGINEER shall have the authority at any time before acceptance of the work to direct the CONTRACTOR to remove or uncover any portions of the finished work. After examination, the CONTRACTOR shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the Specifications. Should the work thus exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be paid for as Extra Work, but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the uncovering, removing and replacing shall be at the CONTRACTOR’S expense. 6. The ENGINEER shall have the authority to direct the CONTRACTOR to correct work that has been damaged or that was not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. An equitable deduction from the Contract Amount shall be made to compensate the OWNER from the uncorrected work.

GC - 16

18. THE OWNER’S DUTIES AND RIGHTS 1. The OWNER will provide the land shown on the Drawings upon which the work under the Contract is to be performed and to be used for rights-of-way for access. Any delay in furnishing these lands by the OWNER shall be deemed proper cause for adjustment in the Contract Amount and in time of completion. 2. The OWNER shall have the right to suspend the work or any portion thereof at any time provided that he gives the CONTRACTOR five (5) days written notice of suspension which shall set forth the date on which work is to be resumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the work upon written notice from the OWNER and within ten (10) days after the date set forth in the notice of suspension, the CONTRACTOR may abandon that portion of the work so suspended and shall be entitled to payment for all work done on the portions so abandoned, plus 15 percent of the value of the abandoned work to compensate for overhead, plant expense, and anticipated profit. 3. The OWNER, acting upon the recommendation of its ENGINEER, shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part, for such period or periods, as may be deemed necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorably for prosecution of the work, or failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to carry out the provisions of the Contract or to supply materials meeting the requirements of the Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall not suspend operations due to unsuitable weather without the OWNER’S permission. 4. In the event of temporary suspension of work or during inclement weather or whenever the OWNER, acting upon the recommendation of the ENGINEER, shall direct, the CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors will protect carefully his and their work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the OWNER, acting upon the recommendation of the ENGINEER, any work or materials shall have been damaged or injured from the weather, by reason of failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors to protect his work, such materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. 5. The OWNER shall have the right to correct any deficiencies, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, upon failure of the CONTRACTOR to perform the work in accordance with the CONTRACT documents, including any requirements with respect to the Schedule of Completion, after five (5) days written notice to the CONTRACTOR and receipt of written approval from the ENGINEER. The cost of the work so performed by the owner shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. 6. The OWNER, acting upon the recommendation of the ENGINEER, shall have the authority to direct the CONTRACTOR not to correct work that has been damaged, or that was not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. An equitable deduction from the Contract Amount shall be made to compensate the OWNER for the uncorrected work. 7. The OWNER shall have the right to terminate the employment of the CONTRACTOR giving ten (10) days written notice of termination to the CONTRACTOR in the event of any default by the CONTRACTOR and upon receiving written notice from the

GC - 17

ENGINEER certifying cause for such action in the event of such termination, the OWNER may take possession of the work and of all materials, tools and equipment thereon and may finish the work by whatever method and means he may select. It shall be considered a default by the CONTRACTOR whenever he shall: a.) Declare bankruptcy, become insolvent, or assign his assets for the benefit of

his creditors. b.) Disregard or violate important provisions of the Contract Documents of the

ENGINEER’S instructions, or fail to prosecute the work according to the agreed Schedule of Completion including extensions thereof.

c.) Fail to provide a qualified superintendent, competent workmen or

subcontractors, or proper materials, or fail to make prompt payment therefor. If the right of the CONTRACTOR to proceed is so terminated, the OWNER may take possession of and utilize in completing the work such materials, appliances, supplies, plant and equipment as may be on the site of the work, and necessary therefor. Upon termination of the Contract by the OWNER, no further payments shall be due the CONTRACTOR until the work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount shall exceed the cost of completing the work including all overhead costs, the excess shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If the cost of completing the work shall exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor and his sureties shall pay the difference to the OWNER. The cost incurred by the OWNER, as herein provided, and the damage incurred through the CONTRACTOR’S default, shall be certified by the OWNER, and approved by the ENGINEER. 8. The OWNER shall have the right to order changes in the work through additions, deletions or modifications without invalidating the Contract. Compensation and time completion affected by the change shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 9. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, not withstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the completion of uncompleted work or causes refinishing of completed work, the CONTRACTOR shall be to such extra compensation, or extension of time or both, as the ENGINEER may determine. 19. ASSIGNMENT Neither the CONTRACTOR nor the OWNER shall sublet, sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose of the Contract or any portion thereof, or of his right, title or interest therein, or his obligations thereunder, without written consent of the other party. 20. ORAL AGREEMENTS

GC - 18

No oral order, objection, claim or notice by any party to the others shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in any of the Contract Documents shall be held to be waived or modified by reason of any act whatsoever, other than by a definitely agreed waiver or modification thereof in writing, and no evidence shall be introduced in any proceeding of any other waiver or modification. 21. INSURANCE 1. The CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all the insurance required hereunder and such insurance has been approved by the OWNER, nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the OWNER shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the CONTRACTOR hereunder. The amounts of such Insurance shall not be less than those enumerated in the Limits of Insurance Section of the Special Conditions. Certificates from the CONTRACTOR’S insurance, carriers stating the coverage provided, the limits of liability, and expiration dates shall be filed in triplicate with the ENGINEER before operations are begun. a. Workmen’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance: The CONTRACTOR shall take out and maintain during the life of this Contract, the statutory Workmen’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance for all of his employees to be engaged in work on the project under this Contract and in case any such work is sublet the CONTRACTOR shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide Workman’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance for all the latter’s employees engaged in such work. b. Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance The CONTRACT shall take out and maintain during the life of this Contract such Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance and Automobile Bodily Injury Liability Insurance and Automobile Property Damage Liability Insurance as shall protect him and any subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract for claims for damages for personal injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. c. Builder’s Risk Insurance: The CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, fire and extended coverage insurance in an amount equal to the insurable value of the Contract. d. Contractual Liability Insurance: The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER and their officers, agents, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, proceedings, liabilities, judgements, awards, losses, damages, costs

GC - 19

and expenses, including attorney’s fees, on account of bodily injury, sickness, disease or death sustained by any person or persons or injury or damage to or destruction of any property, directly or indirectly arising out of, relating to or in connection with the Work, whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive or concurrent negligence or fault of the CONTRACTOR, his officers, agents, servants or employees and/or any other person or persons, and whether or not such claims demands, suits or proceedings are just, unjust, groundless, false or fraudulent; and the CONTRACTOR shall and does hereby assume and agrees to pay for the defense of all such claims, demands, suits and proceedings, provided, however, that the CONTRACTOR shall not be required to indemnify the ENGINEER, his officers, agents, servants or employees, against any such damages, occasioned solely by defects in maps, plans, drawings, designs or specifications prepared, acquired or used by the ENGINEER and/or solely by the negligence or fault of the ENGINEER; and provided further, that the CONTRACTOR shall not be required to indemnify the OWNER, his officers, agents, servants or employees, against any such damages occasioned solely by acts or omissions of the OWNER other than supervisory acts or omissions of the OWNER in connection with the work. e. Special Coverage Insurance: 1. Hazards resulting from storage and use of explosives and storage of highly flammable liquids shall be covered by riders to the insurance policies or by separate policies. 2. Failure to provide and continue in force such insurance as aforesaid shall be deemed a material breach of the Contract and shall operate as and immediate termination thereof. 3. All policies shall be so written that the OWNER will be notified in writing of cancellation or restrictive amendment at least thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of such cancellation or amendment. Renewal certificates must be furnished by the CONTRACTOR prior to the expiration date of any of the initial insurance. 22. CONTRACT SECURITY 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a performance bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price as security for the faithful performance of this Contract and also a labor and materials payment bond in an amount not less than one hundred Percent (100%) of the Contract price as security for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. 2. The Sureties of all bonds shall be such surety company or companies as are approved by the OWNER, and are authorized to transact business in the State. 3. If at any time the OWNER, for justifiable cause, shall be or become dissatisfied with any surety or sureties then upon the Performance or Payment Bonds, the CONTRACTOR shall within five (5) days after notice from the OWNER to do so, substitute an acceptable bond (or bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other surety or

GC - 20

sureties as may be satisfactory to the OWNER. The premiums on such bond shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. No further payments shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety or sureties shall have furnished such and acceptable bond to the OWNER. 23. EXTRA WORK Payment for extra work shall be governed by Sec. 9.03 of the Standard Specifications. 24. EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME When extra work is ordered at any time during the progress of the work which, in the sole judgement of the ENGINEER, unavoidably increases the time for the completion of the work, an extension of time shall be granted. A delay beyond the CONTRACTOR’S control occasioned by an Act of God, an act of omission on the part of the OWNER or by strikes, lockouts, fires, etc., may entitle the CONTRACTOR to an extension of time in which to complete the work as determined by the ENGINEER, provided however, that the CONTRACTOR shall immediately give written notice to the ENGINEER of the cause of such delay, together with a statement of the portions of work so delayed. Delays in work for which necessary material has not been received by the CONTRACTOR will not be recognized or allowed until after receipt of such necessary material. 25. PROGRESS PAYMENTS 1. The CONTRACTOR may submit once each month, a Request for Payment for work done. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER all reasonable facilities required for obtaining the necessary information relative to the progress and execution of the work. Each Request for Payment shall be computed from the work completed on all items listed in the detailed breakdown of Contract Amount, less Five percent (5%) to be retained until final completion and acceptance of the work, and less previous payments. If the ENGINEER determines that the progress of the Work will be benefitted by the delivery to the site of certain materials and equipment, when available, in advance of actual requirement therefor and if such materials and equipment are delivered and properly stored and protected, the cost to the CONTRACTOR or subcontractor as established, by invoices or other suitable vouchers satisfactory to the ENGINEER, less the retained percentages as above provided, may be included in the progress estimates; provided always that there be duly executed and delivered by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER at the same time a Bill of Sale in form satisfactory to the OWNER, transferring and assigning to the OWNER, full ownership and title to such materials or equipment. 2. Within fifteen (15) days of submission of any Request for Payment by the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER shall: a.) Approve the Request for Payment as submitted, or

GC - 21

b.) Approve such other amount as he shall decide is due to the CONTRACTOR, informing the CONTRACTOR in writing of his reasons for approving the amended amount, or

c.) Withhold the Request for Payment, informing the CONTRACTOR in writing

of his reasons for withholding it. 3. Within thirty (30) days from the date of approval of a Request for Payment by

the ENGINEER, the OWNER shall: a.) Pay the Request for Payment as approved, or b.) Withhold payment in whole or in part on an approved Request for Payment to

the extent necessary to protect itself from loss on account of any of the following causes discovered subsequent to approval of Request for Payment by the ENGINEER provided he informs the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER in writing of his reasons for withholding payment in whole or in part:

1. Defective Work 2. Evidence indicating the probable filing of claims by other parties against

the CONTRACTOR. 3. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments to Subcontractors,

material suppliers or labor. 4. Damage to another CONTRACTOR. 26. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT When the CONTRACTOR shall have completed the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify his acceptance to the OWNER and his approval of the CONTRACTOR’S final Request for Payment, less any money to be retained for repairs if so specified in the Special Conditions Section of these Specifications, which shall be the Contract Amount plus all approved additions less all approved deductions and less previous payments made. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish evidence that he has fully paid all debts for labor, materials and equipment incurred in connection with the work, following which the OWNER shall accept the work and release the CONTRACTOR except as to the conditions of the Performance Bond, any legal rights of the OWNER, required guarantees, and Corrections of Faulty Work after final payment and shall pay the CONTRACTOR’S final Request for Payment. The CONTRACTOR must allow sufficient time between the time of completion of the work and approval of the final Request for Payment for the ENGINEER to assemble and check the necessary data. 27. CORRECTION OF FAULTY WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT The approval of the Final Request for Payment by the ENGINEER and the making of the final payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The OWNER

GC - 22

shall promptly give notice of faulty materials or workmanship and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly replace any such defects discovered within one year from the date of written acceptance of the work. The ENGINEER shall decide all questions arising under this paragraph. 28. SUBSTITUTIONS AND DELETIONS Substitutions and deletions in the work shall be accomplished by the CONTRACTOR upon written order from the OWNER as approved by the ENGINEER or upon written order from the ENGINEER: which order shall state the reasons for original inclusion and subsequent elimination or substitution for materials, fixtures or equipment; and that the deviation does not materially injure the project as a whole, is in the best interest of the OWNER and is of the same cost and quality as originally specified or giving the amount in dollars of any equitable adjustment to which the parties have agreed. 29. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall forth will be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 30. PROTECTION OF LIVES AND HEALTH In order to protect the lives and health of his employees under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR and his Subcontractors shall comply with all pertinent provisions of the “Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction” issued by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of and in course of employment on work under the Contract. He alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, ad adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance or operation. 31. OBSTRUCTIONS ENCOUNTERED The Drawings may show certain information which has been obtained by the OWNER regarding the existing structure and various pipe lines and other utilities which exist at the location of the project. The OWNER expressly disclaims any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the information given on the Drawings with regard to existing structures and utilities, and the CONTRACTOR will not be entitled to any extra compensation on account of inaccuracy or incompleteness of such information, said structures and utilities being shown only for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR, who must verify the information to his own satisfaction. The giving of this information upon the Contract Drawings will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligations to support and protect all utilities and other structures

GC - 23

which may be encountered during the construction of the work, and to make good all damages done to such utilities and structures, as provided in these Specifications. 32. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS For the purpose of governing the work to be done under this contract, the OWNER has adopted as its Standard Specifications format the “Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Waterways” published by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Public Works, dated 1988 including the Supplemental Specifications dated December 11, 2002. This Standard Specifications shall apply as if reprinted herein except as modified by the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Technical Specifications. In case of conflict between these documents, the Supplement to Standards and the Special Provisions of these Specifications shall govern.

SC - 1

SPECIAL CONDITIONS SUBSECTION 1. Enumeration of Plans, Specifications and Addenda 2. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages 3. Inspection 4. Photographs of Project 5. Limits for Insurance 6. Blank 7. Money to be Retained for Repairs 8. Blank 9. Blank 10. Blank 11. Traffic Control 12. Communication 13. Owner’s Rights 14. Daily Cleanup 15. Prevailing Wage Rates

16. Contractor Evaluation

A-2

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. ENUMERATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Following are the Plans and Specifications which form a part of this Contract, as set forth in paragraph 1 of the General Conditions. Project: LeLacheur Concourse Project 2. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The Contractor shall commence work within five (5) days of the date specified in a written Notice to Proceed of the OWNER and to fully complete the Contract as stipulated in the specifications. Bidder must agree also to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $500.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter. 3. INSPECTION The OWNER shall have access and be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials and other relevant data and records whenever these are in progress of preparation. The Contractor shall provide proper and necessary facilities for such access and inspection. 4. LIMITS FOR INSURANCE The limits for the various types of insurance required under the Insurance Subsection of the General Conditions shall be as follows: a. For Workman’s Compensation, as required by State Statute; b. Minimum amounts of Public Liability, Bodily Injury Liability and Property damage Liability Insurance is as follows: Injury or death of one person: $500,000.00 Injury to more than one person In a single accident: $1,000,000.00 Property damage in one accident: $250,000.00 Property damage in all accidents: $500,000.00 c. Minimum amounts of Automobile and Truck (Vehicular) Public Liability,

Bodily Injury Liability, and Property Damage Liability are as follows: Injury or death of one person; $500,000.00 Injury to more than one person in

A-3

a single accident; $500,000.00 Property damage in one accident; $250,000.00 Property damage in all accidents; $500,000.00 d. Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be procured and maintained by the Contractor

covering loss by fire and extended coverage in the completed value form in the amount of the total insurance value of all structures, materials, and equipment to be built and installed. The policy shall indicate the Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors as the named insured with loss payable to the Owner as Trustee, the policy shall provide for a thirty (30) day notice to the Owner of cancellation or restrictive amendment. A copy of the policy shall be furnished to the Owner and a Certificate of Insurance shall be furnished to the Engineer.

The Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be obtained before the work is started and shall be maintained until the date of completion of the work as stated in the final estimate, or until the Owner occupies or otherwise takes possession of the project, whichever occurs first.

e. Contractual Liability Insurance covering the liability assumed by the Contractor

as outlined under section (d) of the Insurance Section of the General Conditions to the amounts required under Section (b) above.

6. MONEY TO BE RETAINED FOR REPAIRS 1. The CONTRACTOR agrees that the OWNER may retain out of the final payment due to the CONTRACTOR under this Contract, five percent (5%) of the amount thereof, and may expend the same in the manner hereinafter provided, in making such repairs or replacements of said work as the OWNER may deem expedient. 2. If at any time within one-year period of guarantee any part of the work constructed under the terms of this Contract requires repairing or replacement, the OWNER may notify the CONTRACTOR in writing to make the required repairs or replacements. If the CONTRACTOR neglects to begin making such repairs or replacements within ten (10) days from the date of receipt of such notice, the OWNER may employ other persons to make the same. The OWNER shall pay the expense of the repairs out of the sum retained for that purpose. Upon the expiration of the one year period of guarantee, provided that the work at the time is in good order, the CONTRACTOR will be entitled to receive the whole or such part of the sum retained as may remain after the expense of making repairs or replacements has been paid. 3. For settlement of all claims arising out of this Contract against the OWNER, its officers, or agents and for all expenses, losses, or damages incurred by the OWNER by reason of said claims, it is agreed that the OWNER may keep the whole or any portion of the sum retained.

A-4

7. DAILY CLEAN UP Before completion of each day’s work, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning up and removing and relocating all removed material, debris, equipment and the like to ensure the continuous flow of traffic in roadways where work is progressing including access to private property during non-working hours.

8. PREVAILING WAGE RATES - attached

DAIQ 17021.00 Edward A. LeLacheur Park Right Field Concourse Extension June 1, 2018 Lowell, Massachusetts

PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM 00 62 12 - page 1 of 2

DOCUMENT 00 62 12 PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM

This document is to be fully completed, and attached to, ALL submittals for the Project. Use additional sheets as needed. Attach cut sheets, technical data sheets, materials safety data sheets, and other documentation supporting product data.

General Submittal Information: Edward A. LeLacheur Park Right Field Concourse Extension Lowell, Massachusetts

Architect/Engineer:

D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Architects, Inc. 1310 Broadway Boston, Massachusetts 02144

General Contractor:

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

Filed- Subcontractor /or/ subcontractor:

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

Vendor:

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

Date submitted: _____________________

Submittal #: _________________

Resubmittal:: R-___ ___________

Specification Section Reference: ________

Page: _____ Article: __________________

Drawing Number Reference: ____________

Detail Number: ______________________

Quantity submitted:

Originals: ____ Prints: ________________

Standard References (ANSI, ASTM, FS, etc)

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

Attachments:

Product Data Warranties Drawings MSDS Samples Schedules Reports Calculations Tests 3rd. Party

Certification

Product Information: Product Description/Name: ___________________________________________________

Specified Manufacturer: ___________________________ model #: _______________

Submitted Manufacturer: ___________________________ model #: _______________ (company name & address) ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

Manufacturer’s Phone #: ___________________________________________________


PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM 00 62 12 - page 2 of 2

Deviation from contract documents?: NO Deviations YES (attach complete documentation)

Lead time after approval: ________________________________________________________

Date items required at project: ____________________________________________________

SUBCONTRACTOR COORDINATION IS REQUIRED WITH WORK IN THESE DIVISIONS 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 31 32 33

REVIEW STAMPS

GENERAL CONTRACTOR:

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER No Exceptions Taken Revise And Resubmit Make Corrections Noted Rejected Submit Specified Item

COMMENTS: _________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

CONSULTANT Reviewed Furnish As Corrected Rejected Revise and Resubmit

COMMENTS: _________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

DISTRIBUTION AND COORDINATION Project File: _________________ Site Office: _________________ Owner’s Project Manager: ________________ Resident Engineer / Clerk: ________________ ____________________: ________________

END OF DOCUMENT


REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) FORM 00 63 13 - page 1 of 1

Document 00 63 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) FORM

Date Submitted: ________________________________

To the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Architects, Inc. 1310 Broadway #3 Somerville, Massachusetts 02144

Submitted By: Company: _______________________

Address _______________________________________________

References: Specification Section Number: _____________________________

Article/ Paragraph / Subparagraph: __________________________

Drawing Number: ________________________________________

Detail Number: __________________________________________

Request: _______________________________________________________

Refer to Attachment(s) _______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________ Signed By: __________________________________

Response: _______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

Refer to Attachment(s)

Response From: __________________________________

Signed by: __________________________________ Copies to: Owner Consultants _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ File

End of Document

Architect/Engineer’s Assigned RFI #

_____________

Date Received at Architect/Engineer __________

Date Returned by Architect/Engineer __________



SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 63 25 - page 1 of 2

Document 00 63 25 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Date Submitted: ____________________

To the Architect/Engineer: D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Architects, Inc. 1310 Broadway #3 Somerville, Massachusetts 02144

Submitted By: Company Name: _____________________________________

The General Contractor proposes the following substitution in accordance with Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30, Section 39M(b), and the requirements of the Contract Documents: References: Specification Section Number: --------- __________________

Article / Paragraph / Subparagraph: -- __________________

Drawing Number: --------------------------- __________________

Detail Number: ------------------------------- __________________

Scope of Substitution: ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

Impact on Project Schedule None Yes [Add] [Deduct] # of Calendar Days ____

Impact on Related Work: None Yes - explain: _________________________

___________________________________________________

List all Deviations from specified requirements: ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________ Attach Additional Sheets if necessary to describe deviations

Attachments: Attach supporting documentation sufficient for Architect/Engineer to evaluate substitution. Substitution Request Forms submitted without adequate documentation will be returned without review. Attachments: Drawings Product Data Reports ____________ Samples Warranties Tests ____________

In addition to specific product information, attachments shall address the following issues: • Manufacturer’s Name, Address and Phone Number. • Age of product availability in US marketplace • Point by point comparative with specified product. • List of 3 Similar installations, include Project Name, A/E and A/E phone number


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 63 25 - page 2 of 2

Response Date: List date by which response by Architect/Engineer is requested to maintain project schedule and allow sufficient time for inclusion of proposed substitution.

Requested Response Date *: ______________________________ * shall be not less than 10 working days from date substitution request is received.

Contractor’s Certification: The Contractor certifies substitution complies with the project requirements and with the General Conditions by initiating each line below:

Investigation: ---------------------------------------------- ____________

Warranties and Guarantees: -------------------------- ____________

Cost Data: -------------------------------------------------- ____________

Coordination of Substitute: ---------------------------- ____________ Submitted by: (company name & address) ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

Authorized Signature ___________________________________________________

Notations listed below shall have the same meaning as on Architect/Engineer’s review stamp. Clarifications to or changes in project schedule or time shall be processed using standard project forms.

Architect/Engineer’s Response: -------------------------------------------------------------- No Exceptions Taken: ----------------------------------------------------------------

NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN: --------------------------- ____________

MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED: -------------------- ____________

REVISE AND RESUBMIT: ---------------------------- ____________

SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM: --------------------------- ____________

REJECTED: ----------------------------------------------- ____________

Remarks: ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

Date: ___________________________________________________

Signed: ___________________________________________________ End of Document


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - page 1 of 5

Section 01 10 00 SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Project description.

B. Definitions – Owner, and Architect/Engineer.

C. Work by Owner.

D. Work restrictions. 1. Use of Site. 2. Access to Site.

E. Project Manual formats and conventions.

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. Work covered by Contract Documents: The Project consists of The project is a two story steel framed concourse extension located in the right field of LeLacheur Park in Lowell, MA. The foundation will be pile supported structure. The scope includes perimeter picket railings, a concrete filled metal pan stair and a single stall toilet at the ground floor. 1. Project Address:

Edward A. LeLacheur Park 450 Aiken Street Lowell, MA 01854

2. Completeness: The Work shall be as shown on the Drawings and be complete in every respect and in conformance with all applicable requirements of the governing laws and codes.

B. Contract time: The Contractor may begin on-site work on, or after receipt of a written Notice to Proceed, or suitable Letter of Intent. After commencement of work, the Contractor shall pursue the Work continuously and with diligence, and bring the Project to Substantial Completion prior to September 1, 2019. 1. Substantial completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the work

or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. This includes any and all permits required by governmental agencies necessary for occupancy and use.

C. Building Permits: Contractor is responsible to ensure all required permits are obtained, and that the work pertaining to permits is properly inspected and certified. Filed Subcontractors are required to obtain permits relating to their work.



1.3 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS

A. Objectives: Utilize pollution prevention materials, sustainable construction methods, low VOC and no off-gassing, products to maintain of healthy Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) during the construction process: 1. Incorporate green products and sustainable materials into the Project. To the

greatest extent possible, the Contractor shall: a. Use products with low embodied energy (production, manufacturing, and

transportation). b. Use products that maximize recycled content in materials products, and

systems. c. Use products easy to maintain, repair, and that can be cleaned using

non-toxic substances.. d. Use products that will not negatively affect healthy indoor air quality. e. Use reusable and recyclable packaging. f. Avoid use of ozone-depleting compounds, such as HCFCs from

refrigerants or foam insulation materials.

B. Water resource protection: Conserve and use water efficiently, limit on-site fresh water usage to the greatest extent possible, control water distribution systems and waste, minimize use of imported or mined water. Utilize water-conserving appliances and equipment.

C. Air Quality is achieved by compliance with the limitation of indoor air concentrations of certain pollutants, at or below the established maximum allowable concentrations. Healthy air quality goals shall be maintained during construction, and through building commissioning. 1. Use construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources

and materials.

1.4 DEFINITIONS - OWNER, ARCHITECT

A. Wherever the term "Owner" is used in this specification, it refers to: CITY OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS Purchasing Department City Hall – Room 60 375 Merrimack Street Lowell, MA 01852

1. The terms “Owner” and “Awarding Authority” as used in the Project Manual have the same meaning and are interchangeable in Contract Documents. Both terms refer to the same entity.

2. Important Tax Note: The City of Lowell is exempt from certain taxes. It is therefore required that the Contractor and all Subcontractors purchasing taxable goods or services make known to suppliers that tax-exempt status of the Owner, in order that such taxes will not be applied to the goods under Contract. In the event that such taxes are paid on any items, the Contractor shall obtain rebates for the taxes and reimburse the Owner in the full amount by change order. The Owner will provide the necessary evidence and certificates of its tax-exempt status upon request of those concerned. The most prevalent taxes concerned are:



a. Federal Excise Taxes as applied to articles which are taxable under Chapter 32 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, as amended. The Owner’s Excise Tax Exemption Certificate Number is applicable.

b. Sales and Use Tax imposed by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts: The Owner has been assigned Exemption Certificate Number with respect to leases, rental, or purchase of “tangible personal property”, including building materials and supplies, subject to the Massachusetts Sales and Use Tax. This exemption does not apply to any equipment leased or rented by the Contractor for his own use on the construction of the Project.

c. Sales and Use Tax imposed by the states where the Owner does not have exemption status: The Owner may choose to apply for tax exemption status in other states where major building materials and supplies are being purchased. In the event that the Owner obtains exemption status after bids are received, the Contractor shall adjust the Stipulated Sum by change order, for the amount equal to the scheduled taxes that where included in the Contractors Bid.

d. Fines and Penalties: Contractor and subcontractors are fully responsible for payment of all penalties and fines accessed by authorities having jurisdiction for improper and illegal use of Owner’s tax exemption certificate number.

3. All papers required to be delivered to the Owner shall, unless otherwise specified in writing to the contrary, be delivered to the office of the Architect:

B. Wherever the term "Architect", “Engineer”, or “Architect/Engineer”, is used in the Contract Documents, it refers to:

D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Associates 1310 Broadway Somerville, Massachusetts 02144

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. Related work under separate agreements: The Owner will award separate contracts which may commence prior to, or during the work of this Contract. Work under separate agreements, in general include the following: 1. Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Owner Furnished and Installed (OFI) Products: The Contractor has

coordinating responsibility for the following work, provided by others under separate agreement(s) with the Owner: a. NONE.

B. Owner Furnished - Contractor Installed (OFCI) Products: The Contractor shall install the following Owner furnished items. 1. NONE.

1.6 USE OF SITE

A. Use of, and access to, site may be subject to special requirements of the Owner, as directed.



1. Prior to beginning the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the Architect to determine procedures regarding access and use of the site, locations and access to staging and storage areas, tree protection, temporary barriers and fencing, and any special site conditions or restrictions regarding the use of the site areas surrounding the construction.

2. Hours of construction, 7:30 AM to 4:30 PM local time, Monday to Friday. Provisions for working hours other than those specified, must be pre- arranged with the Owner.

3. Security: Owner Staff access must be permitted at all times in all construction areas, for purposes of security.

B. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated on the Drawings. Portions of the site and building beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 1. Use of on-site areas for storage of materials must be pre-arranged with

Owner. Schedule deliveries to minimize requirements for storage of materials.

C. Contractor shall coordinate and permit uninhibited Owner’s access to site prior to Substantial Completion as required for installation of equipment and furnishings performed under separate contracts outside of this Work.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. The City of Lowell intends to occupy parking areas during construction. Notify the Owner of work which will affect the use of these areas; coordinate work schedule with Owner. The Contractor shall consult with the Owner on the best ways to provide access and on changes to access areas as the work progresses.

B. Keep all public roads and walks, and access drive to facility clear of debris caused by this Work during building operations.

1.8 PROJECT MANUAL FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Project Manual Format: The Project Manual is organized into Divisions and subdivided into Sections and Documents using Construction Specification Institute (CSI) publication "MasterFormat" numbering system, 2016 edition. 1. Section Identification: Six/Eight digit Section numbers are utilized and cross-

referenced throughout the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because only those Section numbers which are applicable to this Project are used.

2. Division One of the Project Manual governs procedural and administrative requirements of the Work. Division One requirements are applicable to all Sections and Documents in the Project Manual.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other

Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall



be interpreted as singular as applicable to the context of the Contract Documents.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language is generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the

context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

End of Section



PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 13 - page 1 of 2

Section 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Product options. 1. Product selections. 2. Additional product selection requirements regarding sustainable and

environmental-friendly products. 3. Visual matching.

B. Product substitution procedures.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: Basic product requirements.

1.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Product selections: Comply with the following for selection of products: 1. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Provide any

acceptable product meeting those standards or description. 2. Products specified by performance requirements only: Provide any acceptable

product which has been tested to show compliance with specified requirements, including indicated performances.

3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Provide products of manufacturers named, or submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer or product not named in accordance with Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30, Section 39M(b).

B. Additional product selection requirements regarding sustainable and environmental-friendly products and materials conforming to Owner’s sustainable/environmental program. 1. Provide products which comply with VOC emission limits required by the

Owner’s Sustainability/Environmental Policy and in compliance with applicable codes.

2. Provide products which comply with specified requirements for recycled content.

3. Provide complete written documentation with all product substitutions that the proposed products are fully compliant to specific environmental and sustainability requirements applicable to the substitution.

C. Visual matching: Where Specifications require matching a sample, the Architect/Engineer's decision on whether a proposed product matches is final. Where no product matches and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions for "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another category.


PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 13 - page 2 of 2

1.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION

A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Pursuant to Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30, Section 39M(b), where products or materials are prescribed by manufacturer name, trade name or catalog reference, the word “or approved equal” shall be implied. The Architect/Engineer will evaluate the proposed “equal” item on the following criteria: 1. The submitted “equal” item is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance,

strength and design. 2. The submitted “equal” item is at least equal in function for the purpose

intended by the design of the Work. 3. The submitted “equal” item conforms substantially to the detailed

requirements for the items as indicated by the specifications.

C. The Architect/Engineer's evaluation and decision on whether a proposed product is equal to that specified, based on the above evaluation requirements, is final. The Contractor retains the right to appeal the Architect/Engineer’s determination of equality through regulated statutory provisions. 1. The Architect/Engineer and Owner reserve the right to reject proposed

substitutions where data for VOCs is not provided or where emissions of individual VOCs are higher than for specified materials.

D. Where Specifications require matching existing materials, the Architect/Engineer's decision on whether a proposed product matches is final.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) End of Section


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - page 1 of 9

Section 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Project coordination.

B. Project meetings.


A. Section 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.

B. Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

C. Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING.

D. Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Requirements for Project Record Drawings (As-built drawings).

E. Section 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.

1.3 GENERAL PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Coordination: The General Contractor is fully responsible for coordinating the Work of this Contract including scheduling, submittals, Work and other activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. The General Contractor is responsible for coordinating actual installed location and interface of work, and to make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation, schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain efficient installation with the least amount of alterations, or cutting and patching, to completed Work. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible to uncover work completed in order to

install ill-timed work, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Where space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service and repair.

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment.



F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and Owner’s occupancy.

H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities.

1.4 UTILITIES, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all Work of this Project. Provide full and complete coordination for utilities, mechanical and electrical work in Divisions 11, 13, 21 through 28 and 33, with Work of other Divisions. 1. Each Filed-subcontractor shall compare his drawings and specifications with

those of other Trades and report any discrepancies between them to the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall obtain from the Architect/Engineer written instructions for changes necessary in the mechanical or electrical work, to ensure that all work is installed in coordination and cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, each Filed-subcontractor shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. All changes required in the work of each Filed-subcontractor caused by his negligence, shall be corrected by him at his own expense, to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction.

B. Give all advance notice to public utility companies as required by law, and provide proper disposition, subject to Architect/Engineer’s approval of all existing pipe lines, conduits, sewers, drains, poles, wiring, and other utilities that in any way interfere with the Work, whether or not they are specifically shown on the Drawings.

C. Coordination regarding existing utilities: 1. Notify Owner and appropriate authorities when coming across an unknown

utility line(s), and await decision as to how to dispose of same. 2. When an existing utility line must be cut and plugged or capped, moved, or

relocated, or has become damaged, notify the Owner and Utility company involved, and assure the protection, support, or moving of utilities to adjust them to the new work.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused to existing, active utilities located within the limits of this Contract, whether or not such utilities are shown on the Drawings, including resultant damages or injuries to persons or properties.

D. General coordination of piping, ductwork, conduits and equipment: 1. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs

and general locations of piping, ductwork, equipment and sprinkler heads. Determine exact routing and location of individual systems prior to fabrication of components or installation. a. Piping runs requiring pitch have “right-of-way” over those systems that

do not pitch.



b. System components whose elevations cannot be changed have “right-of-way” over those components whose elevations can be changed.

2. Adjust locations of piping, ductwork, conduits and equipment as required to accommodate new work with interferences anticipated and as encountered during installation. a. Locate piping, conduits and ductwork to be clear of swinging doors,

access doors, and clear for unimpeded equipment access. 3. Provide all offsets, transitions and changes of direction for all systems, as may

be required to maintain proper clearances for headroom, and as may be required for coordination with other “fixed-in-place” building components (such as structural systems). a. Furnish all vents, drains and similar accessories as may be required for

offsets, transitions and changes of direction. 4. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical

work. 5. Coordinate final locations of ceiling mounted devices (including air distribution

devices, thermostats, heaters, control devices, sprinkler heads and similar work) with reflected ceiling plans. Review locations with Architect/Engineer and obtain approval of all devices prior to installation.

1.5 COORDINATION OF CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching coordination: The General Contractor is responsible for coordination of all cutting and patching necessary for the completion of this Contract and for the quality and appearance of all patch Work in exposed-to-view finished materials.

B. General cutting and patching: Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING. 1. Do not drill through structural beams, slabs or columns. Core drilling through

concrete unit masonry and stair platforms must be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.6 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS

A. General: Prepare coordination drawings for areas where close coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Coordination Drawings include, but are not necessarily limited to:

a. Structure. b. Light fixtures. c. Access panels. d. Smoke and fire dampers. e. Soil, waste and vent piping. f. Major water. g. Rain water drainage piping.



h. Major electrical conduit runs, panelboards, feeder conduit and racks of branch conduit.

i. Sprinkler piping and heads. j. All equipment, including items in the Contract as well as OFCI and OFI

items. k. Existing conditions, including but not limited to mechanical, plumbing, fire

protection and electrical items. l. Seismic Restraints.

B. Timing: Prior to fabricating materials or beginning work, supervise and direct the creation of one complete set of coordination drawings showing complete coordination and integration of work, including, but not limited to, structural, architectural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, elevators, and electrical disciplines.

C. Intent: Coordination drawings are for the General Contractor’s and Filed-Subcontractor’s use during construction and are not to be construed as replacing shop drawings or record drawings. Architect/Engineer’s review of submitted coordination drawings shall not relieve the General Contractor from his overall responsibility for the coordination of the Work of the Contract.

D. Base sheets: Architect/Engineer will provide CAD files for use by the General Contractor for the development of building coordination drawing “base sheets” upon signed receipt of Architect/Engineer’s disclaimer form. General Contractor is responsible to prepare and provide one accurately scaled set of building coordination drawing “base sheets” showing all architectural and structural work. Base sheets shall be at appropriate scale; congested areas and sections through vertical shafts shall be at larger scale. 1. Highlight all fire rated and smoke partitions. 2. Indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural

framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services. 3. Indicate elevations relative to finish floor for bottom of ductwork and piping

and conduit (6 inches and greater in diameter). 4. Indicate the main paths for the installation, or removal of, equipment from

mechanical and electrical rooms.

E. General Contractor shall circulate coordination drawings to the following subcontractors and any other installers whose work might conflict with other work. Each of these subcontractors shall accurately and neatly show actual size and location of respective equipment and work. Each subcontractor shall note apparent conflicts, suggest alternate solutions, and return drawings to General Contractor. 1. Plumbing Filed-subcontractor. 2. Electrical discipline Filed-subcontractor(s).

F. Review and modify and approve coordination drawings in cooperation with individual installers and Filed-subcontractors to assure conflicts are resolved before work in field is begun and to ensure location of work exposed to view is as indicated or as approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. The General Contractor shall stamp, sign and submit coordination drawing

originals to Architect/Engineer for review.



2. Do not commence work in areas described in the coordination drawings until receipt of Architect/Engineer’s comments.

1.7 GENERAL PROJECT ADMINISTRATION

A. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining required coordination procedures. Include required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

B. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their Work is required.

C. Conduct conferences among Filed-subcontractors, subcontractors and others concerned with the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. Such activities include: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Closeout activities.

1.8 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE

A. The Architect/Engineer may, prior to commencement of the Work, schedule a meeting at a meeting room provided by the Owner.

B. In addition to the pre-bid conference specified under Section 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID, the Architect/Engineer may, prior to commencement of the Work, schedule a meeting at a meeting room provided by the Owner. 1. Attendance is required by Owner, Architect/Engineer, Owner’s Project

Manager, engineering consultants, General Contractors’ Project Manager and Superintendent, Filed-subcontractors, and other major subcontractors, applicators, installers and suppliers. Other persons are required to attend as the Architect/Engineer may direct or the General Contractor may wish to have present.

2. Items of Agenda: a. Use of premises by Owner, Contractor, and subcontractor(s). b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy considerations. c. Demolition procedures, identity tagging of existing furnishings and

equipment for salvage or disposal. d. Temporary utilities. e. Barricading and protection of the public, dust barriers. f. Survey and building layout. g. Potentially difficult areas of work. h. Project coordination.



i. Sustainability product requirements and procedures. j. Indoor air quality standards and testing requirements. k. Security and housekeeping procedures. l. Construction schedules. m. Work beyond Contract Limit. n. Procedures for testing and inspection. o. Procedures for maintaining record documents. p. Requirements for equipment start-up. q. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during

construction period.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION/PRE-FABRICATION CONFERENCES

A. When required in individual specification sections, prior to commencing the work of that trade, convene a pre-installation conference at work site, if possible, on same day as weekly progress meeting.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Project Representative a minimum of one week in advance of meeting date. 1. Contractor shall include discussions on Owner’s environmental/sustainability

goals, procedures and requirements in all pre-fabrication meetings conducted with subcontractors, fabricators, and vendors.

1.10 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. In addition to other specified meetings and additional meetings as required. General Contractor shall hold project coordination meetings, at least monthly at regularly scheduled times. Hold meetings more frequently when necessary to ensure full coordination of work. Request representation at each meeting by every entity involved in coordination or planning for work of the entire project. Conduct meetings in a similar manner to progress meetings, to resolve coordination problems.

B. Keep minutes of coordination meetings and distribute copies to all attendees, related parties and to Owner, Resident Project Representative(s), Architect/Engineer and its engineering consultants within 3 business days following meeting. Coordination meetings shall continue on an appropriate schedule, even after completion of coordination drawings by Contractor, to review progress and resolve minor conflicts not identified in the coordination drawings.

C. The following trades shall participate in coordination meetings, preparation of coordination drawings and reviews. Additional trades shall participate as the Contractor deems necessary for proper coordination of the Work. 1. Concrete work. 2. Masonry. 3. Structural steel, light gage metal framing and metal fabrications. 4. Rough carpentry. 5. Air and vapor barrier work. 6. Finish wall and ceiling construction.



7. Fire protection systems. 8. Plumbing systems, including roof drainage, waste and vent systems and

distribution. 9. Ductwork including appurtenances and equipment. 10. Electrical lighting, power, communications and signaling, fire detection and

related systems. 11. Excavation, site utilities and site improvements.

D. All adjustments necessary to achieve full coordination shall be determined in a timely manner, so as not to delay the work. Include time necessary for consideration by the Architect/Engineer and Resident Project Representative(s) for proposed modifications. No claim for additional compensation for extension of time arising from delays due to failure of Contractor to identify potential conflicts requiring coordination in a timely manner or from additional work made necessary by such failure will be valid.

1.11 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The General Contractor shall schedule and administer meetings throughout the progress of the Work at regular intervals; make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings and record minutes. 1. Distribute copies within one week to Architect/Engineer, Owner and

participants, and to those affected by decisions made. 2. Scheduled Frequency of Meetings: Weekly.

B. Attendance: Required are Contractor's Project Manager and Project Superintendent, and each Filed-Subcontractor, applicator, installer, and supplier whose work is on-going or scheduled. Owner, Architect/Engineer, engineering consultants, and other persons are required to attend as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Subcontractors, vendors, suppliers shall be present at meetings upon request of Contractor. 1. Attendee Authority: Subcontractors and supplier representatives present at

meetings shall have authority to act for and make commitments for, the entity which they represent.

2. Restricted Attendance: Owner and Architect/Engineer reserve the right to expel or exclude from any Progress Meeting any person(s) or company representative(s) without statement of reason or excuse.

3. Attendance of Architect/Engineer’s Consultants: Contractor shall make an attendance request for specific Architect/Engineer’s consultants and engineers at least 72 hours in advance of the meeting. Clearly identify In the request all consultant related issues and topics to be discussed at the meeting. The Architect/Engineer will decide if its consultant or engineer will attend.

4. Attendance of Owner’s Independent Consultants: Contractor shall make an attendance request for specific Owner’s consultants at least 72 hours in advance of the meeting. Clearly identify In the request all consultant related issues and topics to be discussed at the meeting. The Owner will decide if its consultant(s) will attend.



C. Items of Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identifications of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

a. Review of environmental/sustainability-related submittals, schedule and status.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Progress of Work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and effect

of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to Work.

1.12 SPECIAL PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Special project meetings: The Contractor shall conduct special project meetings as required throughout the course of the Work. Special Project Meetings are those held in addition to the regularly scheduled progress meetings. The Architect/Engineer and Owner are not required to attend these meetings. Special meeting issues include, but are not limited to: 1. Safety issues. 2. Labor issues. 3. Environmental/sustainability goals and issues. 4. Special scheduling issues.

B. Environmental Quality Review Meetings: The Contractor shall conduct special Environment Quality review meetings throughout the course of the Work. 1. Meetings may be held in conjunction with dates of Project Progress Meetings.

The Contractor shall notify both the Owner and Architect/Engineer at least 7 days in advance of the meeting dates. The Contractor along with any requested or necessary Filed Subcontractors, subcontractors, applicators, vendors or material suppliers shall attend.

2. Meeting shall include the following topics: a. Review of sustainability / environmental related submittals and progress

updates. b. Review of indoor air quality testing.

C. Additional Special Meetings requested by the Architect/Engineer or Owner: The Contractor along with any requested or necessary Filed-subcontractors, subcontractors, applicators, vendors or material suppliers shall attend additional meetings when requested by the Architect/Engineer or Owner as they deem necessary. Such meetings may be convened on short notice if conditions at the



project site so require and attendance is mandatory. The Architect/Engineer and Owner are not limited as to the number of additional meetings that may be requested, or the agenda for such meetings.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - page 1 of 3

Section 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Survey and layout data.

B. Scheduling of the Work.

C. Contract progress reporting. 1. Construction schedule updates. 2. Daily construction reports. 3. Look ahead activity reports. 4. Special Reports - Unusual Event Reporting.

D. Work Documentation: 1. Periodic site observations.

1.2 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA

A. Prior to starting any construction work, stake out all limits of cut and fill, the limits of proposed walkways and site improvements. Promptly upon completion of layout work and before any construction work is begun on the site, notify the Architect/Engineer and Designated Owner’s Representative, who shall conduct a field inspection of the stakeout. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to adjust the location of such layouts as it deems necessary to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.3 SCHEDULING OF THE WORK

A. Submit Gantt/Bar progress schedule in triplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect/Engineer's review. Revise and resubmit as required.

B. Schedule shall be of format approved by Architect/Engineer showing complete sequence of construction activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. For each separate phase, stage of Work and individual activities, indicate the early and late start dates, early and late finish dates, float dates, and duration. 1. The Schedule shall show the sequence and phasing of activities required and

reflect the manner in which actual work will be performed. The number of activities shown in the Schedule must be at least equal and related to the number of items listed in the Schedule of Values including back-up detail.

2. Indicate implementation and termination of each temporary utility. 3. Define portions of work which are dependent on the schedule of other related

activities and phasing. 4. Define activities on which the work is dependent, including:



a. Submittal of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples, color submission, coordination drawings, templates, fabrication and material delivery times.

b. Architect/Engineer’s review of shop drawings, equipment schedules, samples and templates.

c. Delivery times of equipment furnished under separate Contracts with Owner, where the Contractor has responsibility for installation or coordination.

5. Conclude all activities on one common end date, show contract completion date as a milestone activity on the Schedule.

1.4 CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Construction schedule updates: 1. During progress of Work, revise and resubmit with Applications for Payment in

accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

2. Maintain progress schedule with project progress and utilize the plan in planning, coordinating and performing the work under this Contract.

3. Furnish copies of the Progress schedule, and revisions, to all subcontractors, installers, equipment vendors and suppliers.

4. Update schedule showing actual progress of Work in progress, identify Work started and completed during the previous update period. Show the estimated time required to complete each activity started but not yet completed, and reflect any changes in the schedule.

5. Prepare a Schedule Analysis for submission with revised project schedules. The Schedule Analysis shall include a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and completion dates, and an explanation of corrective action to be taken. All activities that are behind schedule by more than two weeks shall be addressed individually in the Schedule Analysis.

6. Submit revised schedules with attached Schedule Analysis, with each Application for Payment; clearly identify changes since previous version. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.

B. Daily construction reports: Prepare a daily construction report, submit duplicate copies to the Architect/Engineer at weekly intervals. Record the following information concerning events at the site: 1. List of subcontractors at the site, and approximate count of personnel. 2. Accidents, unusual events, and emergency procedures. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions (when exterior work is

in progress). 4. Meetings and significant decisions. 5. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 6. Emergency procedures. 7. Orders and requests of governing authorities.



8. Change Orders received, and implemented. 9. Services connected, disconnected. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 12. Partial Completions/occupancies. 13. Substantial completions authorized.

C. Look ahead activity reports: Prepare each week throughout the term of construction a listing of upcoming construction activities. Each weekly report shall include a listing of planned construction activities for the upcoming 2 weeks (14 calendar days). Submit a Look Ahead Activity Report at each job meeting to all participants. If no meeting is planned on a given week, mail the reports directly to both Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Project Representative. 1. Maintain a record of all Look Ahead Activity Reports in a 3-ring binder in the

Contractor’s field office and make available for review by Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Project Representative.

D. Special Reports: 1. Unusual Event Reporting: When an event of an unusual and significant nature

occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information.

1.5 WORK DOCUMENTATION - PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATIONS

A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record the following: 1. Specification section number, product(s), and name of subcontractor or

installer. 2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. 3. Name of manufacturer’s representative present. 4. Date, time and duration of tests. 5. Type of test and results. 6. Retesting required.

B. Observe startup and adjustments; record time and date of equipment start-up and results.

C. Observe equipment demonstrations to Owner; record times and additional information required for operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Assist Architect/Engineer with final inspections. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected.



End of Section



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - page 1 of 8

Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Submittal coordination.

B. Submittal procedures and grading.

C. Schedule of Submissions.

D. Owner’s environmental policy submittals.

E. Shop drawings, product data and samples.

F. Manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Manufacturer’s certificates.

H. Emergency addresses.

1.2 SUBMITTAL COORDINATION

A. General: The Contractor is fully responsible for delay in the delivery of materials, progress of the Work and damages incurred due to Contractor’s failure to submit, revise and resubmit submissions in accordance with the requirements herein, and in a coordinated and timely manner.

B. Make submittals in a proper and timely fashion, allowing for administrative procedures, Architect/Engineer’s review, corrections to submissions and resubmittal, if necessary, and fabrication of products without delaying the project. Minimum processing times required by the Architect/Engineer are as follows: 1. Review for Architect/Engineer’s Office only: Allow a minimum of 10 working

days for review and processing. Some submittals may require additional time. a. Simultaneous submission of a large number of shop drawings and

product data may require longer than 10 working days for review. (In particular submittals for Divisions 3, 5, 6, 21, 22, 23, 25 and 26).

b. Complex Systems (structural, mechanical, electrical) may require longer than 10 working days for review each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and product data are submitted or resubmitted.

2. Review by Architect/Engineer and its consultant(s): Allow 10 working days for review and processing of submittals by Architect/Engineer plus an additional 5 working days for review by each consultant as applicable.

3. Reprocessing of submittals: For submittals requiring resubmittal, re-processing time required shall be the same as first submittal.

4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of Work.

C. Make submittals of similar items, systems, or those specified in a single specification section together.



D. Make submittals for products which other products are contingent upon, first.

E. The Contractor is fully responsible for delay in the delivery of materials or progress of work caused by late review of shop drawings due to failure of the Contractor to submit, revise, or resubmit shop drawings in adequate time to allow the Architect/Engineer checking and processing of each submission or resubmission.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMISSIONS

A. Schedule procedure: Immediately after being awarded the Contract, meet with the Architect/Engineer to discuss the schedule of submissions and then prepare and submit within 14 calendar days for approval a schedule of submissions for the Work. The schedule of submissions shall be related to the entire Project, and shall contain the following: 1. Shop Drawing Schedule (for shop and setting drawings to be provided by the

Contractor). 2. Sample Schedule (for samples to be provided by the Contractor). 3. With respect to portions of the Work to be performed by Subcontractors, such

schedule of submissions for the work of each Subcontractor shall be submitted for approval within 30 calendar days after execution of a subcontract with such Subcontractor.

B. List all submissions required of each trade: 1. Include the Specification Section number, name of subcontractor or vendor,

submittal type, item, description, type, quantity and size (where applicable) of each submission.

2. For each submission, provide the following dates, as estimated: a. Scheduled date of submission. b. Required date of approval. (permit time for appropriate review and

resubmissions as may be required). c. Estimated date of beginning fabrication or manufacture of product (where

applicable). d. Required date of submission of product to testing laboratory. e. Required date of testing laboratory approval. f. Required date for delivery of product to site. g. Required date for beginning of installation of product. h. Required date for completion of installation (and in-place testing). i. Required dates for documentation as indicated in Section 01 78 00 –

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1) Project record documents. 2) Project record drawings. 3) Required date for operation and maintenance data and preventative

maintenance instructions. 4) Materials and finishes manuals. 5) Warranties and bonds. 6) Maintenance contracts. 7) Spare parts and maintenance materials.



C. For each submittal, schedule to allow adequate time for review by the Architect/Engineer and its consultants. The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for Work performed in shop or field prior to approval. Long-lead items requiring expedited action must be clearly indicated. 1. The schedule shall be reviewed and resubmitted as necessary to conform to

approved modifications to the construction Project Schedule, and shall be updated as may be required by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Posting of submittal schedule: Print and distribute the submittal schedule to Architect/Engineer, Owner, subcontractors and other parties affected. Post copies in field.

E. Update schedule throughout progress of the Project, coordinated with scheduling changes in the Work, and redistribute monthly in conjunction with submittal of Application for Payment.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND GRADING

A. Prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer, all specified and requested submittals.

B. Provide space for Contractor, Architect/Engineer and engineering consultant review stamps, on the front page of each item's submittal copy. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. The Architect/Engineer's stamp shall contain the following data:

________ NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN ________ MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED ________ REVISE AND RESUBMIT ________ SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM ________ REJECTED

1. The Architect/Engineer will insert the date of action taken and an identification of the person taking the action.

2. Submittal grading: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN - No corrections, no marks. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED - Resubmission not required. Minor

amount of corrections; all items can be fabricated without further corrections to original submission; checking is complete and all corrections are deemed obvious without ambiguity.

c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT - Resubmission required. Minor amounts of corrections; checking is not complete; details of items noted by checker are to be clarified further before full review can be given. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate noted items requiring correction.

d. SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM - Submission has been rejected by Architect/Engineer previously, and the currently submitted product is rejected as not being in accord with the Contract Documents, or other justifiable reasons. Submission using specified product is required.



e. REJECTED - Submittal is rejected as not in accord with the Contract Documents, too many corrections, or other justifiable reasons. When returning submission, Architect/Engineer will state reasons for rejection. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate.

3. Review/approval neither extends nor alters any contractual obligations of the Architect/Engineer, Engineer or Contractor.

C. Identify all variations from Contract Documents, and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.

D. Contractor's review: Review all shop drawings, product data and samples. Include, without limitation, verification of the following: 1. Proper title, original date, drawing number (which shall be changed if

resubmitted), revision numbers and dates, designation of project contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier.

2. Identification of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Specification Section and subsection or paragraph where appropriate and identification of Contract Drawings by number and detail.

3. On each submittal, as a minimum, Contractor shall identify the following: a. Errors, inconsistencies, and omissions discovered in the contract

documents and field conditions must be reported at once to the Architect/Engineer.

b. Any variations from code requirements contained in the contract documents must be reported promptly in writing to both the Architect/Engineer and owner.

c. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer information that any design, process, or product infringes on a patent.

d. Names of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be given in writing to the Architect/Engineer as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, preferably at the pre-construction meeting. (Note: If objection is made, a change order is possible.) List shall include name(s) of contact person(s), address, telephone and fax number(s).

E. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties; instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

1.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND QUANTITIES

A. Furnish Architect/Engineer with electronic files through the Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) files for each of the following submittal types: 1. Schedules, including, but not limited to:

a. Construction Schedule. b. Schedule of Values. c. Schedule of shop drawings, product data, and samples. d. Schedule of Environmental Submissions.

2. Shop drawings.



3. Product data, manufacturer’s instructions and certificates and similar submissions.

4. Emergency addresses: 1 file to Architect/Engineer, and 1 file direct to Owner.

B. Furnish Architect/Engineer with the following quantities of the following physical submittals: 1. Samples: Sets of 3 identical samples of each submission required.

C. Coordinate related submittals and schedule submissions to expedite the Project; deliver to Architect/Engineer, per the following address:

D’Agostino Izzo Quirk Architect/Engineers, Inc. 1310 Broadway Somerville, MA 02144

D. Transmit submittals to Architect/Engineer at the above address, with individual transmittal forms, Document 00 62 12 – PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM for each submission. Document 00 62 12 is bound into the Project Manual; unbound copies are available from the Architect/Engineer. 1. On transmittal form, identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, installer, or

supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. Transmittals received by the Architect/Engineer from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without any action taken.

2. Contractor shall number submittals sequentially by Specifications Section prior to submittal. Resubmitted items shall retain number and be noted as resubmitted (example 260000-1 R1).

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared specifically for this Project. Shop drawings shall include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project are not considered shop drawings. 1. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field dimensions

where appropriate. 2. Identify materials and products shown. Note all conditions where require

coordination with other trades and special installation procedures. 3. Show gage and thickness of materials. 4. Indicate welding details and joint types. 5. Show every component of fabricated items, notes regarding manufacturing

process coatings and finishes, identifying numbers conforming to the Contract Documents (i.e. stair numbers, door numbers and similar items), dimensions, and appropriate trade names.

6. Show anchorage and fastening details, including type, size and spacing. 7. Review each submittal for conformity with the Contract requirements prior to

submittal, certify such review on each shop drawing with Contractor’s stamp, signature and date. Reference on shop drawings to other sections, installers,



suppliers, or trade(s) shall designate the appropriate specification sections, and the term "by others" shall not be used.

B. Size of Format: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, and no larger than 30 by 42 inches, except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings.

C. The Architect/Engineer's comments and corrections will be made on the electronic submission (PDF) and returned to the Contractor. If necessary, the Contractor then shall make the necessary corrections on the original drawings and resubmit the corrected drawings in electronic format (PDF) as specified. Prints of any submittals required for the Architect/Engineer's own use, and those of engineering consultants, will be made without cost to the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible to distribute and furnish (at no additional cost to Owner) all shop documents needed for use by the Contractor, subcontractors, installers, vendors and suppliers.

D. Required action for shop submittals (including Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples ), returned "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED": Contractor shall obtain and distribute adequate prints for construction, including one print of each for the Owner's Project Representative, and then return the originals to the subcontractor or supplier from whom he originally received them.

E. Required action for shop submittals (including Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples ), returned "REVISE AND RESUBMIT " or "REJECTED": Contractor shall first obtain a record print and then forward them to source for correction of original drawings. Resubmit corrected documents in the same manner as the first submittal.

F. Each drawing shall have a title block on the right hand side containing the following data:

Name of project - EDWARD A. LELACHEUR PARK RIGHT FIELD CONCOURSE EXTENSION

Architect/Engineer - DAIQ Architect/Engineers, Inc. Contractor - Subcontractor/supplier - Date of submission -

G. Each drawing shall have a clear space on the right hand side for review stamps of both the Architect/Engineer and Contractor. 1. The Contractor’s Review and Action Stamp: Provide suitable space on label

or title block for Contractor’s review and action stamp. Stamp and sign each submittal to show Contractor’s review and approval prior to transmittal Architect/Engineer. Submittals not signed and stamped by Contractor will be returned without action. a. Only submittals received from the General Contractor will be considered

for review by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall review each submittal for accuracy and conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and particularly for field measurements and proper fit with adjoining work. Modify submittals as required to show interface with adjacent work and attachment to Building.



b. The Contractor’s Review and Action Stamp shall contain the following language or similar:

APPROVED FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

All dimensions and quantities have been reviewed and are accepted by ____________________________________ General Contractor’s Name All dimensions and field conditions have been or will be verified prior to fabrication of the items described herein.

c. Submittals received from the Contractor shall be signed and comply with review requirements. Submittals not certified or improperly certified (stamped but not reviewed) will be returned to the Contractor without Architect/Engineer’s review. Claims due to the return of uncertified, improperly prepared or inadequately reviewed submittals will be rejected.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Product data as specified, and as the Architect/Engineer may additionally prescribe. Product data includes, but is not limited to: 1. Catalog cuts. 2. Complete specifications. 3. Standard color charts. 4. Performance data.

a. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. b. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards, labels and seals.

5. Environmental data including, but not limited to: a. Chemical composition. b. VOC content. c. Material certifications as applicable to product.

6. Certified laboratory test report data. 7. Health and safety precautions. 8. Illustrated capacities, characteristics, wiring diagrams, controls, and other

pertinent information for complete product and product use description.

B. If more than one size or type is shown on any printed sheet, indicate clearly intended item(s).

1.8 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples clearly labeled as to its material, type or make, manufacturer, size or gauge, and other pertinent data, accompanied by an appropriate transmittal form. Samples shall show full range of color and texture variation that can be expected. 1. When accepted or not accepted, the Architect/Engineer will retain one set of

samples and return the other to the Contractor. Samples will not be permitted for use in the project.



1.9 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for delivery, handling, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer’s instructions and Contract Documents.

1.10 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s certificates and installer certificates to Architect/Engineer for review.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.11 EMERGENCY ADDRESSES

A. Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit in writing, the name, addresses and telephone numbers of key members of their organization including Contractor’s Superintendent and personnel at the site, to be contacted in the event of emergencies at the building site, which may occur during non-working hours.



End of Section


REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00 - page 1 of 2

Section 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section consists of: 1. Applicable codes and regulations. 2. Trade union jurisdictions. 3. Wage rate compliance.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Regulations include laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest version, by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, except as indicated otherwise, of all applicable codes including the following: 1. 2015 International Building Code (IBC) with Massachusetts Building Code,

Ninth Edition amendments (780 CMR). 2. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code with Massachusetts Building

Code amendments, (Effective August 12, 2016 under the 780 CMR, Eighth Edition).

3. 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC) with Massachusetts Building Code, Ninth Edition amendments (780 CMR).

4. 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC). 5. Massachusetts Electrical Code (2017 National Electrical Code

[NFPA 70, 2017 edition], with Massachusetts modifications from 527 CMR 12.00).

6. Massachusetts Fuel, Gas, and Plumbing Code (2002 National Fuel Gas Code [ANSI Z223.1-NFPA 54], with Massachusetts modifications from 248 CMR 5.00).

7. Massachusetts Comprehensive Fire Safety Code (527 CMR) [2012 NFPA 1 as amended], effective January 1, 2015, as amended through November 4, 2016 and MGL Chapter 148.

8. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Regulation 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board.

9. City of Lowell Zoning Regulations / Ordinance , as amended. 10. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding

Building Construction And Demolition Operations, 2013 Edition. 11. United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

Standard Nº. 29-CFR-1926.59 - HAZARD COMMUNICATION STANDARD.


REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00 - page 2 of 2

12. United States Department of Justice, Nº 28 CFR Part 36 - AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT, (Public Law 101-336).

B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a code or regulation is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents, or as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 TRADE UNION JURISDICTIONS

A. Maintain current information on jurisdictional matters, regulations, actions and pending actions; and administer/supervise performance of Work in a manner which will minimize possibility of disputes, conflicts, delays, claims or losses.

1.5 WAGE RATE COMPLIANCE

A. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure that the rate per hour to be paid to mechanics, apprentices, teamsters, laborers and other workers employed on the Work shall not be less than the approved wage rates applicable to this project. A legible copy of the approved rates, along with equal opportunity requirements, shall be posted on a weatherproof bulletin board outside the field office and be clearly visible for review by all workers.



End of Section


UTILITIES NOTIFICATION 01 41 17 - page 1 of 2

Section 01 41 17

UTILITIES NOTIFICATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Comply with all regulations and laws concerning excavation, demolition, or explosive work and be advised of utility notification requirements under Chapter 82, Section 40 of the Massachusetts General Laws.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY

A. Notification of utilities within the Commonwealth is performed through the Utilities Underground Plant Damage Prevention System, commonly referred to as “Dig Safe”.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractors must notify “Dig Safe” by telephone before performing any earth moving operations including: digging, trenching, boring, site demolition, excavation, backfilling, grading, or explosive work in all public ways and private property.

B. This notification must be made at least 72 hours (excluding weekends and holidays) prior to the Work described above, but not more than 30 calendar days before commencement of the contemplated Work. Notification shall occur between 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM local time from Monday to Friday, except in cases of emergency. 1. The toll free phone number is: 811. 2. Provide the following information:

a. Municipality. b. Location of work. c. Intersecting street. d. Type of work. e. Starting date and time of work. f. Name and title of caller. g. Phone number of caller. h. Best time for “Dig Safe” to return calls. i. Company name of General Contractor or Construction Manager. j. Company name of sub-contractor performing subgrade work.

C. Member utilities of the Utilities Underground Plant Damage Prevention System are required to respond to the notice within 72 hours from the time said notice is received by designating at the locus the location of pipes, mains, wires, or conduits. 1. Locations of underground utilities will be marked by spray paint or stakes.

Marks will be color coded with additional descriptions of letters and arrows as required.


UTILITIES NOTIFICATION 01 41 17 - page 2 of 2

D. Do not commence work until “Dig Safe” has been properly notified and has responded as described above.

E. Subsequently notify “Dig Safe” of unanticipated additional blasting required after the initial notification to “Dig Safe” has been made. Do not perform the additional blasting work in less than 4 hours following the subsequent notification.

1.4 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor is fully responsible for protection of the utility location markings, wherever these occur, on or off-site.

B. Perform Work in such a manner, and with reasonable precautions taken to avoid damage to utilities under the surface in said areas of work. Immediately notify any known or suspected damage to underground utilities to the owner of such utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)

End of Section


REFERENCES 01 42 00 - page 1 of 5

Section 01 42 00 REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms.

B. Definitions

C. Reference Standards.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. The following list of common abbreviations are referenced in individual specification sections. This list is provided for convenience to the Contractor and is not intended to define all abbreviations use in the Contract Documents. 1. Abbreviations for contract and specifications.

DCAMM Massachusetts Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance

EPA United States Environmental Protection Agency IAQ Indoor Air Quality IEQ Indoor Environmental Quality MEPA Massachusetts Environmental Protection Agency MGL Commonwealth of Massachusetts General Laws MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet NIC Not in Contract OFCI Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed OFI or OFOI Owner Furnished and Installed (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed) VOC Volatile Organic Compounds

B. Abbreviations for measurements and quantities. C Celsius cm Centimeter F Fahrenheit Hrs Hours Kg Kilogram L Liter M meter m2 or SM square meter m3 or CM cubic meter mm Millimeter Mths Months psi Pounds per square inch t ton



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of contracting parties (Owner, and Architect): Refer to Section 01 10 00 – PROJECT SUMMARY.

B. Definitions for terms utilized in the Contract Documents: 1. "As necessary," "as directed," "when directed," "satisfactory," "good and

sufficient," "approved," or other general qualifying terms are used on the Drawings: These terms are deemed to be followed by the words, "in the opinion of the Architect," or "by the Architect," as the case may be."

2. “Addenda”: written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.

3. “Approval," "approved, “approved equal," "or equal," or "other approved" means as approved by the Architect."

4. The terms “Contractor”, “General Contractor”, and “Construction Manager” as used in the Project Manual have the same meaning and are interchangeable in Contract Documents. These terms refer to the same entity.

5. The term “Day”: is defined as the following: a. The term “calendar day” is a full 24 hour period, starting from 12 AM

(midnight), and includes all weekends and legal holidays. b. The term “working day” shall mean any calendar day except Saturdays,

Sundays, and legal holidays at the place of the building. c. Where the term “day” is used without the adjective of “calendar” or

“working”, it shall mean “calendar day”. 6. The terms “Designer”, “Architect”, and “Architect/Engineer” as used in the

Project Manual have the same meaning and are interchangeable in Contract Documents. These terms refer to the same entity.

7. “Furnish and Install” or “Provide”: items identified shall be furnished and installed under this Contract. The term “Furnish”, when used separately, shall mean that the items referred to shall be furnished, only. Similarly the term “install”, when used separately, shall mean that the items referred to shall be installed, only.

8. “Knowledge,” “recognize” and “discover,” their respective derivatives and similar terms in the Contract Documents, as used in reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean that which the Contractor knows (or should know), recognizes (or should recognize) and discovers (or should discover) in exercising the care, skill and diligence required by the Contract Documents. Analogously, the expression “reasonably inferable” and similar terms in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted to mean reasonably inferable by a Contractor familiar with the Project and exercising the care, skill and diligence required of the contractor by the Contract Documents.

9. “Not in Contract” or “N.I.C.”: equipment, furnishings, or other materials not included as a part of this Contract.

10. “Product”: materials, systems and equipment.



1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents.

D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

E. The contractual relationship to the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

F. Schedule of References 1. Listed below are abbreviations for the names and titles of trade association

names, federal government agencies and similar organizations which are referenced in the individual specification sections. The addresses and URL’s (Uniform Resource Locators) provided are for the Contractor’s convenience and are believed to be current and accurate, however addresses and URL’s frequently change, and no assurance is made on their accuracy:

AA Aluminum Association 900 19th Street N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 www.aluminum.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268 www.aamanet.org

ACI American Concrete Institute, International 38800 Country Club Drive, Farmington Hills, Michigan 48331 www.aci-int.org

AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (Formerly NFPA National Forest Products Association) 1111 19th St. N.W., Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036 www.afandpa.org

AGAI American Galvanizers Association Inc. 12200 E.Lliff Ave, Suite 204, Aurora, CO 80014-1252 www.galvanizeit.org

AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC 20006-5292 www.aia.org

AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association 2700 Prosperity Ave, Suite 250, Fairfax VA 22031 www.aiha.org

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1 E. Wacher Dr., Suite 3100, Chicago,IL 60601-2001 www.aisc.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 W. 42nd Street, 13 Floor, New York, NY 10036 www.ansi.org



APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (formerly APA - American Plywood Association) P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma, WA 98411-0070 www.apawood.org

ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association 230 West Wells Street, Suite 311, Milwaukee WI 53203 www.aecinfo.com

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta GA.30329 www.ashrae.org

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017-2392 www.asme.org

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428 www.astm,.org

AWPA American Wood Preservers’ Association P.O. Box 286, Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 www.awpa.com

AWPI American Wood Preservers’ Institution 1945 Old Gallows Rd., Suite 150, Vienna, VA 22182 www.oas.org

AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W., Miami, FL 33126 www.aws.org

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 www.crsi.org

CSDA Concrete Sawing and Drilling Association 100 Second Ave S., Ste 402N, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 www.csda.org

FM Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corp. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 www.fmglobal.com

MIL Military Specifications and Standards Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120 www.milspec.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000, Chicago, IL 60603 www.naamm.org

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8575 Government Circle, Gaithersburg, MD 20877-4121 www.nebb.org

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association 1300 N. 17th St., Suite 1846, Rosslyn, VA 22209 www.nema.org

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Battery March Park, PO Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269 www.nfpa.org



PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road, Skokie, IL 60077-1083 www.cement.org

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute 4004 Hillsboro Pike, Suite 224B, Nashville, TN 37215 www.porcelainenamel.com

PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce www.omg.org

SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25, Fox River Grove, IL 60021-0025 www.sdi.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Dr., Chantilly, VA 22022-1209 www.smacnapa.org

SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings 40 24th Street, 6th Floor, Pittsburgh PA 15222-4623 www.sspc.org

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute 2841 Main Street, Suite 585, Kansas City, MO 64108 www.swrionline.org

UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road, Northbrook, IL 60602 www.ul.com



End of Section



QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00 - page 1 of 4

Section 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General quality assurance and control of installation.

B. Site safety, worker safety and training.

C. Contractor’s quality control (QC) program.

D. Source quality control.

E. Field samples and mock-ups.

F. Testing laboratory and inspection services.

G. Manufacturer’s field services and reports.

H. Field quality control, Owner’s right for confirmation.

1.2 GENERAL QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including performance of each step in sequence. Notify Architect/Engineer when manufacturers' instructions conflict with the provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents; obtain clarification before proceeding with the work affected by the conflict.

C. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate high standards or more precise workmanship.

D. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.3 SITE SAFETY, WORKER SAFETY AND TRAINING

A. General: The Contractor (and his Filed-Subcontractors) shall, at all times, exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of all persons. All rules, regulations, and laws concerning safety that are in effect at the work site, and in particular, all applicable regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the U.S. Government, in addition to specified requirements shall be complied with in all respects. 1. Contractor's responsibility for safety shall apply continuously twenty four (24)

hours per Day during the term of this Contract and is not limited to normal working hours.



B. Contractor’s safety program: Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall develop and implement a Safety and Health Plan to comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards for the Construction Industry and all other applicable Federal, State, local laws and regulations. Contractors Safety and Health Plan, and included health and safety procedures and policies, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Representative within fifteen (15) Days after the date of Notice to Proceed and in no event later than commencement of the Work, whichever occurs first. 1. Perform pre planning to ensure access Is provided to Fire Department for all

areas of the work site throughout the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the Fire Department site access maps, updated regularly, to reflect changes in the layout of the work site and shall notify the Fire Department when each update is made

2. Post and maintain, at prominent locations throughout the Project site, emergency telephone numbers and shall insure that all personnel on site are continuously aware of this information.

3. Ensure safe access to the Work for the Owner, Architect/Engineer, Architect/Engineer’s consultants, their designated representatives, and all others charged with inspection, testing and monitoring of the Work, and visitors to the site. The Contractor shall furnish site visitors with safety equipment, test equipment, safety apparel and instructions that are required to insure their safety on site, and In the performance of their duties related to the Work of this Contract

C. All employees to be employed at the worksite will have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) that is at least 10 hours in duration. The OSHA training and certification course shall occur at the time each employee begins work. Furnish documentation to Owner and Architect/Engineer, for each employee documenting successful completion of the OSHA safety training and certification course. Submit with the first certified payroll report. Comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to Massachusetts General Laws (MGL) Chapter 149, Section 44A.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

A. Procedures: Contractor and each subcontractor shall include all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidental items necessary to implement quality control procedures to the extent necessary to demonstrate and maintain compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Quality Control Plan: Within 20 days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Quality Control (QC) Plan to the Owner’s Representative and Architect/Engineer for approval. The plan shall address the following, as a minimum: 1. The Contractor’s commitment to quality and implementing and managing the

QC program. 2. Identification of the Contractor’s onsite QC Manager, with name,

qualifications, duties and responsibilities. The QC Manager shall have the authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work. The QC Manager shall be present for all QC meetings, inspections and tests during the project.



3. Procedures for addressing and commenting QC with Contractor’s staff, all subcontractors and suppliers, and Owner, Architect/Engineer and Owner’s representative.

4. Procedures for review of submittals and submittal status, and documentation of same.

5. Procedures for pre-installation meetings and documentation of same. 6. Procedures for inspections of deliveries and documentation of same. 7. Procedures for benchmark inspections, defined as initial installations, and

documentation of same. 8. Procedures for mockup inspections and documentation of same. 9. Procedures for equipment in place, inspections and documentation of same. 10. Procedures for inspections prior to closures of concealment and

documentation of same. 11. Procedures for start-up and commissioning and documentation of same. 12. Procedures for turnover and documentation of same. 13. Procedures for identifying, recording, tracking correcting and reporting items

requiring rework, using a Rolling Completion list chronological item number, phase area, date listed, description, party responsible for correction, date notified, and date corrected.

14. Procedures for testing and documentation of same. 15. Procedures for corrective action on Architect/Engineer’s Field Reports and

Testing Agency reports and documentation of same. C. Procedures for reporting on all of the above on a monthly basis as a condition

precedent to review of the Contractor’s application for payment.

1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Product Labeling: Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, and systems required to be labeled by applicable code(s). 1. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification,

approved agency identification, and the following information, as applicable, on each label. a. Model number. b. Serial number. c. Performance characteristics.



1.6 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Install field samples demonstrating quality level for the Work, at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review and acceptance by Architect/Engineer. Remove field samples prior to date of Final Inspection, or as directed.

1.7 TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected

time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and

tests required for Contractor's use.

C. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum.

1.8 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When called for by individual Specification Sections, provide at no additional cost to the Owner, manufacturers’ or product suppliers’ qualified staff personnel, to observe site conditions, start-up of equipment, adjusting and balancing of equipment, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and as specified under the various Sections. 1. Individuals shall report all observations, site decisions, and instructions given

to applicators or installers. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of any circumstances which are supplemental, or contrary to, manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Submit full report within 30 calendar days from observed site conditions to Architect/Engineer for review.

1.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner reserves the right to take samples and perform, at random, tests of approved materials delivered to the job site to verify compliance of actual materials with specifications.



End of Section


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - page 1 of 16

Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General requirements for temporary facilities and controls.

B. Temporary utilities.

C. Construction facilities.

D. Temporary construction.

E. Construction aids.

F. Vehicular access and parking.

G. Temporary barriers and enclosures.

H. Site and environment controls.

I. Fire prevention measures.

J. Security measures.

K. Project identification and temporary signage.

L. Removal of temporary utilities, controls, and facilities.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary facilities, controls, and construction aids as specified herein until they are replaced by permanent work, or until Project Substantial Completion, as appropriate. 1. Additional temporary facilities and controls which may be specified under

individual Filed Sub-bid sections are the responsibility of the respective Filed Subcontractors.

2. Temporary facilities removed from the Project shall remain the property of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified.

B. Except where specifically noted otherwise, cost or use charges for temporary facilities, utility services, controls, and construction aids and similar items specified in this Section or as required to perform the Work, are not chargeable to the Awarding Authority or Architect/Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order.

C. Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the Work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time when they are no longer needed, or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the temporary facilities. 1. Locate temporary facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result

in minimum interference with performance of the Work.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures

performed on temporary utilities. 2. Schedule showing implementation and termination of each temporary utility

within 15 days of commencement of the Work. 3. Shop drawings:

a. Temporary signage. b. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and

parking areas for construction personnel.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ANSI A 10 - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 3. NFPA 241 - Building Construction and Demolition Operations.

1.5 TEMPORARY WEATHER PROTECTION

A. Weather Protection Standards: The following weather protection standards pursuant to Sections 44F and G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, are hereby incorporated into this specification, and shall be considered supplementary to the temporary heating and temporary enclosure requirements specified elsewhere in this Section and in individual specification Sections. 1. Limitation of Weather Protection Standards: Under the provisions of Chapter

149, Section 44F(1) and Section 44G, Para. D, of the Massachusetts General Laws (MGL), General Contractors are required to provide weather protection to allow building construction to be carried on between the dates of November 1 to March 31 (inclusive). a. These standards do not require enclosures for heat for operations that

are not economically feasible to protect in the judgment of the Awarding Authority; including for example, site work, excavation, pile driving, steel erection, erection of certain exterior panels, roofing and the similar construction elements.

2. Definition of Weather Protection: “Weather Protection” means temporary protection of work which may be adversely affected by moisture, cold, heat, and wind by the use of temporary covers, enclosures, and heat. Maintain at least the minimum temperatures specific. Comply with specific requirements which are specified within individual Specification Sections. a. Temperature at the working surface shall be at least forty degrees

Fahrenheit (40 degrees F). This provision does not supersede any specific greater requirements for methods of construction of curing of materials.



3. General Contractors Responsibilities: a. The General Contractor shall furnish and install all “weather protection”

Both (exterior and interior) during the time period from November 1 to March 31 (inclusive). The General Contractor is responsible to ensure that protection is provided for the building INTERIOR and all materials and equipment from weather at all times (year round).

b. At completion of work, the General Contractor shall remove temporary weather protection and restore all surfaces to first class condition.

4. Filed Subcontractors Responsibilities: Individual Filed Subcontractors are responsible for all tarpaulins and similar protective measures necessary to cover scaffolding for inclement weather conditions during NON-WINTER months. NON-WINTER period is from April 1 to October 31 (inclusive).

5. Proposed Plan: The General Contractor shall within 30 calendar days after Award of Contract, submit three copies of a typewritten proposed plan for “Weather Protection” and obtain the Architect/Engineer’s and Owner’s written approval.

6. Reporting Requirements: a. Within thirty calendar days after Contract award, the General Contractor

shall submit in writing to the Owner for approval, three copies of its proposed plan for weather protection.

b. The General Contractor shall furnish and install accurate Fahrenheit thermometers at places designated by the Owner to determine whether the required temperature is being maintained.

7. Weather protection materials, equipment, and the installation thereof, shall comply with all the safety rules and regulations including provisions for adequate ventilation and fire protection devices.

8. Use of Permanent Heating System(s): The General Contractor may choose, if the Owner approves, to use the permanent heating system for temporary heat after the building is enclosed and the system has been tested and is ready to operate. a. The General Contractor shall thoroughly clean and restore to first class

condition, acceptable to the Owner, all portions of the permanent heating system that are used for heating during construction.

b. Use of the permanent heating system for weather protection shall not affect any heating system guarantee that may be due to the Owner; such guarantee shall begin to run only when the Owner accepts the building.

B. Additional weather protection requirements: The General Contractor is responsible to ensure that the protection is provided by for the building interior and all materials and equipment from weather at all times (year round). 1. Where removal of existing roofing, roof sheathing, windows, doors, and other

items is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and workmen ready to provide adequate and approve temporary covering of exposed areas.

2. Temporary coverings shall be attended as necessary to insure effectiveness and to prevent displacement.

3. Contractor shall repair or replace all elements of the building damaged by failure to properly protect them from the weather to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.



1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General Installation: Install temporary utility service(s), or connect to existing service(s) as indicated, and as specified. Comply with all applicable laws, regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, ELECTRICITY

A. Temporary electricity: The Owner will pay for electrical energy required for temporary light and power. The Contractor is required to hire an electrician licensed where project is located to provide temporary feeders of sufficient capacity from the facility’s power lines, at the point coordinated with the Owner, to furnish electric light and power requirements for the work, while under construction. 1. Metering: The Owner reserves the right to require separate metering and for

the Contractor to pay for electricity used, if, in the Owner’s opinion, electricity is being wasted.

2. Electric power service: Use of existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is sufficient for Contractor’s needs and is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. Provide additional weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics as required to furnish temporary electricity for construction operations. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switch gear. a. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed

by Owner. b. Heavy electrical loads such as welding and other equipment with similar

special power requirements must be powered by individual installers using portable electric generators at each user’s own cost. 1) Except as otherwise specifically provided, all additional costs

resulting from such use shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. Distribution: A grounded receptacle (outlet) for an extension cord shall be

provided by the Electrical Filed-Subcontractor within one hundred (100) feet of any part of the building. Individual users are responsible for their own work lamps and extension cords.

1.8 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, LIGHTING

A. Temporary lighting: The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide lighting with local switching to fulfill security requirements and provide illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. Maintain lighting, replace broken lamps and provide routine repairs. 1. Temporary lighting shall be based on the following requirements:

a. Rooms or spaces under 250 square feet: Two 100 watt lamps. b. Rooms or spaces over 250 square feet and under 500 square feet: Four

100 watt lamps.



c. Rooms or spaces 500 square feet and over: Two 200 watt lamps for spaces 500 to 1000 square feet, and two 200-watt lamps for every additional 1000 square feet or fraction thereof.

d. Provide sufficient additional fixtures and lamps to insure proper lighting in stairwells, corridors and passage areas.

2. Lamps: The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all lamps, both initial and all required replacements until the date of Substantial Completion.

3. Use of Permanent lighting fixtures. a. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. b. Permanent lighting fixtures which have been used during Construction

shall be thoroughly cleaned by the Electrical Subcontractor. c. Immediately prior to the Architect/Engineer’s inspection for Substantial

Completion the Electrical Sub-contractor is required to replace all lamps, which are broken, burned out or are producing reduced light output.

B. Protective night lighting is required at all times (24 hours a day, seven days a week). General Contractor is required to arrange for adequate outdoor lighting to illuminate staging, stockpiles, trenches, dangerous projections, excavations and similar conditions and as additionally required to protect the safety of workmen, other personnel, and the public and as an aid in the protection against theft and vandalism. 1. Shield lighting to protect overflow beyond Contract limits, protect neighbors

from night light overflow.

1.9 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, TELEPHONE

A. Temporary telephone service: Provide telephone service at time of project mobilization, and pay all costs for installation, maintenance, and removal. The General Contractor shall pay service charges for local calls; toll charges shall be paid by party who places call. Service and equipment required includes the following: 1. For Contractor’s Field Office .

a. Provide one direct line service dedicated for use by the Contractor, Filed-Subcontractors, and personnel engaged in construction.

b. One answering machine or phone service with messaging. c. One (direct) separate line for facsimile (FAX) machine. d. Cellular (mobile) phone service for Contractor’s Superintendent,

continuously maintained until Project Substantial Completion. e. Other instruments at the option of the Contractor, or as additionally

required by Authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Temporary internet service: Provide internet service at time of project mobilization, and pay all costs for installation, maintenance, and removal. The General Contractor shall pay service charges through date of Substantial Completion. 1. For Contractor’s Field Office, General Contractor shall provide and maintain

internet and email service. Internet service shall include e-mail account allowing a minimum of 5mb attachments to ensure exchange of all construction related e-mail to Contractor’s field office.



1.10 TEMPORARY UTILITIES, WATER

A. Temporary water: Contractor is permitted to use existing hose bib(s). Awarding Authority will pay for water necessary for the Work; exercise measures to conserve water. 1. Contractor is responsible for connections to existing water supply, and any

required distribution of temporary water services as required for construction. 2. Protect piping and fittings against freezing.

1.11 TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING

A. General, Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

B. Temporary heat: provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Heating Units: UL Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a

qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. a. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or

salamander-type heating units is prohibited. b. Vent heaters directly to outside air, in areas where concrete is less than

15 days old. 2. In enclosed areas, maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees

Fahrenheit; provide higher temperatures where required by individual specification sections. General Contractor is required to provide enclosures necessary to maintain specified temporary heat.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system. Coordinate with work of Division 23, Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC). Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.

1.12 TEMPORARY VENTILATION AND HUMIDITY CONTROL

A. General: 1. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and

to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.

2. Dissipation of VOC’s: The period after installation shall be sufficient to dissipate odors and elevated concentrations of VOCs. A minimum time period of 72 hours is required except where longer periods of time are specified under individual specification sections.



1.13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. General: Existing facilities shall not be used for field offices and for storage, except as expressly authorized by Owner. 1. Availability: Provide offices ready for occupancy within 15 days after date fixed

in Notice to Proceed. 2. Field offices: Provide furnished, insulated, weathertight, office(s) which shall

be portable or mobile building(s), or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors. a. Securely support trailer on temporary masonry or preservative treated

wood piers and not on trailer wheels. Anchor trailer to prevent overturning due to wind or other causes.

3. Location: The location of the field office(s) and storage areas for equipment and materials shall be as directed by Owner. Submit plans showing field office and storage facilities for equipment and materials for acceptance by the Architect/Engineer. a. Offices and sheds located within the construction area, or within 30 feet

of building lines shall be of noncombustible construction. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.

b. Access to trailer shall conform to Massachusetts Regulation 521 CMR - Architectural Access Board.

4. General: a. Contractor shall provide periodic cleaning and maintenance of field

offices and storage areas. b. Provide air conditioning and heating to maintain a temperature range of

65 to 78 degrees F. c. Provide sufficient lighting for 50 foot candles at desk top level over 100

percent of floor area. d. Excluding computer, computer software and related equipment; all other

non-consumed furnishings and equipment, will be returned to contractor upon project completion.

B. Contractor’s field office(s): Provide habitable office(s) or space, of size to accommodate personnel, include as a minimum the following: 1. Size: For Contractor’s needs and to provide space for project meetings. 2. Furnishings:

a. Conference table of sufficient size with seating to accommodate personnel and anticipated visitors for specified conferences and weekly progress meetings.

b. Racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals and Project Record Documents.

3. Outdoor weather thermometer. 4. Hard-hats for site visitors. 5. Duplex convenience outlets, at least one per wall. 6. Telephone service as specified herein above.



7. Other equipment and furniture as the Contractor deems necessary.

C. Storage and fabrication sheds: Provide as required, sheds, equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved. 1. Subcontractor’s are responsible for their own storage facilities, coordinate

locations.

D. Maintain approach walks to field office and storage/fabrication sheds free of mud, water, and snow.

E. When permanent facilities are enclosed with operable utilities, relocate offices and storage into building, with written agreement of Awarding Authority Owner, and remove temporary buildings.

1.14 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Sanitary facilities: Provide self-contained single-occupant chemical toilet units, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. 1. Existing facilities located in the facility may not be used by the Contractor’s

personnel. 2. Locate sanitary facilities within construction zone. 3. Permanent facilities located in completed work may not be used by the

Contractor’s personnel.

B. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, cleaning compounds and similar materials.

C. Maintain facilities, through-out term of construction, and keep clean, provide covered waste containers for used material.

1.15 CANTEEN SERVICES

A. Canteen vehicles must access the worksite at predetermined times coordinated with the Owner, and are limited to service within the construction site only.

1.16 FIRST AID AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. First aid supplies: Comply with governing regulations.

B. Fire extinguishers: Provide and maintain on site, adequate fire extinguishers UL rated for A-B-C type fires. Provide red-painted plywood standards for each extinguisher. Additionally, provide a dry chemical fire extinguisher at each location where welding, torch cutting and other similar hazardous work is in progress. 1. At welding and heat cutting work: Provide not less than a Multi-purpose dry

chemical type (mono amonium phosphate) fire extinguisher, 20-pound capacity, multi-purpose rated “2A, 120 B:C”.

1.17 CONSTRUCTION AIDS - TEMPORARY HOISTS AND CRANES

A. Hoisting equipment and machinery: Furnish all hoisting equipment, crane services and lift machinery required to perform the Work of this Contract, except that required by Filed-subcontractors. Install, operate and maintain in safe condition.



1. Do not charge applicators and installers for these services during normal working hours.

2. Filed Subcontractors are responsible for their own hoisting equipment, crane services and lift machinery required to perform the Work of their respective trade.

1.18 CONSTRUCTION AIDS - SCAFFOLDING, PLATFORMS, STAGING, CHUTES

A. Provide all ladders, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, chutes, and other mounted or installed construction aids as specified herein and as required to facilitate the Work. Furnish and erect construction aids and maintain in safe condition for the use of all subcontractors, installers and applicators.

B. Furnish and erect scaffolds, staging, and maintain in safe condition, dismantle when no longer required. The General Contractor and Filed Subcontractors shall provide scaffolds, staging, and other similar raised platforms, required to access the Work, per the following guidelines: 1. Scaffolding required for used by Filed Subcontractors, 8 feet in height and

less, shall be furnished, erected, maintained, and dismantled, by the Filed Trade requiring such scaffolding.

2. Scaffolding required for used by Filed Subcontractors, above 8 feet in height shall be furnished, erected, maintained and dismantled by the General Contractor.

3. Scaffolding of any height, required for used by installers and applicators of non-filed trades, shall be furnished, erected, and maintained by the General Contractor.

4. General Contractor is responsible to provide, maintain and remove when no longer required, all tarpaulins and enclosures necessary to cover scaffolding (including that furnished by Filed Subcontractor) to maintain specified temporary heat as specified herein under Article entitled “TEMPORARY WEATHER PROTECTION” from the dates of November 1 to March 31.

5. Scaffolding required for used by Filed Subcontractors shall be furnished, erected, maintained, and dismantled, by the Filed Trade requiring such scaffolding. a. Each Filed Subcontractor is responsible to provide, maintain and remove

at dismantling, all tarpaulins and similar protective measures necessary to cover scaffolding for inclement weather conditions and as additionally required for dust control.

6. Scaffolding of any height, required for used by installers and applicators of non-filed trades, shall be furnished, erected, and maintained by the General Contractor.

C. Ladders, temporary stairs, platforms and railings, shall comply with OSHA guidelines. 1. Provide and maintain temporary stairs until permanent stairs are in place and

functional. When permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary railings and guards. Protect permanent stairs with temporary covers and protective treads.

2. Portable ladders and mobile platforms of all required heights, shall be provided by individual users.



D. Temporary chutes: Provide, erect, and maintain properly supported and covered chutes from openings in exterior walls of each building level in convenient and accessible locations for use of all trades, that will permit direct disposal of rubbish and debris directly into trucks or disposal units. 1. Do not drop or throw any materials, rubbish, or debris from openings in the

exterior walls of the project, or from roof.

1.19 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 foot width driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials.

B. Snow and ice removal: Maintain all vehicular and pedestrian access roads and walkways free from ice and snow during the winter season for the duration of the Project.

C. Towing Services: Make arrangements to have illegally parked and stopped vehicles towed. Post conspicuous warning signs. Obtain approval of signs from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Vehicular Parking: There is no on-site parking available to the Contractor. Existing UMass Lowell parking facilities shall not be used by construction personnel. 1. All construction personnel are required to park off-site. Arrange for off-site

parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 2. Parking on public streets: Limited On-street parking is available. The

Contractor’s personnel are fully responsible to abide by all Municipal Laws and Regulations for on street and public parking.

3. The Owner is not responsible for all costs incurred by the Contractor, Filed-Subcontractors, subcontractors, vendors, and their personnel for parking.

1.20 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct any portion of any street public or private, without obtaining permits therefore from the proper authorities. 1. Provide and pay for police traffic details at anytime that construction takes

place in a public street (right of way). The Contractor is responsible for coordinating, requesting. and paying the prevailing rate of wage for police traffic details directly with the City of Lowell Police Department.

B. Construction parking control: Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, Owner’s operations, or construction operations.

C. Vehicle and Equipment Security: Lock all unattended vehicles including construction machinery and equipment. Do not leave vehicles or equipment unattended accessible to public with the motor running, or with keys easily accessible.

D. Haul routes: Consult with governing authorities and establish public thoroughfares which will be used as haul routes and site access. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.



1. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 2. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to expedite traffic flow and

to minimize interference with normal public traffic.

E. Traffic signals and signs: Provide, operate and maintain temporary equipment, services, and personnel, with traffic control and protective devices, as required to direct and maintain an orderly flow of traffic in all areas under Contractors control, or affected by Contractors operations, including but not limited to haul routes, at site entrances, at on-site access roads, and parking areas during construction. 1. Provide traffic control and directional signs as needed to direct construction

and public traffic. 2. Provide warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto

public roads. 3. Comply with signage and traffic control requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.21 DUST CONTROL

A. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1. Take all necessary measures and provide equipment and materials to

minimize dust from rising and blowing across the site and also to control surface water throughout the operation so that it does not run onto paved ways without being filtered. Control all dust created by construction operations and movement of construction vehicles, both on site and on paved ways.

2. During the progress of the work, maintain the areas of construction activities including sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary. Provide and use calcium chloride for more effective dust control, when deemed necessary by regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner.

1.22 NOISE CONTROL

A. Develop and maintain a noise-abatement program and enforce strict discipline over all personnel to keep noise to a minimum.

B. Execute construction work by methods and by use of equipment which will reduce excess noise. 1. Equip air compressors with silencers, and power equipment with mufflers. 2. Manage vehicular traffic and scheduling to reduce noise

1.23 TEMPORARY WEATHER PROTECTION

A. Protect building interior and all materials and equipment from weather at all times. Where removal of existing roofing, roof sheathing, windows, doors, and other items is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and workmen ready to provide adequate and approve temporary covering of exposed areas. 1. Temporary coverings shall be attended as necessary to insure effectiveness

and to prevent displacement. 2. Contractor shall repair or replace all elements of the building damaged by

failure to properly protect them from the weather to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.



1.24 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ISOLATION PARTITIONS

A. General Criteria: Provide 8’-0” high metal framed gypsum wall board partitions at full perimeter of work areas, to serve as barriers/barricades to separate work areas/zones from public occupied areas and prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas/zones. 1. Comply with OHSA standards and code requirements for erection of isolation

partitions. 2. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel

and the public of the hazard being protected against. 3. Provide special barriers necessary to protect entrances and areas around

building and to prevent persons from coming in contact with material or construction operations.

4. Temporary enclosures shall inhibit dust, debris, and noise transmission. 5. Temporary enclosures shall be erected in manner to provide code mandated

egress from the occupied portions of the building at all times. 6. Provide metal framing for all enclosures.

B. Construction: Metal framing with gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1. Studs, Tracks and Runners: complying to ASTM C 645, minimum 3-5/8 inch

width, 25 gage. Studs installed at not greater than 24 inches on center. 2. Gypsum Board: standard board, complying with ASTM C1396 (Section 5) and

ASTM C36, minimum 1/2-inch thickness. 3. Gypsum Board Finishing: Taped and compounded joints, provide metal corner

bead at transitions of plane, and metal J bead at partition edge perimeter (including tops, bottoms and where abuts dissimilar materials). a. Finish: comply with GA-214 and GA-216: Level 4 where exposed to

public, and Level 3 facing construction area.

C. Door openings within temporary partitions: 1. Size: 6’-0” width by 6’-8” height. 2. Provide lockable double door entrances with pressed metal frames, 1-3/4 inch

thick solid core wood doors, or hollow metal doors. a. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

D. Paint all surfaces (partitions, doors and frames) on both sides. 1. Primer:

a. Doors and Frames: DTM metal primer. b. Partitions: One coat latex primer (compatible with finish paint).

2. Finish Paint (all surfaces): Two coats latex eggshell paint, white color, except as otherwise directed by Architect/Engineer. a. California: “Pacific Eggshell”, Nº. 561. b. Glidden Professional: Ultra-Hide 150 Eggshell Nº. 1412. c. Moore: “SuperSpec Green Eggshell”, 781 Series. d. Pittsburgh:“Speedhide Interior Latex Eggshell”, 6-411 Series.



e. Sherwin-Williams: "Eggshell Enamel No. 274 ".

1.25 TEMPORARY BARRICADES

A. Provide barriers and barricades to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas. 1. Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of barricades,

where required provide lighting, including flashing lights. 2. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel

and the public of the hazard being protected against. 3. Provide special barriers necessary to protect entrances and areas around

building and to prevent persons from coming in contact with material or construction operations.

B. Provide temporary enclosures, as required, for protection of existing facilities and new construction from exposure to weather, other construction operations and similar activities. Where heat is needed and the building envelope is incomplete, provide enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. 1. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

C. Provide temporary roofing as needed to maintain the building water tight.

1.26 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by, the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 1. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, County, and municipal laws

regarding pollution. 2. Prevent pollution of streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens,

calcium chloride, acids, waste products, effluents, chemicals or other harmful substances. Prevent from such substances from entering storm drains and sanitary sewers.

B. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. 1. Excavate and legally dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace

with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.

1.27 FIRE PREVENTION MEASURES

A. Prior to commencement of work at the site, the Owner's Representative, Construction Manager, and General Contractor shall meet with the Local Fire Marshal to plan site and building access in the event of fire. 1. Access paths for heavy fire fighting equipment shall be laid out and

maintained. 2. Free access from streets to fire hydrants and to outside connections for

standpipes, sprinklers or other fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided and maintained.



B. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the prevention of fire during construction. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes. Ascertain and comply with requirements of Project insurance carrier, local fire department and the state fire marshal. 1. Maintain the area within contract limits orderly and clean.

a. Remove combustible rubbish promptly from the site and when required, store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

2. Maintain clear access to exits from within the building. 3. Smoking is not permitted in the facility or adjacent areas.

C. Establish procedures for fire protection for welding, cutting and open torch work, and other potentially hazardous operations. Obtain permission from local authorities having jurisdiction for such work as required by law. Provide special fire extinguishers at welding and torch cutting work. 1. Maintain a fire watch when existing fire protection and warning systems have

been temporarily de-activated. Maintain watch during all working hours for full period of de-activation.

2. The Contractor will assign personnel to inspect all construction areas at the end of each day’s work for fire hazards prior to lock-up.

D. Provide for outside storage of gas tanks, sufficiently clear of any structure. Promptly remove welding and cutting equipment from the building when no longer required. Do not store welding or cutting materials within the building when work is not being performed.

E. Permanent fire protection system may be activated to meet these requirements. Replace fusible link heads and other expended or discharged components at time of Substantial Completion.

1.28 SECURITY MEASURES

A. Protect Work, existing premises and Owner’s operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. Maintain security program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy precludes the need for Contractor security. 1. General contractor is responsible for security of site during construction,

including prevention of illegal trespassing, unauthorized entry, theft and vandalism. All losses and damages which occur are the full responsibility of the General Contractor, who shall bear all costs incurred.

2. Maintain security program throughout construction period until Awarding Authority acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security

B. Provide entry control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project Site and existing

facilities. 2. Contractor shall control entrance of persons and vehicles. Allow entrance

only to authorized persons with proper identification.



3. Maintain log of workmen and visitors, make available to Awarding Authority on request.

4. Coordinate access of Awarding Authority’s personnel to site in coordination, with Awarding Authority’s security forces.

1.29 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND TEMPORARY SIGNAGE

A. General: Signs other than those specified herein are not permitted, except those required by law or expressly authorized by the Awarding Authority . 1. At all times during the project, signage must clearly direct occupants and the

general public in the safe use of the building. Signs must clearly indicate areas of no admittance, and further must clearly define and direct users to building entries, exits, and other important destinations. a. All such interim signage must be painted by a professional sign painter

on 3/4-inch medium density overlay plywood with letters no less than 3 inches in height.

b. Coordinate required signage with Architect/Engineer.

B. Project sign: 1. Provide 8 foot wide by 4 foot high foot project sign of exterior grade MDO

plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with self-adhesive color printed text with reproduction of building rendering. Architect/Engineer will provide signage design. a. Color prints for rendering shall be 3M Scotch print marking film series

8640 or equal, 4 mil thickness, “ControlTac” vinyl film as manufactured by 3M company having a position able pressure activated pigmented adhesive.

b. Overlay protecting film, Scotchprint Film, clear over laminating film, as manufactured by 3M company.

2. List title of project, names of Awarding Authority, Architect/Engineer, professional sub-consultants, Contractor, and major Filed-subcontractors.

3. Erect on site at location established by Architect/Engineer.

C. Signage at perimeter of construction site: Provide clear and visible warning signage with appropriate language such as: “Prohibited Access – Hard Hat Only – No Admittance – Authorized Personnel Only”.

1.30 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, CONTROLS, AND FACILITIES

A. Remove temporary materials and construction prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Remove underground work and compacted materials to a depth of 2 feet; fill and grade site as specified.

C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original conditions. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

D. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.





End of Section


TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - page 1 of 5

Section 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General requirements for temporary tree and plant protection. 1. All Trees along Aiken Street are to remain and must be protected. It is

expected that every effort will be made to eliminate construction damage to the existing trees on site. a. Clearing and grubbing work, including removal of designated trees,

shrubs and other vegetation is specified within individual Contract Packages.

B. Work required for tree and plant protection includes, without limitation: 1. Protection of trees and their root structures. 2. Selective trimming and pruning of trees that are indicated to remain, but

interfere with, or are in close proximity to construction. All tree work shall be performed under the direction of a qualified and licensed Arborist.

3. Fertilization and aeration of existing trees.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Arborist: Engage a qualified Arborist licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, to perform the following work: 1. Remove branches from trees, which are to remain, if required to clear new

construction. 2. Recommend procedures to compensate for loss of roots (if any) and perform

initial pruning of branches and stimulation of root growth where removed to accommodate new construction.

3. Perform tree repair work for damage incurred by new construction. 4. Remove dead wood, crossing branches and any other tree trimming on trees

which are to remain, as required by Architect/Engineer. 5. Arborist shall assist and advise the General Contractor , and to provide

monthly inspections of the site for compliance with the Contact Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING

A. Prior to start of on-site demolition or construction, the General Contractor shall arrange a conference on the site with the Owner, the Owner’s Project Manager, and a Certified Arborist employed by the General Contractor to identify trees to be protected.

1.4 GENERAL TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in individual Contract Packages, in addition to those specified herein.



B. Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. 1. Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays, guys, or other fastenings. 2. Do not park vehicles within areas of the tee drip lines, or where damage to

trees may result. 3. Do not stockpile fill, store equipment or building supplies within tree drip lines,

or within 5 feet of shrubs. 4. Do not damage plants and trees by pumping of water operations. 5. Do not operate machinery within tree drip lines, which may damage trees by

exhaust or heat.

C. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.

D. Protect soil from contamination with toxic materials that are detrimental to plant growth. 1. Dumping and disposal of waste (paint, oil, fuel) is prohibited around all trees

and shrubs, and is prohibited on-site in general. 2. Run-off from building materials, vehicle cleaning, petroleum products, lime,

mortar, calcium chloride, and similar materials, are to be eliminated in areas of tree and shrub root systems.

3. Use of herbicides or soil sterilants is prohibited.

E. When lowering grade, scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip lines of trees to be saved, use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune exposed roots in accordance with requirements specified herein.

F. Use caution when installing plants or other materials within tree protection zones. Grubbing and removal of conflicting items must be done with caution and in the least disruptive manner to the existing tree roots. This may include hand grubbing and girdling.

G. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. 1. Plant life or landscape feature scarred or damaged by the Contractor's

equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the expense of the General Contractor .

2. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status. a. The Architect/Engineer will decide whether damaged trees shall be

treated, or be removed and replaced.



1.5 TREE PROTECTION BARRICADES/FENCING

A. Provide sturdy, temporary barriers erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. Maintain barricades in good conditions during the entire period of construction work on site.

B. Install temporary tree protection barrier fencing continuously around the drip line perimeter of the protected trees.

C. Fencing: Provide wire bound wood-roll orange barrier plastic fencing 4 feet high minimum, with 3/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch wide pickets, spaced approximately 2 feet apart bound together with at least 13 gage galvanized steel wire. 1. Existing trees which are to remain and which may, in the Architect's opinion,

be damaged by the Contractor's equipment and operations shall be additionally protected by chain link fencing. Fencing shall be approximately 8 feet by 8 feet, centered on the tree trunk, to a height of approximately 6 feet.

1.6 TREE ROOT PROTECTION

A. The General Contractor shall assume that the majority of tree roots extend to the tree dripline or edge of canopy. In certain instances, demolition may need to occur within this zone.

B. Provide tree protection fencing, locate at the tree's dripline, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Within the branch spread of trees, do not excavate or fill more than two inches

unless directed to do so by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during

construction operations. 3. Digging by backhoe at tree roots under canopy is not permitted until a

trencher has been through first and grounds for assessed by the arborist for tree damage.

4. Roots shall be first cut by a trencher and roots over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be hand trimmed.

5. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible.

C. The Arborist shall evaluate trees affected by demolition/construction activities. 1. Trees having roots that are over 20 percent affected, as determined by a

certified arborist and reviewed by the Owner’s Representative, require the following: a. Trees shall be deep root watered during the growing season as much as

required (at least once). b. Trees shall be deep root fertilized with a slow release fertilizer between

November and April under the direction of a certified arborist. c. Perform Additional remedial insect or disease control measures as may

be required by the Arborist.



2. Trees having roots that are over 30 percent affected as determined by a certified arborist and reviewed by the Owner’s Representative, require the following: a. Trees shall be deep root watered during the growing season as much as

required (at least once). b. Trees shall be deep root fertilized with a slow release fertilizer between

November and April under the direction of a certified arborist. c. Entire remaining rood zone shall be covered with aged woodchips to a

minimum depth of 6 inches. d. Perform Additional remedial insect or disease control measures as may

be required by the Arborist.

D. Tree roots that are exposed during the growing season for more than two weeks shall be covered with filter fabric staked securely or covered with aged woodchips to a minimum depth of 3 inches.

1.7 TREE PRUNING

A. Pruning of existing trees is prohibited without express written approval from the Owner’s Representative.

B. Tree pruning, performed by the designated Arborist, includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Remove all dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruised branches. 2. Perform selective pruning as necessary to improve the appearance of each

tree and to allow additional light to reach lawn areas. 3. Pruning work applies to the full height of trees. 4. Trees damaged during construction by wind or other causes shall be pruned

initially in accordance with the Class II National Arborist Association Standards to preserve the natural character of the plant.

5. Trees with a loss of root systems over 20% due to construction operations shall be pruned. In addition to Class II pruning, the tree canopy shall be pruned in proportion to the amount of root zone lost to the demolition operations. All pruning shall include collar cuts. No flush cuts are permitted.

C. All tree pruning work must be approved by the Owner’s Representative before final payment is made.

D. Any damage done to existing tree crowns or root systems, including compensatory pruning for root loss, shall be repaired immediately by an approved tree surgeon under observation by the Owner’s Representative at no cost to the Owner.

E. Any accidental injuries to the bark, trunk and branches shall be repaired immediately by pruning and trace cutting with a clean, sharp knife, as required.

F. Pruning: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and as specified herein, and in individual Contract Packages. 1. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 2. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site at a recycling center.



1.8 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACMENT

A. The General Contractor is liable for damage to protected trees, including remedial measures required to treat broken limbs, damaged trees or roots, and for unauthorized removal of existing trees or plant material.

B. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.

C. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations that arborist determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced. If trees

which need to be replaced are over 6 inches in caliper measurement (taken 12 inches above grade), provide new trees having 6 inches caliper size, and of species selected by the Owner’s designated landscaping consultant.



End of Section



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - page 1 of 8

Section 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Definition of Terms

B. Basic product requirements.

C. General environmental requirements for products.

D. Owner furnished products.

E. Product delivery and handling requirements.

F. Product storage and protection requirements.


A. Section 01 25 13 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 1. Product options. 2. Product substitution procedures.

1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. “Products” is defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems used in the Work. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for re-use.

B. "Materials" are products that are shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

D. “Fasteners” include all products required for mechanical connections and include, but are not limited to: nails, screws, bolts, expansion bolts, chemical bolts, epoxy anchors, pins, powder-actuated devices, and similar fasteners, anchors, and connections.

E. Definitions in this article are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in Contract Documents, including "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction", and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1.4 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.



1. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source.

C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

D. When the Contractor has the option of selecting two or more products, ensure that products selected shall be compatible with products previously installed or approved.

E. Provide all products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

F. Galvanic Corrosion: Install materials in manner which will effectively isolate dissimilar metals which may potential for galvanic corrosion. Use non-absorptive dielectric material, isolation coatings, or other protective isolator approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. For non-humidity controlled environments, and all building shell components,

the following applies: a. For all fasteners, anchors, and connections, provide types of metal to

prevent galvanic corrosion. Small anodic areas (fasteners) relative to the cathodic areas (field) should be avoided. Utilize same metal or more noble metals (cathodic) for fasteners and bolts. 1) Apply corrosion-inhibiting pastes or compounds under heads of

screws or bolts inserted into dissimilar metal surfaces whether or not the fasteners had been previously plated.

b. Use non-absorptive dielectric material, isolation coatings, or other protective isolator approved by Architect/Engineer.

c. Seal faying edges to preclude the entrance of liquids.

G. Fasteners, Anchors, and Connections: Provide all fasteners, anchors, and connections needed to safely, securely, and appropriately secure all Work permanently in place. 1. General: The Contractor is solely responsible for the capacity, suitability,

adequacy, and safety of all welded, fastened and anchored connections. a. Comply with applicable code requirements regarding fastener selection

and installation. b. Provide at least two fasteners for each individual item being fastened. c. Utilize fastener manufacturer’s published load tables for working loads to

assist in determining fastener size and space. Do not use ultimate load capacity in determining fastener selections.

d. Provide a minimum safety factor of 4. e. Select and utilize fasteners having minimum galvanic corrosion factor

(refer to above Paragraph F.) f. Hydrogen embrittlement prevention:



1) Do not use high-strength and low-alloy fasteners which have been subjected to an acid pre-treatment (because they can become brittle and fail), utilize instead equivalent capacity and size bi-metal, stainless steel or high strength aluminum fasteners, as appropriate to the conditions and materials where being used.

2) Utilize low-hydrogen electrodes for welding high-strength steels to prevent hydrogen embrittlement.

2. To permit the Contractor control over means and methods, some fastener conditions may not be fully defined in the Contract Documents. In particular, individual specification sections that require delegated independent engineering. In such instances the Contractor is fully responsible to determine method of fastening appropriate for each condition. The Contractor shall take into consideration substrate material(s) and product(s) being fastened, live and dead loading, and both atmospheric and visual exposure considerations. Contractor is responsible to determine fastener type, material, finish, size, diameter, length and spacing.

3. Torque structural fasteners as recommended by fastener manufacturer, or as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

H. Permanent Labels and Nameplates: 1. Restrictions:

a. Do not provide exposed-to-view labels, nameplates, or trademarks which are not required by code, or regulations.

b. Do not expose manufacturers, suppliers, or installer's name, logo, or trade names on normally visible surfaces.

c. Do not provide labels, nameplates or trademarks when individual specification sections specifically exclude them.

d. All exposed-to-view advertising and name-brand labels shall be fully removed without damage to substrate finish.

2. Location for required labels: Required labels, approval plates and stamps shall be located on a concealed surface, or where required for observation after installation on accessible non-conspicuous surface.

3. Data Plates: Provide permanent data plate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. a. Data Plate Information: Include manufacturer, model, serial number, date

of manufacture, capacity, ratings, power requirements, and all other similar essential data.

b. Locate data plates on easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces.

1.5 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS

A. General: Prohibit the use of or incorporation into the work of materials which contain toxic, hazardous and harmful materials. 1. Hazardous materials: Defined as pesticides, biocides, and carcinogens as

listed by recognized authorities, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) or regulated under OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200.



2. Harmful materials: Defined as materials which contain the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances; or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural, or historical purposes.

3. Owner restricted materials: Defined as all products to which the Owner has a reasonable objection because of its content, composition, properties, or characteristics.

B. Vapors, Gases, Fumes, Odors: 1. General: Comply with all state and federal VOC requirements. Where ever

possible use non-VOC materials. a. Limit use of products to the greatest extent possible which have "off-

gassing", fumes, flammability, and other harmful characteristics. 1) Prohibit use of products which contain substances that contribute

significantly to the production of photochemical smog, tropospheric ozone, or poor indoor-air quality.

b. Limit use of ozone-depleting compounds to the greatest extent possible. An ozone-depleting compound is any compound with an ozone-depletion potential greater than 0.01 (CFC 11 = 1).

c. Use organic and biodegradable cleaners to the greatest extent possible. 2. Do not install, use for installation, and use for cleaning those materials which

may produce objectionable (to Owner and public) vapors, gases, fumes, odors, or similar conditions.

3. Do not install or use products which may have possible chemical or biological reactions with other on-site materials.

C. Toxicity of prefabricated wood products (composite wood and agrifiber products): Products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. 1. Laminating adhesives used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied composite

wood and agrifiber assemblies shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

D. Adhesives: Provide adhesives approved by the manufacturers of the products being adhered which are Low-VOC or non-VOC, non-flammable, water-proof after cured, odor free. 1. Comply with Commonwealth of Massachusetts Adhesives and Sealants

Regulations 310 CMR 7.18 (30). 1) Outdoor floor covering adhesives 250 2) Non-membrane Roof Installation

and Repair Adhesive 300 3) Single-ply Roof Membrane Roof Installation

and Repair Adhesive 250 4) Thin-Metal Laminating 780 5) Waterproof Resorcinol Glue 170 6) Flexible Vinyl 250 7) Rubber 250 8) Other Substrates 250

b. Adhesive Primers VOC Limit [g/L less water]



1) Plastic Cement Welding 650 2) Single-ply Roof Membrane 250 3) Traffic Marking Tape 150 4) Other 250

E. Sealants: Provide products that comply with specified VOC limits. Comply with Commonwealth of Massachusetts Adhesives and Sealants Regulations 310 CMR 7.18 (30). Refer to Section 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS, and as specified herein, for additional requirements. 1. Only use sealants and primers that comply with the following limits for VOC

content: a. Sealants VOC Limit [g/L less water]

1) Architectural 250 2) Single-Ply Roof Membrane 450 3) Non-membrane Roof 300 4) Roadway 250 5) Marine Deck 760 6) Other 420

a. Sealant Primers VOC Limit [g/L less water] 1) Architectural Non Porous 250 2) Architectural Porous 775 3) Marine Deck 760 4) Other 750

F. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) {formerly Material Safety Data Sheets, MSDS: Obtain and maintain on-site record data sheets for each product brought onto the Site. 1. Maintain an organized file of Material Safety Data Sheets at the job-site for

quick reference. 2. Furnish SDS for all finishes, paints, coatings, curing compounds, sealers,

adhesives, mastics, waterproofing, dampproofing, sealants, cleaning chemicals, carpets, upholstery, fabrics and all similar products.

G. Cleaning and maintenance products: 1. Provide data on manufacturers’ recommended maintenance, cleaning,

refinishing and disposal procedures for materials and products utilized. These procedures are for final Contractor cleaning of the project prior to substantial completion and for provided materials and products as required by the specific specification sections. a. Where chemical products are recommended for these procedures,

provide documentation to indicate that no component present in the cleaning product at more than 1% of the total mass of the cleaning product is a carcinogen or reproductive toxicant as defined in the lists in this specification section.

b. For purposes of reporting, identification of product VOC contents shall not be limited to those regulated.

2. Avoid cleaning products containing alpha-pinene, d-limonene or other unsaturated carbon double bond alkenes due to chemical reactions with



ozone to form aldehydes, acidic aerosols, and ultra fine particulate matter in indoor air.

H. Establish written Contractor’s safety and emergency response procedures for safety precautions, accidents, emergency conditions, and clean-up methods.

1.6 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner Furnished Products: As provided in the General Conditions, the Owner will provide products by others under a separate agreements. 1. Owner’s responsibilities regarding Owner furnished products:

a. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor.

b. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. c. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. d. Submit claims for transportation damage, and replace damaged,

defective, or deficient items. e. Arrange for manufacturers’ warranties, inspections, and service

agreements. 2. Contractor’s responsibilities regarding Owner furnished products:

a. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor.

b. Handle, store, and provide temporary protection. c. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. d. Provide protection of installed work. e. When not installed under this Contract, the Contractor shall coordinate

Owner installed work with interfacing work of this Contract. The Contractor shall provide temporary protection and final cleaning of Owner installed products, except as directed otherwise.

3. Items noted in Drawings as “Not in Contract” or “N.I.C.”, identify work or products which either exist, or are furnished by Owner; such work requires coordination with the Work of this Contract and may even require installation by this Contractor.

B. The Contractor has coordinating responsibility for Testing laboratory services as identified under Section 01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL and as specified under individual specification sections.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified in individual specification sections.

B. Avoid use of virgin wood pallets whenever possible. It is preferable that pallets be manufactured from recycled wood and recycled plastic. Labeling of plastics used for packaging: Plastic is marked by manufacturers for type of plastic material in accordance with the Society of Plastic resin codes. Maintain marks, or sort by manufacturer’s resin codes for recycling purposes. 1. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).



2. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE). 3. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC). 4. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE). 5. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP). 6. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS). 7. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made

with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.

C. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays in installation of products, to minimize long-term storage, to prevent overcrowding of construction . Coordinate with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses.

D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle and store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified in individual specification sections. 1. Provide all necessary equipment and personnel to store products by methods

to prevent soiling, disfigurement and damage. 2. Store and protect products with seals and labels intact and legible.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. 1. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering.

Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.

D. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

E. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

F. Store heavy materials in locations and in a manner that will not damage or disfigure existing, or new construction.

1.9 MOLD PROTECTION OF PRODUCTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION

A. General:



1. Keep building materials dry to prevent the growth of mold and bacteria, including, but not limited to: gypsum wallboard, wood, porous insulation, paper, and fabric.

2. Cover materials to prevent rain damage, and if resting on the ground, use spacers to allow air to circulate between the ground and the materials.

3. Thoroughly dry all water damaged materials within 24 hours from time of moisture damage. Materials that have been damp or wet for more than 24 hours shall not be incorporated into the Work. a. Review moisture damaged materials for signs of mold and mildew,

including any with moisture stains, from the site and properly dispose of them.

b. Replace water damaged and moldy materials with new, undamaged materials.




EXECUTION 01 73 00 - page 1 of 8

Section 01 73 00 EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Examination of existing conditions and acceptance of conditions.

B. Project preparation.

C. Execution of the Work.

D. Cleaning.

E. Protecting installed work.


A. Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING: Administrative and procedure requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Section 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Demolition of selected portions of the building for new construction.

1.3 EXAMINATION OF AND ACCEPTANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor, its subcontractors and Filed-Subcontractors shall inform themselves of existing conditions before submitting his bid, and shall be fully responsible for carrying out all work required to completely and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions inconsistent with those assumed, except those conditions described in the General Conditions.

B. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing damage to structure surfaces, equipment, or to surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Architect/Engineer prior to starting work.

1.4 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT ELEMENTS

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where called for in individual specification Sections.

B. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction and demolition operations. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products and occupied areas.

C. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. Coordinate with requirements under individual specification sections.



D. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

E. Protect all existing landscape areas [not indicated to be cleared]. Do not deface, injure, or destroy trees or other plant life. Do not remove or cut trees or other plant life, without authorization from the Owner. Do not attach any anchorages, ropes, cables or guys to any trees scheduled to remain. 1. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

F. Protect non-owned vehicles, stored materials, site and structures from damage.

G. Refer to respective Sections for other particular protection requirements.

1.5 PROTECTION OF INTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS

A. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential for areas scheduled to receive concrete stains and sealers, specified under Division 3. 1. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of in-

place concrete. 2. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their

scope of work, drop cloths will be placed under vehicles at all times. 3. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slabs. 4. Steel will not be placed on interior slabs to avoid rust staining.

1.6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION, APPLICATION AND ERECTION

A. Inspection of conditions: The Installer of each component shall inspect the substrate and conditions under which Work is performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Resource Efficiency of Materials: 1. Use construction practices such as material reduction and dimensional

planning that maximize efficient use of resources and materials. a. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting installation.

2. Provide materials that utilize recycled content to maximum degree possible without being detrimental to product performance or indoor air quality.

3. Where possible and feasible, provide for non-destructive removal and re-use of materials after their service life in this building.

C. Manufacturer's instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that they are more stringent than requirements in Contract Documents.

D. Inspect material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation Reject damaged and defective items.

E. Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best results. Isolate each part from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.



F. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests, to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

G. Limiting exposures: Supervise operations to ensure that no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful or deleterious exposure. 1. Such exposures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Excessive static or dynamic loading. b. Excessive internal or external pressures. c. Excessive weathering. d. Excessively high or low temperatures or humidity. e. Air contamination or pollution. f. Water or ice. g. Chemicals or solvents. h. Heavy traffic, soiling, staining and corrosion. i. Rodent and insect infestation. j. Unusual wear or other misuse. k. Contact between incompatible materials. l. Theft or vandalism.

H. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element. Secure each construction element true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.

I. Visual effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints to obtain the best effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect/Engineer for decision.

J. Mounting heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, review heights with Architect/Engineer, prior to commencement of Work.

K. Cleaning and protection: During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

L. Clean and maintain completed construction as often as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

1.7 PROGRESS CLEANING AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. General: Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Maintain work and surrounding areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish; remove from site on a on-going basis through-out the term of construction. 1. Adjacent Areas: Keep adjacent areas, neighboring properties, public ways,

and all nearby areas clean and free of construction debris and dirt including wind blown debris.



2. Filed Sub-bid Subcontractors are responsible for clean-up and removal of their own rubbish, debris, shipping materials and waste materials through-out the term of their work.

3. General Contractor shall furnish dumpsters and provide general site cleaning services, except as explicitly specified otherwise under individual Sections of the Specifications.

B. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site. The General Contractor shall bear all costs, including fees resulting from such disposal.

C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in

storm or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 4. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction including, without

limitation, requirements related to fire prevention, rodents, pests, vermin, waste storage, waste trucking, waste removal, waste disposal, street cleaning, truck tire cleaning, and other requirements.

D. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

E. Maintain project in accordance with all local, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and Federal Regulatory Requirements.

F. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.

G. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

H. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces,

and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 2. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and

continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

I. Use only those materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.

J. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned.

K. Execute cleaning to ensure that the buildings, the sites, and adjacent properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

L. Provide on-site containers (dumpsters) for collection and containment of, waste materials, debris and rubbish.



M. General Contractor shall provide on-site containers (dumpsters) for collection and containment of, waste materials, debris and rubbish. 1. Trash Barrels and Containers: Use containers with tightly fitting lids. Use only

steel containers and lids when there is any evidence of rodent or pest activity. 2. Returnables: Provide special, labeled containers for deposit returnables such

as soda cans.

N. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at least once weekly, and dispose off-site. Comply with NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste.

O. Handle material in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw materials from heights.

P. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not damage surrounding surfaces.

1.8 SITE MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition, free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 1. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public

streets and Owner’s parking areas and access.

B. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction. 1. If any street or private way shall be rendered unsafe by the Contractors

operations, the Contractor shall make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as shall be acceptable to the governing authority.

2. Promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition.

1.9 FINAL CLEANING

A. Scheduling: Perform final cleaning immediately prior to the Architect/Engineer’s review of the project for issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Re-clean all surfaces, materials and products of the Work immediately prior to

Owner’s occupancy of the Project. a. Should the Owner occupy any portion of the Work prior to completion of

the Contract, the responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be in accordance with the General Conditions.

B. Qualifications: Commercial cleaning firm, with a minimum of 3 years experience specializing in the post-construction cleaning of facilities.

C. Protection: During the operation of final cleaning, protect surrounding materials and finishes against undue damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all products and surfaces which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match original profiles and finishes. Materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work in conformance with the Contract Documents.

D. General cleaning requirements:



1. Remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste.

2. Remove all advertising matter and temporary instructional material from exposed surfaces throughout.

3. Use only methods and cleaning materials which are compatible with and as recommended by the manufacturer of the material being cleaned.

4. Finished surfaces: Remove paint smears, spots, marks, dirt, mud and dust and similar disfigurement created by the Work, from all exposed to view existing or new interior and exterior finished surfaces.

5. Polished surfaces: Apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished.

6. Cleaning Materials: Only non-hazardous cleaning materials shall be used in the final cleanup.

E. Exterior building surfaces: 1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste

materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. 3. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the

exterior of the structure. 4. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the

Architect/Engineer may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Concrete: Clean exposed concrete free of all foreign matter. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, further cleaning of specific areas is required, they shall be scrubbed with water or other cleaning agents. Acid cleaners shall not be used, except as may otherwise specifically permitted in the trade sections.

F. Bright metal: Clean metal surfaces, hardware, fixtures, appliances, equipment, and similar items free of all foreign matter. As required, lightly scrub specific stains with clean water, mild soap, and soft rags, thoroughly rinsed and wiped with clean, soft white rags. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

G. Glass: Replace broken, chipped and defective glass. Remove from glass: stains, spots, marks, paint smears; dirt and foreign materials. Clean and polish both surfaces of all interior and exterior glass. Clean and polish mirrors.

H. Hardware: Clean and polish finished hardware, remove marks, stains, scratches and blemishes.

I. Site: Sweep exterior paved surfaces broom clean; rake clean unpaved surfaces.

J. Equipment: Thoroughly clean all items of electrical equipment; remove excess oils and grease from exposed surfaces. 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if ventilating units were

operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils, if units were operated without filters during

construction.



1.10 PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect all built, and in-place Work. In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall protect all installed work from subsequent damage or deterioration from construction activities, and atmospheric damage until Owner’s Substantial Completion and occupancy precludes the need for protection activities. No attempt is made in this Section to list all elements requiring protection or to describe how each element will be protected. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine for itself the scope and nature of protection required. 1. Protection of some products/building elements may be required to remain in

place for a large portion duration of the project. As such, materials should be installed to provide adequate protection throughout the full extent of construction activities. Repair or reinstall protection throughout the duration of construction as required.

B. Finish Products: Some finishes may need to be physically isolated from construction operations by means of protective barriers and coverings. 1. General: After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage

due to traffic and construction operations. Replace protective coverings which may become wet, torn, or ineffective. Remove coverings when no longer needed.

2. Doors, door frames and hardware: Protect from damage due to traffic and construction operations.

3. Floor and Finished Surfaces Protection: Protect against construction traffic, rolling loads, static loads, damage from material movement and storage, or similar causes of damage.

4. Walls: Protect from impact, dents, marks, water damage, and similar damage. 5. Glass: Protect from damage including etching and staining. Keep glass clean. 6. Protect products sensitive to water damage from becoming wet. 7. Protect products sensitive to ultra-violet exposure and atmospheric exposure

by limiting exposure to within limits recommended by respective product manufacturer.

8. Protect products from biological growth, molds and mildew. 9. Protect products from rodents and other animals, birds and insect damage.

C. Roofing and waterproofing systems: Protect and isolate from traffic and construction operations. Protect from chemicals. Work and traffic directly upon roofing and waterproofing is prohibited, provide temporary walkways and platforms.

D. General Protection from chemicals: 1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical

cleaners selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use covering materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

2. Do not clean surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces.



3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off-site. 4. Dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner

that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.



End of Section


CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - page 1 of 6

Section 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Examination of existing conditions and acceptance of conditions.

B. Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill as required to complete the Work. General Contractor is responsible for all cutting and patching work, including but not limited to: 1. Perform all cutting, altering, patching, and fitting of the Work (new and

existing) as necessary for the Work and the existing improvements. Fully integrate with existing and new construction, all cutting, alterations and patching, to present the visual appearance of an entire, completed, and unified project. a. Make all products and their components of the work fit together properly.

2. Provide openings in elements of the Work, and the patching of same, for penetrations required by all trades, including but not limited to mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical work. a. Individual Filed Subcontractors are responsible for designated types of

coring and drilling penetrations for piping, conduit, ducts and other penetrations as defined elsewhere in this Section.

3. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work; 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents or as otherwise determined to be defective. 5. Patch and match all surfaces and products disturbed or damaged by the

Work. 6. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.


A. Section 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: Demolition of selected portions of the building for new construction.

B. Individual product specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching of not-exposed-to-view materials incidental to work of

the Section. 2. Core drilling (up to 8 inches in diameter) of interior building components,

incidental to work of individual Sections. 3. Cutting and Patching work of particular exposed-to-view finish work,

performed by trades as specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written proposals to perform cutting and patching under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Describe cutting and patching procedures in advance of the time cutting and patching.



1. Submit a written request when cutting work affects the following: a. Structural integrity of any element in the project. b. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. c. Integrity of any fire suppression, fire alarm, or life safety system. d. Interruption or disturbance of utilities service. List utilities that will be

relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

e. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements and systems. f. Aesthetic and visual qualities of exposed-to-view elements. g. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational

elements. h. Work of Owner or work performed under separate Contract. i. Owners on-going operations or schedule.

2. Include in the request: a. Identification of project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Alternatives to cutting and patching. e. Scope of proposed cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. f. List of tradespeople who will execute the work. g. Description of products to be used. h. Extent of refinishing and cleaning to be performed. i. Effect on work by Owner or work performed under separate Contract,

and written permission of affected party. j. Date and time cutting and patching is scheduled to be executed. k. Cost proposal, when applicable. l. Written permission of separate contractor(s) whose work will be affected.

3. Review by the Architect/Engineer does not waive the Architect/Engineer's right to later require complete removal and replacement of Work found to be unsatisfactory.

4. Should conditions of Work or the schedule indicate a change of products from original installation, Contractor shall submit a request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 25 13 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES.


A. Only tradespersons skilled and experienced in cutting and patching shall perform such Work.

B. In performing Work which requires cutting, fixing, or patching, Contractor and subcontractors shall utilize best efforts to protect and preserve the visual appearance and aesthetics of the Project to the reasonable satisfaction of both Owner and Architect/Engineer.



1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General performance requirements: Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

B. Structural elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce the load-carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. Always obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements. 1. Do not drill through structural beams, slabs or columns. Core drilling through

concrete block walls and stair platforms must be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.

C. Exposed elements: 1. Employ original installer of new construction to perform cutting and patching

for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

2. Employ an appropriate tradesperson to perform cutting and patching of existing weather-exposed and moisture-resistant construction, and exposed-to-view surfaces.

D. Penetrating elements: Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated materials in accordance to applicable codes and regulations, and compatible to surrounding construction.

E. Visual requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect/Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. General: Restore work with new products in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract Documents. 2. Engage a firm recognized and experienced in the trade or specialty operation

required to cut and patch the exposed-to-view work. 3. Engage a firm recognized and experienced in firestopping for patching of

existing firestopping, smoke seals and firesafing in compliance with applicable codes and as additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements of Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING.

F. Operational and safety limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety components in a manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended, or would increase maintenance, or decrease operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and

patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment.



b. Fire resistance rated barriers and smoke barriers. c. Fire protection systems. d. Control systems. e. Communication systems. f. Electrical wiring systems.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void existing applicable warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Patching Materials: Use patching materials identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of the existing materials. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. 1. All materials used shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer for consistency

with the existing surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Pre-bid examination: General Contractor and Filed Subcontractors shall inform themselves of existing conditions before submitting bids, and are fully responsible for carrying out all work required to completely and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions which are inconsistent with those assumed, except for fully concealed conditions.

B. Examination - General: Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: 1. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. 2. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 3. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions. 4. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by

uncovering work.



3.3 GENERAL CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Performance: Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive repairs, patching, and finishing.

B. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete the work. 1. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not

permitted without prior approval, from Architect/Engineer 2. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. 3. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 4. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 5. Remove samples of installed work for testing, when requested. 6. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical

work.

C. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing

or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 31 - EARTHWORK Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling.

5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.

3.4 FINISHING OF PATCHED AREAS:

A. General: Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break; for assemblies, refinish entire unit. 1. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible, showing

no evidence of patching and refinishing. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction Comply with specified tolerances. a. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling or floor construction,

completely seal voids with fire rated materials in accordance to applicable codes and regulations, and compatible to surrounding construction.



b. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Provide vapor and air seal when penetrating existing vapor and air seals.

c. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, extend final paint coat over

entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. Extend re-painting to entire surface plane up to where plane changes direction.

3. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

3.5 CORING AND DRILLING

A. Coring and Drilling of holes incidental to work of individual sections shall be performed by the trade requiring the penetration, except as follows: 1. Coring and Drilling of holes greater than 8 inches in diameter in concrete

decks and slabs. 2. Coring and drilling requiring patching of the following existing surfaces shall

be performed by the General Contractor with patching performed by the appropriate trade or subcontractor.

3. The General Contractor is responsible for performing core drilling in wall and roof surfaces leading to, or from, the outside of the Building.

4. The General Contractor is responsible for coordination of all coring and drilling and resultant patches necessary for the completion of this Contract and for the quality and appearance of all patch Work in exposed-to-view finished materials.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning patched areas: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and similar items.

End of Section


STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 75 00 - page 1 of 2

Section 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Operation, maintenance, and service.

1.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. General: Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1. Contractor is advised that testing and balancing agents may be required

during commissioning activities or as may be additionally directed by Architect/Engineer.

B. Contractor will employ services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing. Submit to Owner at least three qualified testing firms for Owner’s review and acceptance.

C. Filed-subcontractors under Division 21 – Fire Suppression, Division 22 – Plumbing and are responsible for primary system testing and balancing as specified under their respective Sections. General Contractor will be required to coordinate these services.

D. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 AIR QUALITY TESTING

A. Air quality testing: The Owner reserves the right to employ the services of an independent testing agency to perform air quality testing. Testing will occur prior to Contractor’s request for inspection for Substantial Completion. The intent of testing is to certify that the building is “Clear” of airborne contaminants.

1.4 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, AND SERVICE

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner 7 days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.


STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 75 00 - page 2 of 2

F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractors’ personnel in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.



End of Section


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - page 1 of 5

Section 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Closeout of incomplete work (punch list) requirements.

B. Closeout procedures.

C. Conferences occurring after Substantial Completion.


A. Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Requirements for project record documents.

B. Section 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES: Administrative and procedural requirements for warranties, guarantees and bonds.

1.3 PUNCH LIST REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

A. Definitions: 1. Contractor’s Punch List: Complete list of incomplete and incorrect Work

prepared by the Contractor prior to request of Architect/Engineer’s inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. As a minimum the List shall include the following information for each work item: a. Location identification organized by Building, Area, Room Number, or

combination thereof as appropriate to project. b. Clear identification of each incomplete work item, including all

subcontractor’s work. c. Estimated value of each incomplete work item. d. A short statement of why work is not complete. e. Identify subcontract responsibility, as appropriate to each item.

2. Architect/Engineer’s Punch List: A list of incomplete and incorrect Work prepared by the Architect/Engineer, which modifies the Contractor’s Punch List, following review and acceptance of the Contractor’s Punch List.

B. Pre-Closeout requirements: Prior to requesting initial Architect/Engineer’s inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion, submit to the Architect/Engineer a full and complete list of all incomplete work items (Contractor’s Punch List).

C. Punch list procedures at Substantial Completion: 1. Architect/Engineer will review submitted Contractor’s Punch List and

determine whether it is suitable to proceed with the Substantial Completion Process. a. If the Architect/Engineer determines that the amount of completed work

is insufficient to be considered for Substantial Completion, the



Architect/Engineer will not proceed with the Punch List process until sufficient completion of the Project is achieved.

b. The Architect/Engineer will review the Contractor’s Punch List and if the Architect/Engineer determines that it does not reflect proper identification of the incomplete and incorrect work, he/she will request a revision and resubmission of the Contractor’s Punch List.

c. If the Architect/Engineer determines that the amount of work indicated on the Contractor’s Punch List is excessive, the Architect/Engineer will suspend its review until the scope of work identified in the Contractor’s Punch List is reduced to a level satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer.

d. When the Architect/Engineer reviews and accepts the Contractor’s Punch List as being an accurate reflection of incomplete and incorrect work; the Architect/Engineer will prepare and issue to the Contractor the “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List”. 1) The “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” will be based on the

Contractor’s Punch List with modifications and additions as may be required.

2) The “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” includes work which must be completed and corrected prior to final completion.

2. Upon receipt of the “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List”, the Contractor shall immediately distribute the list to all subcontractors.

D. Completion of Punch List Work: Make reasonable efforts to ensure that all “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” items are completed or corrected within 14 calendar days from the date of the Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” or within the Contract Time, whichever comes first.

E. Architect/Engineer’s Final Inspection and review of Punch List Work: 1. After Contractor certification that all Punch List Work has been properly

completed the Architect/Engineer will then perform the Final Inspection. a. Incomplete Items: If the Architect/Engineer discovers any incomplete or

incorrect “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” items or any other deficiency in the work, the Architect/Engineer will prepare a “Revised Punch List” which may also include other incomplete Contract requirements such as record documents, owner’s operation and maintenance manuals, warranties, and other Contract requirements. Architect/Engineer’s site reviews of the Work for this “Revised Punch List” and any subsequent revised Punch Lists shall be performed as additional service to Owner, back-charged to the Contractor.

b. The Architect/Engineer may assign a dollar value for each item of incomplete or incorrect work remaining.

F. Additional Inspections and related additional services fee: The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer’s consultants will provide two site inspections, one at Substantial Completion, and one to confirm that the “Architect/Engineer’s Punch List” has been completed. 1. “Revised Punch List: If the Architect/Engineer prepares and issues a “Revised

Punch List: because of the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work, then the Owner shall compensate the Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer’s consultants for their additional services and additional inspections. The



payment for additional services and inspections will be back-charged to Contractor. The Owner will deduct the amount of the Architect/Engineer’s additional services fee from final payment to the Contractor by Change Order.

1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following: 1. On Application for Payment, show 100 percent completion for portions of work

claimed as substantially complete. a. Submit list of incomplete items (Punch List), value of incomplete work,

and reasons work is not complete. 2. Obtain evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies

having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certificate of Final Inspections, “signed off” by authorities having

jurisdiction. b. Certificate of Occupancy.

3. Submission of product and installation warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, installer certifications and similar documents specified in individual sections.

4. Submission of test/adjust/balance reports. 5. Change-over permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 6. Remove temporary facilities and services that are no longer required. 7. Remove mock-ups, field samples and similar items. 8. Complete final cleaning, including repair and restoration, or replacement of

damaged Work. 9. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 10. Application for reduction of retainage. 11. Consent of Surety. 12. Advise the Owner of the change-over in security provisions. 13. Notification of shifting insurance coverage.

B. Within 2 weeks after receipt of the notice of Substantial Completion from the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer will inspect to determine status of completion. 1. Should the Architect/Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially

complete: a. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing, stating the

reasons therefore. b. The Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies and send a second written

notice of Substantial Completion to the Architect/Engineer, requesting re-inspection.

C. When the Architect/Engineer concurs that the Work is substantially complete: 1. The Architect/Engineer will prepare AIA Document G 704 - CERTIFICATE OF

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, accompanied by the



Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified by the Architect/Engineer.

2. The Architect/Engineer will submit the Certificate to the Owner, and to the Contractor, for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.

1.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Final Acceptance and final payment, perform the following: 1. Completion of incomplete Work. Submit a copy of the final inspection list

stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

2. Prove that all taxes, fees and similar legal obligations have been paid. 3. Submit final payment requests with release of all liens, and supporting

documentation. 4. Provide written assurances that all unsettled claims are in the process of and

will be resolved. 5. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar

data, taken on date of Substantial Completion. 6. Submit updated final statement, including accounting for final additional

changes to the Contract Sum. Show additional Contract Sum, additions and deductions, previous Change Orders, total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and Contract Sum due.

7. Submit consent of surety to Final Payment. 8. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 9. Remove remaining temporary facilities and services. 10. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipts for:

a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for items so listed in individual Sections of the Specifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect/Engineer.

b. Project Record Documents (as-builts), including CAD format drawings. c. Warranties and bonds specified in individual Sections of the

Specifications. d. Keys and keying schedule. e. Spare parts and materials extra stock. f. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors,

including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all times including nights weekends, and holidays.

11. Submit Certification stating Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents.

12. Submit Certification stating equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner’s representative and are fully operational.



13. Submit Certification stating that Work is 100 percent complete and ready for final inspection.

B. Within 2 weeks after receipt of the request for Final Acceptance from the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer will inspect to determine status of completion. 1. Should the Architect/Engineer determine that the Work is incomplete or

defective: a. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing, stating the

reasons listing the incomplete or defective work. b. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the deficiencies

and send a second written notice of request for Final Acceptance to the Architect/Engineer.

c. Costs relative to the Architects re-inspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims made by the Contractor, will be compensated by the Owner, who will deduct the amount of such compensation from the Final Payment due to the Contractor.

C. After the Architect/Engineer finds the Work acceptable, the Architect/Engineer will review the Final Close-out submittals.

D. Application for Final Payment: Submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Architect/Engineer will prepare a Final Change Order, reflecting approved

adjustments to the Contract Sum not previously made by other Change Orders.

1.6 CONFERENCES AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. The Owner reserves the right to call for conferences commencing with the date of Substantial Completion and continuing for one year thereafter, for purposes of inspecting the Work and to plan correction of any deficiencies or failures discovered during this period. 1. Attendance is required by Contractor's Project Manager, Architect/Engineer,

and each applicator, installer, and supplier as the Owner may direct or the Contractor may wish to have present. All representatives attending such meetings shall be the same persons, or shall have the same powers and authority, as those attending progress meetings occurring prior to the Date of Substantial Completion.



End of Section



CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - page 1 of 7

Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Project record documents.

B. Record Project Manual.

C. Project Record Drawings (As built drawings).

D. Emergency Manuals.

E. Operation and maintenance data, preventive maintenance instructions.

F. Materials and finishes manual.

G. Maintenance contracts.

H. Spare parts and maintenance materials.


A. Section 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION: 1. Coordination Drawing Requirements. 2. Electronic file requirements for base sheets to prepare Project Record

Drawings.

B. Section 01 78 36 – WARRANTIES: Administrative and procedural requirements for warranties, guarantees and bonds.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Record documents shall reflect actual “as-built” condition and the products installed. Include all changes and deviations from original Contract Documents, and incorporate information from: 1. Original Contract Documents. 2. Addenda. 3. Change orders. 4. Construction change directives. 5. Field directives, and instructions from the Owner, Architect/Engineer or

regulatory authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Project Record Documents include, but are not limited to: 1. Record Project Manual. 2. Project record drawings (as built drawings). 3. Final Site Survey. 4. Operation and maintenance data, preventive maintenance instructions.



5. Materials and finishes manual. 6. Product warranties and bonds. 7. Maintenance contracts. 8. Record of all test reports and inspections. 9. Wall charts and data such as valve diagrams, electrical panel board

directories, and similar information.

C. Labeling and identification of Record Documents 1. Clearly label all record documents with name of Project and the words

“Record Document”. 2. Date progressive entries of information as appropriate. 3. Date Record Documents with the final submission date.

1.4 SUBMITTAL QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish Architect/Engineer with the following quantities of each submittal: 1. Record Project Manual:

a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 4 bound hard copies (paper).

2. Project record drawings (as-builts): a. 2 sets of Drawings in Autocad™ format. Verify release version and data

type with Owner prior to submittal. b. 2 “blackline print” sets of Drawings. c. 2 electronic (PDF) copies.

3. Operation and maintenance data, preventive maintenance instructions: a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 2 bound hard copies (paper).

4. Materials and finishes manual: a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 2 bound hard copies (paper).

5. Product warranties and bonds: a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 2 bound hard copies (paper).

6. Maintenance contracts: a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 2 bound hard copies (paper).

7. Record of all test reports and inspections: a. 2 electronic (PDF) copies. b. 4 bound hard copies (paper).



1.5 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL

A. The General Contractor is responsible to maintain a Project Manual reflecting revisions and changes to the Original Issue Project Manual. 1. Clearly label the Record Project Manual as “Record Document Specifications,

in a three ring binder. 2. Do not use Record Project Manual for construction purposes; protect from

loss in a secure location. 3. Record all variations and deviations to the Contract Documents, including

changes made by Addenda, Bulletin, Change Order, Change Directive and other modifications to the Contract. a. Cut and paste revisions into their applicable specification section. b. Identify all changes with cross-reference to appropriate Addendum

Number, Modification Number, Change Order Number 4. In each individual Specification Section, under “Part 2 – Products”, identify all

manufacturers and products which are actually used as part of the Work. 5. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to

measure and record at a later date.

B. Record Project Manual: Provide prior to request for Final Acceptance. 1. Manuals shall be in 8-1/2 by 11 inch pages and bound in 3-ring (D-shape)

binders with durable plastic covers. Internally subdivide the binder contents by Division with permanent page dividers.

2. Label front cover and spine of each binder with laser printed titles, dates, and project information.

3. All information from “in-progress” manual shall be clearly and completely transferred.

4. Pages shall be undamaged.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The General Contractor is responsible to maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and shop drawings for preparing the record drawings. 1. Where shop drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the

corresponding location on the Contract Documents.

B. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from loss in a secure location. Mark-up these drawings to show clearly and completely the actual installation reflecting all changes made in the Work during construction. 1. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions accurately. 2. Record all variations and deviations to the Contract Documents, including

changes made to schedules, details, and all architectural changes to structure, exterior enclosure, interior partitions and ceilings.

3. Record new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on the Contract Drawings or shop drawings.

4. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.



C. The fire protection, plumbing, and electrical trades shall be responsible to the Contractor to keep the record documents for their portions of the work marked currently to record all changes in the mechanical and electrical work made during construction.

D. The Architect/Engineer may periodically inspect these record drawings, and their proper maintenance may be a condition precedent to approval of applications for periodic payments.

E. Deliver all Project Record Documents, shop drawings, product data, and samples to the Architect/Engineer for the Owner’s use, upon completion of the Work and prior to request for Final Acceptance of the Work.

F. In addition at the completion of the work, the General Contractor is responsible for the preparation and submittal of neat, clean well drafted, and complete record drawings, at no additional costs to the Owner. These reproducible Project Record Documents shall be transmitted to the Architect/Engineer as a condition precedent to final payment, and include documents prepared by the fire protection, plumbing, and electrical trades.

1.7 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.



5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. Furnish manuals which contain all of the following groups of equipment: 1. Fire protection system. 2. Utilities and plumbing systems. 3. Electrical systems.

B. Furnish bound and properly identified Manuals prior to request for Final Acceptance. 1. Manuals shall be in 8-1/2 by 11 inch pages and bound in three “D ring”

capacity binders with durable plastic covers. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers. a. Arrange content by section number and systems, process flow, under

section numbers and sequence as listed in the Table of Contents of this Project Manual.

b. Drawings: Preferable 11 inches in height bound in with text with reinforced punched binder tab. Fold drawings larger than 8-1/2 by 11 inches to size of text pages. Provide a drawing pocket for Drawings larger than 11 by 17 inches; locate pocket inside rear cover or bound in with text.

2. Each manual shall include the same following minimum information: a. Table of Contents. b. Directory of Contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment supplies

listing addresses, phone numbers and appropriate emergency phone numbers. 1) Include local sources of supplies and replacement parts.

c. Directory of Architect/Engineer and consultants listing addresses and phone numbers.

d. Operation and maintenance instructions. Provide schematic diagrams of control systems, circuit directories for each electric panel and charts showing the tagging of all valves.

e. Air and water test and balancing reports. f. Maintenance and cleaning instructions for finishes. g. Product and manufacturer's Certificates. h. Photocopies of all extended warranties and bonds.

3. Submit one copy of completed volume in final form 21 days prior to Final Inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection with Architect/Engineer's comments; Revise and submit all volumes to Owner.

C. For each item of equipment, include description of equipment, component parts and accessories. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Additionally provide the following for each item:



1. Panel board circuit directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.

2. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. 3. Operating procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

4. Maintenance requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and re-assembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. a. Maintenance drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relation of

component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

5. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 6. Include manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions. 7. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 8. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. 9. Provide Contractor’s coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams

as installed. 10. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve,

keyed to flow and control diagrams. 11. Provide original manufacturer’s parts (OEM) list, illustrations assembly

drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts (OEM), current prices,

and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. b. Include local source of supplies and replacement parts, and any other

data pertinent for procurement procedures. 12. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification Sections.

D. Standards: 1. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet

and inches, pounds, and cfm; provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI).

2. Abbreviations: Provide complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment; include part numbers of all replaceable parts.

1.9 MATERIALS AND FINISHES MANUAL

A. Furnish bound and properly identified manuals for all materials and finishes prior to request for Substantial Completion review. 1. Manuals shall be in 8-1/2 by 11 inch pages and bound in three “D ring”

capacity binders with durable plastic covers. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers and logically organized.

2. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.



a. Arrange content by section number and systems, process flow, under section numbers and sequence as listed in the Table of Contents of this Project Manual.

b. Drawings: Preferable 11 inches in height bound in with text with reinforced punched binder tab. Fold drawings larger than 8-1/2 by 11 inches to size of text pages. Provide a drawing pocket for Drawings larger than 11 by 17 inches larger drawings; locate pocket inside rear cover or bound in with text.

B. Manuals shall include the following: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture

designations for all building products, applied materials, and finishes. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

2. Instructions for care and maintenance: Include manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

3. Moisture protection and weather exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

4. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification Sections.

1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver materials to on-site location designated by the Owner; obtain receipt.



End of Section



WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - page 1 of 5

Section 01 78 36 WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties, guarantees and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. Warranty, Guarantee and Bond requirements of this Section are applicable to all trades, all Divisions of the Specifications, and applies to all Work performed under this Contract. 1. Warranties required under the Contract are in addition to and not in lieu of any

remedy or warranty to which the Owner is entitled under law. 2. Warranties required under the Contract are not a waiver of Owner’s legal

rights.

B. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or sub-subcontract for material or units of work for project where a special project warranty, certification or similar commitment is required, until it has been determined that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.


A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Section 01 78 00 – CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Administrative and procedural requirements for submitting warranties.

C. Individual Specification Sections contain additional specific requirements for warranties and bonds.

D. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1.3 DISCLAIMERS AND LIMITATIONS

A. General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties are intended primarily to protect Owner against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient, defective, and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor . 1. Pro-rating of warranties: Except where explicitly specified otherwise, each

warranty issued shall cover the full cost of warranty-related repairs throughout the full term of the warranty.



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the work are in several categories, including those of General Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 50 of these Specifications: 1. General Contractor’s Comprehensive Warranty: The General Contractor shall

provide a comprehensive one-year warranty covering all labor, materials, equipment and work related to the entire Contract, and shall promptly repair or replace defective and deficient work.

2. Special Project Warranty (Guaranty): A warranty specifically written and signed by contractor for a defined portion of the work; and, where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor. Special Warranties extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.

3. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by Contract Documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work; regardless of whether manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special project warranty as a direct result of Contract Document requirements. a. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published

by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.

4. Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty not specifically required by Contract Documents (other than as specified in this Section), but which is available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer or product has published warranty in connection with purchases and use of product without regard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty.

1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Warranty Period Commencement Date: Effective stating date for Warranty periods is the Date of Substantial Completion for Project. 1. Equipment and systems start-up, operation and use, occurring prior to Project

Substantial Completion, will not be considered commencement of warranty period under any terms of this Contract.

2. Exceptions: Starting dates for warranties prior to the Project Date of Substantial Completion are not permitted, except for the two conditions below: a. Warranty requirements specified in individual specification sections

explicitly specify that a required warranty or guarantee shall be effective on date of shipment, date of manufacturer, or date of installation.

b. Warranties for Incomplete work: The effective date for warranty of work which has not been completed prior to the Date of Substantial Completion, shall be effective on the date of Final Completion and Owner’s acceptance of the Work.

B. Related Damages and Losses: In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which



has been damaged as a result of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

C. Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work. 1. Reinstated warranty value: The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the

original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 2. Reinstated warranty period: A period of time ending upon date original

warranty would have expired, if there had been no failure, but not less than half of original warranty period of time.

D. Warranties are Irrevocable: Warranties issued to the Owner are irrevocable. 1. Non-Payment: If warrantor refuses to issue warranty, or attempts to revoke

warranty due to lack of payment by any party other than the Owner, the Contractor shall resolve the payment conflict, and cause the warranty to be issued or reinstated.

2. Incomplete or incorrect Installation: If warrantor refuses to issue warranty, or attempts to revoke warranty due to improper installation or other deficiency, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency and cause the warranty to be issued or reinstated.

E. Transferable Warranties: All warranties shall permit Owner to transfer or assign warranties to future owners or other assignors at no additional cost to the Owner for the full warranty period.

F. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. 1. Work repairs or replaced under warranty shall be warranted for the full

duration of the original warranty.

G. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

H. Rejection of Warranties: 1. Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion or thereafter, to

reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor , which in opinion of Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties which are not in conflict with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



I. Owner’s right to refuse Work: The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept work for the project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such work or part of the work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.6 COMPREHENSIVE WARRANTY

A. Comprehensive Warranty: In addition to all other warranties, the General Contractor shall issue a Comprehensive Total Contract Warranty which shall include all work of this Contract, without limitation including consequential damages. 1. Duration of Comprehensive Warranty: One full year from date of Substantial

Completion. 2. Consequential damages: Warranty includes consequential damages which

relate to a warranty claim, these include without limitation: a. All costs required to uncover and repair all work related to warranty

claim. b. All costs relating to repair and restoration of damaged property, resulting

from warranty claim. c. All costs resulting from failure to conform to the Contract Documents,

and for required rebuilding, construction or reconstruction to correct work.

d. Perform to the satisfaction of the Owner all repairs, reconstruction, and restoration to original condition of adjacent and related work affected by damage under a warranty claim.

B. Warranty Claims: Owner will notify General Contractor in writing of each warranty claim. Warranty repairs shall be completed within 30 days of written notice, except as pre-approved by Owner. 1. In the event of an emergency condition, where in the reasonable opinion of

the Owner an immediate repair under warranty is necessary, warranty repairs shall be completed within 14 calendar days from date of notice.

2. Owner’s right to correct: In the event the Contractor fails to respond to a warranty claim within the specified time limits, the Owner reserves the right to make the necessary corrections or repairs and recover all costs and expenses from the General Contractor .

C. Contractor’s responsibilities under Comprehensive Warranty: 1. Notify in writing each affected warrantor and original Filed-Subcontractor,

subcontractor, installer, vendor as appropriate to the warranty claim. 2. Manage the warranty claim for the Owner. 3. Assist the Owner in obtaining warranty satisfaction. 4. Arrange and manage all warranty related work including work relating to

consequential damages.



1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Owner prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. In compliance with requirements specified under Section 01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and Section 01 78 00 – CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied, or used

by the Owner by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within 14 calendar days of completion of the designated portion of Work.

2. Refer to individual section of Divisions 2 through 50 for the determination of units of work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and terms of those warranties (or guarantees).

3. Specific Warranty Forms: Where a special project warranty (guaranty) or specified product warranty is required to be executed, prepare a written document to contain terms and appropriate identification, ready for execution by all required parties (including manufacturers, vendors, and subcontractors). Submit draft to Owner (through Architect/Engineer) for approval prior to final executions.

B. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile three (3) copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the General Contractor, or by the General Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the Table of Contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring

vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name, and the name of the General Contractor .

4. When operating and manuals are required for warrantied construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.


PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE

A. Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in individual specification Sections in Divisions 2 through 26 of the Project Manual.

End of Section



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - page 1 of 2

Section 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Demonstrating equipment.

B. Instruction and training of Owner’s personnel.

1.2 DEMONSTRATING EQUIPMENT

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner’s personnel 2 weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners’ personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location.

E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals specified under Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

F. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections.

1.3 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner’s designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times.

B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months .

C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. Provide sufficient formal instructional time for training Owner’s personnel, so that the Owner’s personnel will fully comprehend operation and maintenance of the facility’s equipment and systems. Contractor’s personnel designated for Owner training shall be competent and knowledgeable and have good communication skills.


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - page 2 of 2

1. Training sessions shall be pre-arranged directly with the Owner. a. Instructors shall arrive at pre-scheduled training sessions on-time and be

fully prepared to teach using a preplanned training program. b. All instructors are subject to the Owner's approval. Replace

unacceptable instructors and reschedule training as directed by the Owner at no increased cost to the Owner.

2. Training shall include the following: a. General overview of Record Documents:

1) Record Drawings. 2) Record Project Manual. 3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4) Finishes. 5) Warranty and maintenance agreements. 6) Test reports and inspections.

b. Fire suppression systems and equipment. c. Fire alarm systems and equipment. d. HVAC systems and equipment. e. Plumbing systems and equipment. f. Electrical systems and equipment.

F. Final payment is condition precedent on completion of Owner training (instruction). Contractor is required to submit affidavit that training and instruction of Owner’s personnel is completed.



End of Section


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 1 of 10

Section 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: The work described in this Section consists of selective demolition, cleaning, removal and legal disposal of all structures, equipment and materials indicated for demolition, or careful removal and temporary storage of materials and equipment indicated for salvage and re-use, or salvage and delivery to Owner. No attempt is made in this Section to list the entire scope of selective demolition required on this project or to describe each element to be removed. Drawings indicate both existing construction and final construction. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine for itself the scope and nature of the existing materials, equipment and finishes required for removal or salvage, based on the information provided in the full set of Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING.

B. Permits: Obtain and pay for all demolition and construction permits required by local authorities having jurisdiction and other regulatory agencies and utility companies.

C. Selective demolition and removal work includes the following at indicated locations, but is not limited to: 1. Remove existing steel fencing without damaging concrete slab, where

indicated. Remove fencing and foundations where indicated. 2. Remove gravel base. 3. Remove designated utility sheds and related abandoned utilities. 4. Remove masonry wall construction and salvage brick for re-use. 5. Remove existing field pads. 6. Remove selected steel framing members. 7. Remove masonry cap stones. 8. Remove from site all abandoned, disconnected and dismantled utilities,

fixtures and equipment. 9. In addition to demolition specifically shown, cut, move or remove existing

construction to remain as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Coordinate such relocation’s and removal to accommodate the demands and requirements of other trades.

10. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete.

D. Selective demolition and removal work by Filed Subcontractors includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Each Filed Subcontractor shall Disconnect cut, cap and make safe all utilities,

equipment and fixtures which are not indicated for salvage or re-use, or otherwise indicated to be abandoned in place as well as any abandoned materials of any kind.



a. Disconnect cut, cap and make safe, all utility services indicated to be demolished at their primary source. Obtain the approval from authorities having jurisdiction, or applicable service provider prior to the execution of the work.

b. Cut, cap and make safe all existing utility services indicated to be abandoned in place, where so indicated on the Drawings.

2. The Electrical Filed Subcontractor shall disconnect, detach, dismantle all existing abandoned electrical systems and equipment including, but not limited to, panelboards, light fixtures, fire alarm, intercom, speakers, wiring devices, and all related conduit and appurtenances. a. Suspended wiring, conduit, hangers, fixtures, equipment, and

appurtenances scheduled for demolition, shall be disconnected and lowered to floor by the Electrical Filed Subcontractor.

E. Conduct walk-through of existing site prior to commencement of selective demolition work and jointly identify and tag with Owner items required to be salvaged. These products in general would be in addition to those indicated on Drawings. 1. All salvaged products not designated for re-use in project, shall be furnished

to the Owner for its own use, carefully packaged and clearly identified.

F. Identify locations of utilities for work of other sections.


A. Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING: 1. Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 1. Disconnection, salvage, re-working and re-installation of sprinkler system. 2. Disconnection and dismantling designated fire suppression systems and

components.

C. Division 22 - PLUMBING 1. Disconnection, salvage, re-working and re-installation of plumbing system. 2. Disconnection and dismantling designated plumbing systems and

components.

D. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: 1. Disconnection and dismantling designated electrical systems and

components. 2. Disconnection, salvage, and re-installation of designated light fixtures.

E. Division 31 - EARTHWORK: Excavation and backfilling for structural foundations, and exterior concrete slabs.

F. Individual specification sections: Cutting and patching incidental to work of individual specification sections shall be performed by respective trades, except as specified in Section 01 73 29 – CUTTING AND PATCHING.



G. Individual specification sections: Utility shutoffs by respective trades.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ANSI A10.6 – Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations. 2. NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and

Demolition Operations.

1.4 OWNERSHIP OF REMOVED MATERIALS

A. If during the work, articles of unusual value, or of historical or archaeological significance, are encountered the ownership of such articles is retained by the Owner, and information regarding their discovery shall be immediately furnished to the Architect. Resolution shall be handled as a Change in the Work.

B. Ownership of materials, equipment and furnishings designated for salvage for re-use in this Project or designated for Owner’s use is retained by the Owner.

C. Ownership of materials, equipment and furnishings to be removed from the Project which are not defined by the above two paragraphs is retained by the Contractor; if any of these are considered of salvageable value to the Contractor, they may be removed from the Project as work progresses. 1. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: 1. Comply with all requirements of this contract relative to protection, scheduling

and coordination with the Owner. 2. Hazardous materials: When hazardous materials are encountered, they shall

be handled, removed, and disposed of in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements.

3. Coordinate and arrange with utility, mechanical and electrical trades for their disconnecting, rerouting and maintenance of existing services leading to adjacent occupied buildings, as part of the work of this Contract.

4. Coordinate Work of this Section with related utilities work identified in the Contract Documents.

B. Sequencing: 1. Coordinate and arrange with mechanical and electrical trades for their

disconnecting, rerouting and maintenance of existing services in the buildings as required, as part of the work of this Contract.

C. Scheduling: 1. Comply with all requirements of this contract relative to protection, scheduling,

phasing, and coordination with the Owner.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Schedule: Prior to commencement of work, prepare a schedule indicating

proposed methods and sequence of operations for demolition work. a. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility

services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.

b. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site operations. Receive acceptance from Architect prior to commencing work.

2. Shop drawings: Indicate demolition sequencing and locations of salvageable items.

3. Design Data: Submit calculations for bracing and shoring, signed and sealed by professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

4. Permits: Submit copy of permits required by regulatory agencies for demolition.

5. Special Procedure Submittals: Submit copies of written agreements from private landowners, landfill operators, or other agencies accepting disposal of demolished materials at least two weeks prior to commencement of demolition work.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Record Documentation: Indicate actual location of capped site utilities.


A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, safety of structure, dust control, and disposal of debris. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous materials or contaminated substances.

B. Obtain and pay for required permits and licenses required from authorities prior to commencing demolition work. Arrange and pay for legal disposal of removed materials and equipment, obtain proper disposal receipts for verification.

C. Notify affected utility companies and Owner before starting work and comply with utility company requirements.

D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notification to the Owner.


A. General: Conduct the work in a manner giving prime consideration to protection of the public; protection from the weather, control of noise, shocks and vibration; control of dirt and dust; orderly access for and storage of materials; protection of existing buildings; protection of adjacent surfaces and property; coordination and cooperation with the Owner at all times.



1. Comply with all requirements of this contract relative to protection, scheduling and coordination with the Owner.

B. Qualifications: 1. Demolition subcontractor: Company specializing in performing work of this

section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 2. Shoring and bracing design: Design shoring, and bracing, under direct

supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with wind and weather conditions established at pre-demolition meeting.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility nor makes any claim as to the actual condition or structural adequacy of any existing construction to be demolished. The Contractor shall investigate and assure himself of the condition of the work to be demolished and shall take all precautions to ensure safety of persons and property. 1. Notify both Owner and Architect, if any type of hazardous chemicals, gases,

explosives, flammable material, unmarked containers, or similar dangerous substances are discovered. Cease work in affected areas until directed by Architect. Continue work in other areas.

B. The Contractor shall have examined the existing conditions per requirements of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements, and reviewed Contract Documents prior to commencement of demolition. Coordinate and verify scope of selective demolition with other portions of work specified in other sections, and under separate Contract. Change orders will not be issued for the removal of any exposed to view materials or equipment, which are either indicated on the Drawings for removal, or not indicated, but necessary to remove for the Work of this Project.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Provide necessary protection of non-work areas during demolition operations. Provide, erect and maintain temporary barriers as required to protect non-construction related pedestrian and vehicular traffic using the adjacent portions of the site and building. 1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and

noise to permit continued Owner occupancy of adjacent facility.

B. Protect existing structures which are not to be demolished. Protect designated materials and equipment to be removed and retained by Owner. 1. Cover or otherwise protect as necessary existing equipment, furniture and

furnishing located beyond the immediate demolition work.



2. Protect existing landscaping materials, structures, and appurtenances which are not to be demolished.

C. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. 1. Protect existing active utility services and structures from damage during

selective demolition work including during installation of bracing and removal of same. Repair or replace damages to satisfaction of Owner.

D. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas, in compliance with governing laws and buildings, with prime consideration given to the safety, protection and convenience of the public and Owner's personnel. 1. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work at all times.

B. Perform selective demolition in an orderly and careful manner. Carefully cut materials to be removed to eliminate damage to portions to remain. Protect existing structure designated to remain. 1. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings

without Architect's approval. 2. Except as otherwise required by Project phasing requirements, proceed with

selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

3. Locate equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

4. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Do not throw trash from windows or from roof.

5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

7. Pull nails and fasteners which remain after removal of attached material. Remove lath, strapping and other substructures associated with finishes to be removed.

8. Where existing finishes are indicated to be removed, remove down to bare subsurface without causing damage to the subsurface. a. After removal of non-asbestos finish flooring materials, remove

underlying mastic and prepare substrate to receive new flooring materials by Shot Blasting method. Create a uniform 20 mil profile. Mechanically scarify areas which cannot be profiled by shot blast method. Thoroughly wash all flooring substrate and leave clean and dry ready for application of new flooring materials.



C. Remove foundation walls and footings as indicated on Drawings, and where indicated, to a minimum of two feet beyond area of new construction.

D. Cutting openings and holes: Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 1. All penetrations in floors and roof shall be framed with miscellaneous metal

work prior to cutting and demolition of deck and concrete. 2. Repair damage done to existing elements of building to remain, except repairs

specified to be provided under other Sections. Repairs shall be done in such manner as to closely match construction, appearance and quality of original work.

E. Use of cutting torches: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and

contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting

operations. Comply with fire prevention measures specified under Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

F. Carefully observe existing structure during demolition operations, cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Immediately notify both Architect and Owner’s Project Representative. Do not resume demolition operations until directed.

G. Disconnect, cap and clearly identify designated utilities within demolition areas. 1. Cap and remove abandoned existing utilities back to locations indicated, or to

limit line of Contract where terminations are not indicated. a. Pipes to be demolished that require a connection shall be removed to the

extent required to install the new connection. Remove pipe sections by saw-cutting, removing a complete pipe section to an existing joint, or other adequate means which results in a clean joint.

2. Protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes, and similar utilities that are not to be demolished

H. Disconnect existing equipment and fixtures to be removed, or services abandoned, and piping, wiring, and conduit which would otherwise be exposed in the finished work. Remove from site disconnected equipment and fixtures and piping not to be reused. 1. Contractor to remove and dispose of all equipment not tagged or scheduled

for reuse.

I. Abandoned Equipment, Utilities, Systems: Remove in their entirety. Abandonment in place is not acceptable, except where an item is specifically indicated to be abandoned in place.



1. "Abandoned" means the item is not operational in the completed Contract. 2. Without limitation, remove abandoned pipes, tubing, conduits, wires, cables,

ducts, equipment, machines, and all elements and items related to abandoned work including, without limitation, hangers, connectors, anchors, valves, drains, strainers, sumps, panels, mounting boards, grounding rods, ground connectors, boxes, dampers, plenums, insulation, escutcheons, trims, and all other related items.

3. Where an existing element is indicated to be abandoned in place, the abandoned item shall be cut off and, if hollow, capped. a. Cut off sufficiently below the finished plane to permit space for patching

over the abandoned element. The General Contractor shall provide all cutting and chipping required to recess the cut element, and to coordinate depth of cut-offs required for finishing.

3.4 BRACING

A. Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of original brace. Provide suitable bracing materials which will support loads imposed

B. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except as otherwise acceptable to Architect.

C. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion to braced frames.

D. Maintain bracing until structural elements are rebraced by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand designed live and dead loads.

E. Remove bracing in stages to avoid disturbance or damage to existing structure.

F. Repair or replace adjacent work damaged or displaced through installation or removal of bracing work.

3.5 GENERAL DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall employ dust and pollution prevention procedures at all times. 1. Clean up loose debris daily, or more frequently as required, to prevent the

wind spreading debris. Keep dumpsters covered when not in use. 2. Wet down debris (as appropriate) to prevent air pollution by dust rising from

demolition work. Wet down dumpsters to prevent fires caused by vandals. 3. Employ tarpaulins on all trucks carrying debris.

3.6 SALVAGE MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Carefully salvage and provide safe storage for products designated for salvage, reuse, as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as requested by Owner for reuse on the project, or to be stored for Owner's future use. Take particular care with finished items and items requiring special handling. 1. Remove items indicated to be salvaged with extreme care to prevent damage. 2. All components and parts of salvaged items shall be saved and packaged.



B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area as designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of

containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for

new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.7 SPECIFIC DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS AND SURFACES.

A. Plumbing Equipment: Plumbing Filed Subcontractor specified under Division 22 is responsible to disconnect, cap and lower to floor items required to be removed, including but not limited to fixtures, equipment, water heaters, piping, hangers, valves, and insulation

B. Electrical Equipment and Lighting Fixtures: 1. Electrical Filed Subcontractor specified under Division 26 is responsible to

disconnect, cap and lower to floor items required to be including but not limited to, panelboards, light fixtures, and overhead devices including, fire alarm, intercom, bus ducts. General Contractor is responsible for removal from site.

3.8 REPAIRS

A. Repair all damage done to elements of buildings and structures to remain, except repairs specified to be provided under other Sections, or as indicated for removal in subsequent project phase(s). Repairs shall be done in such manner as to closely match construction, appearance and quality of original work.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated or specified to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.



1. As work progresses, regularly remove demolished materials from site. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site, except as required for materials determined to be reused, salvaged, or as required to comply Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations on specific banned materials prohibited from incineration or landfill disposal.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

3. Liquid Waste Management: Dispose of liquid waste in accordance with all applicable regulations. Consult all regulations (federal, provincial, state, local) or a qualified waste disposal firm when characterizing waste for disposal. Contact manufacturer f or MSDS sheets for product information, and recommendations for proposal disposal. Utilize licensed waste disposal companies as may be required.

B. Do not burn or bury demolished materials on site, arrange for legal disposal of the same.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Daily cleaning: Sweep all street and roads affected by demolition operations.

B. Upon completion of the work of this Section; remove unused tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust. Leave area in raked or broom-clean condition, as appropriate.

C. Upon completion of the work of this Section; clean adjacent structures and facilities of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition work to the satisfaction of Owner, owner(s) of adjacent properties, and authorities having jurisdiction.

End of Section


CONCRETE SEALERS 03 05 13 - page 1 of 3

Section 03 05 13 CONCRETE SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install concrete sealers/coatings on exposed-to-view concrete floors where shown and as scheduled on the Drawings.


A. Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: 1. Placing and finishing concrete slabs. 2. Dustproofing concrete slabs exposed to view and substrate for carpet.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance

data, physical properties, material compositions, and application instructions for all finishing products to be applied hereunder. a. Include certification of data indicating Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

content of all coatings. 2. Samples of each level of slip resistance, aggregate, and pattern available in

the specified products from the proposed manufacturer.


A. Use an applicator approved by the manufacturer, experienced in the approved materials, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Work shall be done only under optimum conditions as recommended by manufacturer. Surfaces over which sealer is to be applied shall be completely dry (minimum 30 days since concrete placement) and thoroughly clean. Maximum moisture content is 8 percent. Substrate and ambient temperature shall be between 60 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit (15 to 32 degrees Celsius).



1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the job site and store in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Transparent single component water and chloride-ion repellent penetrating sealer having a 40 percent solids, Alkyltrialkoxy Silane resin base, forming a permanent chemically bonded layer within the concrete. 1. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC. (Master Builders Brand), Shakopee MN,

product “MasterProtect H 400”. 2. Dayton-Superior, Miamisburg OH., product: “Weather Worker 40% (J-29)”. 3. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland OH., product “Baracade Silane 40.” 4. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, product” “Sikagard 740W.” 5. Symons Corporation, Des Plaines, IL, product “Silane 40”. 6. Textured Coatings of America, Inc., Ft. Lauderdale, FL, product “Tex-Cote

Rainstopper 140”. 7. Tnemec, Kansas City, MO., product Series 664 “Dur-a-Pell 40”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Upon acceptance of completed substrate surfaces, thoroughly remove all dust and debris by sweeping or vacuum cleaning.

B. Remove laitance, curing sealers, existing adhesives and other foreign matter from concrete surfaces with necessary techniques such as shot blasting, Muriatic acid etching, surface freezing and power scarification.

C. Surface preparation required if a curing compound has been applied to substrate surfaces. 1. Thoroughly etch concrete surfaces using well mixed solution consisting of two

parts by volume water diluted with one part by volume 30 percent commercial grade hydrochloric acid at a rate of one quart per ten square feet. Apply evenly to thoroughly saturated areas and scrub into surfaces using stiff-bristled broom. Allow solution to activate undisturbed for not less than five minutes or for duration of boiling effect.

2. Thoroughly remove etching solution by washing down surfaces with clean water; flooded at least three separate times at a rate of two gallons per ten square feet; thoroughly remove all contaminates that may be engrained or latent in surfaces.

3. Perform a test application of a square foot in three locations, such as beneath casework. Allow to set for 72 hours, and test adhesion as recommended by the manufacturer.



D. New concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to application of penetrating sealer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply transparent water-repellent system to properly prepared surfaces indicated. Apply water repellent within time restrictions after surface preparation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Apply water-repellent by low pressure spray techniques recommended by manufacturer to achieve desired function and warrantable results.

C. Apply water-repellent products in a flood coat to complete saturation working to a wet edge. If product is poured down, follow with medium, stiff bristle push broom or equivalent working materials into the substrate.

D. Apply water repellent material as demonstrated and approved at jobsite mock-up and not less than manufacturer's minimum recommended coverage rate. Coverages of approximately 120-225 square feet per gallon can be attained depending on substrate porosity, texture and profile.

End of Section



UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - page 1 of 17

Section 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install: 1. Concrete masonry unit (CMU) construction for partitions. 2. Grout fill for hollow metal steel frames, elevator hoistway frames, and

wherever ties or anchorage items occur, and as further indicated in the Drawings.

3. Reinforcing, ties, anchors, and other metal accessories, for anchoring unit masonry together and to other materials.

4. Compressible joint fillers for control joints in unit masonry work and joints with structural steel.

5. Built-in masonry flashing. 6. Control joints in concrete masonry.

B. Place, install and build-in, as work progresses, the following products and materials furnished under the indicated Sections: 1. Anchor bolts, wood blocking, and anchorage items furnished or set by other

trades as specified in individual Sections. 2. Steel lintels furnished by Section 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS. 3. Flashing reglets furnished by Section 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND

TRIM.

C. Build-into place as work progresses, the following products and materials furnished under the indicated Sections: 1. Hollow metal door and window frames furnished by Section 08 11 13 -

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.

D. Clean and point exposed to view surface masonry.


A. Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (NOTES ON DRAWINGS): Concrete foundation work, walls and slabs.

B. Section 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING: Structural light gage metal framing.

C. Section 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS: Steel lintels at masonry openings.

D. Section 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Setting and temporary bracing of hollow metal frames occurring in masonry, and removal of temporary centering when frames have been built into the masonry.

E. Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING.



F. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Sealant, caulking materials, and compressible joint bead back-up, in conjunction with masonry work.

G. Section 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) [The Masonry Society

(TMS)/American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)]: TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 - “Specifications for Masonry Structures”

2. ASTM A 82 - Steel Web, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A 497 - Welded Wire Fabric; Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bar for Concrete

Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A 641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 8. ASTM B 117 - Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. 9. ASTM B 633 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 10. ASTM C 5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 11. ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 12. ASTM C129 - Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 13. ASTM C 140 - Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 14. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 15. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. 16. ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 17. ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. 18. ASTM C 387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. 19. ASTM C 404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 20. ASTM C 476 - Grout for Masonry 21. ASTM C 578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 22. ASTM C 595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement. 23. ASTM C 744 - Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. 24. ASTM C 778 – Specification for Standard Sand. 25. ASTM C 780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for

Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.



26. ASTM C 954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs.

27. ASTM C 1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 28. ASTM C 1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. 29. ASTM C 1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for

Masonry. 30. ASTM C 1329 – Standard Specification for Mortar Cement. 31. ASTM C 1357 – Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength. 32. ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products. 33. ASTM D 2287 - Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and

Extrusion Compounds. 34. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 35. ASTM E 447 - Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 36. ASTM E 488 - Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 37. ASTM E 518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry. 38. American National Standards Institute Building Code requirements. 39. MCAA – Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. IMI: Masonry Construction Guide Manual. 3. PCA, “Concrete Masonry Handbook”. 4. NCMA applicable TEK Bulletins. 5. NCMA TEK Bulletin Nº. 45 - Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Walls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications, performance

data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Material certificates: Provide for the following, signed by manufacturer and

Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements. a. Provide fabricators UL certificates for rated concrete masonry units,

submit for UL-assembly compliance for each indicated fire rating. b. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including

name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. c. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. d. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. e. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

3. Material test reports from a qualified independent laboratory employed and paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to



compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: a. Mortar complying with the property requirements of, and tested in

accordance with ASTM C 270. b. Mortar complying with the proportion requirements of ASTM C 270 and

tested in accordance with ASTM C 780. c. Grout mixes: Include description of type and proportions of grout

ingredients. d. Masonry units; report for tests performed within the previous six months.

4. Certification: a. Provide manufacturer’s written certification of recycled steel content for

reinforcing steel. b. Provide manufacturer’s written certification of recycled content for

concrete masonry units. 5. Shop drawings:

a. Provide elevations of masonry work showing jointing patterns and coursing; indicate locations of expansion and control joints.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the masonry work of this Section with minimum of 10 years documented experience. Work shall be done by skilled workmen, fully instructed as to the requirements of this Specifications and adequately supervised during the work.


A. Single-source responsibility: 1. Facing units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a

uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces.

2. Concrete masonry units: Obtain concrete masonry units for the project from a single manufacturer.

3. Mortar materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

4. Prepackaged mortar materials: Obtain masonry cement or masonry mortar from a single manufacturer. Where colored mortar is required provide batch tickets confirming all materials are from a single production run to ensure uniformity of the mix.

B. Inspection, Testing, and Quality Control: A program of Inspection and Testing of structural masonry work will be established by the Structural Engineer of Record (SER) who will direct the implementation of tests as carried out by an independent testing agency. All costs for inspection and testing will be borne by the Owner.




A. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Do not deliver cement, lime, and similar perishable materials to the site until suitable storage is available. Store such materials in weatherproof structures, and ensure that materials are in perfectly fresh condition when brought for use. Protect masonry units and manufactured products of all types from wetting by rain or snow, and keep covered when not in use.

B. Masonry Face Units: Handle all masonry units carefully in transit and on the site, so as to keep units whole, with edges sharp, and faces clean and undamaged. Deliver all masonry units on pallets; or handle units individually, and properly stack same.

C. Aggregates: Deliver, store and handle aggregate materials so as to prevent contamination with earth or other foreign materials. 1. Store cement, lime and similar products under cover and from direct contact

with earth or floor slabs.

D. Manufactured items: Deliver manufactured products in original containers plainly marked with product identification and manufacturer’s name. 1. Store metal accessories and the like under cover and from direct contact with

ground, and in manner to prevent rust.

E. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks, or which show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Hot and cold weather requirements shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the Masonry Industry Council as contained in the document “HOT AND COLD WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION” published by the MCAA (Masonry Contractor’s Association of America). Enforcement for these requirements shall take place under the following conditions which modify those in the referenced document. 1. The recommended hot weather requirements for 100 degrees Fahrenheit

(37.8 degrees Celsius) shall be enforced for this project when ambient temperatures are above 90 degrees Fahrenheit (32.2 degrees Celsius) under all wind conditions including zero velocity.

2. Cold weather requirements shall be enforced when ambient temperatures fall below 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4.4 degrees Celsius).



1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with that of other trades which require placement and building-in of, as work progresses, anchor bolts, wood blocking, hollow metal frames, and anchorage items.

B. Examine all Drawings as to requirements for the accommodation of work of other trades. Provide all required recesses, chases, slots, and cutouts. Place anchors, bolts, sleeves and other items occurring in the masonry work. Take every precaution to minimize future cutting and patching. Closely coordinate the location and placement of such items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Load bearing hollow and solid, normal weight concrete masonry units: Conform to ASTM C90, Type 1, Class 1, normal weight. 1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal 8

by 16 inch face dimension with light gray color and uniform medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and line, and free from chips, cracks, and other defects. a. Types required, wythe (depths) and fire resistant construction rating as

indicated on Drawings. b. Recycled content: Use maximum available percentage of recycled

materials. Concrete masonry units incorporated into the work shall contain not less than 3 percent of recycled content.

2. Aggregate: sand and gravel: conform to ASTM C 33. 3. Minimum allowable compressive strength for an individual unit of not less than

1700 psi (net area); and not less than 1,900 psi. (net area) for average of 3 units; when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.

4. Oven dry density: 125 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Moisture content for average of 3 units, when delivered, not exceeding 35

percent of the total absorption, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.

B. Concrete masonry grout blocks: Open end high strength concrete masonry units and slot type strength concrete masonry units for use at reinforced concrete masonry construction where indicated on the Drawings. Conform to all requirements specified above for standard concrete masonry units, and the following additional requirements: 1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal 8

by 16 inch face dimension with light gray color and uniform medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and line, and free from chips, cracks, and other defects.

2.2 MORTAR

A. General: 1. Prepackaged mortar (ready mix) complying with ASTM C 1142



a. Admixtures are not permitted except where expressly specified herein or as otherwise approved by Architect for specific field conditions.

B. Prepackaged mortar (ready mix) 1. General: complying with ASTM C 1142, factory blended consisting of:

a. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I. b. Hydrated lime: Type S, complying with ASTM C 207. c. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from

injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying with ASTM C144.

d. Admixtures: Prepackaged mortar mixes contain manufacturer’s own proprietary admixtures, additional field admixtures are strictly prohibited.

e. Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. Water shall be potable.

C. Mortar types: 1. Mortar: ASTM C 270 type S using the property specification.

2.3 GROUT MIXES

A. Prepackaged grout (ready mix) complying with ASTM C 1107, or site-mixed Portland cement grout complying with ASTM C 476 may be used.

B. Grout for setting equipment, anchor bolts, elevator guide rails, structural steel elements and miscellaneous metals: Non-metallic high-strength controlled expansion grout of flowable consistency, having a compressive strength of 6,500 pounds per square inch (44.9 MPa) at 28 days; slump 8 to 10 inches. 1. Basis of Design: Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield CT, product “Five Star

Grout.” 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Omaha NE, Product: “Crystex.” 3. Master Builders, Cleveland, OH, product “Masterflow 713”. 4. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, product “SikaGrout 212”. 5. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, product “Sonogrout 10K”. 6. Symons Corporation, DesPlaines, IL, product “Symons Multi Purpose Grout”.

C. Grout for engineered masonry (core fill): Course grout having a compressive strength of 2,000 to 2,250 pounds per square inch (13.8 to 15.5 MPa) at 28 days; slump 8 to 10 inches. 1. Use 1/3 fly ash cement replacement in grout for exposed walls to reduce risk

and intensity of efflorescence. Comply with ASTM C 476, for fine grout. a. Proportions by volume 1:1/3:3 (Portland cement, fly ash, sand). b. Fly ash: Class F.

D. Grout for bond beams and lintels: Fine grout having a compressive strength of 2,500 to 3,000 pounds per square inch (17.2 to 20.6 MPa) at 28 days; slump 8 to 10 inches.



2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS

A. Single wythe longitudinal reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls and partitions: in overall width 1-5/8 inches less than the overall wall thickness, as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal, Hohmann, AA Wire, or equal. 1. Interior partitions: Ladder design, 9 gage ASTM A 641 class 1 galvanized

wire. 2. Exterior partitions: Ladder design, 9 gage ASTM A 641 class 3 hot dipped

galvanized wire.

B. Reinforcing steel, additional to rods which are embedded in concrete: As specified under Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, with additive requirement of incorporating recycled steel. 1. Recycled content of Steel: Use maximum available percentage of recycled

steel. Reinforcing steel incorporated into the work shall contain not less than 60 percent of recycled scrap steel.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self-expanding, continuous in length, and in width to fill the joint to a point 3/4 inch back from each face of wall or partition.

B. Compressible filler for joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry partitions, and for expansion joints in masonry walls: Closed cell Neoprene or PVC foam board, soft grade, 25 percent thicker than joint width, continuous in length, and in width to fill the joint to a point 3/4 inch back from each face of wall or partition.

C. Premolded control joints for concrete masonry construction: Solid rubber of profile as indicated (to maintain lateral stability of wall), 60-80 shore A hardness.

D. Building paper (to maintain joints open for subsequent application of sealant and backer rod): Nº. 15 asphalt saturated felt.

E. Cleaning solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. General: Mix mortar and grout in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C270, and ASTM C476 as applicable. 1. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by measuring

materials by volume. Amount of mixing water and mortar consistency shall be controlled by mason.

2. Control batch sizes to allow for use within manufacturer’s recommended pot life.

3. Retempering will be permitted only within the first two hours of initial mix or shorter times as directed by manufacturers.

4. Discard all mortar and grout which exceeds the time limits allowed by the manufacturer .Discard mortar that has partially set.

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before mixing process.



C. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout.

E. Pouring grout shall be fluid consistency (as fluid as possible for pouring without separation of constituent parts).

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Preconstruction testing: Except for testing by the Contractor, required as part of this Section, or Section 014529 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following preconstruction testing indicated as well as other inspecting and testing services required by referenced unit masonry standard or indicated herein for source quality control: 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each different concrete masonry unit

indicated, units will be tested for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140.

2. Mortar efflorescence: Test each mortar type which will be exposed to weather for efflorescence in accordance with the “Wick test” procedure in BIA Research Report Number 15, The Causes and Control of Efflorescence in Brickwork”, Section 4.4. Mortar mixes which show efflorescence shall not be used in the Work.

3. Mortar composition and properties will be field evaluated per ASTM C 780 for compressive strength, consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content, and splitting tensil strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive the work of this Section.

B. Verify built-in and other items provided by separate Sections of the work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify foundation walls supporting masonry is constructed within tolerances required by code

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

B. Foundations: 1. Do not commence installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level. 2. Sandblast the foundation tops, if necessary, and remove all laitance and

foreign material.



3. Verify that the foundation elevation is such that the bed joint thickness shall not vary from specified thickness, and that the foundation edge is true to line with masonry not projecting over more than 1/4”.

C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

D. Protect surfaces of windows, door frames, louvers and vents as well as similar finish products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings and stains.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

C. Establish lines, levels and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

D. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

E. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing and where indicated on the Drawings. Maintain joints free from mortar, ready to receive sealant and joint bead back-up.

F. Provide compressible filler at tops of interior masonry partitions abutting structural above.

3.4 COURSING, BONDS AND JOINTS

A. Coursing, joints and bond pattern: Running bond except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

B. Joints: 1. Exposed to view masonry: except as specified below, fill all joints with mortar,

strike off flush, and when mortar is thumb print hard tool joints with a non-staining tool. Joints shall be free of drying crack. a. Horizontal joints Tool joints flush. b. Vertical joints (all): Tool joints flush.

2. Concealed from view masonry, including masonry which will be concealed by flashings and similar materials: Fill joints with mortar and strike joints flush. Concave tool exterior joints below grade.

3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Locate control joints where shown on Drawings, at corners adjacent to openings in masonry, changes in wall height and intersections with structural walls as approved by Architect.



1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.

B. Form vertical control joints with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. 1. Size control joints in accordance with the requirements of Section 07 92 00 -

JOINT SEALANTS.

3.6 LAYING MASONRY - GENERAL

A. Build the masonry walls and partitions in the various combinations and thickness as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Erect all masonry work in compliance with the line and level tolerances specified herein. Hold uniform joint sizes. Correct, or replace, as directed by the Architect, non-conforming masonry work at no additional cost to the Contract.

C. Lay out coursing before setting to minimize cutting closures or jumping bond, Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units.

D. Laying masonry units: 1. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints; uniformly joint

with other work. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not

permitted. 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Cut all exposed masonry with a motor-driven carborundum blade saw to

ensure straight and clean, unchipped edges. a. Lay no unit having chipped edges or face defects where such unit would

be exposed to view. Remove any such unit, if installed, and replace with an undamaged unit, and bear all costs therefore.

6. Do not spread any more mortar than can be covered before surface of mortar has begun to dry.

7. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove entirely, clean off mortar, and reset with fresh mortar.

8. Except for cleaning down and repointing, finish all masonry as the walls and partitions are carried up.

E. Build-in reinforcement and anchorage items as the work progresses, grouting for secure anchorage. 1. Where steel reinforcing rods have been cast into concrete slabs, and left with

upturned ends, carefully place masonry units down over the upturned ends of the rods, and fill cells of masonry units with specified grout.

2. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8” (16 mm) on exterior face of walls and 1/2” (13 mm) at other locations. Lap units not less than 6” (152 mm) at ends. Use prefabricated L and T units to provide continuity at corners and intersections.



Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.

F. Except as indicated otherwise, isolate masonry from overhead structure: 1. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a

control joint. 2. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing

members and slabs, decks or blocking with compressible joint filler.

G. Provide control joints at 30 feet on center maximum spacing, and keep clean of mortar droppings.

H. Provide complete protection against breakage and weather damage to all masonry work, including substantial wood boxing around door jambs, over the tops of walls and wherever necessary to protect work at all stages of completion. Protect masonry when not roofed over, at all times when masons are not working on the walls. Apply tarpaulins or waterproof paper, properly weighted, or nailed, to assure their remaining in place to protect masonry from all possible hazards.

I. Point and fill all holes and cracks in new mortar joints with additional fresh mortar; do not merely spread adjacent mortar over defect or use dead mortar droppings. Do all pointing while mortar is still soft and plastic. If hardened, chisel defect out and refill solidly with fresh additional mortar, and tool or rake joints as specified herein.

J. Protect all masonry from rain prior to, and during the installation thereof. If the temperature is in excess of 80 degrees Fahrenheit at time of installation, lightly moisten contact surfaces of masonry units by brushing with water.

K. Cold/Hot Weather Procedures: No masonry work shall be laid in temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit without the submittal to and review by the Architect of cold weather procedures. 1. In ambient temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit make provisions to

adequately protect the masonry materials and the finished work from frost by heating of masonry materials, enclosing the work or heating the enclosed spaces.

2. No frozen work shall be built upon nor shall anti-freeze admixtures be permitted in the mortar mix.

3. Any completed work found to be affected by frost shall be taken down and rebuilt at no additional expense to the Owner.

4. This project will have an waterproofing material applied to CMU as specified under Section 07 14 16 - COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING AND SECTION 071353 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING. Special attention and care must be taken to provide a smooth, filled surface to receive the membrane. The care is necessary to insure the design performance of the selected materials.

5. Concrete masonry unit (CMU) wall shall be prepared as follows to accept the air & vapor barrier: a. Surfaces shall be free of contaminants such as grease, oil and wax on

surfaces to receive membrane



b. The CMU surfaces shall be free from projections. c. Strike all mortar joints full and flush to the face of the concrete block. d. Fill all voids and holes greater than 1/2-inch across at any point with

mortar, sealant or other approved fill material. e. Fill all cracks, gaps and joints exceeding 1/4-inch width with mortar,

sealant or other approved fill material. f. Surface irregularities exceeding 1/4-inch in height or sharp to touch shall

be ground flush or made smooth. g. Fill around all penetrations with mortar, sealant or other approved fill

material and strike flush. h. If the surfaces cannot be made smooth to the satisfaction of the

Architect, it will be the responsibility of the trade to alternatively apply a parge coat (one part cement to three parts sand) over the entire surface to receive Air & Vapor Barrier Membrane

i. Remove mortar droppings on brick ties, shelf angles, brick shelves or other horizontal obstructions.

3.7 ENGINEERED MASONRY

A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and clear of mortar and unobstructed.

B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1/4 inch from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel back and upward. Permit mortar to cure 7 calendar days before placing grout.

C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where vertical steel reinforcing rods will be required in masonry walls. Reinforce masonry unit cores with reinforcement bars and grout.

D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Division 3 - Concrete.

E. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement.

F. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout using high or low grouting techniques.

G. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-1/2 inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.

H. Low lift grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of three concrete masonry unit courses, and rod for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation.

I. High lift grouting: 1. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell

to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit.



2. In double wythe walls, omit every second masonry unit in one of the wythes for clean out and cell inspection purposes.

3. In double wythe walls, construct vertical grout barriers or dams between masonry wythes, with masonry units ever 30 feet maximum.

4. Clean out masonry cells [and cavities] with [high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage.] [compressed air, remove debris.]

5. Request inspection of the cells and cavities. Allow [3 working days] [24 hours] notice.

6. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units. 7. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump

without aggregate segregation.. 8. Limit grout lift to 60 inches and rod for consolidation [mechanically vibrate].

Wait between 30 and 60 minutes before placing next lift.

3.8 BUILDING-IN WORK

A. As work progresses install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, fireplace accessories, anchor bolts, plates and other items to be built-in the work.

B. Install built-in items plumb and level; take care not to distort alignment of such items.

C. Bed anchors of metal frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout except where joints are indicated to receive caulking and sealant. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 1. Rake joints to receive sealant to a uniform depth of 3/4 inch for installation of

caulking and sealant.

D. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.9 BUILDING-IN LINTELS

A. Install loose lintels over all openings, whether or not scheduled. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. 1. Openings up to 42 inches wide: Place two Nº4 reinforcing bars 1 inch from

bottom web. 2. Openings from 43 inches wide up to 78 inches wide: Place two Nº5 reinforcing

bars 1 inch from bottom web. 3. Openings over 79 inches wide: Reinforce as detailed in Drawings, consult

Architect/Engineer if not detailed. 4. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position with

1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary

supports.



B. Where not detailed otherwise, maintain the following minimum bearings for lintels on each side of opening: 1. 6 inches bearing on concrete. 2. 3 inches bearing on steel. 3. 8 inches bearing on masonry.

3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry joint reinforcement, spaced 16 inches vertically commencing one course above supporting concrete slab.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joint above and below openings. Extend 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches .

E. Install preformed units (or optional field-formed units) at corners, reveals, and offsets in exterior masonry, at intersections of all masonry walls and partitions, and wherever walls and partitions change directions.

F. Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system.

G. Embed anchors in concrete. Attach to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block.


A. Field inspection will be performed under the provisions of Division 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Section 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL, or Section 014529 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, as applicable).

B. Testing frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article shall be performed during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall area or portion thereof.

C. Prism Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated on Drawings, masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM E 447, Method B: and as follows: 1. Prepare one set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one set for testing at 28

days.

D. Evaluation of Quality Control tests: In absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from source quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.

3.12 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Loading: Do not apply loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls and partitions. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns, walls or partitions.

B. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.



1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to un-constructed wythe and hold cover in place.

C. Stain prevention: Provide protection and prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of exposed masonry and building finishes. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. 1. Remove immediately all grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

3.13 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from true surface level for exposed to view walls and partitions: 1. Unit-to-unit tolerance: 1/16 inch. 2. Surface, overall tolerance: 1/4 inch in 10 feet in any direction and 1/2 inch in

20 feet or more. a. Where both faces of single wythe wall or partition will be exposed to

view, request and obtain decision from the Architect as to which face will be required to conform to the specified surface level tolerance.

B. Maximum variation from plumb: For lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in any story up to 20 feet maximum. At expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet.

C. Maximum variation from level: For lines of sills, tops of walls and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 3 feet, or 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 30 feet.

D. Maximum variation of linear building line: For position shown in plan relating to columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet.

E. Maximum variation in specified height: 1/2 inch per story.

F. Maximum variation of joint thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.

G. Maximum horizontally projected unsupported masonry unit: 1-1/8 inches

3.14 CLEANING

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 81 20 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: for handling and disposition of all construction and demolition waste.

B. Progress Cleaning: 1. General: Maintain site free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish resulting

from the work of this Section. a. Remove from work areas surplus and waste materials resulting from the

work of this Section. Remove on a continual on-going basis through-out the term of construction.



2. During the progress of the work, keep the exposed surfaces of masonry clean at all times, and protected against damage. As each segment of the masonry is erected, dry-brush the surfaces free from mortar spots and droppings.

C. Prior to performing the final cleaning work, examine all face joints in exposed masonry to locate cracks, holes or other defects in the mortar; and point up all such defects and fill with mortar as specified herein. Where necessary, in the opinion of the Architect, cut out defective joints in masonry and replace with new materials, exercising extreme care to match original work.

D. At a time approved by the Architect, perform final cleaning operations on all masonry as specified herein . 1. Perform the final cleaning work only when the ambient temperature is above

40 degrees Fahrenheit, and rising. 2. Do not use wire brushes or other abrasive tools in the cleaning operations. 3. Perform final cleaning operations from the top down. If masonry cleaning work

is performed after windows, doors, frames, and other work has been installed, provide complete protection for said items; be fully responsible for any damage due to the cleaning operations.

4. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels.

5. Perform final cleaning of masonry units by scrubbing with stiff bristle fiber brushes and clear water, changing the water frequently.

E. Provide suitable protective coverings for all other surfaces and materials during the final cleaning procedures, and bear full responsibility for correcting any damage caused by these operations, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

End of Section



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - page 1 of 9

Section 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Design, engineer, furnish and install metal framing and support system for the following applications: 1. Load bearing formed steel stud roof framing at Toilet Room. 2. Metal plate blocking in conjunction with framing of this Section 05 40 00. 3. Include all connections, bracing, bridging and accessories.

B. Furnish the following products to be installed under the designated Sections: 1. Placement of anchors securing the work of this section: Section 04 20 00 -

UNIT MASONRY.


A. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY: Concrete unit masonry supporting roof metal framing.

B. Section 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING: Metal floor decking, metal roof decking.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. AISI S211 – North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing, Wall

Stud Design. 2. AISI S212 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing, Header

Design. 3. AISI S213 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing, Lateral

Design. 4. AISI S902-02, Stub-Column Test Method for Effective Area of Cold-Formed

Steel Columns, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, DC. 5. AISI S905-02, Test Methods for Mechanically Fastened Cold-Formed Steel

Connections, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, DC. 6. ANSI - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. 7. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 8. ASTM A 645 - Steel Sheet, Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy

Steel, Specially Heat Treated. 9. ASTM A 653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process



10. ASTM A 780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

11. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

12. ASTM C 955 Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases

13. ASTM C 1513 Standard Specification For Steel Tapping Screws For Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections

14. AWCI: Specifications Guide for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 15. AWS A 2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. 16. AWS D 1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code. 17. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual. 18. SSMA: Cold Formed Steel Details.

B. Inclusionary References: The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. AISI S100 – North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed

Steel Structural Members. 2. ANSI S200 – North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. 3. ANSI S202 – Code of Practice for Cold-Formed Structural Framing. 4. ANSI S220 – North American Standards for Cold-Formed Steel Framing –

Non-Structural Members. 5. ASCE 7 (Including Supplements) - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and

Other Structures.


A. Coordination: 1. General: Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades

responsible for installing interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequence of installation, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.

B. Sequencing: 1. Field Measurements:

a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work.

b. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:



1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and limitations on standard framing members and other products furnished hereunder.

2. Engineering Calculations: Provide calculations for loadings and stresses for all framing under the Professional Structural Engineer’s seal. Show how design load requirements and other performance requirements have been satisfied.

3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions: Indicate special procedures, and conditions requiring special attention.

4. Shop drawings: a. Large scale design details showing component details, framed openings,

bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1) Provide detail of building up sections required to accommodate

fireproofing. 2) Indicate all products which interface with framing. Indicate

reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

3) Indicate resilient hangers, and imposed loading. Coordinate resilient hanger with framing design and imposed loading conditions.

b. Show profile, size and location of custom punches for MEP distribution. c. Detail all conditions which deviate from Contract Documents. d. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted and welded

framing connections. e. Show loads applied to framing, indicate differential of movement. f. Provide elevations showing framing layout. Coordinate framing locations

with cladding systems. 5. Prior to prefabrication of framing, submit fabrication and erection drawings for

approval. All calculations and details are to be submitted for all members and connections.

B. Submit prior to request for Certificate of Occupancy, to both Architect and local Building Official having jurisdiction, under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, the following 1. All certifications, reports and programs required by Chapter 17 of the

Massachusetts State Building code for work engineered by Contractor’s Profession Engineer under the requirements of this Section.


A. General: 1. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI,

MF/SLA and AWS D l.3 requirements. 2. Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and

existing materials, and existing methods of construction.

B. Qualifications:



1. Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience.

2. Installer/Applicator: Company with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer.

3. Welders Certificates: Utilize only qualified welders employed on the Work. Submit verification that Welder’s are AWS D1.1 and D1.4 qualified within the previous 12 months.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Design structural elements under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been

submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. 2. Deliver materials in original unopened packages, containers or bundles

bearing brand name, and identification of manufacturer, with labels and package seals intact and legible.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle materials following manufacturer's recommended

procedures, and in accordance with material safety data sheets. 2. Protect materials from damage due to moisture, direct sunlight, excessive

temperatures, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction operations and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, LLC, West Chester, OH. 2. Marino-Ware Industries Corp., South Plainfield NJ. 3. Steel Elements, Gorham NH. 4. The Steel Network (TSN), Las Vegas NV. 5. Telling Industries, Willoughby, OH.

2.2 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Structural performance: Design, engineer and provide a complete metal framing and support system having deflection limits as specified herein under the full inward and outward lateral load prescribed by applicable codes for this project location.



1. Design roof support framing to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

2. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. Comply with the following cold-formed steel framing design standards: a. Lateral Design: AISI S213. b. Roof framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

B. Design Loading: As required by Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition.

C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

D. Welding: Employ experienced welders who are certified in compliance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures.

E. Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts to design and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section and as required by Massachusetts State Building Code.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, of grade as follows and having G90 (Z275) galvanized coating: 1. Framing

a. Grade: As required by structural performance but in no case less than 18 gauge.

B. Steel Sheet for Connectors: ASTM A 570/A 570M, hot rolled or ASTM A 611, cold rolled; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's baked-on, lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664. 1. Grade: As required by structural performance but in no case less than 18

gauge. a. Coating: G90 (Z275) galvanized coating.

2.4 FRAMING MEMBERS

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track complying with ASTM C 955. Formed of ASTM A-653/653M steel, same designation, coating, and thickness as studs except as otherwise noted, channel shaped, solid web, depth compatible with studs, size, thickness and grade as required by structural design calculations but in no case less than 18 gauge, 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).

B. Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, complying with ASTM C 955. Formed of ASTM A 653/653M steel, G90 (Z275) galvanized , channel shaped with lipped flanges, solid web, size as shown on Drawings, thickness and grade as required by structural design calculations. 1. Minimum joist size shall be 8 inches.



C. Drift and Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head clips as required, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure using mechanical fasteners. 1. Provide clips with step bushings. Mechanical attachment to structure and

screw attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical movement. 68 mils (1.72 mm) minimum thickness. Size of clips shall be as required by structural design calculations performed by clip manufacturer, and reviewed by specified Engineering Licensed Professional stamping Shop Drawings. Clips shall be fabricated/designed for the following conditions: a. Exterior head of wall. b. Exterior head of wall pre-assembled with track. c. By-pass structural pour stop at floor slab. d. By-pass floor slab or structure. e. By-pass structure.

2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard

elsewhere.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Low VOC organic zinc-rich coating containing 92% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film (ASTM D520, Type III) and conforming to SSPC Paint 20, Type II, Level 1. Liquid zinc coating shall be recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to MIL-P-21035B and SSPC Paint 29, Type II, Level I, for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements for Zinc-Rich Paints. 1. VOC limit: not more than 250 g/L.

2.7 PRE-ERECTION FABRICATION

A. Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting. Fabricate panels square with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements; attach components in a manner to prevent racking.

B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect previous work, related work, and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor in writing of all deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper completion of this work.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrates, previous work and conditions.

3.2 ERECTION - GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

indicated on approved Shop Drawings, or where not indicated, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying or clip fasteners of framing members is not permitted. a. Where welding is indicated or required on approved Shop Drawings:

Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to approved Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

H. Accurately align and attach runners in strict compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. . Allow for main structure deflection at top runner to avoid transferring load stud system.



1. Frame wall openings with additional framing members at perimeter of openings as needed.

2. Align holes in framing members to facilitate electrical conduit and piping work. 3. Provide all needed connections and accessories provide a complete structural

system. 4. Provide all needed members for proper fastening interior gypsum wallboard.

I. Bracing: Provide continuous 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel horizontal bracing within 10 to 12 inches of tops of stud. Connect bracing to each stud as indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide additional bridging and bracing as recommended by manufacturer, as necessary, and as indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide kick-back bracing perpendicular to plane of framing system and securely anchored to building structure needed to create a complete structural system meeting specified performance requirements.

J. Touch-up damaged metal coatings and cut ends, with specified liquid zinc coating.

3.3 ERECTION OF STUDDING

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with approved shop drawings, referenced standards and codes.

B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place as indicated on approved engineered shop drawings, at maximum 24 inches on center.

C. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on approved shop drawings; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings.

D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window jambs.

E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted.

F. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements.

G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.

H. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. Install double deep leg deflection track or specified clip system for vertical deflection of primary building structure.

I. Attach cross studs, furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.

J. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.

K. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized and primed surfaces with primer.



3.4 ERECTION JOISTS

A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.

C. Place joists purlins at spacing indicated on approved shop drawings; locate not more than 12 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using method indicated.

D. Set floor and ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging.

E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track.

F. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points.

G. Provide joist bridging as required or shown on the plans.

H. Provide an additional joist under parallel partitions when the partition length exceeds one-half the joist span and around all floor and roof openings which interrupt one or more spanning members unless otherwise noted.

I. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.

J. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized or primed surfaces with primer.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. The following allowable installed tolerances are allowable variations from locations and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents and shall not be added to allowable tolerances indicated for other work. 1. Allowable variation from true plumb, Level, and Line: 1/8 inch in 20 feet. 2. Allowable variation from true wall thickness: 1/8 inch in 20 feet. 3. Allowable variation from true plane of adjacent surfaces: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

End of Section



METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - page 1 of 23

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

B. Work of this Section requires Filed Sub-Bids and is governed by the provisions of the Massachusetts General Laws (MGL), Public Bidding Law - Chapter 149, Sections 44A to 44J inclusive, as amended, and applicable Sections of the MGL, Public Contract Law - Chapter 30.

C. The work to be completed by the Filed Subcontractor for the work of this Section is shown on the following listed Drawings:

Architectural Drawings: A1 through A8 inclusive. Structural Drawings: S000 through S601 inclusive.

1. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section The listing of Contract Drawings above does not limit Filed Subcontractor’s responsibility to determine full extent of work of this Section as required by all Drawings listed in the Drawing List on the Drawing Title Sheet, as modified by Addenda.

D. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in ADVERTISEMENT TO BID and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 1. The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope:

NAME OF SUB-BIDDER: __________________________________ SUB-BID FOR TRADE: MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND ORNAMENTAL IRON.

2. Each Sub-Bid submittal for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding Authority, as bound herein, accompanied with the required bid deposit in compliance with MGL Chapter 149 Section 44B in the amount of 5 percent of Filed Sub-Bid.

E. Sub Sub-Bid Requirements: NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: The work of this Section consists of miscellaneous metals, and ornamental iron where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation.

B. Furnish and install:



1. Steel stairs (Stair Number 5) with intermediate landing construction, complete with all supporting members and railings.

2. Exterior railings at concrete stair (Stair Number 6). 3. Steel Fencing and gate. 4. Picket Guardrails. 5. Field gate. 6. Mount supports for flag poles. 7. Steel column maintenance bases.

C. Furnish the following items for installation under related sections: 1. Anchors, bolts, inserts, and sleeves, required to attach miscellaneous metals

for embedment into concrete under Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2. Hot dipped galvanized loose lintels at door, louver, and similar openings in exterior masonry partitions; installed under Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY.

3. Anchor bolts, with nuts and washers; inserts; and sleeves; required to attach miscellaneous metal items to masonry, for installation under Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY.

D. Perform all drilling and cutting in miscellaneous metal items required for the attachment of other items.

E. Perform all shop-painting for all surfaces of exposed to view galvanized and non-galvanized metals, and post-erection touch-up of shop prime coat, using the same material as shop-prime coating.

F. Perform application of liquid zinc touch-up to all welds of galvanized steel items furnished hereunder.

G. No attempt is made in this Section to list all elements of miscellaneous metal required on this project or to describe how each element and component will be installed. It is the responsibility of the Filed-subcontractor to determine for itself the scope and nature of the work required for a complete installation from the information provided herein and in the Drawings.

1.3 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS

A. Bidders are expected to examine and to be thoroughly familiar with all contract documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Awarding Authority (Owner) will not be responsible for errors, omissions and/or charges for extra work arising from General Contractor's or Filed Subcontractor's failure to familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the Bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity to examine the site and the Contract Documents, that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work a given result to be produced, that the Contract Documents are adequate and that he will produce the required results.

B. Pre-Bid Conference: Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the Pre-Bid conference; refer to ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS for time and date.




A. Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Installation of anchors into concrete, pouring concrete stair treads and landings.

B. Section 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING (refer to notes on Drawings): Structural steel framing members not otherwise specified hereunder.

C. Section 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING (refer to notes on Drawings): Metal roof deck and floor decking.

D. Section 09 91 00 - PAINTING: Applied finish coatings other than those specified herein.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated, Welded and

Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold

Finished. 4. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed

and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. 5. ASTM A 153 - Zinc-Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A 283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. 7. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 8. ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength 9. ASTM A 361 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Roofing sheets. 10. ASTM A 385 – Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings. 11. ASTM A 380 – Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling and Passivation of

Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems. 12. ASTM A 386 - Zinc Coating on Assembled Steel Products. 13. ASTM A 446 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets of Structural Quality,

Coils and Cut Lengths. 14. ASTM A 501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing. 15. ASTM A 525 - Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized). 16. ASTM A 780 – Repair of Hot-Dip Galvanizing.



17. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.

18. ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 19. ASTM A 575 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,

M-Grades. 20. ASTM A576 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,

Special Quality. 21. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

22. AGAI - Inspection Manual for Hot-Dipped Galvanized Products. 23. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 24. AISC - Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural

Steel for Buildings. 25. AWS - Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. 26. MIL-P-21035B - Paint High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric)

(superseding DOD-P-21035A) 27. SSPC referenced standards. 28. NAAMM publication AMP 500 – Metal Finishes Manual 29. NAAMM publication AMP 510 – Metal Stairs Manual. 30. NAAMM publication AMP 521 – Pipe Railing Manual 31. NAAMM publication AMP 555 – Code of Standard Practice for The

Architectural Metal Industry. 32. SSPC standards referenced herein, including:

a. SSPC-SP1, Surface Preparation – Solvent Cleaning, b. SSPC-SP2, Surface Preparation – Hand Tool Cleaning. c. SSPC-SP3, Surface Preparation – Power Tool Cleaning d. SSPC-SP8, Surface Preparation - Pickling. e. SSPC-Paint 20, Zinc-Rich Coating (Type 1) Inorganic and (Type II)

Organic. f. SSPC-Paint 29, Zinc Dust Sacrificial Primer Performance.

B. Definitions: 1. AESS: Architectural Exposed Structural Steel, Includes all exposed-to-view

fabricated steel elements furnished under the scope of this Section 05 50 00.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate work of this Filed subcontract with that of other trades, affecting or

affected by this work, and cooperate with the other trades as is necessary to assure the steady progress of work.



2. Be responsible for establishing locations and levels for all work of this Section, except such parts as may be delivered to others and set by them. In such cases assist them in properly locating said parts.

B. Pre-Installation Meetings: At least two weeks prior to commencing fabrication work of this Section, conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project site. Comply with requirements of Section 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. Coordinate time of meeting to occur prior to installation of work under the related sections named below. 1. Required attendees: Architect, Contractor, Installer’s Project Superintendent,

and representatives of other related trades as directed by the Architect or Contractor.

2. Agenda: a. Scheduling of metal fabrications operations. b. Quality control for AESS fabricated components. c. Finish and installation requirements for AESS fabricated components. d. Review of staging and material storage locations. e. Coordination of work by other trades. f. Installation procedures for ancillary equipment. g. Protection of completed Work.

C. Sequencing: 1. Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required in the listed

Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.

2. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to ensure that all such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived.

3. Field Measurements a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and

fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work. b. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field

measurements before fabrication might delay Work.

D. Scheduling: 1. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for

installing inserts and anchorages furnished by this Section; make arrangements for delivery, receipt and installation of inserts and anchorages to prevent delay of the Work.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate work of this Filed Subcontract with that of other trades, affecting or affected by this work, and cooperate with the other trades as is necessary to assure the steady progress of work.



B. Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required in the listed Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.

C. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to assure that all such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's complete product data and specifications for all

prefabricated items, shop primer paints, liquid zinc coating, and hydraulic cements, to be furnished hereunder. a. For epoxy anchoring systems: Furnish ICC-ES Code approvals and

performance data that includes recommended loading for each application.

2. Shop Drawings, bearing registration stamp of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in Commonwealth of Massachusetts. a. General requirements:

1) Include large scale details of items of all metal fabrications to be furnished hereunder, showing proposed methods of anchorage to surrounding structure and conditions.

2) Indicate on the shop drawings all erection marks for various places of miscellaneous metals, and ensure that the actual field pieces bear corresponding marks.

3) Indicate shop built components, and field-built components. 4) Indicate and detail all field installation connections. 5) Indicate weld types and length. 6) Indicate blocking locations.

b. Include large scale details of stairs, intermediate landings and railings. 3. Selection Samples:

a. Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors of shop applied finishes available for selection by Architect.

4. Verification Samples: Accepted samples will be used to establish the quality standard for fabrication, workmanship and finish. a. Factory/shop finishes: 3 inch by 6 inch samples of factory-applied

coatings and colors proposed for use for approval prior to coating application.

b. Handrail, quality assurance sample: Fabricate a sample showing a typical handrail section demonstrating component connections. Sample section shall be minimum 18 inches in horizontal length and 12 inches in height and include a corner post. Provide a shop primed finish.



c. Provide minimum 24 by 24 inch (or equivalent for shapes) of fabricated and finished ornamental metal components, demonstrating the quality of fabrication work, and finish.

d. Provide 12 inch sections of fabricated and finished AESS metal components, demonstrating the quality of welds and finish.

5. Certificates: a. Certificate of Compliance from Galvanizer: Submit notarized Certificate

of Compliance with application for payment for galvanizing, signed by galvanizer, indicating compliance with requirements of specifications. Include scope of services provided, and quantity and itemized description of items processed.

b. Welders certificates as specified under Article entitled “QUALITY ASSURANCE”.

6. Delegated Design Submittals: Provide calculations for loading and stresses for the work of this section, bearing the Professional Structural Engineer’s seal. Show how design load requirements and other performance requirements as required by the Massachusetts State Building Code have been satisfied. a. Work scope requiring loading and stress calculations includes, but is not

limited to the following: 1) Stairs, intermediate landings and railings. 2) Metal fabrications supporting work of other trades.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Special Inspections: Submit prior to request for Certificate of Occupancy, to

both Architect and local Building Official having jurisdiction, the following: a. All certifications, reports and programs required by Chapter 17 of the

Massachusetts State Building code for work engineered by File Subcontractor’s Professional Engineer under the requirements of this Section.


A. General: Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction. 1. Galvanizer’s tagging: The galvanizer shall mark all lots of material with a

clearly visible stamp or tag indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the zinc coating, and the applicable ASTM Specification Numbers.

B. Exposed Fabricated Steel Elements including stairs, railings, ornamental fabrications and exposed to view fabrications shall be fabricated and finished as Architectural Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) meeting tolerances and fabrication requirements as specified herein.

C. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator/Installer: Minimum of 5 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer.



2. Welders: Utilize only qualified welders employed on the Work. Submit verification that Welder’s are AWS D1.1 and D1.4 qualified within the previous 12 months.

3. Licensed Professionals: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts to design and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section and as required by the 2015 International Building Code with Massachusetts Building Code, Ninth Edition amendments. a. Prepare Shop Drawings for under direct supervision of a same Engineer

experienced in design of this work.


A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required in the listed

Specification Sections included as part of this Filed-Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle and store materials under cover in a manner to prevent defacement,

deformation, or other damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to erection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: All materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. Unless specifically called for otherwise, work shall be fabricated from the following: 1. Carbon Steel:

a. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM Designation A 36. b. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, seamless pipe, black finish unless

otherwise noted. c. Structural steel tubing, square and rectangular shapes: ASTM A500,

Grade B. d. Steel tubular shapes: ASTM A 501. e. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C. f. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A36. g. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108. h. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in

accordance with ASTM A525.

B. Steel materials: to be hot dip-galvanized: Provide steel chemically suitable for metal coatings complying with the following requirements: Carbon below 0.25 percent, silicon below 0.24 percent, phosphorous below 0.05 percent, and



manganese below 1.35 percent. Notify galvanizer if steel does not comply with these requirements to determine suitability for processing.

C. Metal surfaces, general: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

D. Welding rods: AWS E70XX grade, or select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded and in accordance with the recommendation of the welding rod manufacturer. 1. Where stainless steel is welded to mild steel, select rods to minimize dilution

effects on the stainless steel component.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide all fasteners and attachments as required for work specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. In general,

a. Provide all fasteners and attachments of the same material and finish as the metal to which it is applied unless otherwise noted. 1) Provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use. 2) Provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

B. Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components.

C. Fasteners at blind structural tubes, or other blind conditions: Lindaptor North America, Ann Arbor MI, product: “Type HB Hollo-Bolt”, or approved equal. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers, or approved equal.

a. Lindaptor North America, Ann Arbor MI. b. Simplified Building Components, Rochester NY. c. Avdel USA LLC., Stanfield NC.

2. Head type: Countersunk. 3. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where

item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.



J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive for attaching anchors and for direct pinning: high-modulus, high strength, moisture tolerant, epoxy adhesive, two-component 100 percent solids, epoxy resin complying with ASTM C 881. 1. Minimum performance properties (as cured at 70 degrees F. and 50 percent

relative humidity): a. Minimum Compressive Strength, tested per ASTM D-695:

1) at 3 days: 11300 psi (31.0 MPa). 2) at 7 days: 11800 psi (44.8 MPa). 3) at 28 days: 12200 psi (58.6 MPa).

b. Shear Strength, tested per ASTM D-732 at 14 days: 6200 psi (43 MPa) c. Minimum Flexural Strength tested per ASTM D-790 at 14 days: 10700

psi (74 MPa). d. Minimum Bond Strength tested per ASTM C-882 at 14 days:

1) Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete 2200 psi (13.8 Mpa). 2) Plastic Concrete to Steel 2000 psi (13.8Mpa).

e. Maximum Water Absorption, tested per ASTM D-570: 24 hour 0.27% f. Minimum Tensile properties tested per ASTM D-638: Tensile Strength

6900 psi (48 Mpa). 2. Products which may be considered as equal include the following, or

approved equal: a. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst NJ., product: “Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod Gel. b. Simpson Strong Tie, Pleasanton, CA., product “SET High Strength

Epoxy”. c. Symons Corporation, Des Plaines, IL., product “Rescon Gel anchor 304”.

B. Grout: Ready mixed, non-metallic high-strength controlled expansion grout of flowable consistency, conforming to ASTM C 1107 with minimum compressive strength of 8,000 pounds per square inch (55.2 MPa) at 28 days. 1. Products which may be considered as equal include the following, or

approved equal: a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield CT, product “Five Star Grout.” b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Omaha NE, Product: “Crystex.” c. BASF Construction Chemicals, Cleveland, OH., product “Masterflow

713”. d. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ., product “SikaGrout 212”. e. ChemMasters, Madison, OH., product “Conset”.

C. Metal paste filler: 2 component epoxy, high strength, structural adhesive putty: 1. Products which may be considered as equal include the following, or

approved equal: a. Abatron, Inc. Gilberts IL, product: “Ferrobond-P”. b. Dynatron/Bondo Corp., Atlanta, GA, product: “Bondo Plastic Filler”.



c. U.S. Chemical & Plastics Company., Massillon OH, product “Metal filled epoxy”.

D. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, field cuts, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Organic Zinc-Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to MIL-P-21035B (Reinstated) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements for Zinc-Rich Paints. 1. Specified manufacturer and product: ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield MA, product

“Galvilite”, or approved equal.

E. Primer for non-galvanized steel surfaces, modified alkyd rust-inhibitive, high solids primer: 1. Products which may be considered as equal include the following, or

approved equal: a. Benjamin Moore product: “Metal Primer KP14-70”, Gray Primer. b. Rust-Oleum: 6100, Gray Primer. c. Sherwin Williams: Kem Flash 500 Primer, Gray Primer E61A750. d. Tnemec: V10-1009 Gray Primer.

2.4 SCAFFOLDS AND STAGING

A. General: Filed Subcontractors shall obtain required permits for, and provide scaffolds, staging, and other similar raised platforms, required to access their Work as specified in Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS and herein. 1. Scaffolding and staging required for use by this Filed Subcontractor pursuant

to requirements of Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS shall be furnished, erected, maintained in a safe condition, and dismantled when no longer required, by this Filed Sub-Trade requiring such scaffolding.

2. Each Filed Subcontractor is responsible to provide, maintain and remove at dismantling, all tarpaulins and similar protective measures necessary to cover scaffolding for inclement weather conditions other than those required to be provided, maintained and removed by the General Contractor pursuant to MGL (Refer to Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS and as additionally required for dust control).

3. Furnishing portable ladders and mobile platforms of all required heights, which may be necessary to perform the work of this trade, are the responsibility this Filed Subcontractor.

2.5 HOISTING MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT

A. All hoisting equipment, rigging equipment, crane services and lift machinery required for the work by this Filed Subcontractor shall be furnished, installed, operated and maintained in safe conditions by this Filed Subcontractor, as referenced under Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

2.6 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines,



and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased.

B. Shop fabricate items wherever practicable, accurately fitting all parts and making all joints tight. Do not fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect.

C. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of anchor bolts and other hardware and for attachment of work by other trades. All such work shall be done prior to hot-dip galvanizing of the various components.

D. Grind all edges of bars and plates completely free from nicks and machine marks, prior to galvanizing and/or shop priming. 1. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces smooth, square and of surface quality

consistent with the approved mock up or samples (as appropriate). Comply with specified ANSI level requirements for AESS steel.

E. Grind all exposed-to-view welds completely smooth and flush to the surface plane of the base metals. Perform welding work prior to galvanizing in all cases, except where field welding is necessary, in which case, completely coat all such welds with two coats of specified liquid zinc coating, after performing grinding operations. 1. Finish welds on exposed to view components to comply with NOMMA's

"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

F. Use screws and bolts only where welding cannot be performed, of sufficient size to ensure against loosening from normal usage of miscellaneous metal items furnished hereunder. 1. Countersink all screw heads and bolt heads as far as practicable. Use not less

than two screw, bolts, or other anchorage items, at each connection point. 2. Draw up all threaded connections tightly, after buttering same with pipe joint

compound, to exclude water.

G. Provision for Thermal Movement: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Design, fabricate and install for temperature change range of 120 degrees F,

ambient temperature and 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

H. Carefully coordinate the installation of metal fabrications with the work of trades responsible for the installation of interfacing work, and for the installation of work into the various assemblies furnished hereunder, and permit the installation of the related materials to be made at the appropriate times.

I. Fit and assemble metal fabrications in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. 1. Galvanized assemblies: Where size of assembly is too large for galvanizing

kettle, galvanize components prior to fabrication and assemble after galvanizing.



2.7 FABRICATION - AESS

A. Designated AESS elements are assigned the following AESS Level per AISC Code of Practice, Latest Edition: 1. Column maintenance bases: AESS-3. 2. Support structure for Stair 5, including stringers and metal pan treads:

AESS-3.

B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, employ the following fabrication techniques: 1. Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate steel to one half the normal tolerance as

specified in the Code of Standard Practice Section 10. 2. Welds ground smooth: Fabricator shall grind welds of AESS smooth. For

groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces each side and be within plus 1/16 inch, minus 0 inch of plate thickness.

3. Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be ground-contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required and grind to provide a smooth transition and to match profile on approved mock-up.

4. Continuous Welds: Where welding is noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of a uniform size and profile.

5. Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed

6. connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with adjacent material.

7. Coping and Blocking Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8” ± 1/32” at all copes and blocks.

8. Joint Gap Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8” ± 1/32”. 9. Piece Marks Hidden: Fabricate such that piece marks are fully hidden in the

final structure or made with such media to permit full removal after erection. 10. Mill Mark Removal: Fabricator shall deliver steel with no mill marks (stenciled,

stamped, raised etc) in exposed locations. Mill marks shall be omitted by cutting of mill material to appropriate lengths where possible. Where not possible, the fabricator can fill and/or grind to a surface finish consistent with the approved mock up.

11. Grinding of sheared edges: Fabricator shall grind all edges of sheared, punched or flamecut steel to match approved samples.

12. Rolled Members: Member specified to be rolled to a final curved shape shall be fully shaped in the shop and tied during shipping to prevent stress relieving. Distortion of the web or stem, and of outstanding flanges or legs of angles shall be visibly acceptable to the Architect from a distance of 20’ under any lighting condition determined by the Architect. Tolerances for the vertical and horizontal walls of rectangular HSS members after rolling shall be the specified dimension plus or minus ½ inch.

13. Seal weld open ends of round and rectangular hollow structural section with 3/8 inch thick closure plates. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed to weather.



2.8 FABRICATION - STAIRS AND RAILINGS

A. Refer to the Drawings for location and details of steel stairs and railings (handrails and guardrails) to be furnished and installed hereunder. 1. Verify heights shown in Drawings comply with referenced codes and

regulations. 2. Verify field measurements with approved Shop Drawings prior to fabrication.

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Concrete pan filled stairs:

a. Egress stairs: NAAMM Stair Standard, Commercial class.

C. Performance requirements; conform to all requirements of those codes and regulations referenced under Section 01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS. 1. Stairs: Design, fabricate and install stairs to safely support a minimum live

load of 100 pounds per square foot and a concentrated load of 300 pounds on any area of four square inches as required under Section 1607 of the 2015 International Building Code with Massachusetts Building Code, Ninth Edition.

2. Railings: Design, fabricate and install all railings in a manner which will ensure the railings will be capable of withstanding loads as follows and as required under Section 1607 of the 2015 International Building Code with Massachusetts Building Code, Ninth Edition amendments.. a. Resist a load of 50 pounds per linear foot (0.73 kN/m) applied in any

direction at the top and to transfer load through railing supports to structure.

b. Resist a single concentrated load of 200 pounds (0.89kN) applied in any direction at any point along the top, and to transfer load through railing supports to structure. Concentrated loading requirements are not concurrent with other loading requirements.

c. Intermediate rails, balusters and panel fillers shall resist a horizontally applied load of 50 pounds (0.89 kN) on an area equal to 1 square foot (.093m2), including openings and space between rails. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed with loadings specified for top rail.

D. Sizes of all headers, stringers, and other structural members; and gauges and configurations of all riser tread and landing plates and pans, railings, stringers, and posts shall be as indicated on the approved shop drawings, and in accordance with the standards of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

E. General fabrication: Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. Indicate on shop drawings sizes of all members, gages and configurations of stairs and railings. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.



3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.

4. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

5. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

6. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 7. Weld connections to comply with the following:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise

indicated. e. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's

"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

8. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

9. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

10. Fabricate stringers of steel channels or tubes as indicated on Drawings. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and tube stringers

11. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

12. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 13. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board or shaft-wall assemblies, provide

hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

14. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

F. Fabrication, Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). 1. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where

they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 2. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same

as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

G. Fabrication, Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of



tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads and deflection criteria. 1. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections

to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. a. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards"

for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint. 2. Form changes in direction of railings as indicated on drawings, with radius

bends of radius indicated. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

3. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 4. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise

indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

5. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. a. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise

indicated.

2.9 FINISHES - HOT-DIP GALVANIZING

A. Surface preparation prior to galvanizing: Pickle steel prior to galvanizing in conformance with SSPC-SP8. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign matter.

B. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process. 1. Basis-of-Design: “Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA., product ”Duragalv.” 2. Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for bolts,

nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.

3. Wherever possible, perform galvanizing after assembly of items. 4. Galvanized items shall be straightened to remove all warpage and distortion

caused by the galvanization process. 5. Fill vent holes after galvanizing (if applicable), and grind smooth. 6. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or

undue abrasion with liquid zinc coating as specified herein above. Apply liquid zinc by brush or spray on all damaged areas in two coats to a total dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils. Apply first coat within two hours after damage to hot-dip film to prevent undue oxidation of exposed surface. On all welds remove weld spatter by power wire brushing or equivalent before applying liquid zinc coating. Repair material should extend at least 3 inches



beyond all edges of the damaged galvanized area as possible to assure continuity of galvanic protection.

7. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable.

2.10 FINISHES - SHOP APPLIED COATINGS

A. Schedule: Shop applied coatings as indicated on Drawings, and as additionally specified and scheduled in this Section.

B. For non-galvanized steel surfaces: 1. Surface preparation prior to priming: Thoroughly clean all steel of all loose mill

scale by power wire brushing or sandblasting. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign matter by wire-brushing or scraping (power wire-brushing, if necessary). Grind smooth any sharp projections.

2. Shop apply specified primers thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into the joints and other open areas on the surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats. Dry film thickness of primer shall be not less than 2.4 mils per coat.

C. For hot-dipped galvanized steel items scheduled for field applied painted finish: 1. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or

undue abrasion with liquid zinc coating as specified above under the Article entitle “Hot Dip Galvanizing”.

2. Factory-Applied Primer over Galvanized Steel: Provide factory-applied prime coat, certified OTC/VOC compliant less than 2.8 lbs/gal. and conforming to EPA and local requirements. Apply primer within 12 hours after galvanizing at the same galvanizer’s plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the primer coating manufacturer. Primer coat shall exhibit a rugosity (smoothness) not greater than 4 rug (16-20 microns of variation) when measured by a profilometer over a 1 inch straight line on the surface of architectural and structural elements that are less than 24 pounds per running foot. Profilometer shall be capable of operating in 1 micron increments. Blast cleaning of the surface is unacceptable for surface preparation. Primer shall have a minimum two year re-coat window for application of finish coat. Coatings must meet or exceed the following performance criteria as stipulated by the coatings manufacturer: a. Basis-of-Design: Primergalv by Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA. b. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 4060 (CS17 Wheel, 1,000 grams

load).1kg load, 200 mg loss. c. Adhesion: ASTM D4541, 1050 psi. d. Corrosion Weathering: ASTM D5894, 13 cycles, 4,368 hours; rating 10

per ASTM D714 for blistering and rating 7 per ASTM D610 for rusting. e. Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794, 160 in. lbs. f. Flexibility: Method: ASTM D522, 180 degree bend, 1 inch mandrel,

passes. g. Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, 3B. h. Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D4585, 100 degrees F, 2000

hours; passes, no cracking or delamination.



i. Dry Heat Resistance: Method: ASTM D2485, 250 degrees F. 3. Touch-up finish in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Provide touch-up such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.

D. For hot-dipped galvanized steel items scheduled for shop applied coating: 1. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or

undue abrasion with liquid zinc coating as specified above under the Article entitled “Hot Dip Galvanizing”, herein above.

2. Finish: Provide factory-applied architectural coating over hot-dip galvanized steel matching approved samples. a. Basis-of-Design: Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA., product “Colorgalv

10”. b. Primer coat shall be factory-applied. Apply primer within 12 hours after

galvanizing and within 3 hours of surface preparation at the same facility where the galvanizing is done in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the primer coating manufacturer. Primer must meet or exceed the criteria for the following categories as stipulated by the coatings manufacturer: 1) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D4060 (CS17 Wheel, 1,000 grams

load) 1kg load, 200 mg loss. 2) Adhesion: ASTM D4541, 1050 psi. 3) Corrosion Weathering: ASTM D5894, 13 cycles, 4,368 hours; rating

10 per ASTM D714 for blistering and rating 7 per ASTM D610 for rusting.

4) Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794, 160 in. lbs. 5) Flexibility: Method: ASTM D522, 180 degree bend, 1 inch mandrel,

passes. 6) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, 3B. 7) Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D4585, 100 degrees F,

2000 hours; passes, no cracking or delamination. 8) Dry Heat Resistance: Method: ASTM D2485, 250 degrees F.

c. Finish coat shall be factory-applied high performance architectural finish. Apply finish coating at the galvanizer’s plant, in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the finish coating manufacturer. Finish must meet or exceed the criteria for the following categories as stipulated by the coatings manufacturer: 1) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 4060, CS17 Wheel, 1,000 cycles

1kg load, 87.1 mg loss. 2) Adhesion: ASTM D4541, 1050 psi. 3) Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794, greater than 28 in.

pounds. 4) Indirect Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794, 12-14 in. pounds. 5) Dry Heat Resistance: ASTM D2485, 200 degrees F. 6) Salt Fog Resistance: ASTM B117 9,000 hours, rating 10 per ASTM

D714 for blistering. 7) Flexibility: ASTM D522, 180 degree bend, 1/8 inch mandrel,

passes. 8) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, 2H.



9) Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D4585, 100 degrees F, 1000 hours, no blistering or delamination.

10) Xenon Arc Test: ASTM D 4798, pass 300 hours. d. Coatings shall be certified VOC compliant and conform to applicable

regulations and EPA standards. Apply the galvanizing, primer and coating within the same facility and provide single-source responsibility for galvanizing, priming and finish coating. Blast cleaning of the galvanized surface is not acceptable.

3. Engage the services of a galvanizing facility which will assume single-source responsibility for galvanizing and finish coating. a. Touch-up finish in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Provide touch-up such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.

E. Field touch-up: Shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor and shall include the filling, and touch-up of exposed job made bolt or screw holes, refinishing of raw surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair of job inflicted scratches and marks, and final cleaning up of the finished surfaces. 1. Touch-up finishes shall be fully compatible with, and exactly match shop

applied finish, color, texture and sheen.










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION - GENERAL

A. General: Accurately set all work to established lines and elevations, and rigidly fasten in place with suitable attachments to the construction of the building. At the completion of the work, check all work, re-adjust as required, and leave in perfect condition. Grind all exposed to view welds smooth to the touch.

B. Setting bearing and leveling plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,

and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 2. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After

bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. a. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed

locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

C. Miscellaneous framing and supports: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and additional requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Anchor supports for operable partitions, and similar products, securely to and

rigidly braced to building structure.

3.2 FIELD WELDING

A. Field weld components indicated on approved shop drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1. Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with approved samples and mock-ups. 1. Welds ground smooth: Erector shall grind welds smooth in the connections of

AESS members. For groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces of each side and be within + 1/16”, -0” of plate thickness.

2. Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be ground contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required; grind to provide a smooth transition and to match profile on approved mock-up .

3. Continuous Welds: Where noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of a uniform size and profile.

4. Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with adjacent material.

B. Immediately after welding, touch-up welds, burned areas and damaged surface coatings. 1. Thoroughly remove all spatter by power wire-brushing (or if inaccessible, wire

brushing) per SSPC, surface preparation specification SP2 or SP3. Allow surface to cool to ambient temperature. Clean surface with solvent wipe to



remove oils, grease and dirt in accordance with SSPC surface preparation specification SP1.

2. Apply one coat of liquid zinc to attain a minimum of 1.5 mils dry film thickness. Coating should extend at least two inches beyond either side of weldment to ensure complete coverage of welded area.

3.3 FIELD BOLTING

A. Accurately drive all bolts into holes, protecting the bolt heads so as not to damage the thread during the driving. Ensure that bolt heads and nuts rest squarely against the metal. Where structural members have sloping flange faces, provide approved beveled washers at the bolted connections to afford square seating for bolt heads or nuts. Nick bolt threads for unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts from backing off. 1. Bolt Head Orientation: All bolt heads shall be oriented as indicated on the

contract documents. Where bolt-head alignment is specified, the orientation shall be noted for each connection on the erection drawings. Where not noted, the bolt heads in a given connection shall be oriented to one side.

B. Use an approved calibrated manual or power torque wrench to obtain the proper torque and tension as recommended by the bolt manufacturer for all ASTM A 325 bolts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STAIRS

A. Preparation: 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal

stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

2. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs.

B. Stair Installation: Construct and install stairs in strict accordance with the details, the approved shop drawings, and requirements of all codes, laws, and ordinances bearing on the work. Additionally comply with manufacturer's instructions for prefabricated stair systems, as applicable. Set stair units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from distortion or defects. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 2. Weld stair framing to steel structure or to cast-in-placed weld plates, unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size

limitations. a. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-

dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

4. General requirements for field welding: As specified herein above, and the following additional requirements: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength

and corrosion resistance of base metals.



b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

5. Stair installation tolerances: a. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for full height of stair. b. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3000 mm). c. Maximum Angular Variation of the Tread from True Position: 3 degrees.

C. Grouted baseplates (as applicable): 1. Clean cementitious bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen

to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. 2. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have

been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. a. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated. b. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no

voids remain.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS

A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loading. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves providing at least 1/2 inch

clearance around entire perimeter of post, preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. a. For setting into colored concrete; hold grout back 1/2 inch from finish

surface and fill void with Portland cement grout matching color and texture of adjacent surface.

b. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus grout, and leave 1/8" build-up, sloped away from post.

2. Anchor posts to steel with steel flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting members.

3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round steel flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts.

4. Anchor rail ends to steel with round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into concrete. Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.



B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure rails to walls with wall brackets, wall return fittings and anchor plates, in a manner required to meet code requirements, and as follows: 1. Each bracket shall be fastened with not less than 2 bolts. 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield

and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 4. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel

framing or concealed anchors to steel reinforcing plate, using bolts of size and type required to support structural loads.

5. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood blocking or backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of blocking or backing members.

3.6 TOUCH-UP

A. Touch-up all welds, burned areas, scratches, abrasions, on galvanized metals, using specified liquid zinc coating.

B. Touch-up all welds, scratches, abrasions, and other surface damaged on shop-primed or painted metals, using the same coatings as specified under shop applied finishes, herein above.

3.7 SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULES

A. General: Items listed herein below provide further description of those already indicated in the Drawings. This list does not represent a complete list of miscellaneous metal components or types required to complete the Work. 1. Carefully review all Drawings and furnish and install metal fabrications

required by the various trades, whether or not specifically listed herein, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings, reasonably implied therefrom, or reasonably necessary for the thorough completion of the work.

B. Steel pan stair and related support components, as detailed on the Drawings and specified herein above.

C. Railings (guardrails and handrails), as detailed on the Drawings. Connections and sizing to conform to engineering and code requirements specified herein above.

D. Fencing, as detailed on the Drawings.

E. Lintels: As scheduled on Structural Drawings. 1. Provide lintels 12 inches longer than masonry openings. Where lintel abuts

column, provide structural clip connection. 2. All lintels shall be galvanized in conformance with the requirements of ASTM

A 143, and ASTM A 123. End of Section



THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - page 1 of 3

Section 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of building insulation where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Work includes, but is not limited to the following scope.

B. Furnish and install the following: 1. Rigid insulation below slab and at interior perimeter of foundation walls of

toilet room.


A. Section 07 26 00 - VAPOR RETARDERS: 1. Vapor barrier, seam tape, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under

concrete slabs.

B. Section 07 53 23 - ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING: roof insulation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. ASTM C 203 - Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block Type Thermal

Insulation. 2. ASTM C 518 - Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow

Meter. 3. ASTM C 578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 4. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 5. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750ºC. 6. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. ASTM E 96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 8. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for

thermal insulation.

B. Definitions: 1. The term "R-Value" referred to herein refers to the thermal resistance of the

insulation alone and does not allow consideration of air spaces or other factors.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications,

performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder.


A. General: Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction.



submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. 2. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand

name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.


procedures, and in accordance with material safety data sheets. 2. Protect materials from damage due to moisture, direct sunlight, excessive


C. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in packages containing water marks, or show evidence of mold.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Under-slab and foundation insulation, rigid extruded polystyrene insulation: Closed cell foam board, square edge, conforming to ASTM C 578, Type IV, with a compressive strength of 25 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. 1. Panel size: 48 by 96 inches beneath slab, and 24 by 96 inches at verticals. 2. Minimum R-value: 5 per inch thickness. 3. Acceptable products include but are not limited to:

a. Dow Chemical Corp., product, Styrofoam Brand “Square Edge” b. Owens Corning, product “Foamular 250”. c. Kingspan Insulation LLC, product “GreenGuard Type IV 25 PSI

Insulation Board”. d. DiversiFoam Products, product “CertiFoam 25 SE”.



2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Staples, tape, adhesives and fasteners required for the proper and complete installation for work of this Section shall be as recommended by each respective manufacturers of each insulation type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and project

conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Insulation beneath slabs-on-grade and interior side of foundation walls: 1 inch thick rigid insulation. 1. Place insulation boards at the exterior perimeter of foundation walls and

beneath slabs-on grade. a. At inside perimeter of foundation walls, extend insulation from slab to

bottom of foundation wall. b. Beneath slabs-on-grade, extend insulation to provide 100 percent

coverage beneath slab. 2. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent boards. Bevel insulation to allow snug fit

at cants. 3. Place soil as a perimeter restraint to minimize movement of insulation.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 73 00 – EXECUTION.

B. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris, and scraps.

C. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition.

End of Section



ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 53 23 - page 1 of 15

Section 07 53 23 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Pressure preservative treated solid wood and plywood blocking required for

the work of this Section 07 53 23. 2. Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) single ply membrane roofing

system. 3. Tapered insulation beneath the roofing work of this Section. 4. Overlayment board above insulation. 5. Flashing at all penetrations through the roofing system and at all materials

which abut roofing system. 6. Walkway pads leading from roof access point to each rooftop mechanical unit

and at work areas surrounding rooftop units.

B. Provide field testing of fasteners.

C. Provide Infrared survey of completed roof assembly, performed by independent third party testing agency hired by the Contractor, Comply with requirements of Section 01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL.

D. Provide manufacturer’s pre-construction and final inspection as specified herein. These inspections are to be included in the base bid; additional inspections, or work incurred as a result of the final inspection shall be without additional cost to the Owner. 1. Work of this Section additional includes providing Owner assistance in the

preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended insurance coverage of roofing and associated work.


A. Section 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING (refer to notes on Drawings).

B. Section 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: Break Metal flashing, trim, scuppers, and downspouts.

C. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Sealants other than those specified in this Section 07 53 23.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.



1. ASTM C1177: Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

2. ASTM D4637: Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof Membrane

1. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.

2. FM Roof Assembly classifications and loss prevention requirements contained in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29, and 1-31.

3. UL Fire Resistance Directory. 4. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for fire-

resistance roof ratings.

B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, latest printing.



responsible for installing interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequence of installation, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.

B. Scheduling: 1. Notify manufacturer's representative 48 hours in advance for deck

acceptance. Plan the lay-up of roofing membrane with respect to deck slope; avoid situations where excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing.

2. The Roofing applicator shall maintain communication with roofing manufacturer’s representative to inform of progress and to schedule period sample testing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.

2. Manufacturer's specimen warranties: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof.

3. Certification: a. Manufacturer's certification stating that roofing materials comply with

specified ASTM and referenced trade standards. b. Manufacturer's written certification stating that roofing and insulation

products and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section and that all FM and



Underwriters Laboratories (UL) fire-resistive requirements for the indicated Labels have been met.

c. Submit roof manufacturer's certification that insulation fasteners and insulation furnished is acceptable to roofing manufacturer as a component of roofing system and is eligible for roof manufacturer's system warranty.

4. Review statement: Written statement, signed by the roofing applicator, stating that the Contract Drawings have been reviewed by an agent of the roofing system manufacturer; accompanied by a pre-installation written statement from the manufacturer that the selected roof system is proper, compatible, and adequate for the application shown. a. The roofing applicator will notify the Architect and Owner in writing if the

existing conditions when exposed are in conflict with the Contract Documents for the proper application of the selected roofing system or the warranty requirements.

5. Project roofing superintendent’s resume and project experience list for similar installations.

6. Shop drawings: a. Setting plans for roofing insulation, thickness and direction of slopes. b. Fully dimensioned 1/4-inch scale plans of roof. Plans shall show changes

in level, key locations of details, all roof penetrations, roof slopes and direction of slope. Indicate on plans areas of proposed staging and material storage on roof.

c. Large scale design details, minimum of 1-1/2 inch per foot scale, showing perimeter flashing conditions and penetrations. Details shall show dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project and reflect actual conditions; manufacturer’s standard preprinted details will not be accepted as substitute for shop drawings.

7. Verification samples: a. Provide 8-1/2 by 11 inch samples of roofing membrane and membrane

flashing materials. b. Provide 12 inch long samples of membrane batten. c. Provide 12 inch long samples of each metal flashing type. d. Furnish additional samples are requested by the Architect.

B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Manufacturer’s field quality control reports of field inspections, including,

revised “as-built” shop drawings and manufacturer’s final punch list. 2. Manufacturer’s warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Roofing manufacturer, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.

B. Roofing Subcontractor/installer: Minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and certified



by the roofing system manufacturer as trained and qualified to install the specified manufacturer's roofing materials.

C. Roofing Subcontractor/installer’s supervisor/foreman: minimum of 5 years documented experience of the type specified herein, and trained by product manufacturer. 1. Installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman on the job site for all

phases of roofing work and at all times when roofing work is in progress.


A. Single source: Obtain products required for the Work of this Section from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of roofing system membrane. 1. All roofing materials shall be provided and approved by the roof system

manufacturer. Any materials not manufactured or provided by manufacturer shall have written approval from the manufacturer stating the materials are acceptable and are compatible with the other materials and systems required.

B. Manufacturer’s On-site Inspections: Make arrangements to have Manufacturer’s representative (employed by manufacturer) be present on-site during the Work of this Section at key points at no additional cost to the Owner, which include, but are not limited to: 1. Pre-installation conference. 2. Review of installation procedures (a minimum of 2 site visits are required). 3. Final inspection at the completion of the project to insure, that the project has

been completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Upon approval and acceptance of the project, then a manufacturer's warranty certification shall be written, executed and furnished to the Owner.

C. Submit Manufacturer’s field quality control reports of field inspections, including, revised “as-built” shop drawings and manufacturer’s final punch list.

D. UL listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" for application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof slopes shown.

E. Fire performance characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

F. The roof system manufacturer’s Technical Specifications shall be considered a part of this specification and should be used as a reference for specific application procedures and recommendations. Where a conflict does exist between the manufacturer’s written specifications and those procedures specified in this Section, the more stringent requirements meeting the Manufacturer’s minimum requirements for the provided warranty shall apply. 1. Roofing subcontractor shall provide at no additional cost to this contract, all

additional labor and materials to conform to manufacturer’s required installation procedures which are necessary to provide a total roofing system



which is in full compliance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements, including additional materials, installation procedures, manufacturer’s inspections, sample testing and other requirements.

2. Maintain clean and easily accessible copy of the roof system manufacturer’s Technical Specifications on-site at all times during roofing work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with labels and package seals intact and legible.

B. Store all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Store rolled goods on clean, raised platforms. Store other materials in dry areas, protected from water and direct sunlight.

C. Do not expose stored curable roofing materials and accessories, including uncured flashing, adhesives, sealant and pourable sealer, to a constant temperature in excess of 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Provide continuous protection of stored materials against deterioration for duration of project.

E. Store insulation on dunnage and completely cover with a water-resistant breathable material. Provide weights to prevent wind damage to insulation.

F. Distribute any materials stored on roof levels for immediate use to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive strain on deck or structural members. Protect roof stored materials to prevent displacement by the wind and protect from exposure to inclement weather and sun.

G. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, or show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply roofing in dry weather; do not install roofing in inclement weather or when precipitation is predicted with greater than 20 percent possibility.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.

C. Apply roofing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Deliver to the Owner upon completion of the work of this Section, an unconditional warranty, on the work of this Section agreeing to promptly repair the roofing as necessary to prevent penetration of water through it. 1. Warranty shall cover product quality, performance, and workmanship for a

period of 25 years. 2. Warranty shall cover total roofing system including membrane, insulation,

adhesives, sealant, fasteners, membrane flashings, and other materials furnished and installed under this Section.



3. Warranty shall provide coverage for uplift created by maximum wind speed of 72 miles per hour (measured 10 meters above grade).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Carlisle Syntec, Carlisle PA. 2. Firestone Building Products Co., LLC, Indianapolis, IN. 3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems, Denver, CO. 4. Mule-Hide Products Company, Inc., Beloit WI.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fully adhered Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) roofing system, including insulation and substrate, shall meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Hazard Classification “Class A” roof.

B. Performance Requirements 1. Wind Loading: Panels and installation shall be designed to conform to

Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition, (780 CMR 1609) for basic wind speed of 112 miles per hour (3 second gust).

2. Above-deck roof components shall be designed and installed in accordance with requirements of FM 1-29 for performance requirements specified above.

C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Roofing system, including insulation and substrate, shall meet Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. Fire Hazard Classification “Class A” roof. 2. Refer to applicable building codes for roofing system installation requirements

and limitations. When a conflict exists, the more restrictive document will govern.

2.3 ROOFING MATERIALS

A. EPDM membrane: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D4637. 1. Membrane total thickness: 0.075 inches having minimum 0.032 inch

membrane thickness over scrim. 2. Thickness tolerance, min. ± 10 percent ASTM D 751

3. Elongation, minimum

500 percent ASTM D 412, Die C.

4. Breaking Strength, minimum

177 lbf. ASTM D 751.

5. Tearing Strength, minimum

70 lbf. ASTM D 751, B – Tongue Tear.

6. Brittleness point, maximum -49 degrees F. ASTM D 2137



7. Heat Aging Resistance Pass minimum std. ASTM D 573

8. Ozone Resistance No cracks ASTM D 1149

9. Ultraviolet Resistance No cracks No crazing

ASTM G155, minimum 3,000 hours.

B. Sheet seaming system: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges.

C. Cant strips, tapered edge strips and flashing accessories: Types recommended by manufacturer of EPDM material, provided at locations indicated and at locations recommended by manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealant.

D. Flashing material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with flexible sheet membrane.

E. Membrane adhesive: As recommended by EPDM membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and project conditions, formulated to withstand min. 60 psf uplift force.

F. Overlayment (recovery) board: 1/2 inch thick complying with ASTM C 1177 and FM 4450, Class I, non structural glass mat faced, noncombustable, water-resistant treated gypsum core panel. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Subject to compliance with the

requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: a. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge PA., product: “GlasRoc Roof

Board” b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products, Atlanta, GA, product: “DensDeck

Prime Roof Board”. c. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL, product: “Securock Glass-

Mat Roof Board”.

2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. General: Insulation shall be approved by the roof manufacturer, and shall be UL listed and FM approved. 1. Roof insulation is included as a system component under the specified “Total

System” warranty and therefore shall either be furnished by the roofing manufacturer or be otherwise in compliance with the requirements of the roof system warranty

B. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to acceptance of roofing manufacturer and the following specification requirements: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation, Atlanta, GA. 2. The Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI. 3. Hunter Panels, Portland ME. 4. Johns Manville Roofing System, Denver, CO. 5. Carlisle Syntec, Carlisle PA.



6. Firestone Building Products Co., LLC, Indianapolis, IN.

C. Polyisocyanurate foam insulation manufactured with HCFC-free blowing agent and bonded to glass fiber reinforced facers on top and bottom surfaces during the manufacturing process. Insulation shall conform to property requirements of ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2. 1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) R-value per inch (as determined by

ASTM C1289-14a, or later): R = 5.6 per inch. 2. Thickness as indicated on Drawings. 3. Density: 2.0 pounds per cubic foot (ASTM D-1622). 4. Compressive strength: 20 psi (ASTM D1621). 5. Moisture vapor transmission: Less than 1 perm (ASTM E-96). 6. Water absorption: Less than 1 percent per volume (ASTM C209). 7. Provide factory-tapered insulation system as required to meet elevations and

slopes shown on drawings or as required by membrane manufacturer, which ever is more stringent. Provide cants and crickets at drains as necessary.

2.5 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER MATERIALS

A. Pressure preservative treated solid lumber for blocking, nailers and curbs as indicated or required: Hem Fir, Douglas Fir, Eastern Spruce, Eastern Hemlock, or Southern Pine, surfaced dried stud or utility grade. Wood members shall be of sizes indicated on the Drawings or of the same size as the members being braced. 1. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and

cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

B. Pressure preservative treated plywood for unspecified exterior applications (including plywood blocking, nailers, and backing for roofing and flashing work) : APA graded B-C, Exposure 1, EXT, Group 1 species, 5 ply/5 layer plywood, touch-sanded, thickness as indicated on approved shop drawings.

C. Pressure Preservative Treatment (PT): 1. General: Treated wood products shall be produced by a single treatment

plant, fully licensed by the chemical manufacturers, and conforming to the requirements specified herein. a. Toxicity and Environmental Quality:

1) Products containing chromium will not be permitted. 2) Products containing arsenic will not be permitted.

b. Kiln dry all treated lumber and plywood to the following maximum moisture content after treatment. 1) Lumber: 19 percent. 2) Plywood 15 percent. 3) Discard pieces with defects which might impair quality of work.

c. Quality marks: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be permanently affixed with a quality mark, containing the following information:



1) Identification of the inspection agency. 2) Standard to which material was treated. 3) Identification of the treating plant. 4) Preservative treated wood shall include: Retention and end use for

which product is suitable. 2. Pressure preservative treated wood. Designated as “PT”

a. Chemical Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, Products which may be incorporated in the work include: 1) Osmose, Inc., Griffin GA., product “NatureWood”. 2) Universal Forest Products, Inc., Grand Rapids MI., product

“ProWood ACQ”. 3) Viance, LLC., Charlotte, NC., product “Preserve”

b. Treatment: Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound (ACQ), arsenic-free and chromium-free chemical “ACQ Preservative” in accordance with AWPA Standards. Apply the preservative in a closed cylinder by pressure process in accordance with AWPA Standard C15. 1) Minimum preservative retention for floor plates, framing, lumber and

plywood above ground use: 0.25 pounds per cubic foot (4.0 kg/m3) of ACQ chemical, in accordance with AWPA UC1, UC2, UC3A, and UC3B, or NER-643 as appropriate.

2) Minimum preservative retention for framing, lumber and plywood in contact with water, ground, concrete and masonry: 0.40 pounds per cubic foot (6.4 kg/m3) of ACQ chemical, in accordance with AWPA UC4A, UC4B, UC4C, or NER-643 as appropriate.

3) Minimum preservative retention for lumber and plywood in permanent wood foundations: 0.60 pounds per cubic foot (9.6 kg/m3) of ACQ chemical, in accordance with AWPA UC4B, or NER-643.

c. Fixation of Chemical: Treated wood shall not be shipped from treatment plant until fixation of the preservative has occurred in the wood.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding adhesive shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive shall be compatible with all materials to which the elastomeric membrane is to be bonded.

B. Splicing cement and inseam sealant shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Lap sealant for sealing the exposed edge of the splices shall be trowel on gun consistency as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

D. Water cutoff mastic shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

E. Night sealer shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

F. Pourable sealer for penetration pockets, preparation of decking and wall substrates shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.



G. Prefabricated elastomeric accessories (pipe seals, inside and outside comers) shall be as manufactured and recommended by membrane manufacturer.

H. Termination bars: Minimum 1/8 inch thick extruded aluminum, of channel profile with 1/4-inch legs and minimum 1 inch width. Termination bar shall be factory punched to accept fasteners 4 inches on-center. Install with stainless steel screw fasteners.

I. Masonry fasteners: Round head stainless steel screw and neoprene washer with lead expansion anchor as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Manufacturers offering masonry fastener products which may be considered equal, include the following: 1. Dur-O-Wal Inc., Dayton, OH. 2. Hilti Corporation, Tulsa OK. 3. Rawlplug by the Rawlplug Company, Inc., New Rochelle NY.

J. Fasteners: Austenitic stainless steel or steel fastener with fluorocarbon coating. Minimum thread diameter 0.22 inches and minimum shank diameter of 0.172 inches. The fastener must have 11 threads per inch and a 30° spade.

K. Miscellaneous materials: Best grade or quality approved by the roofing manufacturer for the specific application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section.

B. Verify edge nailers, curbs and penetrations are in place prior to roofing, so that the roof system can be installed as continuously as possible.

C. Verify the roof deck, and related surfaces are clean, smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, and suitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.

E. Any condition requiring correction or completion shall be corrected or completed prior to the installation of the roofing system Notify Contractor of unacceptable conditions.

F. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

G. Verify sizing of existing roof drain plumbing.

H. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. During the operation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.

B. Where surface joints at roof and wall substrates exceed 1/4-inch width, fill flush with surface with pourable sealer before proceeding with the installation.

3.3 EMERGENCY MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

A. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of new roofing system. Do not leave unfinished roof areas uncovered over-night or during inclement weather. 1. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces. 2. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position

with weights or temporary fasteners. 3. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities. 4. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface.

B. Maintain on site equipment and materials necessary to apply emergency temporary coverage in the event of sudden storms or inclement weather.

C. Do not install more insulation than can be covered by roofing system in the same workday. Do not apply more roofing than can be properly fastened and sealed in the same workday. Ensure that water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the roofing system, provide temporary closures.

D. Roofing Subcontractor is fully responsible for all damage due to water penetration occurring during the Work of this Section.


A. The entire work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to trades involved.

B. Follow local, state and federal regulations, safety standards and codes. When a conflict exists, the more restrictive document shall govern.

C. Follow insurance underwriter’s requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems.

D. Review all special conditions, such as at projections, at connections to sheet metal gravel stops, flashings with the Roofing Manufacturer, submit the Roofing Manufacturer’s recommendations and details to the Architect for approval.

E. Special Cautions: 1. Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement. 2. Do not subject elastomeric materials to contact with petroleum, grease, oil,

solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, nor animal fat. Prevent contact with hot pipes, and ducts.



3. Cements and bonding adhesive contain petroleum distillates and are extremely volatile and flammable. Avoid breathing vapors and do not use near fire or flame.

4. Ensure that splicing and bonding surfaces are dry during installation.

3.5 INSTALLATION - ROOF NAILERS AND BLOCKING

A. General: Provide anchorage for nailers as required for roof and edging to obtain specified wind loading requirements. 1. Secure nailers and blocking to metal deck with electro-galvanized screws at

not greater than 12 inch on center spacing, extending a minimum of 3/4-inch below deck.

2. Secure nailers and blocking to wood substrates with electro-galvanized screws at not greater than 12 inch on center spacing, extending a minimum of 1-1/2 inch into board substrates and 3/4 inches into sheet materials.

B. When building up layers of nailers and blocking, fully secure each layer to at least the one below, alternating location of fasteners, spacing at 12 inches on center. Provide fasteners in lengths to penetrate through more than one substrate layer of blocking. Stagger locations of butt ends of boards, such that no two joints are “lined up”.

C. Ensure finished height of nailers is same as top surface of roof insulation within 1/4-inch, plus or minus.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Place the constant thickness insulation of first layer and the subsequent tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated by membrane manufacturer; but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area, or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28”. 1. Test fasteners for pull-out resistance as specified herein below under FIELD

QUALITY CONTROL; report findings to Architect and roofing manufacturer.

C. Install recovery board butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps greater than 1/4 inch shall be filled with the same material. Mechanical fasten through insulation directly to decking, in accordance with roof manufacturer’s instructions and additional requirements for specified warranty.

3.7 MEMBRANE ADHERED INSTALLATION

A. Apply adhesive at a rate of 60 square feet per gallon in manner recommended by manufacturer.

B. Roll out membrane and allow it to relax. Inspect sheet for defects as it is being rolled out. Align sheet to that it overlaps the previous sheet by the lap width recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches.



C. Fold membrane back on itself and coat the bottom side of the sheet and the top side of the deck with adhesive. Avoid getting adhesive in the lap joint area.

D. After adhesive has been allowed to set in accordance with the manufacturers requirements, roll the membrane into the adhesive, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. Firmly press sheet into place without stretching.

E. Bond sheet to substrate except those areas directly over or within 3 inches of a control or expansion joint.

F. Clean and dry splice joint areas of both membrane sheets. Apply splicing cement as recommended by manufacturer, and seal joint permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint splice.

G. Provide additional membrane securement at the perimeter of roof, at expansion joints, curbs, skylights, and similar roof top penetrations, at interior wall and penthouse perimeter s, and at any angle change which exceeds 2 inches in on horizontal foot. 1. Install continuous reinforcement strips 3 inches to 6 inches from inside and

outside corners where additional membrane securement is required and where recommended by roofing manufacturer. Secure reinforcement strips with 2 -inch diameter aluminum or stainless steel seam fastening plates; space fastening plates not greater than 12 inches on center.

2. Install reinforcement strips either horizontally into deck or vertically into curbs as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

3. Cement EPDM flashing over installed fastening plates and reinforcement strips as recommended by roofing manufacturer, and in no case provide flashing of less than 6 inches in width, and at ends of flashing, provide a minimum 2 inch splice from edge of plate/strip.

H. Extend membrane up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces.

I. Install termination bars with screw fasteners and EPDM or neoprene washers, located 6 inches on center. Install roofing manufacturer’s recommended sealant along top and bottom edges of termination bar.

J. Seal membrane around roof penetrations.

K. Walkway protection: Install additional membrane at locations shown and where required for access to roof-mounted equipment. 1. Clean roofing membrane and fully adhere walkway pads as recommended by

manufacturer’s instructions.

L. Provide daily night seal at loose edges to prevent water flow beneath finished roofing. 1. Mix sealer components as instructed by manufacturer. Apply at rate of 1

gallon/100 linear foot, 12 inch. back from sheet edges on exposed substrate. 2. Embed membrane in sealer and apply continuous pressure with 2-1/2 inch

tubing filled with sand. Pull sheet free before continuing permanent installation.



3.8 INSTALLATION - ELASTOMERIC FLASHINGS

A. Elastomeric Flashings. Provide elastomeric sheet flashings at elastomeric sheet roofing work, as indicated. 1. Use longest practical lengths and widths of elastomeric sheet flashing material

to eliminate or minimize joints. Complete splices between flashings and main-roof sheet before bonding flashings to vertical surfaces. Splices shall be sealed 3 inches beyond fasteners that attach membrane to horizontal nailer in same manner as splices within roofing membrane. Flashings shall be bonded 100 percent to subsurfaces, except at coves where movement is anticipated. a. Install flexible tube at coves where movement is anticipated.

2. Apply bonding adhesive to flashing and surface to which it is being bonded. When bonding adhesive has dried to the point where it does not string or stick to a dry finger touch, roll flashing into adhesive. Do not bridge flashing at changes of direction.

3. Nail top of flashing 12 inches on center under sheet metal copings, counter flashing, and other sheet metal work.

4. Expansion Joints: Treat expansion joints as indicated in expansion joint manufacturer’s standard details and published instructions for specific conditions.

5. Sheet metal copings, fascias, gravel stops, and flashings will be furnished and installed under Section 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.


A. General: Field inspections will be performed under the provisions of Section 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL.

B. Roofing Subcontractor to correct all deficiencies in roof as determined by roof sample analysis and as prescribed by roof system manufacturer. Should additional samples be required, these cost will be borne by the roofing applicator.

C. Fastener Pull-out testing. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, obtain a independent testing agency approved by the Architect for each separate roofing area pull out resistance. Report findings to Architect and the roofing manufacturer. Perform testing per ANSI/SPRI FX-1-2001 - Standard Field Test Procedure for Determining the Withdrawal Resistance of Roofing Fasteners, without additional cost to the Contract. 1. Testing frequency: Ten tests per initial 10,000 square feet (or less) and one

additional pullout for each additionally 5,000 square feet, or portion thereof for each section of roof.

D. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, obtain a independent testing agency approved by the Architect and test six fasteners for each separate roofing area pull out resistance. Report findings to Architect and the roofing manufacturer. Perform testing without additional cost to the Contract.

E. Owner’s testing: At the owner's discretion, he/she may engage a testing agency to perform testing of the roofing assembly, including but not limited to the following: 1. Infrared imaging of the roofing assembly 2. Moisture content testing of roofing materials



F. As-built Infra-red Survey: Perform survey in compliance with ASTM C1153 - Standard Practice for Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing Systems. 1. Schedule test for “cool, clear night following a warm, sunny day.”

G. Provide final visual inspection of the Work by Manufacturer’s technical representative and his/her written approval of installation, as precondition for issuance of Manufacturer’s warranty. 1. Assignment of the responsibilities of the Manufacturer’s technical

representative to a contractor or other agent is prohibited.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove elastomeric adhesive markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced, or disfigured finishes caused by the work of this Section.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Provide special protection or avoid traffic on completed work. Contractor is responsible to restore to original condition, or replace, work and roofing materials damaged by work of other trades.

End of Section



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - page 1 of 7

Section 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Aluminum flashing. 2. Continuous formed aluminum fascia (coping and roof edge). 3. Stainless steel scuppers. 4. Cap flashings, in conjunction with roofing system sheet membrane base

flashings. 5. Sealant in conjunction with sheet metal work specified herein.


A. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY: Installation of flashing at masonry.

B. Section 07 53 23 – ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING: 1. Sheet membrane flashings for flanges of curbs, and sheet membrane roofing

and flashing system. 2. Factory fabricated and finished roof edging.

C. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Sealant and backing material not specified herein.

D. Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical and electrical items protruding through roofing: By respective trade sections furnishing same.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 2. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum Alloy, Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM B 221 - Specification for Aluminum Extrusions. 4. ASTM D 226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing. 5. ASTM D 2178 - Asphalt Impregnated Glass Mat for Roofing and

Waterproofing. 6. FS QQ-S-766D – Steel Plates, Sheets and Strip, Corrosion Resisting.



B. Inclusionary References: The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 7th Edition (January 2012),

referred to herein as “Sheet Metal Manual”. 2. NRCA - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of flashings and sheet metal work with the various

trades responsible for installing interfacing materials, and install the work at appropriate times so as not to delay the progress of related work

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's data sheets for each metal type and accessories

furnished hereunder, include material specifications, performance data, physical properties and finishes.

2. Certification: Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with the specified requirements for the use indicated.

3. Shop drawings: a. Fully dimensioned large scale design details showing material profiles,

splices, flashing terminations and other jointing details, fastening methods and installation details. Indicate material type, sizes, and weights or gages. Indicate extent of adjacent work specified under other Sections of the Specifications.

b. Fully detail methods of relieving stresses due to thermal movement, including sealing of expansion seams.

c. All details bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project.

4. Selection Samples: a. Metal sample chips, indicating Manufacturer's full range of finish colors

for factory finishes available for selection by Architect. b. Manufacturer's sample boards for sealant colors.

5. Verification Samples: a. 12 inch long samples of formed fascia, gutters and downspouts.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Manufacturer’s warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and

resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture.


A. Company specializing in fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing work with minimum 5 years documented experience.



B. Flashing and sheet metal applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer.


A. Store preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide the following warranties under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide sufficient quantity of each color finish coat material, for field touch-up work after erection, and pack the additional coating materials with the components to be furnished hereunder.

B. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet aluminum, having a minimum thickness as specified herein below, for the applications indicated: 1. General exposed-to-weather flashings and trim: 0.050 inch thick. 2. Copings: 0.063 inch thick.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 302/304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface and having 2D Finish (dull, cold rolled).having a minimum thickness as specified herein below, for the applications indicated: 1. Scuppers, 20 gage (0.038 inch) thick.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Non-perforated, Nº. 15 (73 kg/sq m) asphalt impregnated building felt, (applied in two layers).

B. Flashing cement: Trowel grade, composed of selected asphalt, solvents, and non-asbestos fillers, conforming to FS SS-C-153 Type 1, ASTM D 2822, Type 1 and ASTM D 4586, Type 1 (Non-asbestos) as manufactured by Karnak Chemical Corporation, product Nº. 19 “Flashing Cement” , or equal as manufactured by Koch Materials Company, J & P Petroleum Products Company or other approved manufacturer.

C. Nails shall not be smaller than Nº.2 of 12 stub gauge (1.109 inches), with large flat heads, and of sufficient length to penetrate the wood nailers a minimum of 7/8-inch. Nails shall be stainless steel.



D. Screws: Stainless steel wood screws, of sizes most appropriate for the specific application, and equipped with soft neoprene washers.

E. Joint Sealer (Polyurethane 1-component): Low modulus single component gun-grade polyurethane sealant, non-sagging, conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 35, Grade NS, use NT,M, A and O with a minimum movement capability of ±35 percent, equal to the following: 1. BASF (Sonneborn), product “Sonolastic NP1”. 2. Sika, product “Sikaflex 1a”. 3. Tremco, product “Vulkem 116 FC”, or “Dymonic 100”.

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

G. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.


A. Form flashings as required, or to profiles indicated on the Drawings, to protect materials from physical damage and shed water.

B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. To the greatest extent applicable, fabricate sheet metal components in shop, and thoroughly clean all joints on both sides of the sheet metal work.

C. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. 1. Coated / finished metals: Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant

unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use 2. Uncoated / unfinished aluminum: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam

sealer. Rivet joints where recommended by referenced SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

3. Natural “Red” Copper and Lead Coated Copper: Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Stainless steel (Uncoated / unfinished) and Tin/Zinc coated copper: Form seams, and solder.

E. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, with flat lock seams. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/4 inch, miter and seam corners.

F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, solder for rigidity, seal with sealant.

G. General: Fabricate custom formed gravel stop / roof edge in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 7th Edition, Chapter 2, and as additionally detailed on the Drawings.



2.4 FINISHES

A. Stainless steel sheet, Mil rolled Number 2D finish.

B. Aluminum coping: Factory-Coil-applied polyvinylidene fluoride enamel finish system equal to PPG Industries, Product: “Duranar”, or approved equal, applied as follows, in color selected by Architect from manufacturers’ full range. 1. Prime all surfaces with a corrosion resistant, epoxy-based primer compatible

with finish coating, minimum 2.0 mils dry film thickness, fully oven-cured. 2. Provide a finish coating of polyvinylidene fluoride enamel on all exposed

surfaces, including all exposed screws, fastenings, with a minimum coating of 1.0 to 1.3 mills. dry film thickness.

3. Provide a clear top coating of polyvinylidene fluoride enamel on all exposed surfaces, including all exposed screws, fastenings, with a minimum coating of 1.0 to 1.3 mills. dry film thickness.

4. Ensure that all coatings, proposed to be applied hereunder, are compatible with the receiving substrate material for each condition, thoroughly clean, and treat aluminum by chromate process.

C. Aluminum components not indicated for enamel or color finish: Mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place and nailing strips located.

B. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to which this work is to be applied.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabrication.

B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations where approved by Architect.

E. Cleat and seam all joints. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings, asphalt shingle roofing or asphalt roll roofing.

F. Seal all metal joints watertight.

G. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with dampproofing mastic where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.



H. During the installation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Except as otherwise shown on the reviewed shop drawings or specified herein, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method for forming joints anchoring, cleating, provisions for thermal movement, shall conform to the standard details and recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer organizations and research institutions and associations concerning the sheet metal used, in addition to the standards and details set forth in the referenced materials specified this Section.

B. Face nailing will not be permitted, concealed cleating or other concealed method must be used to attach sheet metal work to structure.

C. Ensure that fastenings do not exceed 8 inches on centers. Use flat head fasteners throughout, and seal all fastener heads after installation thereof.

D. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant material, removing all excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces immediately, to prevent staining the finish.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CAP FLASHINGS

A. Provide cap flashing in connection with all base flashings.

B. At new masonry: Extend 4 inches into masonry with rear edge turned up 1 inch behind first brick course. Apron shall be of sufficient width to overlap base flashing at least 3 inches. Horizontal joint between adjacent pieces shall be set in plastic cement and overlap at least 3 inches. 1. Rake joint in masonry a depth of 1 inch. Extend flashing into raked out joint

with rear edge bent back on itself. Secure with lead wedges spaced not more than 8 inches apart.

2. Overlap horizontal joints between adjacent pieces at least 3 inches and set in plastic cement.

3.5 INSTALLATION - COPING COVERS

A. Use sheets of specified materials and weights, in formed sheets of 8 to 10 feet in length, joined by a 3/4 inch locked and soldered seam.

B. At intervals not exceeding 32 feet, provide 1-1/2 inch loose-locked expansion joint filled with sealant. 1. Straight runs between 24 and 64 feet shall have expansion joint at center, or

as otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Straight runs which exceed 32 feet and form leg of corner shall have an

expansion joint placed not more than 16 feet from corner.

C. Provide continuous edge strips made of 8 to 10 feet long pieces. Install at front and rear edges; secure to substrate with copper or bronze nails spaced 3 inches apart. Lock coping cover to edge strips with 3/4 inch loose lock seam.



3.6 CLEANING

A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris.

B. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition.

End of Section



FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - page 1 of 12

Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install fireproof firestopping, firesafing materials, smoke seals and related accessories required for this Project for all penetrations through fire resistance rated construction, including, but not limited to, penetrations for plumbing, fire suppression, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, electrical systems, and specialized equipment. 1. Fire resistance rated construction requiring firestopping includes, but is not

limited to: floors, rated partitions, smoke barriers, smoke partitions, partitions in rated corridors, passageways and stairs, shaft partitions, shaft wall (vertical and horizontal), area separation fire walls, party wall systems, and temporary fire resistant rated partitions and barriers.

2. Provide removable temporary firestopping (pillows) as required to maintain fire integrity prior to Owner’s final acceptance, to permit installation of electrical, telephone, data and sound system wiring. Replace temporary firestopping with permanent, after wiring systems are completed.

B. Furnish and install firestopping/smoke seals at construction joints occurring at tops of fire resistance rated partitions, smoke partitions, and temporary partitions between top of partition and underside of deck above.

C. Furnish and install all firestopping, firesafing, and smoke seals at perimeter of floor/roof construction and exterior wall systems, as indicated and where required by applicable codes.

D. Furnish and install all firestopping, firesafing, and smoke seals at expansion joints in chase walls where expansion joints are not exposed to view.

E. Furnish and install all firestopping, firesafing, and smoke seals where required by applicable codes and as additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Section 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING: Procedural and administrative requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY: Masonry partitions.

C. Section 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING: Metal floor and roof deck.

D. Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION: Fire protection system penetrations through fire resistance rated construction.

E. Division 22 - PLUMBING: Plumbing system penetrations through fire resistance rated construction.



F. Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING: Heating, ventilating and air conditioning system penetrations through fire resistance rated construction.

G. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: Electrical penetrations through fire resistance rated construction.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM E2174 - Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops 5. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire

Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers 6. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 7. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 8. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide materials and work to conform to Building Code Requirements in fire resistant wall and floor assemblies.

B. Manufacturer’s certified product test requirements: 1. All firestop/smokeseal material shall be tested by a recognized, independent

testing agency and shall conform to both Flame (F-rating) and Temperature (T-rating) requirements of ASTM E-814.

2. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements. 3. Tested and classified non-combustible per ASTM E-84.

C. Firestops in place shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the floor, wall, or partition construction into which it is installed.

D. Non-combustible dams shall be constructed: 1. As necessary to achieve fire rating as tested and rated. 2. In conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and

partition construction. 3. As recommended by firestop/smokeseal manufacturer.

E. Combustible damming materials, if used, must be removed after proper curing.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


performance data, and physical properties. a. Indicate requirements for manufacturer’s descriptive data for products

and related materials with FM, UL or Warnock-Hersey illustrations showing systems and approval of materials in systems.

2. Certificates: Manufacturer's written certification stating that firestopping materials, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section and that all fire-resistive requirements for the indicated combustibility, Flame (F-rating) and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings have been met.

3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4. Test reports: Submit fire test reports from recognized, independent testing

agent(s) indicating the following: a. Fire test report of firestop material applied to substrate and penetration

materials similar to project conditions. Tests to indicate both Flame (F-rating) and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings.

b. Test reports of products to be used shall indicate conformance to ASTM E-814.

5. On-site sample installation to be included in Work: Minimum thirty days prior to application in any area, provide samples of firestop and smokeseal materials and installation in accordance with the following requirements. a. Apply one sample of appropriate firestop and smokeseal material for

each different penetration and fire rating required for the work. b. Sample areas will comply with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and

finished appearance of the project and applicable fire code. c. Acceptance samples will constitute standard of acceptance for method of

application, thickness, and finished appearance for firestop and smokeseal application. The sample(s) shall remain visible during completion of the work and shall remain as part of the completed work.

6. Shop drawings indicating requirements for penetrations in wall/deck intersections, change of planes, control joints, expansion joints and blank openings.



B. Sole Source: Obtain firestop and smokeseal products from a single manufacturer, except as otherwise approved by Architect.

C. Special Inspections: Allow for 3 percent of each type of firestopping system to be removed and inspected for conformance with approved submittals. 1. firestopping shall be inspected prior to installation of suspended ceilings or

concealed by other materials.



D. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a specialized subcontractor having not less than 3 years

documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein. a. The manufacturer of the firestop material shall submit written certification

that the firm to be used for the firestop products has been trained in the application of the products by the manufacturer.

2. Independent Third Party Firestopping Inspector: a specialized testing agency having not less than 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.

1.7 MOCK-UPS

A. Provide mock-ups under provisions of Section 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL for purpose of verifying quality of firestop installation.

B. Provide firestop samples and locate as directed. Accepted samples may remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver and store firestopping materials in original, sealed, packages showing manufacturer’s identification and date of packaging.

B. Store and handle materials following manufacturer's recommended procedures, and in accordance with material safety data sheets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering similar products include the following, or approved equal: 1. Bio Fireshield (A Division of Rectroseal), Houston TX. 2. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland MI. 3. Hilti, Inc. Tulsa OK. 4. 3M Company, Saint Paul MN. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc., Somerville NJ. 6. Metacaulk, (A Division of Rectroseal), Houston TX. 7. Tremco, Inc., Beachwood OH.


A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.



2.3 MATERIALS

A. Firestop mortar: asbestos free, cementitious mortar, U.L. classified as a "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product “Novasit K-10”. b. Hilti, Inc., product “CP 637 Firestop Mortar”. c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SSM Firestop Mortar”. d. Tremco Inc., product “Tremstop M”.

B. Firestop sealant: Single component, non-combustible firestop sealant, U.L. classified as a "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product product “Biotherm 100" (Gun Grade) or “Biotherm 200" (Self Leveling).

b. Hilti, Inc., product “CFS-S SIL GG” (Gun Grade). c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SpecSeal SIL300 Sealant (gun

grade)” or “SpecSeal SIL300SL" (Self Leveling). d. 3M Company, product “Fire Barrier Silicone Sealants”. e. Tremco Inc., product product “Tremsil" (Gun Grade) or “Tremsil S/L"

(Self Leveling). 2. Sealants will not dissolve in water.

C. Intumescent firestop sealant and caulks: Acrylic based, water resistant sealant, which will not re-emulsify after drying. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product “Biostop 500". b. Hilti, Inc., product “FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant” or “FS 657

Fireblock”. c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SpecSeal SSS". d. 3M Company, product “Fire Barrier Caulk CP25WB+". e. Tremco Inc., product “Tremstop 1A".

D. Firestop putty: sticks or pads. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product “Moldable Putty”. b. Hilti, Inc., product “CP 767 Speed Strips” or “CP 777 Speed Plugs”. c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SpecSeal Putty Bars and Pads”. d. 3M Company, product “Fire Barrier Moldable Putty”. e. Tremco Inc., product “Flowable Putty”.



E. Firestop collars: Pre-manufactured fire protective pipe sleeve, UL classified as "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Provide separated (two piece) firestop collar for application when plastic pipe

system is already in place. Provide non-separated firestop collar for application prior to installation of plastic pipe system.

2. Acceptable products, or approved equal: a. Bio Fireshield, product, product “Fireshield Pass-through Device”, or

“Biostop Intumescent Sleeve.” b. Hilti, Inc., product “CP 643 Firestop Collar”. c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SpecSeal Collars”. d. 3M Company, product “Fire Barrier PPD’s”. e. Tremco Inc., product “Fyrecan sleeve”.

F. Firestop pillows: UL Classified as "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product “Fireshield Firestop Pillows”. b. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “SSB Firestop Pillows”. c. Tremco Inc., product “Tremstop P.S”.

G. Wrap strips: 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield, product “FS-195”. b. Hilti, Inc., product “CP 645-E Endless Wrap Strip, or CP 648-S Firestop

Wrap Strip”. c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “Spec Seal Wrap Strip”. d. 3M Company, product “Fire Barrier FS195 Wrap Strip”. e. Tremco Inc., product “Tremco W.S”.

H. Mineral wool fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing): Conforming to ASTM C665, Type 1, ASTM C612, and ASTM C553 with a minimum density of 4 pounds per cubic foot. 1. Flame Spread Classification: Material shall be classified non-combustible per

ASTM E-814. 2. Recycled content of slag:: Use maximum available percentage of material

(slag). Mineral wool insulation products incorporated into the work shall contain not less than 75 percent of recycled material (slag) by weight.

3. Acceptable products include: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. Sarnia Ontario, Canada, product: “Fibrex FBX”

Industrial board. b. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company, Leeds, AL, product: “Delta Safing

Mineral Wool”. c. Roxul, Inc., product “Roxul Safe”. d. Thermafiber, Inc. product “Safing 4.0 pcf”.



4. Accessories: Provide galvanized steel safing clips as required for installation of insulation.

I. Elastomeric Firestopping: Non halogenated latex based elastomeric coating applied by airless spray. 1. Acceptable products, or approved equal:

a. Bio Fireshield (A Division of Rectroseal), product “Biostop 750.” b. Hilti, Inc., product “CP 601S.” or “CFS-SP-WB” c. Specified Technologies, Inc., product “Spec Seal Elastomeric Firestop

Spray”.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Forming and damming materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type as recommended by firestopping manufacturer.

B. Primer, sealant and solvents: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Woven wire mesh: Galvanized 20 gage woven wire mesh “chicken wire” or “poultry fencing”, 1 inch spacing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and project

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface to receive firestops shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the firestop material to the substrate or penetrating item(s).

B. Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projection removed prior to installation of firestops.

C. All penetrating items shall be permanently installed prior to firestop installation.

D. Substrate shall be frost, free and, when applicable, dry.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by applicators/installers qualified

and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures.



2. Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. Meet building code requirements.

3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops. Schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of firestops. a. Ensure that all firestopping is inspected prior to installation of suspended

ceilings or concealed by other finished materials.

B. Dam construction 1. Install dams when required to properly contain firestopping materials within

openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming material may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system.

2. Placement of dams shall not interfere with function or adversely affect the appearance of adjacent construction.

C. Installation of single component silicone firestop 1. Apply with manual or powered caulking gun. 2. Apply minimum 1/2 inch thickness for 2 hour rating. Apply 1/2 inch to both

sides of wall penetrations; one side only in floor penetrations. 3. Use incombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating. 4. Surface of gun grade silicone firestop may be tooled using clean, potable

water. 5. Clean excess material off of adjacent surfaces and tools within 10 minutes

using either water or Xylol where the use of such would not be hazardous.

D. Installation of cementitious firestop mortar. 1. Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools

as recommended by firestop mortar manufacturer. Allow a average mixing time is 3 minutes and provide a average wet density of 70 pounds per cubic foot, plus or minus 5 PCF.

2. Do not apply if ambient or substrate temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit during 24 hours after application.

3. Wet all surfaces prior to application of firestop mortar. 4. Mortar may be hand applied or pumped into the opening. 5. Exposed surfaces shall be finished using conventional plastering tools prior to

curing. 6. When installation around layered cables, it is recommended to increase the

fluidity of the firestop mortar to provide a better fill around the cables. Vibrate or move the cables slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables.

7. Allow 48 hours for initial cure prior to form removal. For full cure allow 27 days.



8. Wet material may be cleaned with water. Dry material may require scraping or chipping.

E. Installation of firestop collars (plastic pipe only) 1. Firestop collars may be surface mounted to a slab or wall or imbedded in

Firestop Mortar to a maximum depth of 2 inches. 2. For wall penetrations with ABS pipe firestop collars must be installed on both

sides of the penetration to provide a 2 hour F and T Rating. All other applications required installation on one side only to provide a 2 hour F and T Rating.

F. Firesafing insulation: Install firestopping safing insulation on safing clips spaced as needed between each stud and floor slab, leaving no voids. Secure safing clips to slab using fasteners recommended by insulation manufacturer. Install sealant over mineral wool in accordance with test requirements.

3.4 LABELING

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. 1. Include the following information on labels

WARNING: THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM-DO NOT DISTURB. NOTIFY FACILITY MANAGER OF ANY DAMAGE.

• Contractor’s name, address, and phone number. • Through-penetration firestop systems designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. • Date of installation. • Through-penetration firestop systems manufacturer’s name. • Installer’s name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-

penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued.

C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. General: Typical penetrations are indicated below with list of standard firestopping/smokeseal approaches. Actual firestopping materials and combination of materials will vary with size of penetration and with individual firestopping



manufacturer’s approved UL Design System Requirements. Use only UL Design System materials for each penetration that best matches the wall and floor construction. 1. Where penetrations occur for which no listed UL or WH Design System test

exists, obtain from the firestop system manufacturer an engineered system acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for firestopping such penetrations. Engineered system from manufacturer shall include a detail drawing showing the engineered system and shall contain no disclaimers.

B. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar. 2. Silicone Firestop sealant. 3. Intumescent firestop sealant. 4. Firestop putty, sticks or pads. 5. Mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) in

conjunction with a firestop sealant.

C. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through walls: 1. (masonry and concrete walls only) Firestop mortar and putty. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing). 3. Intumescent firestop sealant with wrap strips.

D. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar and wrap strips. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing).

E. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through walls: 1. Firestop mortar and putty. 2. (through masonry walls only) Firestop pillows with woven wire mesh. 3. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible

insulation (fire safing).

F. Insulated metal pipe penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar and wrap strips. 2. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible

insulation (fire safing). 3. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing). 4. Silicone Firestop sealant over wrap strip. 5. Mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) in

conjunction with a firestop sealant.

G. Insulated metal pipe penetrations (single and multiple) through walls: 1. Firestop mortar with wrap strips.



2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing).

3. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) and Wrap strips.

4. (multiple penetrations through masonry walls only) Firestop pillows with woven wire mesh.

H. Duct penetrations through floors or walls: 1. Rectangular and square ducts: Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber

/ ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing), and steel flanges provided under Division 15.

2. Round ducts: Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing).

I. Combustible plastic pipe and conduit penetrations through floors: 1. Firestop mortar with wrap strips. 2. Firestop mortar with firestop putty and firestop collars. 3. Silicone firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible

insulation (fire safing). 4. Silicone firestop sealant and firestop collars. 5. Intumescent firestop sealant and firestop collars. 6. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing) with firestop collars. 7. (maximum pipe size 2 inches) Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber /

ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) with wrap strips.

J. Combustible plastic pipe and conduit penetrations through walls: 1. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing). 2. Intumescent firestop sealant with firestop collars.

K. Cable penetrations through floors: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible


combustible insulation (fire safing).

L. Cable penetrations through walls: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible


combustible insulation (fire safing). 3. (single penetrations only) Firestop putty. 4. (electrical boxes) Firestop pads. 5. Firestop putty over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation

(fire safing).



M. Bus ducts through floors: 1. Firestop mortar and wrap strips. 2. Intumescent firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing) and 28 gage (minimum) steel cover plate.

N. Blank openings: 1. Firestop mortar. 2. Silicone Firestop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible


O. Fire rated joints: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant over backer rod or bond breaker.

P. Construction joints at head of wall/floor assemblies: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant/mastic over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-

combustible insulation (fire safing). 2. Elastomeric spray over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible


Q. Smoke barrier sealant for dampers, fire door frames: 1. Silicone Firestop sealant.

R. Temporary sealing of openings and penetrations: 1. Firestop putty, sticks or pads. 2. Firestop pillows.

End of Section


JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - page 1 of 8

Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: The work of this Section consists of sealants and backing materials where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. 1. This Section specifies general requirements, definition of joint sealer types,

and application requirements for sealant work specified within other individual specification sections.

B. Prepare sealant substrate surfaces.

C. Furnish and install sealant and backing materials.


A. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY.

B. Section 07 53 23 - ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING: Sealant used in conjunction with the application of single ply membrane roofing.

C. Section 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: Sealant integral with flashing.

D. Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping sealants and related backing materials.

E. Section 09 91 00 - PAINTING: Caulks used in preparation of applied finish coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect.

B. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ASTM C 717 - Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants. 2. ASTM C 790 – Guide for Use of Latex Sealants 3. ASTM C 804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. 4. ASTM C 834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. 5. ASTM C 919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 6. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM C 962 - Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 8. ASTM C 1085 - Butyl Rubber Based Solvent Release Sealants. 9. ASTM C 1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.



10. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 11. ASTM D 3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic

Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings

C. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. SWRI – Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


performance data, chemical and physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.

2. Selection Samples: Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors available for selection by Architect.

3. Verification Samples: 12 inch long samples of sealant for verification of color, installed where directed by Architect.

4. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that the Products supplied meet or exceed specified requirements.

5. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Compatibility and adhesion test reports: Test reports from sealant

manufacturer indicating that sealant proposed for use have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with actual samples of substrates to be used on this project. Include sealant manufacturer’s interpretation of test results, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation specific to this Project.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Bonds and Warranty Documentation: Manufacturer’s standard Warranties and

Guarantees.



B. Sole Source: Provide sealants from a single manufacturer for all work of this Section to the greatest extent possible. Each individual type of sealant installed in the Work shall be from a single manufacturer.

C. Qualifications: 1. Installer/Applicator: Minimum of 3 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.


A. Each container and package must bear an unbroken seal, test number and label of the manufacturer upon delivery to the site. Failure to comply with these



requirements shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the material in question, by the Architect and his requiring its removal from the site. New material conforming to said requirements, shall be promptly furnished at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not install single component solvent curing sealant in enclosed building spaces.

B. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and 24 hours after installation. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are below 40 degrees F. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other

causes.

C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminates capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General: Submit manufacturer’s warranties under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

B. Manufacturer’s warranties shall guarantee sealants installed are free of manufacturing defects and conforms to the published physical properties and referenced standards effective at time of installation. 1. Sealant performance: Manufacturer’s warranties shall include coverage for the

following listed failures, when sealants are applied in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Warranty to include coverage for: a. Sealant will not become brittle, tear or crack due to normal exposure or

normal expansion or contraction. 2. Warranty period:

a. Silicone sealants on vertical surfaces: 20 years. b. Urethane sealants on vertical surfaces: 5 years. c. Urethane sealants on horizontal surfaces: 5 years.

C. Installer’s warranty: Provide 3 year warranty or bond which shall include coverage of installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 1. Installer’s warrant shall include coverage for sealant that fails cohesively or

adhesively.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Specified Manufacturers and Products: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on the products specified under this section for each individual sealant type, for the applications scheduled at the end of Section, and as may be additionally identified on the Drawings.



B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals (Sonneborn), Shakopee MN. 2. Bostik, Inc., Wauwatusa, WI. 3. Dow Corning Corporation, Auburn MI. 4. Momentive Performance Materials (GE Silicones), Waterford NY. 5. Owens Corning, Toledo, OH. 6. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA. 7. Phenomenal Brands, Baltimore, MD. 8. Sika Corp, Lyndhurst NJ. 9. Tremco, Inc., Beachwood OH.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Sealant Materials, General Requirements: 1. Only use sealant and primers that comply with the following limits for VOC

content: a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Roofing Sealants: 420 g/L. c. Roadway Sealants: 250 g/L. d. Sealant primer: 250 g/L.

2. Sealants containing aromatic solvents, fibrous talc, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, chromium and their compounds, are not permitted.

B. Joint Sealer Type B (Butyl): Gun-grade modified butyl and polyisobutylene sealant, conforming to ASTM C-834, with a movement capability of ±10 percent or better and a Shore A hardness of 24 to 28, equal to one of the following: 1. Tremco, product “Butyl Sealant”. 2. Pecora, product “BC-158”.

C. Joint Sealer Type HLM (Horizontal-self-Leveling, Multi-component): Pouring grade self-leveling multi-component urethane sealant, conforming to ASTM C 920, with a minimum movement capability of ±25 percent, equal to the following: 1. BASF (Sonneborn), product, “Sonolastic SL 2” (self-leveling grade). 2. Sika, product, “Sikaflex 2CSL”. 3. Tremco, product, “THC-900 / THC-901”.

D. Joint Sealer Type P35 (Polyurethane 1-component): Low modulus single component gun-grade polyurethane sealant, non-sagging, conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 35, Grade NS, use NT,M, A and O with a minimum movement capability of ±35 percent, equal to the following: 1. BASF (Sonneborn), product “Sonolastic NP1”. 2. Sika, product “Sikaflex 1a”.



3. Tremco, product “Vulkem 116 FC”, or “Dymonic 100”.

E. Joint Sealer Type SX (Silicone, Exterior construction): Medium modulus, neutral curing, low to no bleed silicone passing ASTM C1248, having a useful life expectancy of at least 20 years, conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, with a minimum movement capability of +50 percent and -50 percent, equal to the following: 1. Dow Corning, product, “795”. 2. GE Silicones, product, “SCS9000 SilPruf NB”. 3. Sika, product “Sikasil-WS-295”. 4. Tremco, product “Spectrem 4-TS”.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible joint bead back-up: Compressible closed cell polyethylene, extruded polyolefin or polyurethane foam rod complying with ASTM C 1330, Type C, 1/3 greater in diameter than width of joint. Shape and size of compressible back-up shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the specific condition used. Provide one of the following, or equal. 1. Construction Foam Products (Division of Nomaco, Inc.), Zebulon, NC, product

“HBR Closed Cell”. 2. Industrial Thermo Polymers Ltd., Brampton, Ontario CN, product “ITP

Standard Backer Rod”. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals (Sonneborn), Shakopee MN, product

"Sonolastic Closed Cell Backer Rod". 4. W.R. Meadows Inc., Hampshire, IL, product “Sealtight Kool-Rod”.

B. Primers: Furnish and install joint primers of the types, and to the extent, recommended by the respective sealant manufacturers for the specific joint materials and joint function.

C. Bond-breaker tape, and temporary masking tape: Of types as recommended by the manufacturer of the specific sealant and caulking material used at each application, and completely free from contaminants which would adversely affect the sealant and caulking materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Weather conditions must be dry and of the temperature, as recommended by

sealant manufacturer, during application operations.



2. Surface receiving work of this section must be absolutely dry and dust free. All joints receiving sealant/caulking materials and primers shall be subject to the approval of the sealant manufacturer for proper use of specified materials.

B. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all loose mortar, oil, grease, dust, frost, and other foreign materials that will prevent proper adhesion of primers and sealant materials. 1. Clean ferrous metals of all rust and coatings by wire brush, grinding or

sandblasting. Remove oil, grease and protective coatings with cleaners recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Prime joint substrates, as recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, as based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or as based upon prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

D. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

E. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 804 and C 790 for solvent and latex base solvents, respectively.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Conform to SWRI requirements, and sealant manufacturer’s written requirements for installation.

B. Install joint bead back-up in all joints in excess of 5/8-inch depth, and joints that have no back-up therein, placing the joint bead in the joint in a manner that will assure a constant depth 1/8 inch greater than the sealant and caulking material depth tolerances. 1. Set beads into joints continuously, by slightly stretching during placement, to

permit compression against sides of joint, without surface wrinkles or buckles. 2. Do not stretch back-up material into joints.

C. Install bond breaker in joints where shown in the Drawings and wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent bond of the sealant to surfaces where such bond might impair the Work.

D. Apply masking tape or other precautions to prevent migration or spillage of materials onto adjoining surfaces.

E. Apply urethane sealants, silicone sealants, and latex caulking materials into joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using mechanical or power caulking gun equipped with nozzle of appropriate size, with sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints. 1. The depth of sealant and caulking materials shall be in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations for the specific joint function, but in no case exceed 1/2-inch in depth, nor less than 1/4-inch, regardless of the joint width.

2. Maintain the outer edge of the sealant and caulking materials, where side faces of joints are in the same plane, back 1/8-inch from the faces.



3. Apply sealant in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets so as to provide a watertight and airtight seal for the entire joint length.

4. After placement of the sealant and caulking materials, concave-tool the surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations.

5. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling, and before the sealant or caulking material has taken initial set.

F. Take care not to block-off weep tubes or any through wall opening constructed to allow weeping of accumulated water.

G. Apply pouring self-leveling urethane sealant (Sealant designation HLM) into horizontal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to a level approximately 1/16 inch below adjacent surfaces. 1. Apply sealant without open joints, voids or air pockets so as to provide a

watertight and airtight seal for the entire joint length. 2. After placement of the sealant and caulking materials, concave-tool the

surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations.

3. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling, and before the sealant has taken initial set.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean all surfaces of adjacent surfaces which have been marked or soiled by the work of this Section, removing all excess sealant and caulking materials with solvents which will not damage the surfaces in any way.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. During the operation of sealant work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. General: Seal joints indicated and all interior and exterior joints, seams, and intersections between dissimilar materials.

B. Sealant Colors: 1. Colors for Sealant Type “HLM”: Match colors furnished by the Architect, or

match other building materials as directed. Should such custom colors not be available from the approved manufacturer, except at additional charge, provide all such colors at no change in Contract Sum.

2. Colors for Sealant Types “HLM”, and “SX”: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

3. Color for Sealant Type “B”: Black. 4. In concealed installation, and in partially or fully exposed installation where so

approved by the Architect, standard gray or black sealant may be used.

C. joints (Listed by primary building material abutting sealant joints):



1. Horizontal Concrete: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Concrete foundation walls to abutting concrete, and

other non-bituminous pavements, steps, platforms, and ends of ramp, (horizontal joints):

HLM

b. Concrete slabs on grade to abutting non-bituminous pavements (horizontal joints, including pedestrian traffic surfaces):

HLM

c. Concrete to concrete saw cut and tooled control and isolation joints in horizontal surfaces including pedestrian traffic surfaces:

HLM

2. Masonry: Joint Condition Sealant Type a. Masonry to masonry, expansion and control joints: SX

b. Masonry to abutting masonry, or concrete: SX

c. Masonry to abutting non-porous materials (painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill finished aluminum, PVC, glass, and similar materials):

SX

d. Masonry to all items which penetrate exterior masonry walls, including, but not necessarily limited to, door frames, louver frames, pipes, vents, and similar items:

SX

End of Section


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - page 1 of 8

Section 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: The work of this Section consists of hollow metal doors and frames where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation.

B. Furnish and install the following: 1. Flush UL-Labeled and non-labeled steel doors, complete with internal

reinforcing, hardware cut-outs; and provided with glazing openings, where so indicated.

2. Hollow metal frames for doors, UL-Labeled and non-labeled, complete with internal reinforcing.

3. Hollow metal frames for fixed-glazed window conditions, complete with internal reinforcing.


A. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY: Building-into masonry hollow metal door frames, placed and braced under Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: 1. Placement and temporary bracing of hollow metal frames built-into masonry.

C. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Furnishing finish hardware, and installation templates for hardware cut-outs and reinforcing.

D. Section 09 91 00 - PAINTING: Applied finish coatings.

E. Building-in of frame anchors to wall and partition construction: By trade responsible for wall and partition erection.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible

to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical

Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.

3. ANSI/SDI A250.8 – R2008 (formerly SDI 100) - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

4. ANSI/SDI A250.11 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.



5. ASTM A109 / A109M - Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled.

6. ASTM A568 / A568M - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

7. ASTM A653 / A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

8. ASTM A924 / A924M - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

9. ASTM A1008 / A1008M - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

10. ASTM A1011 / A1011M - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.

11. ASTM C1363 - Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

12. SDI 111 Series (111A-111F): Recommended Details, Steel Doors and Frames.

13. SDI 117-93: Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 14. NFPA publication 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 15. NFPA publication 105 – Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door

Assemblies. 16. UL publication 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 17. UL publication 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 18. UL 1784 – Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 19. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for

exits.



responsible for installing anchorages furnished by this Section; make arrangements for delivery, receipt and installation of inserts and anchorages to prevent delay of the Work.

2. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for furnishing hardware and installing doors and frames.

3. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued templates authorized by the hardware supplier.

4. Do not fabricate doors or frames before receiving a copy of the approved hardware schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect. Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the approved schedule; immediately notify the Architect, in writing, of any conflicts.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, for doors,

frames and shop applied finishes. 2. Shop Drawings:

a. Door and Frame Schedule: A complete schedule coordinated with, and using same identifier designations as, the door and frame schedule contained in the Contract Drawings.

b. Large scale details of each type door and frame construction, indicating all gages, reinforcing, and anchorage.

3. Certificates: Manufacturer's written certification stating that doors, frames, and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section; that specified galvanized and shop priming has been performed.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Bonds and Warranty Documentation: Manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. General: Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards, specified materials, and methods of construction.

B. Sole Source: Obtain doors and frames specified in this Section from a single manufacturer.


A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Prior to shipping, identify each frame and door with a removable metal or

plastic label which corresponds with door schedule identifying opening number and location.

2. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect.

3. Deliver doors and frames boxed or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

4. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the refinished items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items.


procedures. 2. Store doors and frames at the building site upright and under cover. Place the

units on wood dunnage and cover in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc., (A Division of Amweld International, LLC),

Coppell TX. 2. Ceco Door Products (A Division of Assa Abloy Group Company), Milan TN. 3. Curries Company (A Division of Assa Abloy Group Company), Mason City IA. 4. Republic Doors and Frames, McKenzie TN. 5. Steelcraft (A Division of Allegion Company), Cincinnati OH.

2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Exterior Openings: Comply ASTM C1363 for minimum thermal ratings. Openings to be fabricated and tested as fully operable, thermal insulating door and frame assemblies. 1. Thermal Performance (Exterior Openings): Independent testing laboratory

certification for exterior door assemblies being tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and meet or exceed the following requirements: a. Door Assembly Operable U-Factor and R-Value Ratings: U-Factor 0.29,

R-Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold. 1) Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable

minimum U-Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.7, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and threshold.

2. Air Infiltration (Exterior Openings): Independent testing laboratory certification for exterior door assemblies being tested in accordance with ASTM E283 to meet or exceed the following requirements: a. Rate of leakage of the door assembly shall not exceed 0.25 cfm per

square foot of static differential air pressure of 1.567 psf (equivalent to 25 mph wind velocity).

2.3 DOORS

A. General: Refer to the Drawings for design of doors, sizes, glazing cut-outs in doors, and details.

B. Construction: Full flush commercial type, 1-3/4 inches thick, unless noted otherwise, meeting or exceeding the materials, gages, construction, and testing requirements of the referenced ANSI and SDI publications. 1. Exterior Door Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel-

stiffener core. Fabricate doors with specified R-value when tested according to ASTM C1363.

C. Exterior Doors: ANSI 250.8, Level 4, Model 2 (Seamless), ANSI A250.4 Physical Performance Level A, (Maximum Duty) having 14-gage, 0.071 inch thick (1.78 mm) A60 galvannealed steel faces, with a minimum core R-value of 6.25.



1. Visible edge seams: weld edge seams and finish for seamless appearance (Model 2).

D. Hardware reinforcing: Welded in place steel reinforcement, hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM A569. Provide G-60, hot-dipped galvanized reinforcing for all exterior openings, and locations where galvanized doors and frames are scheduled. Reinforcing shall be not less than the following minimum steel thicknesses: 1. Hinges: 7 gage, minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick. 2. Closers: Box/channel-shape reinforcing, 12 gage, minimum 0.093 inch (2.3

mm) thick. 3. Locks: Box/channel-shape reinforcing,

a. Cylindrical locks: 16 gage, minimum 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) thick. b. Mortise locks: 14 gage, minimum 0.067 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

4. Kick plates: 18 gage, minimum 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 5. All other hardware: 14 gage, minimum 0.067 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 6. Locations for reinforcing shall be determined from information and templates

provided under Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE.

E. Fabrication 1. Fabricate exposed faces of door panels from cold-rolled steel only. 2. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and

moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel (at manufacturer's option). 3. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. 4. Attach fire rated label to each door unit. 5. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with flush end closure. Seal joints

watertight.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Refer to the Drawings for various types of frames, sizes, and profiles, and other characteristics of frames and related items. 1. Frame type (all frames ): Shop welded frames with mitered joints arc-welded,

reinforced and ground smooth.

B. Materials for frames, reinforcement, anchors, anchor clips and related items: commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A109 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A415. 1. Frame gage:

a. Exterior frames: 12-gage, 0.093 inch thick (2.3 mm), with an A60 zinc coating (galvannealed) supplied by the hot-dip process conforming to ASTM A653, Grade 37, with coating applied in accordance with A 924.

2. Hinge reinforcement: 7 gage, minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick. 3. Lock and strike reinforcement: 12 gage, minimum 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick. 4. Door closer reinforcement: 12 gage, minimum 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick. 5. Floor clips: 16 gage, minimum 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) thick.



6. Splice plates or channels: same gage as door frame. 7. Mortar guards: 26 gage, minimum 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

C. Frame construction: 1. Shop-fabricate frames as whole single units per door opening, except when

frame size is too large to ship as a single unit. Oversized frames may be shipped in large sections as practicable for field assembly with concealed splice plates or channels. a. Frame corner construction: Refer to paragraph A of this Article.

2. Reinforcements, stiffeners, and base angle clips: Welded to interior surfaces of frames to provide a stable base and so as to not interfere with installation of hardware.

3. Provide mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cut-outs where mortar or other materials may obstruct hardware operation.

4. Appearance of finished frames: Strong, rigid, completely free from warp and buckle, with miters well-formed and in true alignment, and with surfaces smooth and free from defects of any kind.

D. Anchorage: 1. Anchors for frames in masonry walls: Adjustable, T-shaped, positively

engaging the retainers on both flanges of each jamb member, when placed. The stem of the anchors shall be 2 inches wide by 12 gage, minimum 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick, corrugated or perforated for mortar bond, and extend 10 inches into the masonry, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide the following number of anchors, clips, or bolts, per jamb: a. For frames 7’-6” in height or less: 3 anchors per jamb. b. For frames 7’-6” in height or less and having doors exceeding 3’-0” feet

width, and for cross corridor frames: 4 anchors per jamb. c. For frames greater than 7’-6”, up to 10’-0” in height: 4 anchors per jamb. d. For frames greater than 7’-6”, up to 10’-0” in height, and having doors

exceeding 3’-0” feet width, and for cross corridor frames: 5 anchors per jamb.

e. For frames over 10’-0’ in height: 5 anchors per jamb.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Do not fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect.

B. Fabrication Tolerances, Maximum variation for doors and frames: Maximum diagonal distortion 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Preparation: Pressure-sand all surfaces of all doors, frames, accessory items, anchors, and related items, to remove blemishes and foreign matter and provide paint grip. Spot-fill imperfections with metallic filler, and sand smooth. Thoroughly clean the surfaces by applying hot or cold phosphate treatment standard with the manufacturer.



B. Following cleaning apply one dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer to all surfaces, including those which will be concealed after erection. Bake, or oven dry, the primer at time and temperature recommended by the manufacturer for developing maximum hardness and resistance to abrasion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and in compliance

with these specifications and applicable codes. 2. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and project

conditions.

3.2 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General: Install frames and doors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI A250.8, SDI-105, and the Door Hardware Institute recommendations. Install with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch measured with a straight edge, corner to corner.

B. Place in-position all steel frames, in accordance with the approved shop drawings and frame schedule. 1. During the installation of metal door frames, after the manufacturer’s steel

shipping bars have been removed, install wood spreaders at door opening, carefully dimensioned to permit square and plumb installation of door frames and doors. a. Provide rigid temporary bracing for frames as required to ensure

maintenance of positioning, and remove only after frames have been permanently anchored.

b. For doors located in masonry work, maintain frame position with temporary bracing until frames are built-into-place, and grout has sufficiently cured to maintain frame position.

c. Spreaders shall remain in place until doors are installed. 2. Coordinate installation of frames with the various trades installing abutting wall

construction for anchor placement. a. Secure frames with the following number of anchors per jamb.

1) For frames 7’-6” in height or less: 3 anchors per jamb. 2) For frames 7’-6” in height or less and having doors exceeding 3’-0”

feet width, and for cross corridor frames: 4 anchors per jamb. 3) For frames greater than 7’-6”, up to 10’-0” in height: 4 anchors per

jamb. 4) For frames greater than 7’-6”, up to 10’-0” in height, and having

doors exceeding 3’-0” feet width, and for cross corridor frames: 5 anchors per jamb.

5) For frames over 10’-0’ in height: 5 anchors per jamb.



3. Secure frames, occurring in existing masonry, with expansion bolts and sleeves.

4. Where exposed fastener heads occur in frames, fill with automotive body filler and sand smooth.

C. Install doors and door hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of referenced organizations, and the requirements of Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE. 1. Tools for maintenance: All special tools packaged with hardware items shall

be saved, tagged/identified as to product use, and turned over to the Owner upon completion of the Work.

3.3 CLEANING

A. General: Clean work under provisions of Section 01 73 00 - EXECUTION.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Prior to Final Inspection make final check and adjustment of all hardware, clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

End of Section


ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 00 - page 1 of 6

Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Suspended acoustical tile ceiling including suspension system and associated

edge moldings.


A. Section 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING: Roofing joists

B. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: 1. Fire alarm and smoke detection equipment mounted in ceiling system. 2. Light fixtures and independent hangers for suspended fixtures.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ASTM A 641 - Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 2. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the

Reverberation Room Method "UL Classified". 3. ASTM C 523 - Light reflectance of Acoustical Material by the Integrating

Sphere Reflectometer. 4. ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel

Ceilings. 5. ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-In Panels. 6. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material "UL

Classified" 7. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials "UL

Classified". 8. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 9. ASTM E 580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 10. ASTM E 1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. 11. ASTM E 1414 - Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a

Common Ceiling Plenum. "UL Classified". 12. UL Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 13. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations

regarding flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes.



B. General References The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. CISCA (Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association) - Acoustical

Ceilings: Use and Practice.


A. Coordination: Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequence of installation, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.

B. Sequencing: 1. Field Measurements

a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work.

b. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work.

2. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, to allow work which will be concealed by the ceilings to be completed prior to commencing installing the ceilings in such locations.

C. Scheduling: 1. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 2. Schedule work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is

enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead work is completed, tested and approved.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Shop drawings: Mark-up a set of blackline reflected ceiling plans indicate

corrections to grid layout and provide dimensioning, show interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to the ceiling systems.

3. Verification Samples: a. Full size samples of acoustical units, illustrating material and finish. b. 12 inch long samples of suspension system components including main

runners, cross runner and edge trim. c. 12 inch long samples of existing exposed spline suspension system

components including runners and edge trim for comparison with supplied materials.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1. Bonds and Warranty Documentation:



a. Manufacturer’s Warranties and guarantees as specified elsewhere herein this Section.

C. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage. 1. Provide to the Owner, extra ceiling panels: 3 percent of each type installed. 2. Provide to the Owner, extra suspension components: 3 percent of each type

installed.



B. Sole Source: Obtain products required for the Work of this Section from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of acoustical ceiling panels.



submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. 2. Do not deliver acoustical ceiling panels to the project until all concrete,

masonry, plaster and other wet work has been completed and dry. 3. Deliver acoustical ceiling panels in original, unopened packages and store

protected in a fully enclosed space.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Protect materials from damage due to moisture, direct sunlight, excessive


C. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks, or show other evidence of damage, unless Architect specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum of 60 degrees Fahrenheit and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: Submit warranties under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

B. Manufacturer Warranty: In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner’s name the standard written manufacturer’s



guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer’s published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Specified Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster PA. No substitution will be accepted.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS

A. Type ACT-1 Ceiling panels (typical locations): 1. Panel size: 24 by 24 inch by 3/4 inch thick. 2. Panel edge: beveled tegular. 3. Description: ASTM E-1264 Type IV Form 2, Pattern E, Class A flame spread,

wet formed mineral fiber, non-directional fissured, fine textured panel, non-combustible, vinyl latex paint finish.

4. Color: White. 5. Minimum light reflectance: LR 0.86. 6. Acoustical characteristics:

a. CAC: 35. b. NRC: 0.70

7. Acceptable products: Equal to Armstrong product "HealthZone Ultima” with HumiGuard and BioBlock - Number 1936".

2.3 CEILING GRIDS

A. Type ACT-1 Ceiling grid: 9/16 inch dimensional tee grid in color matching ceiling panel, furnished with hemmed edge wall molding; acceptable products are: 1. Armstrong; 9/16" Sonata Dimensional Tee Grid.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Edge moldings: Grid system compatible with exposed grid system and color matched, Armstrong series model Nº. 7821.

B. Edge/wall moldings where ceiling abuts walls and drop down soffits: Stepped profile “shadow” molding compatible with exposed grid system and color matched

C. Hanger attachments: Of the most appropriate types for the specific receiving surfaces.

D. Hangers: ASTM A641 Soft temper, pre-stretched galvanized carbon steel wire, with a yield stress of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12 gage.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. 1. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and project

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-situ Conditions: During the operation of work of this Section, protect surrounding materials and finishes against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Clean, or repair all existing surfaces which are soiled or otherwise damaged by Work of this Section, to match indicated profiles and specified finishes. Materials and finishes which cannot be cleaned, or repaired shall be removed and replaced with new work in conformance with the Contract Documents.

B. Surface Preparation: 1. Carefully examine all receiving surfaces, to which attachments will be made

hereunder, and determine the most practical way of making such attachments. Request Architect's approval of any attachment method which differs from that indicated on the approved shop drawings before proceeding with installation.

2. Permit acoustical ceiling tile to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate system on room axis, leaving equal sized border units of not less than one-half tile width.

B. Install all components of the suspended grid systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the approved shop drawings, conforming to ASTM C-636 requirements. Ensure a deflection not to exceed 1/360 span of 48-inch simple span.

C. Install specified edge moldings wherever ceilings intersect a wall or partition surface, and around all items having any dimension of 4 inches or more which penetrate the ceilings, including circular penetrations. Set moldings absolutely level, using as long lengths as practicable, and secure with fasteners recommended by manufacturer for the type of substrate. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant (type AA specified

under Section 07 92 00), concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings.

2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches on center. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.



D. Install hanger attachments to overhead construction in accordance with the approved shop drawings, spacing the attachments not more than 48 inches on centers over location of each main tee member. 1. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers,

reinforce the nearest affected hangers to span the extra distance. 2. Install hanger wire to attachments with triple twists.

E. Install main tees parallel to the long dimension of each area, spacing the tees 48 inches on centers. Secure the bottom of hanger wires through slots in the main tee members and tie with triple twists. Level the main tees as the work progresses.

F. Uniformly space the cross tees at 24 inches on centers, and secure the cross tees into the main tees as recommended by the system manufacturer.

G. Fit acoustical ceiling tile units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Install acoustical ceiling tile level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp or dents. 1. Field cut tegular type tile with a tegular reveal at all edge conditions. 2. Where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, install retention

clips, provide two clips per ceiling panel installed on opposite sides of panel.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: 2 degrees.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Properly clean surfaces of panels and open grids free from dirt and handling marks. Wherever surfaces cannot be cleaned by normal methods or have defects, remove and replace with new components.

B. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 73 00 – EXECUTION.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

End of Section


PAINTING 09 91 00 - page 1 of 15

Section 09 91 00 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: This Section consists of painting work where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper installation. Painting work includes, but is not limited to the surface preparation and application of coated finishes, and subsequent touch-up, of interior and exterior items and surfaces as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as scheduled herein. 1. No attempt is made in this Section to list all surfaces, fixtures and equipment

requiring painting on this project. It is the responsibility of the Subcontractor to determine for itself the scope and nature of the Work required for a complete installation from the information provided herein and in the Drawings.

B. Surfaces and Materials: In general, without limiting the generality thereof, the following surfaces, fixtures and equipment require a painted finish: 1. New and existing handrails and guardrails. 2. New and existing exposed to view structural steel. 3. Metal door and frame. 4. Exposed to view structural steel. 5. Exposed to view sprinkler piping. 6. Exposed to view electrical conduit and raceways.

C. DO NOT PAINT the following surfaces and materials. 1. Concealed from view surfaces, except as indicated otherwise in the Contract

Documents or as specified herein. 2. Chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, bronze, brass. 3. Aluminum other than mill finished or factory primed. 4. Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment, pumps, machinery and

similar items which occur in mechanical, storage or equipment rooms or areas.

5. Factory finished materials, specialties, and accessories unless otherwise specified.

6. Prefinished millwork items. 7. Fire resistant testing and certification labels, code required labels, safety

warning labels, performance rating plates, nomenclature plates, identification plates, and similar other labels.





B. Pre-Bid Conference: Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the Pre-Bid conference; refer to ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS for time and date.


A. Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Concrete slabs.

B. Section 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY: Concrete masonry partitions.

C. Section 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING: Shop priming of structural steel framing.

D. Section 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS: Shop priming and finishing of designated miscellaneous metals.

E. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Requirements for sealant and backing materials.

F. Section 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: Shop priming of metal frames and steel doors.

G. Division 22 - PLUMBING: Prefinished items such as plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads, convectors, anemostates and similar surfaces and materials.

H. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL: Prefinished items such as light fixtures, switch gear, electrical distribution cabinets and similar surfaces and materials.

I. Respective sections: Factory-finishing of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical equipment.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ANSI/ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer,

and Related Products. 2. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 3. SSPC-Vis1 - Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel

Structures.



4. SSPC-SP2 - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications.

5. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes.

B. Definitions: 1. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels,

stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials specified herein, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

2. Sheen: Specular gloss readings in accordance with ASTM D52. a. Flat: less than 5 (measured at 85 degrees). b. Eggshell: 5 – 20 (measured at 60 degrees). c. Satin: 15-35 (measured at 60 degrees). d. Low Luster: 25 – 35 (measured at 60 degrees). e. Semi-Gloss: 30 -65 (measured at 60 degrees). f. Gloss: 65 or more (measured at 60 degrees).


A. Coordination: 1. General: The applicator of work specified herein is responsible to ensure that

all paints, enamels, and coatings, proposed to be applied hereunder, are compatible with coatings used for shop-primed items and items which have been prime-coated under the work of other trades.

2. Immediately notify the Architect in writing of conditions which may require a change in the specifications of this Section before proceeding with the work. Failure to do so, in a timely fashion, so as not to interfere with the schedule of work of this Contract, shall be construed as acceptance of the coatings specified. Perform all corrective measures, at no cost to the Owner, for any defects in the work, resulting from the use of such materials.

B. Scheduling: Painting work should be scheduled so as to minimize touch-ups. Interior painting is to be without flashmarks. Should flashmarks occur due to touch-ups, the Contractor shall be required to redo the entire surrounding wall surface.

C. Do not order materials until all required schedules have been properly submitted, reviewed by the Contractor and Approved by Architect.

1.7 SEQUENCING



C. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to assure that all such conditions and work are suitable to



satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived.

1.8 SUBMITTALS


data, physical properties, material compositions, and application instructions for all finishing products to be applied hereunder. a. Include certification of data indicating Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

content of all paint materials. 2. Samples:

a. Manufacturer's color selector for custom mixed colors for Architect's color scheduling.

b. Opaque coatings: Two 9 x 12 inch finished samples on hardboard of each color scheduled in each finish for review and approval. Identify boards with finish type, color mix number and scheduled substrate surfaces or materials.

c. Transparent finishes and stains: Two 9 x 12 inch finished samples on same species of solid wood and plywood to be furnished under Section 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY, of each color scheduled in each finish for review and approval. Identify boards with finish type, color mix number and scheduled substrate surfaces or materials.

B. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 1. Color chips: After final approval of all colors and tints by the Architect, submit

to the Owner, color chips of all coatings used, with manufacturer's name and mix designation of the coating for the purpose of future re-ordering of coatings. Color chips shall be at least six (6) square inches in size, for each color and tint.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 3 years minimum documented experience.

B. Single source responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

C. Environmental Requirements for Volatile Chemicals: 1. For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following

limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24) and the following chemical restrictions (applicable LEED Credit EQ 4.2): a. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. b. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. c. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.



d. Clear wood finishes: 1) Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 2) Lacquer: VOC not more than 550 g/L

e. Floor coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L f. Sealers:

1) Waterproofing sealers: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 2) Sanding sealers: VOC not more than 275 g/L. 3) All other sealers: VOC not more than 200 g/L.

g. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 2. Do not use water based paints formulated with aromatic hydrocarbons

(organic solvent with a benzene ring in its molecular structure), formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury or mercury compounds, or tinted with pigments of lead, cadmium, chromium VI and their oxides. Water based paints shall be low VOC and shall have a flash point of 61 degrees C or greater.

3. Where it is necessary to use solvent-based paints, with less than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

4. The following shall be low VOC and not be formulated with aromatic hydrocarbons (organic solvent with a benzene ring in its molecular structure). a. High performance water based acrylic coatings. b. Pigmented acrylic sealers. c. Catalyzed epoxy coatings. d. High performance silicone grafted epoxy coatings.

5. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings used on this Project shall not contain any of the following compounds. (Excluded from this restriction are residual quantities of naturally occurring elements and chlorinated organics which are found in chlorinated water supplies; contaminate levels shall be below that of the National Primary Drinking Water Standard): a. 1,2-dichlorobenzene b. Alkylphenol ethoxylates (APEs) c. Formaldehyde-donors d. Heavy metals, including lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium

and antimony in the elemental form or compounds e. Phthalates f. Triphenyl tins (TPT) and tributyl tins (TBT).

1.10 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL for purpose of verifying selected colors.

B. Paint on-site sample areas, minimum 40 square feet, illustrating selected color, and tint.

C. Locate samples where directed. The Contractor shall provide in the base Contract, a total amount of samples equal to one sample per room.



D. Accepted samples may not remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; container labeling shall include manufacturer's name, type of paint, color mix designation, expected coverage, surface preparation instructions, instructions for mixing and reducing, drying time, and clean-up recommendations.

B. Store materials, conforming with applicable codes and fire regulations, in designated spaces. Keep storage area secure when direct access is not required or when not performing work under this Section. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion, maintain a dry-chemical type fire extinguisher in all areas where materials of this Section are being stored or used.

C. Store paint materials in a well ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Do not use the sanitary system for mixing or disposal of refuse material. Carry water to mixing rooms and dump waste material in a suitable refuse receptacle. Remove oily rags and waste each day.

1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Provide heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

C. Apply paints and finishes above minimum temperature conditions in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Provide sufficient lighting to maintain 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Paints and general finishes:

a. Benjamin Moore & Company, Montvale, NJ. b. California Paints, Andover MA. c. Glidden Professional (division of PPG Industries, Inc.), Strongsville, OH. d. Devoe High Performance Coatings (division of PPG Industries, Inc.),

Strongsville, OH. e. Pittsburgh Paints / PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh PA.



f. Pratt & Lambert Inc., (division of Sherwin Williams), Buffalo, NY. g. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland OH.

2. Cold galvanizing touch-up paint: a. ZRC Worldwide Inc., Marshfield MA. b. Duncan Galvanizing, Everett, MA. c. Rustoleum Corp., Vernon Hills IL.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except for field catalyzed coatings with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Color pigments shall be processed to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. Provide best quality grade, where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified.

B. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Organic Zinc-Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to MIL-P-21035B (Reinstated) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements for Zinc-Rich Paints. 1. Specified manufacturer and product: ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield MA, product

“Galvilite”.

C. Joint sealant for fill of minor cracks in plaster prior to painting: One component acrylic latex caulking compound, conforming to FS 19-TP-21M and ASTM C 834, paintable within 24 hours after application, with a minimum movement capability of ±12.5 percent, equal to one of the following: 1. Pecora, product “ AC-20+”. 2. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., product, “Sonolac”. 3. Tremco, product, “Trimflex 834”.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory materials: other materials not specifically indicated, but are required to achieve the finishes specified of commercial quality.

B. Cleaning Materials: Tri-Sodium Phosphate (TSP) substitute. Acceptable products include the following, or approved equal: 1. Savogran, Norwood MA, products “TSP-PF”, or “Liquid TSP Substitute”. 2. Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA., product “Custom T.S.P.

Substitute”. 3. DAP Inc., Baltimore MD., product “T.S.P. Substitute Heavy Duty Cleaner”.

1.2 SEQUENCING






PART 2 - PRODUCTS








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section. Notify Contractor of any condition that may potentially affect proper application of coatings.

B. Measure moisture content of surfaces, do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Masonry or concrete: 12 percent.

C. Beginning Work of this Section means acceptance of existing substrate surfaces and site conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in all areas where coating work is being done to protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during the work. Protect adjoining surfaces with painters mask tape.

B. Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove all finish hardware for painting doors and frames, except hinges and locks on exterior door; remove electrical plates, light fixture trim and fittings. Re-install hardware and other removed items after painted surfaces are thoroughly dry.

C. Mix coatings thoroughly, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of the specific coating used, to ensure uniformity of color and mass. Strain previously opened coatings to remove skins, lumps, and other foreign matter prior to painting.

D. Thin or reduce materials only as recommended by the specific material manufacturer, and only with the approval of the Architect.

E. Impervious surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to thoroughly dry.

F. Concrete and unit masonry surfaces scheduled to receive paint finish: 1. Remove all loose scale and mortar, dirt, salt or alkali powder and other

surface contaminates, using a detergent expressly formulated for cleaning of concrete and masonry.

2. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate. 3. Remove stains caused by weathering corroding metals with a solution of

sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. 4. Thoroughly rinse the cleaned surfaces with clear water, and allow the

surfaces to completely dry, allow a minimum of 4 hours before commencing application of coatings.

G. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: 1. Remove grease, scale, dirt, rust, and all foreign materials, down to bright

metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or sandblasting where heavy coatings of scale are evident.

2. Wash steel with solvent, apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned.

3. Spot prime after repairs with metal primer product of the finish coating manufacturer.

H. Shop primed steel surfaces: 1. Remove rust, blistered and defective shop prime paint, and all foreign

materials, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or commercial paint remover. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.

2. Remove all grease or dirt with mineral spirits. 3. Spot prime bare metal with metal primer product of the finish coating

manufacturer. Seal top and bottom edges of metals doors with primer.

I. Previously painted steel surfaces:



1. Remove rust, blistered and defective paint, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, or sanding. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous as possible

2. Remove grease, dirt and all foreign materials. 3. Spot prime bare metal with metal primer product of the finish coating

manufacturer.

J. New galvanized surfaces to receive field apply paint: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP16 to achieve a surface profile

of 0.5 to 1.5 mils.

K. Existing galvanized metal surfaces which have been depleted of zinc by exposure or abrasion to receive touch-up liquid zinc coating. 1. Thoroughly abrade surface to be coated with wire brush to remove rust and

loose materials 2. Clean surface with industrial solvent to remove dirt, grease and oils.

3.3 REMOVAL OF LEAD-BASED PAINT MATERIALS

A. Remove existing visible lead-based paint occurring on exterior trim and elsewhere where it occurs using caustic paste. Comply with all referenced regulations, those contained within the referenced regulations, and all other applicable regulations and requirements of other governing agencies having jurisdiction

B. Isolate work areas from other workers of this project, provide air sampling results and worker exposure samples as required by referenced regulations. Contractor is responsible for worker safety and environmental exposure of contaminants during the performance of this Work. 1. Shroud work areas by utilizing staging with tarps, in accordance with

Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Guide 61 - “Containing Debris Generated during Paint Removal Operations.

2. Maintain shroud barriers until exterior surfaces are th0roughly cleaned of visible debris by use of HEPA vacuum.

C. Apply paste-type paint stripping using trowel or spray to 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch depth as recommended by manufacturer. Cover paste with recommended fibrous laminated cloth with printed polyethylene side facing out. Rub gently to remove air and pierce remaining air bubbles with knife. Leave stripper on for a period of 24 hours or longer according to test patch.

D. Remove stripper and dispose of in accordance with cited regulations for hazardous waste.

E. Clean-up and dispose all visible paint chips on the ground within 8 feet from the foundation of the building, resulting from removal of work on exterior trim. Remove all visible paint chips and debris using HFPA vacuums

F. Dispose of caustic waste, paint chips and any exterior trim removed in compliance with Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and all other EPA, state and local authority requirements as might be applicable.

G. After removal of paint and waste



1. Thoroughly neutralize paint remover as recommended by paint-stripper manufacturer. Remove all residue with water spray and scrub surfaces with nylon brushes taking care to get at all crevices, grooves, cracks and similar conditions.

2. Allow wood to dry (15 percent moisture content maximum) and sand surfaces smooth. Vacuum wood surfaces with HEPA vacuuming.

3. Wash wood with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate (TSP). 4. Allow wood to dry (15 percent moisture content maximum) and sand surfaces

smooth. 5. Touch up knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with two coats exterior

stain sealer, “Kilz” or equal. 6. Fill up nail holes, wood defects, chips in layers of paint, and cracks with

exterior wood putty, or plastic wood after primer finish is dry, and sand smooth.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Apply all materials in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed instruction, and in accordance with the best trade practices. Each coat shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect before succeeding coats are applied.

B. Do not apply successive coating until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, and in no case in less than 24 hours after the preceding coat.

C. Number of coats is indicated under Painting Schedules. Number of coats is indicated as a minimum number to be applied over scheduled substrates. An additional coat or coats may be required for proper color coverage of substrate as determined by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. Examples of these conditions include, but are not limited to: 1. Dark colored substrates may require an additional primer or intermediate coat

to stabilize color, if final applied top-coat color is light. 2. Pre-finished or pre-primed products may require an additional field applied

coat to stabilize the shop/factory applied base color prior to application of top-coat finishes.

3. Dark color top coat finishes may require additional finish coat over white or light colored substrates to obtain correct color density.

D. Apply each coat to a uniform finish; Apply primer and first coat of slightly lighter in color tint than the scheduled color of the final coat.

E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish and remove sanding dust prior to applying succeeding coat.

F. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

G. Prime back surfaces of all interior and exterior woodwork scheduled for painted finish with primer.



3.5 APPLICATION – CONCRETE MASONRY

A. Apply block filler to concrete masonry partitions at maximum rate allowed by coating manufacturer. Apply by airless spray followed by back rolling to force material into voids. Use a squeegee to remove excess material prior to initial set, and provide a smooth surface texture. After initial set, touch-up and fill apparent voids and holidays with fresh material.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the work in each area, remove all coating splatters from glass, prefinished surfaces, bright metals, and from other surfaces that have not been painted or finished hereunder. Do not use abrasive paper or abrasive cleaner on any prefinished surface or bright metal. Remove all materials and debris; leave work area in a clean condition.

3.7 PROTECTION AND TOUCH-UP

A. During painting work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Properly clean, repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.

B. Protect all painted and finished surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance of the work. The Architect will conduct a final review of all work performed hereunder. Re-coat or touch-up, all scratches and other blemishes on surfaces, and as directed by the Architect, any areas found which do not comply with the requirements of this Section, and bear all costs therefore.

C. Any re-coating or touch-up work, required after the work of this Section has been reviewed and accepted by the Architect, will be paid for by the Contractor.

3.8 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Colors: The Architect will furnish a schedule of colors for each area and surface. Tinting and matching shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect. No limit is placed on the number of colors that may be required, or the number of colors in any one room, area, or surface. Premium paints of deep-hued, bright, pigment intensive, accent and primary colors may be scheduled for up to 25 percent of all interior and exterior surfaces without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Finishes and Colors: The Architect will furnish a schedule of colors for each surface. Tinting and matching shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1. In general: colors shall match existing, and be used in like manner as existing.

Acceptance as to the match of colors to existing shall be the sole determination of the Architect.

2. Colors of priming coats (and body coats where specified) shall be lighter in tint than those of finish coat.

3. Colorants: Pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof, ultra-violet resistant, finely ground in approved medium; and be limeproof, when used in coatings to be applied on masonry, concrete, plaster, and gypsum board surfaces.

C. Field finished coating high performance system for Metal fabrications and structural steel (excludes hollow metal door and frame):



1. Application: Metal, Ferrous. 2. Substrate preparation:

a. At bare steel: SSPC - SP6 / NACE 6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning,” with a uniform profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils.

b. At primed steel: SSPC – SP1 “Solvent Cleaning,” and SP2 “Hand Tool Cleaning” to remove surface contaminants.

c. At galvanized steel: Galvanized: SSPC-SP16 – “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Non-Ferrous Metals”. Take care not to remove galvanized coating.

3. Field Primer: Tnemec product “90-97 Tneme-zinc”, at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. 4. Filed intermediate Coat: Tnemec “Series N69F, Epoxoline II” at 3.0-4.0 mils

DFT. 5. Finish Coat: Tnemec “Series 750 UVX (with Accelerator)” at 2.5 to 3.0 mils

DFT.

D. Exterior side of CONCRETE MASONRY, walls scheduled for painted finish: 1. Application: Masonry wall surfaces scheduled to receive field-applied

coatings. 2. Substrate preparation:

a. Remove all loose scale and mortar, dirt, salt or alkali powder and any other surface contaminate, using a detergent expressly formulated for cleaning of concrete and masonry.

b. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate. c. Remove stains caused by weathering corroding metals with a solution of

sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. d. Thoroughly rinse the cleaned surfaces with clear water, and allow the

surfaces to completely dry, allow a minimum of 4 hours before commencing application of coatings.

3. First coat: Back-roll coat if spray applied. a. Carboline “Sanitile, Flexxide Elastomeric” at 5.0 mils DFT. b. Courtaulds/Porter “PorterFlex 6000” at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT. c. Tnemec Series 156 “Envirocrete” at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT. d. PPG “Perma-Crete, Pitt-Flex” at 6.5 to 7.5 mils DFT. e. Benjamin Moore Moorlastic 056 at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT

4. Second coat (finish coat): a. Carboline “Sanitile, Flexxide Elastomeric” at 50 mils DFT. b. Courtaulds/Porter “PorterFlex 6000” at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT. c. Tnemec Series 156 “Enviro-Crete” at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. d. PPG “Perma-Crete, Pitt-Flex” at 6.5 to 7.5 mils DFT. e. Benjamin Moore Moorlastic 056 at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT

E. Interior side of CONCRETE and CONCRETE MASONRY, walls scheduled for painted finish: 1. One coat block primer.



a. California: “Mason-Cote Block Filler”, Nº. 3751. b. Glidden Professional: Concrete Coatings Block Filler Interior/Exterior Nº.

3010. c. Moore: “Superspec Latex Block Filler”, 160 Series. d. Pittsburgh: “Speedhide Exterior Latex Masonry Block Filler”, 6-15 Series. e. Sherwin-Williams: "Loxon Ext. Masonry Acrylic Primer", B25 W300.

2. Two coats 100-percent-acrylic semi-gloss paint: a. California: “2010 Acrylic Latex Exterior Satin Gloss”, Nº. 402. b. Glidden Professional: Fortis 450 Exterior Nº. 6207V. c. Moore: “Aura Exterior Semi-Gloss”, Nº. 632. d. Pittsburgh: “Manor Hall Timeless – Semi-Gloss”, 73-510 Series. e. Sherwin-Williams: “A-100 Exterior Paint – Satin Gloss”.

F. Exterior METAL, ALUMINUM, new, mill finish and as scheduled to receive paint: 1. One coat primer:

a. California: “Rust-Stop DTM Primer/Finish”, Nº. 1061. b. Devoe Coatings: Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer and Flat Finish. c. Moore: “Acrylic Metal Primer”, Nº. P04. d. Pittsburgh: “Pitt-Tech DTM Primer/Finish”, 90 Series. e. Sherwin-Williams: “DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish”, B66W1 Series.

2. Two coats acrylic gloss enamel: a. California: Everlife 100% Acrylic Waterborne High Gloss “, Nº. 521. b. Devoe Coatings: Devflex 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic

Semi-Gloss Enamel. c. Moore: “Acrylic Gloss Enamel”, Nº. P28. d. Pittsburgh: “Pitt-Tech DTM Exterior Waterborne High Gloss Enamel”, 90-

300 Series. e. Sherwin-Williams: “DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating”, B66 Series.

G. Exterior METAL, GALVANIZED (hollow metal door and frame): 1. Wash primer apply if recommended by individual paint manufacturer. 2. One coat primer.

a. California: “Rust-Stop DTM 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss”. b. Devoe Coatings: Devflex 4020PF Direct To Metal Primer and Flat Finish. c. Moore: “DTM. Acrylic Gloss Enamel”, WM28 d. Pittsburgh: “Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel”, 90-

712 Series. e. Sherwin-Williams: "DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish", B66-W1 Series.

3. Two coats of gloss finish direct-to-metal acrylic enamel paint. a. California: “Rust-Stop DTM 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss”. b. Devoe Coatings: Devflex 659 Gloss DTM Waterborne Acrylic Enamel. c. Moore: “DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel”, WM28



d. Pittsburgh: “Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel”, 90-374 Series.

e. Sherwin-Williams: "DTM Acrylic Coating", B66-100 Series.

End of Section



SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - page 1 of 4

Section 10 14 00 SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install the following informational and directional signage: 1. Exterior acrylic plate signage.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations

regarding accessibility requirements.

B. Inclusionary References: The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto: 1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible

to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, physical

properties for each item furnished hereunder. 2. Schedule: prepare and submit shop drawings and verification schedule. 3. Shop drawings:

a. Elevation drawing showing full size elevations of each sign. Indicate for each sign: sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions.

4. Selection samples: a. Sample plastic chips indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors

available for initial selection by Architect. 5. Verification samples:

a. Full size sign in specified finish and typeface. Approved sample may be used in finished Project.


A. Provide all signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with all applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and

regulations regarding signage for exits and handicapped barriers.




A. Sole Source: Obtain products required for the Work of this Section from a single signage fabricator, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime signage fabricator of plastic plate signage.

B. Qualifications: 1. Signage Fabricator: Minimum of 5 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.


A. Delivered packaged signs, labeled in name groups.

B. Store all materials in an elevated dry location, protected by waterproof coverings. Store adhesive tape at ambient room temperature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following, or approved equal: 1. Apco New England, East Providence, RI. 2. Design Communications, LTD., Boston, MA. 3. Sunshine Sign, North Grafton, MA. 4. Back Bay Sign Company, Medford, MA.

2.2 SIGNAGE - GENERAL

A. General: Provide sign copy to comply with the requirements indicated in the Drawings, for sizes, styles, spacing, content, positions, materials, finishes and colors of letters. 1. All Signs shall conform to United States “Americans with Disabilities Act” and

Commonwealth of Massachusetts Regulation 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board.

2. Final placing and sizing of lettering shall be done as part of the shop drawing approval process, at which time the manufacturer shall make recommendations for Architect’s review. Lettering shall have stroke width to height ratio and width to height ratio in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.

3. Tactile Signage: a. Raised Lettering: raised minimum 0.793 mm (1/32 in). and be in

compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act. b. Braille: Accurate Grade 2 translations, and conforming to the provisions

of ADAAG and ICC/ANSI A117.1 with regard to size, position, spacing, and profile characteristics.

B. Installation of all signs shall be done by vandal-proof method, fully described on the approved shop drawings.



2.3 PLAQUE SIGNAGE

A. Photopolymer plaque signage (general requirements): Identification signs with raised tactile graphics, text, and Grade 2 Braille. Signs shall consisting of 1/32 inch thick synthetic light sensitive photo emulsion permanently bonded to a rigid phenolic substrate, aluminum or acrylic plaque. 1. Raised lettering: Bond photopolymer permanently to sign plaque, with

appropriate laminating film, as recommend by the photopolymer manufacturer.

2. Screenprinting: All screen printing graphics, including raised areas of tactile plaques except Braille, shall be screen printed in a contrasting color so as to meet the color contrast requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act. a. All non-tactile text shall be screen printed with catalyzed epoxy ink.

Applied vinyl lettering and graphics is not acceptable. b. Apply screen printing inks evenly without pinholes, scratches or orange-

peeling. 3. Graphics: All text, symbols and graphics shall be reproduced utilizing

computer generated digital art. All screen printed graphics shall utilize photographically prepared screens and shall be printed in accordance with industry standards. Hand-cut screens are not acceptable. a. All edges and corners and letter forms shall be true and clean.

Letterforms, color areas, or lines with rounded positive or negative corners, built-up edges, bleeding, spattering, shall not be accepted.

b. Prepare artwork from typesetters reproduction of the test specified, minimum 1200 dpi resolution, camera ready artwork. All camera ready artwork and typesetting shall be no less than 75 percent of actual finished size.

4. Sign colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard and standard special colors. a. All signs shall be two color signs.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners, General: Concealed metal fasteners, non-corrosive to sign material or mounting surface.

B. Exposed mounting hardware: Stainless steel screws with button shape Torx head.

C. Adhesive tape: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


A. Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a minimum material temperature range of 56 °C (100 °F), without causing buckling, excessive opening of joints or over stressing of adhesives, welds and fasteners.

B. Shop fabricate. Signs shall have fine, even texture and be flat and sound. Lines and miters sharp, arises unbroken, profiles accurate and ornament true to pattern. Plane surfaces be smooth flat and without oil-canning, free of rack and twist. Maximum variation from plane of surface plus or minus 0.3 mm (0.015 inches). Restore texture to filed or cut areas.



C. Pre-drill holes for bolts and screws.

D. No signs are to be manufactured until final sign message schedule and location review has been completed by the Architect and Owner.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, locations in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Use mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install signs plumb, level and true to height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

C. Shop fabricate signs where practical and deliver to site completely assembled. All joints of such fabricated work are completely smooth without apparent marks showing throughout the finish. All work “broken down” is erected so that all parts fit accurately with hairline joints, with all joints flush. Joints in lighted signs shall be light-proof.

D. Door mounted signs: Secure sign with VHB tape, and specified screws in corners. 1. Vinyl Tape Mounting: Use very high bond, double sided foam tape, of

thickness indicated, to mount signs to smooth nonporous surface. Use screws in conjunction with foam tape.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean and polish installed signs.

B. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition.

C. Remove all names, stamps and decals of sign manufacturers, and installers. No visible advertising of any kind is permitted.

End of Section


TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - page 1 of 7

SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install toilet, bath and custodial accessories.

B. Furnish and install protection padding for exposed piping.

C. Furnish toilet and bath accessory templates, to locate anchorage reinforcement, to trades responsible.


A. Section 04 20 00 – UNIT MASONRY:

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 42 00 - REFERENCES. The standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized minimum quality only. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable, subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. 1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible

To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed,

and Forged Steel, Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. 3. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel, Plate,

Sheet and Strip. 4. ASTM A 269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for

General Service. 5. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 6. ASTM A 386 - Zinc Coating on Assembled Steel Products. 7. ASTM B 456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus

Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Information and Review Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, for each item furnished

hereunder. 2. Schedule: Complete schedule, indicating types, quantity, and model numbers

of accessories for each location in which the accessories will be installed. 3. Selection samples: Sample color chips indicating each manufacturer's full

range of colors available for selection by Architect.



4. Verification samples: Complete units, as requested by Architect.


A. Conform to applicable codes and accessibility regulations, and comply with ANSI A 117.1 for installation of work.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name, identification of manufacturer or supplier and item identification number corresponding with approved schedule.

B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

B. Coordinate the work of this Section with placement of internal wall reinforcement.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Deliver to the Owner upon completion of the work of this Section, applicable manufacturer’s standard warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufactures and models: To establish a standard of quality, design, function desired, and appearance, Drawings and specifications have been based on manufacturers and model numbers specified herein below. Manufacturers offering products which may be considered as equal include the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc., (A&J) New Windsor NY. 2. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI), Yonkers NY. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Bobrick), Clifton Park NY. 4. Bradley Corporation / Washroom Accessories Division, (Bradley) Menomonee

Falls, WI. 5. Meek Manufacturing Company, Inc., Fort Smith AR.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sheet steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality, ANSI/ASTM A 366.

B. Stainless steel sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304.

C. Tubing: ASTM A 269 stainless steel.



D. Plastic laminate: NEMA LD-3, general purpose type; 0.125-inch thick, matte finish in color as selected by the Architect.

2.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Baby changing station: Surface mounted diaper changing station equal to Koala Kare Products, Stainless Steel Recessed Mounted Horizontal Design (Model KB110-SSRE) having the following features: 1. Sanitary Liner Dispenser: Koala Kare Products Model KB134-SSLD (Stainless

Steel), holds 25 sanitary liners. 2. Construction: 18 gage Type 302/304 stainless steel exterior finish with FDA

approved blow-molded high-density grey polyethylene liner with Microban antimicrobial interior.

3. Horizontal format design: a. Hinges: Reinforced, full-length steel on steel. b. Mounting supports: multiple 11-gage steel. Secure with Tamper resistant

fasteners. c. Operation: Opens and closes with pneumatic gas spring mechanism in

concealed cylinder. 4. Unit rated to support static load of at least 250 pounds (113 kg). Provide test

results from licensed independent testing company, manufacturers declarations are not acceptable.

5. Equip changing station with integral liner dispenser, 2 built-in bag hooks, and child protection safety straps with cam buckle adjustable with one hand.

6. Instruction graphics/written instructions shall be printed for visibility and permanently engraved into plastic or metal for resistance to vandalism.

7. Provide safety strap and harness to be secured at four points, closure to be a buckle type.

8. Unit is to resist bacterial growth. Provide test results that conform to ASTM G-222.

9. Unit to be cycle tested by licensed independent testing lab for at least 50,000 operations.

10. Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s 5 year limited warranty on materials and workmanship, and 5 year replacement warranty against vandalism.

B. Fully recessed paper towel and waste receptacle: Surface mounted stainless steel paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle. Paper towel dispenser shall dispense 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels without any additional adapters. Waste receptacle shall be furnished with removable, leak-proof, rigid molded plastic waste container. Waste capacity: 3.3 gallons minimum. 1. A&J model Nº. U6024 (having waste capacity of 4.0 gallons). 2. ASI model Nº. 6467 (having waste capacity of 5 gallons). 3. Bobrick model Nº. B-38034 (having waste capacity of 3.8 gallons), [Basis of

Design]. 4. Bradley model Nº. 2027. (having waste capacity of 3.3 gallons).



C. Toilet tissue dispensers: Surface-mounted double roll type toilet tissue dispenser fabricated from stainless steel, with satin finish, molded and extruded ABS spindles, vandelproof keyed locking mechanism, able to accommodate two 2000 sheet rolls. 1. A&J model Nº. .UX75-B-1 2. ASI model Nº. 74022-SM. 3. Bobrick model Nº. B-.6977 (Basis of Design). 4. Bradley model Nº. 5126

D. Soap dispensers: Recessed for viscous free flowing soaps, with lockable 45 fluid ounce (or greater) stainless steel container, and corrosion resistant all purpose valve for liquid soaps, lotions and detergents which will operate with less than 5 pounds of force. 1. A&J model Nº. U130A. 2. ASI model Nº. 0326. 3. Bobrick model Nº. B-306 (Basis of Design). 4. Bradley model Nº. (n/a).

E. Mirrors, framed: 24 inches wide by 36 inches high, having the following: 1. Frame: one piece 3/4/ by 3/4 inch type 304 18 gage stainless steel roll formed

frame, with continuous integral stiffener on all sides. Corners shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. a. Exposed finish: Brushed satin

2. Back: Mirror back shall be protected by full-size, shock-absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive 1/8" (3-mm) thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel backing shall have integral brackets for concealed mounting.

3. Mirror glass: 1/4 inch thick clear safety glass, ASTM C 1048 with Class 1 clear, quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, with Class 1, standard commercial quality, electro-copper back-plating protected by a corrosion-resistant zinc-coating. a. Mirror corrosion resistant backing shall have minimum 15 year warranty.

4. Acceptable models: a. A&J model Nº. U700-VC. b. ASI model Nº. 0600. c. Bobrick model Nº. B-2908-2436. (Basis of Design) d. Bradley model Nº. 780. e. Meek model Nº. M1210.

F. Coat hook: Surface-mounted hat and coat hook shall be Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. 1. Hafele model 842.34.010. (Basis of Design)

G. Grab bars, 42 inch length: 1. Grab Bar Loading Criteria as defined in Commonwealth of Massachusetts

Regulation 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board.



a. Bending stress in a grab bar induced by the maximum bending moment from the application of 250 lbs. shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the grab bar.

b. Shear stress induced in a grab bar by the application of 250 lbs. shall be less than the allowable shear stress for the material of the grab bar. If the connection between the grab bar and its mounting bracket or other supports is considered to be fully restrained, then direct and torsional shear stresses shall be totaled for the combined shear stress, which shall not exceed the allowable shear stress.

c. Shear force induced in a fastener or mounting device from the application of 250 lbs. shall be less than the allowable lateral load of either the fastener or mounting device or the supporting structure, whichever is the smaller allowable load.

d. Tensile force induced in a fastener by direct tension force of 250 lbs. plus the maximum moment from the application of 250 lbs. shall be less than the allowable withdrawal load between the fastener and the supporting structure

e. Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings. 2. Grab bars: 1-1/4 inch diameter with satin finished ends, concealed 1/8 inch

thick mounting flange with snap-on cover, equal to: a. A&J model Nº. UG2. b. ASI series 3700. c. Bobrick series B-5806.99 (Basis of Design) d. Bradley series 832.

2.4 ADA PIPING PROTECTION

A. Specified Product (Basis of Design): IPS Corporation, Collierville, TN., product “Soft Guard Plus”.

B. Description: 1/8 inch thick pliable PVC Shell finish Soft Guard Plus on all drainage piping including hot and cold water valve and supplies under lavatories to comply with ADA and UPC standards. Covers shall be secured by custom fit, tamper-resistant snap-to-lock fasteners. 1. Complies with ICC/ANSI A117.1 (sec 606.6). 2. PVC Base Insulation Material, Class A rated complying with 25 Flame

Spread/450 Smoke Index (tested under ASTM E-84).

2.5 LOCKS

A. General: All locks shall be keyed alike. Provide four (4) keys, for lockable accessories, to the Owner.

2.6 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Type 304 stainless, tamperproof.

B. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion, scratches or dents. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.

B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

C. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Ferrous metals: Clean and treat, spray apply one coat of baked-on rust and moisture-resistant primer, followed by two coats of baked-on synthetic enamel, in selected colors. Ensure that finish coating is uniform in color intensity and degree of gloss, throughout.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM 456, Type SC2, satin finish.

C. Stainless steel: Number 4 satin finish, except as otherwise specified above under the Article entitled “Toilet Accessories”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate times for building-in by other trades

B. Coordinate with trades responsible for providing receiving surfaces on which accessories will be installed.

C. Exact locations of accessories within each room or area shall be as directed by the Architect.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Perform installation work in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install toilet accessories absolutely level and in true line, securely and rigidly anchored with theft proof fasteners of the size and type most appropriate for the specific receiving surface, concealing the fasteners as far as practicable.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove all protective films and coverings from accessories, and clean and polish each piece. Remove all rubbish, packing materials, and debris, caused by the work of this Section.

End of Section



EXTERIOR SAFETY PADDING 11 68 40 - page 1 of 2

Section 11 68 40 EXTERIOR SAFETY PADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnish and install the following: 1. Exterior safety padding.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets for wall padding. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s certificates: Certify that Products provided under this Section

meet or exceed UL and specified requirements. 4. Warranty: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all

materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof.

5. Shop drawings: Installation details showing mounting conditions, clearances, dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Porter Athletic Equipment Company, Schiller Park IL. 2. Performance sports systems, Anderson IN 3. AALCO Manufacturing Company, Louis MI

2.2 WALL PADDING

A. Exterior wall/fence padding: Prefabricated wall-mounted panels, equal to Porter No. 90360-00xx-xx* (*xx-xx equals dimensions required), in compliance with Class A flame spread and smoke in accordance with ASTM E84, and the following requirements: 1. Sizes: as indicated on Drawings, with cutouts made in field to fit job

conditions. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard 2-3/4 inches to 3 inches as applicable to

referenced products. 3. Covering: flame-retardant 14-ounce non-tear vinyl laminated material, mildew

and rot resistant, fungicide treated, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

4. Backing: 1/2 inch thick sealed weather resistant composite core.


EXTERIOR SAFETY PADDING 11 68 40 - page 2 of 2

5. Foam: 2-1/4 inch thick polyethylene foam. 6. Mounting: As detailed on the Drawings. 7. Locations and quantities: As shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of project conditions.


D. Inspect prefabricated padding prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install padding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each type. 1. Fasten pads and mounting strips to wall level and plumb; shim as required to

keep panels flat.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completion of the work of this Section, remove equipment, and clean all wall, partition, and floor areas free from materials installed under this Section.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect pad covering materials and finished metal surfaces on volleyball system from damage during fabrication, shipping, storage, and erection; advise the Contractor of protective treatment and other precautions required through the remainder of construction.

End of Section

DAIQ 17021.00 Edward A. Lelacheur Park Right Field Concourse Extension October 24, 2018 Lowell, Massachusetts

FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00 - page i of 21

SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS...................................................................................... 1 1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ................................................................................. 2 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 2 1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES ................................................ 2 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................... 3 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 3 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................... 4 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................. 4 1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 5 1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................ 6 1.13 GUARANTEE .................................................................................................................................. 6 1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................ 6 1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL .................................................................................................... 7 1.16 REMOVAL WORK .......................................................................................................................... 7 1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ....................................................................................................... 7 1.18 FINAL COMPLETION ..................................................................................................................... 7 1.19 REOBSERVATION ......................................................................................................................... 8 1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................ 8 1.21 ASBESTOS REMOVAL .................................................................................................................. 8 1.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS.................................................................................................................. 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9 2.2 PIPE SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ........................................................................... 10 2.3 INSPECTORS TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS .................................................................... 11 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS .................................................................................................................... 11 2.5 SPARE HEADS ............................................................................................................................. 12 2.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS ................................................................................ 12 2.7 ACCESS PANELS ........................................................................................................................ 12 2.8 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................................................................ 13 2.9 TESTS AND APPROVALS ........................................................................................................... 19

PART 3 – EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 19

3.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 19 3.2 SPRINKLER HEADS .................................................................................................................... 20 3.3 ACCESS PANELS ........................................................................................................................ 20 3.4 DESIGN CRITERIA ....................................................................................................................... 20



FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00 - page 1 of 21

SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicable

parts of Division 1 as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section

whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and

supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as required by the drawings and details and as specified herein.

B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the

Fire Protection Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified hereinunder to include the following items:

1. Modifications to the existing dry pipe sprinkler system as required to match the new

architectural layout of the ball park’s concourse spaces. 2. Furnishing of Access Panels. 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other

Sections: 1. All Cutting and Patching. 2. Temporary Water, Heat, Fire Protection and Toilet Facilities. 3. Temporary Light and Power. 4. Excavation and Backfilling. 5. Foundations and Trenching. 6. Concrete Bases for Equipment. 7. Flashing of Holes through Roof. 8. Painting. 9. Food Service Equipment. 10. Laboratory Equipment. 11. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 12. Plumbing. 13. Electrical. 14. Utilities Beyond 10’ - 0” from the Building. 15. Installation of Access Panels. 16. Fire Extinguishers.



17. Electric Heat Tracing. 18. Kitchen Hood Fire Suppression System. 1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all applicable Codes, Local

and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies

between the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc. C. In the event of a conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply. D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable: 1. Massachusetts State Building Code. 2. National Electric Code (NEC). 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (DEP). 5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of City or Town. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 7. Insurance Services Organization (ISO). 8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 10. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). 11. American Welding Society (AWS). 12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS). 13. Factory Mutual (FM). 14. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI). 15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 16. American Gas Association (AGA). 17. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment

that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project.

1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location

of piping and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and accessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.

B. Where requirements of the applicable codes, plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most

stringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of the work which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer’s attention for direction as to what is provided.

C. Final location of sprinkler heads, valve cabinets, fire department valves, siamese connections,

roof manifolds, etc., shall be coordinated with the Architectural Plans. Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.



D. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items, they shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not reported, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and operable system.

E. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades. Fire protection systems shall be so

located as to not interfere with access doors of HVAC units or the required space for maintenance staff to service these units.

F. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus

and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.

G. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and

condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.

H. Prepare and submit for review coordinated Plans and sections, clearly showing how the work is

to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. Work that is installed before coordination with other trades, or that causes interference with the work of other trades shall be changed to correct condition.

I. Coordinate the final sprinkler head locations with architectural soffits, lintels, and other similar

architectural features so as to meet the clearances to sprinkler head obstructions as required by Code. If there are discrepancies between the Contract Documents and the Code required clearances to architectural features, they shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to the start of any installation work. The Architect/Engineer will direct the contractor on how to proceed with any corrective action. If the discrepancies are not reported, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and operable system, including any rework of installed sprinkler heads or adding additional sprinkler heads.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare

Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment and lines.

B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum or

compatible system. A disc and one (1) set of reproducibles (all-trade composite) shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8” = 1’-0” scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that scale or

larger, plans and sections. D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the other trades (Fire Protection, Plumbing and Electrical) so they can indicate their work.

E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the

approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials



and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders, instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate the location, size, type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.

B. The marked up and colored in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the

work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are accurate and up-to-date.

C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked up prints for review and comment.

After review and comment, these marked up prints shall be used in the preparation of the Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the basis of the Architect/Engineer’s final comments. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducibles and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the completed installation. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disks properly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.

D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible mylars and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2014

minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the completed installation.

E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with

the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals. F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings, Record Hydraulic Calculations and/or CAD

disks properly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.

G. The Fire Protection Contractor’s Design Engineer shall certify that the completed installation

complies with all applicable codes and underwriters' requirements. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this

Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the Codes, Standards, recommended practices and manuals of the National Fire Protection Association, the Insurance Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has been

tested and accepted. B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials

and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment.



C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and make good damage thus caused.

D. When open flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches, welding equipment, etc., are

required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor will be notified not less than twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location where the work is to be performed.

E. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire

watch where work is being performed and until it is completed. F. All exposed piping in parking garages, warehouses and similar type occupancies shall be

permanently protected against physical damage from any type of vehicle. G. The Fire Protection Contractor shall exercise the proper precautions required by NFPA 241, 2009

Edition. 1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for requirements, all of which

shall be included as part of this Specification. B. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted and stamped approved by the

local fire department and insurance underwriters prior to submitting to the Architect for review. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall bear the seal of registration of a qualified Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer.

C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the

requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the shop drawing review.

D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect. Such

certification shall be made by the Owner, or Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly authorized by the Owner to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.

E. It is intended that the Contractor submit complete and accurate data at the first submission. If the

shop drawing is returned marked “Resubmit”, or “Not Accepted”, only one (1) additional submission will be permitted.

F. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as

required, without invalidating the manufacturers' warranty, so that it can be installed through regular window, door, and/or louver openings.

G. The shop drawings and manufacturer’s data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in

advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary. No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.

H. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer’s

office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures are submitted



or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his work.

I. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted and stamped approved by the

local fire department and insurance underwriters prior to submitting to the Architect for review. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall bear the seal of registration of a qualified Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer.

1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions regarding substitution of

materials as it relates to this project. B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for

consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term “approved equal” appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process.

C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear

the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution. D. Manufacturer’s directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage and installation of any

equipment. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the Contract Drawings and the manufacturer's requirements and obtain a written response prior to proceeding with work. Should the Subcontractor fail to comply with this, he/she shall bear the costs of any corrections which may be required.

E. The Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and

incidentals to complete the work under this Section. 1.13 GUARANTEE A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for requirements, all of which

shall be included as part of this Specification. B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all

defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing with the date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems resulting from such failures.

C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee

period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced.

1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas which will be occupied during the

construction period. When an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made only upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.

B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this

schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.



1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from all inspectors

and authorities having jurisdiction, notarized letters from the manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition.

1.16 REMOVAL WORK A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of service. B. All existing equipment to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All

existing equipment to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removed from the premises.

C. Remove all abandoned piping and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilings

or walls are removed all abandoned piping shall be removed and ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing inaccessible ceilings shall remain and ends capped and marked abandoned.

1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is

substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items remaining to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work is not substantially complete, he will

promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.

C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial

completion. D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a

Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions. 1.18 FINAL COMPLETION A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the General

Contractor written certification that: 1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies

listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully

operational. The contractor shall attach the NFPA Aboveground and Underground Test Certificates, as applicable.



5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review. B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly suspend

his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor. C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of

final completion. D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a

second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor listing observed deficiencies.

E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals. 1.19 REOBSERVATION A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer

due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor’s claims on initial Architect and/or Engineer’s review for Substantial Completion or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect and/or his Engineer’s compensation for additional services from final payment to Subcontractor.

1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Furnish in accordance with DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, operating and

maintenance manuals and forward to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner. B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer’s catalogs, other similar data including the

necessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project and all unrelated material shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained. The material shall be bound in note book form and indexed.

C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the Manufacturer’s Representative and service

company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for each item of equipment can be readily obtained.

1.21 ASBESTOS REMOVAL A. Should this Subcontractor or any of its Sub-Subcontractors encounter any asbestos and/or

asbestos related products or materials (the “asbestos materials”) during the performance of its work, this Subcontractor shall stop work immediately and so inform the General Contractor and the Owner of the presence of asbestos.

1.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Installation of Fire Protection equipment, accessories and components shall be in accordance

with the Seismic Requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth (9th) Edition. Refer to Part Two (2) of the Specifications for further information.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Type A: Mechanical joint ductile iron, Class 52, with mechanical joint ductile iron fittings; pipe and

fittings shall be 350 psi rated. Pipe and fittings shall be coated on the outside, cement lined on the inside. All changes in direction shall have tie rods and clamps anchored to thrust blocks.

B. Type B: Cast iron flanged pipe and fittings; pipe shall conform to Federal Specification

WW-P-421, Class 150; flanges faced and drilled for 125 psi service. Pipe and fittings shall be coated on the outside, cement lined on the inside.

C. Type C: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, black cast iron screwed companion flanges and flanged

cast iron fittings, all suitable for 175 psi working water pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi).

D. Type D: 1 ½” and smaller pipe diameter - Schedule 40 black steel pipe with black cast iron

screwed sprinkler fittings suitable for 175 psi working water pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi).

E. Type E: 2” and larger pipe diameter - Schedule 10 welded and seamless steel pipe in accordance

with ASTM-135 joined with groove fittings and couplings approved for service with grooves rolled on the pipe by an approved groove rolling machine. Minimum wall thickness shall be Schedule 10 for sizes up to 5 inch pipe, 0.134 inch for 6 inch pipe and 0.188 inch for 8 inch pipe and 10 inch pipe. Fittings and couplings shall be designed specifically for use in grooved piping systems and suitable for 175 psi minimum working pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi). Fittings, couplings and gaskets shall be of the same manufacturer.

1. Rigid Type Couplings: Coupling housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads

shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA 13. Victaulic Style 005/009.

2. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required.

Victaulic Style 004/75/77. 3. Flange Adapter: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 and 150 flanged

components. Victaulic Style 741/744 or for Class 300 use Victaulic style 743. F. Type F: Schedule 10 (for pipe sized 2” and greater) Schedule 40 (for pipe sized 1 ½” and smaller)

galvanized interior and exterior steel pipe with standard iron screwed or standard grooved fittings as listed for Type E suitable for 175 psi working water pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi).

G. Type G: Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi

working water pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi). H. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Dry and Preaction System Type F I. Grooved End joints:



1. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

2. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the

intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer.

3. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in

the area from pipe end to groove. 4. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site

training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products.

5. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. shall

remove and replace any improperly installed products. 2.2 PIPE SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for piping of sizes 4 inches and smaller shall be Carpenter & Paterson Figure No. 800

FP adjustable swivel ring, Crane Company, Tolco Company or approved equal, black steel and hanger rods with machine threads. Hangers for piping of sizes larger than 4 inches shall be the adjustable clevis hanger type, steel with extension rod to structure, Carpenter-Paterson Figure No. 100. All hangers shall be UL/FM approved.

B. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured at all points where pipes pass through

masonry, concrete or wood where these penetrations are located within areas where water filled piping is present (fire protection piping not included). Pipe sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to provide a clearance of a maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes less than 3” in diameter and 4 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes 4” and greater in diameter, including insulation. An alternate method to providing the above clearances is to install a flexible coupling 12” above and 24” below where the pipe penetrates a slab/wall.

C. Cored holes must be packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of

this specification and/or state and local codes. No additional horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations. Cored holes shall be of sufficient diameter to provide a clearance of a maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes less than 3” in diameter and 4 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes 4” and greater in diameter, including insulation. An alternate method to providing the above clearances is to install a flexible coupling 12” above and 24” below where the pipe penetrates a slab/wall.

D. Pipe sleeves through masonry partitions and floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Wall

sleeves shall have chromium-plated escutcheons with set screws or clips for firmly holding in place. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with surface of walls. Sleeves in floors shall extend one inch above the floor and after installation of piping shall be packed and made water tight. Provide core drilling. Core openings shall have Link-Seal fire rated penetration closures. Sleeves in exterior walls shall have water stop plates, shall end flush with the surface of the walls and shall have Link-Seal penetration closures.

E. Where pipes penetrate fire rated floors and partitions, the openings shall be packed with a

material which will maintain the integrity of the fire rating.



2.3 INSPECTORS TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS A. Inspector’s test connections shall be Test Master II Alarm Test Module Style 720 or equal with

grooved ends 1-1/4”-2” or threaded 1”-2” (optional pressure relief valve for threaded), bronze body, dual polycarbonate sight glasses, Bronze valve bonnet, and Malleable Iron hand wheel. The assembly shall be rated for service up to 300 psi working pressure. Each floor, area or each hydraulically calculated area on floors with multiple hydraulically most remote areas shall be provided with an inspector’s test assembly at the hydraulically most remote point. Each test connection valve shall be ready accessible and labeled. Each floor control valve assembly shall be connected to a drain riser, and this drain riser should discharge to outdoors in a location where water damage will not result.

B. Dry system test pipe shall not be less than 1 inch in diameter, terminating in a smooth bore

corrosion resisting orifice to provide a flow equivalent to one sprinkler of a type installed on the particular system installed on the end of the most distant sprinkler pipe in the upper story and be equipped with a readily accessible 1 inch shut-off valve, brass nipple and brass cap.

C. Auxiliary drain connections shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents drainage

of sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve. The drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 3/4 inch size and plug, at least one of which shall be brass.

D. Dry sprinkler system auxiliary drains - Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping is less

than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of not less than a ½" valve and plug shall be provided. Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more than 5 gallons, a drain consisting of two 1" valves and a 2" by 12" condensate nipple (drum drip) shall be provided.

2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed, FM Approved, and of the automatic closed type and of the

temperature rating required. Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of ceiling tiles. When the ceiling tile is divided into sections by grooved depressions, the sprinkler head shall be located in the center of one of the panels. Sprinklers shall also be aligned with other ceiling mounted architectural features, such as lighting. Body shall be die cast brass, with hex-shaped wrench boss cast into the body to facilitate installation and reduce the risk of damage during installation.

B. All concealed style sprinkler heads shall be of the two-piece type that allows ceiling panels to be

removed without shutting down the sprinkler system. All recessed and concealed style sprinkler heads shall be of the 1/2 inch field adjustable type.

C. All sprinklers in new Light and Ordinary Hazard occupancies shall be Quick Response type. In

existing buildings, the thermal sensitivity of new or relocated sprinkler heads shall match that of the existing sprinklers unless all sprinklers in the work scope are replaced with Quick Response type sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler heads in unheated spaces finished without ceilings shall be bronze upright. E. Sprinkler heads in the new Toilet Room shall be dry concealed pendent style with white cover

plate. F. Pendent sprinkler heads connected to dry sprinkler systems shall be of the dry pendent type. G. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings, submittals, and other documentation by the sprinkler

identification or model number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or approval. Trade names or other abbreviated designations shall not be allowed.



2.5 SPARE HEADS A. Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided for each type and temperature rating of sprinkler head

installed. Spare heads along with proper sprinkler head wrenches shall be packed in a metal container and located as directed by the Owner. Spare sprinkler heads shall be supplied in proportion to the style and temperature rating of the heads installed.

Up to 300 heads Not less than 6 of each type 300 to 1000 heads Not less than 12 of each type More than 1000 heads Not less than 24 of each type 2.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS A. All piping, except that piping which is within inaccessible chases, shall be identified with semi-

rigid plastic identification markers equal to Seton Setmark pipe markers. Direction of flow arrows are to be included on each marker. Each marker background shall be appropriately color coded with a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe in conformance with the “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems” (ANSI A13.1-1981). Setmark snap-around markers shall be used for overall diameters up to six (6) inches and strap-around markers shall be used above six (6) inch overall diameter. Markers shall be located adjacent to each valve, at each branch, at each cap for future, at each riser take off, at each pipe passage through wall, at each pipe passage through floors, at each pipe passage to underground and on all vertical and horizontal piping at 20 foot intervals maximum.

B. All valves shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and letters carefully coordinated with a

valve chart. Valve tags shall be 19 gauge polished brass, 1-1/2 inch diameter with stamped black filled letters similar to Seton Style No. 4522, or approved equal. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch high for type service and 1/2 inch for valve number. Tag shall be attached to valves with approved brass “S” hooks, or brass jack chain. Whenever a valve is above a hung ceiling, the valve tag shall be located immediately above the hung ceiling.

C. Furnish a minimum of two typed valve lists to be framed under glass or Plexiglas. Each chart

shall be enclosed in an approved .015 inch thick plastic closure for permanent protection. Valve numbers shall correspond to those indicated on the Record Drawings and on the printed valve lists. The printed list shall include the valve number, location and purpose of each valve. It shall state other necessary information such as the required opening or closing of another valve when one valve is to be opened or closed. Printed frame valve lists shall be displayed in each Mechanical Room or in a location designated by the Owner.

D. Equipment nameplates shall be 3/4 inch by 2-1/2 inch long .02 inch aluminum with a black enamel

background with engraved natural aluminum letters similar to Seton Style 2065-20. Nameplate shall have pressure sensitive taped backing.

E. Provide a brass wall plaque, minimum .020 inch thickness, secured to the exterior wall just above

the grade line for all service entrances and exits that are buried. Sample of the label shall be FIRE SERVICE BELOW.

2.7 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the fire protection systems that require

accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.



B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose, but no less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes used will match the courses of brick or block.

C. Access doors shall be prime coated of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and manufactured

by Inland Steel Products Company “Milcor”, Miami-Carey or Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, Incorporated “Way Loctor”. Type shall be based upon “Milcor” as follows:

1. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: Style ATR with 16 gauge frame, 18 gauge panel and flush

screwdriver operated cam locks. 2. Plastered Walls and Ceilings: Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush

screwdriver operated cam locks. 3. Masonry Non-Rated Walls: Style M with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush

screwdriver operated cam locks. 4. Masonry Fire Rated Walls: Fire rated with UL 1-1/2 hour “B” rating, 16 gauge frame, 20

gauge sandwich type insulated panel, self-latching lock having interior release mechanism and key operated cylinder lock keyed as required to suit requirements of the Architect.

5. Non-Rated Drywall Walls: Style DW with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush

screwdriver operated cam locks. D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a colored

button to indicate equipment above. 2.8 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General 1. This section provides Seismic Control for the "equipment" as listed below. 2. It is the intent of this specification to provide restraint of non-structural building

components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component’s center of gravity.

3. The work in this section includes the following: a. Seismic restraints for equipment. b. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 4. Definitions a. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes

ALL non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation walls is included. Equipment referred to below is a partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this specification)



Electrical Panels Piping Pumps (All types) Tanks (All types) 5. Life safety systems defined a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps,

jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks.

b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply

including all circuits to fire protection, systems. 6. Positive Attachment a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge type

expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through bolted connection to the structure.

7. Transverse Bracing a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of

the pipe, duct, or conduit. 8. Longitudinal Bracing a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe, duct, conduit

etc. B. Submittal Data Requirements 1. Submittals a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific restraints to be utilized detailing

compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per "PRODUCTS" section of this specification.

b. An itemized list of all equipment. Detailed schedules showing seismic restraints

proposed for each piece of equipment, referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.

2. Shop Drawings a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of

acceptable methods must be included. b. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size

and locations for each piece of equipment. c. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locations

and types of restraints shown for all pipe. Rod bracing at various installation angles and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated. Any and all tributary loads, Eg: Fire Protection pipe runouts shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.



d. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation angle allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each allowable installation condition.

3. Seismic Certification and Analysis a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment

to the structure. Performance of all products (such as; strut, cable, anchors, clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer's data sheets or certified calculations.

b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown

in Table A acting through the equipment’s center of gravity. c. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be

stamped by a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts. (1) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials

utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or weld length.

d. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit seismic design Errors and Omissions

insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer’s product liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.

C. Manufacturer’s Responsibility 1. Manufacturer of seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide equipment seismic restraints as specified. c. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure proper

installation and performance of systems. D. Related Work 1. Housekeeping Pads a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the project structural engineer.

Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the Concrete section contractor.

b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor and

sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.

2. Supplementary Support Steel a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all

equipment and as required or specified. 3. Attachments



a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping

pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.

TABLE A

“G” FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS (SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV > 0.1 < 0.2)

PIPE

RIGIDLY MOUNTED

EQUIPMENT

ALL LIFE SAFETY

EQUIPMENT

.25

.40

.60

E. Materials 1. Devices a. All seismic restraint devices described in this section shall be the product of a

single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base manufacturer of these specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design and performance of the Base Manufacturer.

2. Seismic Restraint Types a. All seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without failure, the

“G” forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculations as described in the “SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS” section of these specifications.

b. All seismic restraint devices (1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position. (2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure. 3. Seismic Restraint Types a. TYPE I: Not Used b. TYPE II: Not Used c. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems (1) Multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized cable rope. Mason Industries Type SCB (2) Structural steel strut type with approved fastening devices to equipment

and structure. Mason Industries Type SSB



(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of

hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor’s submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD.

Mason Ind. Model “SRC”. (4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They shall

be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD.

Mason Ind. Model “CCB”. d. TYPE IV: Not Used e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors

for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published standards.

F. Installation 1. Seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

written instructions and all submittal data. 2. Equipment Installation a. Housekeeping pads for equipment in this section must be properly doweled or

bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to housekeeping pads, see RELATED WORK.

3. Seismic Restraints a. Installation (1) All floor mounted equipment shall be snubbed, anchored, bolted or

welded to the structure to comply with the required acceleration. Calculations that determine that equipment movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers (restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must be positively attached to the structure.

(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently

braced with TYPE III restraints. Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals and shop drawings. Equipment less than 50 lbs. Is excluded.

(3) All horizontally suspended pipe shall use RESTRAINT TYPE III.

Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE B at the end of this section.



(4) For all trapeze supported piping the individual pipes must be

transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze support at the designated restraint locations.

(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building

structure must not occur. Bracing may occur from: (a) Flanges of structural beams. (b) Upper truss chords in bar joists. (c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete

structures. (6) Pipe Risers (a) Where pipes pass through cored holes, core diameters to be a

maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes less than 3” in diameter and 4 inches larger than pipe O.D. for pipes 4” and greater in diameter, including insulation. Cored holes must be packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of this specification and/or state and local codes. No additional horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.

(b) An alternate method to (a) above is to install a flexible coupling

12” above and 24” below where the pipe penetrates a slab. Cored holes must be packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of this specification and/or state and local codes.

(c) Pipe risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at each

floor level on top of the slab attached in a seismically approved manner for vertical restraint.

(d) Pipe in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in a

seismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser clamp at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the structural steel. The riser clamp and structural steel must be capable of withstanding all thermal, static and seismic loads.

(7) All floor or wall mounted equipment and tanks shall use RESTRAINT

TYPE III or V. (8) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic

forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units center of gravity to suitably resist "G" forces specified.

(a) Vertically mounted tanks may require this additional restraint. (9) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building

or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill or pipes crossing a building expansion joint.



(10) Piping that crosses a building expansion joint must be provided with a

seismic separation assembly, regardless of size, in accordance with NFPA 13, 2013 Edition, Section 9.3.3. This can be in the form of a 6 ell expansion loop using flexible couplings as shown in NFPA 13, 2013 Edition, Section A-9.3.3(a) or a UL Listed seismic separation assembly.

4. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment a. Piping (1) Fire protection standpipe, risers, and branches less than 2-1/2 inches

in diameter unless required by Chapter 9 of NFPA 13, 2013 Edition. G. Inspection 1. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices,

the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner’s expense to review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be corrected immediately at the contractor’s expense.

TABLE B SEISMIC BRACING TABLE

EQUIPMENT

ON CENTER SPACING (Max)

WITHIN EACH CHANGE

OF DIRECTION (LARGER OF. . . )

TRANSVERSE

LONGITUDINAL

PIPE (Threaded, Welded, Soldered or Grooved)

To 16"

40 Feet

80 Feet

10 Feet or 15 Diameters

2.9 TESTS AND APPROVALS A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation and before any piping is concealed,

the Fire Protection Contractor shall subject the system to tests required by the latest versions of NFPA 13 and the Insurance Underwriters and shall arrange for approval of installation. A certificate of approval and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction shall be submitted to the Architect. All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect and Underwriters’ Representative.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and shall be

installed without springing or forcing. All piping shall be protected against mechanical injury in manner satisfactory to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide UL/FM valved pressure gauge assemblies at the top of all risers. Assembly shall include needle shutoff valve and snubber.

B. All piping shall be located to avoid conflict with structure, all other trades and as required to

maintain the maximum possible headroom. All service pipes, fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2 inch from finished coverings and



such other work and not less than 1/2 inch between finished coverings on the different services. Provide swing joint assembly to sprinkler heads to be located in the center of ceiling tiles.

C. Pipe shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a drain valve at each low

point in piping so that all parts of the sprinkler system can be drawn off. D. Piping shall not be installed in or through Electrical Rooms, Electrical Closets, Transformer

Rooms, Telephone Rooms or Elevator Machine Rooms unless the piping is intended to serve these rooms. No piping shall be installed over electrical panels.

3.2 SPRINKLER HEADS A. The Fabrication Drawings are to be prepared by the Fire Protection Contractor and shall indicate

all light fixtures, ductwork, smoke or heat detectors, speakers, diffusers and ceiling tracks in relation to the proposed location of sprinkler heads. Provide additional sprinkler heads over and above the code minimums as required to obtain symmetrical ceiling layouts.

B. All new sprinklers shall be installed on minimum 1” outlets. For existing sprinkler systems that

require relocation of sprinklers, any sprinkler outlets less than 1” in size shall be removed and replaced with 1” outlets.

C. Sprinkler heads located in the vicinity of heat sources (i.e. unit heaters, steam equipment, boilers,

etc.) shall have temperature ratings increased in accordance with NFPA 13, Chapter 8. 3.3 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and deliver access panels for access to all concealed parts of the fire protection systems

that require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system. Access panels shall be installed by the appropriate trades.

3.4 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically designed and calculated by the Fire Protection

Contractor. The Fire Protection Contractor shall submit all required hydraulic calculations to prove the hydraulically most remote areas are being protected. Maintain a minimum of 10 psi cushion between required pressure and available pressure. Comply with all Underwriters’ and code authorities requirements including maximum water flow velocity in the fire protection system.

B. Automatic dry pipe sprinkler system in new toilet room and concourse areas shall be designed to

light hazard occupancy requirements shall be capable of providing a minimum design density of 0.10 GPM per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet. Maximum protection area per sprinkler head shall be 225 square feet for upright and pendent sprinkler heads, and 196 feet for sidewall sprinkler heads. Hose allowance shall be 100 GPM.

C. Provide a new hydrant flow test. Use the results of this new hydrant flow test to hydraulically

design the sprinkler systems within the building.

End of Section

\\Fs3\g_drive\Projects\2017-Boston\M1052-016.00\Specifications\Fire\FP Spec - 100% CD - 10-24-18.docx


PLUMBING FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00 - page 1 of 3

Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL




C. Specification requirements for the Filed Sub-Bid “PLUMBING” includes all work of the following listed Specification Sections, in their entirety: 1. Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing Filed Sub-Bid Requirements 2. Section 22 00 01 - Plumbing.

D. The work to be completed by the Filed Subcontractor for the work of this Section is shown on the following listed Drawings, not just those pertaining particularly to this Sub-Trade, unless specifically called out otherwise, regardless of where among the Drawings it appears:

Architectural Drawings: D1, and A1, through A5 inclusive. Plumbing Drawings: P0.1, P0.2 and P1.1.

E. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this Filed Subcontract.

F. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in INVITATION TO BID and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 1. The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope:

NAME OF SUB-BIDDER: __________________________________ SUB-BID FOR TRADE: PLUMBING

2. Each Sub-Bid submittal for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding Authority, as bound herein, accompanied with the required bid deposit.

G. Sub Sub-Bid Requirements: NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION.


A. Bidders are expected to examine and to be thoroughly familiar with all contract documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Awarding Authority (Owner) will not be responsible for errors, omissions and/or



charges for extra work arising from General Contractor's or Filed Subcontractor's failure to familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the Bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity to examine the site and the Contract Documents, that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work a given result to be produced, that the Contract Documents are adequate and that he will produce the required results.

B. Pre-Bid Conference: Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the Pre-Bid conference; refer to INVITATION TO BID for time and date.

1.3 SEQUENCING


B. Do not order or deliver any materials until all schedules and submittals, required in the listed Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS







A. All hoisting equipment, rigging equipment, crane services and lift machinery required for the work by this Filed Subcontractor shall be furnished, installed,



operated and maintained in safe conditions by this Filed Subcontractor, as referenced under Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.


End of Section


DAIQ 17021.00 Edward A. Lelacheur Park Right Field Concourse Extension

October 24, 2018 Lowell, Massachusetts

PLUMBING 22 00 01 - page i of 35

SECTION 22 00 01

PLUMBING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS ...................................................................................... 2 1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ................................................................................. 2 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 3 1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES ................................................ 3 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................... 4 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 4 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................... 5 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................. 5 1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 5 1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................ 6 1.13 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................ 7 1.14 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL .................................................................................................... 7 1.15 REMOVAL WORK .......................................................................................................................... 7 1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ....................................................................................................... 7 1.17 FINAL COMPLETION ..................................................................................................................... 7 1.18 REOBSERVATION ......................................................................................................................... 8 1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................ 8 1.20 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................... 9 1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................................................................ 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9 2.2 INSULATION ................................................................................................................................. 10 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ....................................................................................................... 11 2.4 SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND FIRESTOPPING ................................................................... 12 2.5 CLEANOUTS ................................................................................................................................ 13 2.6 VALVES ........................................................................................................................................ 14 2.7 FLOOR DRAINS ........................................................................................................................... 14 2.8 ACCESS PANELS ........................................................................................................................ 14 2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES ................................................................................................................. 15 2.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS ................................................................................ 15 2.11 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS ...................................................................................... 16 2.12 TESTS AND APPROVALS ........................................................................................................... 16 2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS ................................................................................................. 17 2.14 VIBRATION ISOLATION & SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................................................................... 17

PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 30

3.1 POTABLE AND NONPOTABLE WATER SYSTEMS ................................................................... 30



PLUMBING 22 00 01 - page ii of 35

3.2 SANITARY SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 30 3.3 INSULATION ................................................................................................................................. 31 3.4 CLEANOUTS ................................................................................................................................ 31 3.5 VALVES ........................................................................................................................................ 31 3.6 FLOOR DRAINS ........................................................................................................................... 32 3.7 ACCESS PANELS ........................................................................................................................ 32 3.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES ................................................................................................................. 32 3.9 VENTS THROUGH ROOF ........................................................................................................... 32 3.10 ELECTRICAL ROOMS ................................................................................................................. 33



PLUMBING 22 00 01 - page 1 of 35

SECTION 22 00 01

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicableparts of Division 1 as part of this Section.

B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Sectionwhether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.

D. On January 4, 2014, the "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act" becomes effective nationwide.This amendment to the 1974 Safe Drinking Water Act reduces the allowable lead content ofdrinking water pipes, pipe fittings and other plumbing fixtures. Specifically, as of January 4, 2014,it shall be illegal to install pipes, pipe fittings, and other plumbing fixtures that are not "lead free.""Lead free" is defined as restricting the permissible levels of lead in the wetted surfaces of pipes,pipe fittings, other plumbing fittings and fixtures to a weighted average of not more than 0.25%.This new requirement does not apply to pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings or fixtures that areused exclusively for non-potable services such as manufacturing, industrial processing, irrigation,outdoor watering, or any other uses where water is not anticipated to be used for humanconsumption. The law also excludes toilets, bidets, urinals, fill valves, flushometer valves, tubfillers, shower valves, service saddles, or water distribution main gate valves that are 2 inches indiameter or larger.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment andsupplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as requiredby the Drawings and details and as specified herein, in general, to include the following items:

1. Domestic cold water system.

2. Domestic hot water system.

3. Sanitary, waste and vent system.

4. Alterations, additions and/or removal of existing plumbing systems and fixtures within therenovated area in order to conform to new space requirements.

5. Core Drilling.

6. Furnishing of access panels.




1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under otherSections:

1. All Cutting and Patching.2. Temporary Water, Heat, Fire Protection and Toilet Facilities.3. Temporary Light and Power.4. Excavation and Backfilling.5. Foundations and Trenching.6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.7. Flashing and Caulking.8. Painting.9. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.10. Fire Protection.11. Electrical.12. Installation of Access Panels.13. Toilet Room Accessories.14. Electric Heat Tracing.15. Fireproofing and Smoke Stopping.

1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all applicable Codes, Localand State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.

B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between theContract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.

C. In the event of a conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:

1. State Building Code.2. National Electric Code (NEC).3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).4. Department of Environmental Protection (DEP).5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of the City of Lowell, Massachusetts.6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).7. Insurance Services Organization (ISO).8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).10. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).11. American Welding Society (AWS).12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS).13. Factory Mutual (FM).14. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI).15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).16. American Gas Association (AGA).17. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).18. Massachusetts Uniform State Plumbing Code.19. Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code.20. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).




21. Massachusetts Water Resource Authority (MWRA).22. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).23. Architectural Access Board (AAB).24. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).25. Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION

A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipmentthat is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the workand to complete the project.

B. Prior to performing any new work, uncover, locate and determine the routing, size, material anddirection of slope of all existing systems to be connected to. The invert elevation of the existingdrains and sewers must be established prior to any slab cutting for new systems.

1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and locationof piping and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and accessoryrequired, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.

B. Where requirements of the applicable codes, plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the moststringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing anyportion of the work which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to theArchitect/Engineer’s attention for direction as to what is provided.

C. Final location of plumbing fixtures and other pieces of equipment, whether or not furnished by thePlumbing Subcontractor, requiring plumbing services shall be coordinated with the ArchitecturalPlans. Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement atno extra cost to the Owner.

D. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items, they shall be reportedto the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not reported, thePlumbing Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and operable system.

E. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.

F. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatusand give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place allsleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.

G. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam andcondensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other tradesas to the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.

H. Prepare and submit for review, coordinated Plans and sections, clearly showing how the work isto be installed in relation to the work of other trades. Work that is installed before coordinationwith other trades, or that causes interference with the work of other trades shall be changed tocorrect condition.




1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepareCoordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment andlines.

B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum orcompatible system. A disc and one (1) set of reproducibles (all-trade composite) shall be providedto the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8” = 1’-0” scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that scale orlarger, plans and sections.

D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to theother trades (Fire Protection, Plumbing and Electrical) so they can indicate their work.

E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.

F. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be additionally responsible for preparing drawings indicatingall the buried or underground plumbing systems. Include in these documents all otherunderground components such as, but not limited to, underslab drainage systems, foundationdrainage systems, footings, foundation walls, pits, tie beams, electric and telephone duct banks.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of theContract Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials andapparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of theinstalled equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate thelocation, size, type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.

B. The marked up and colored in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of thework installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if foundinaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings areaccurate and up-to-date.

C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked up prints for review and comment.After review and comment, these marked up prints shall be used in the preparation of the RecordDrawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously indicated, aswell as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the basis of theArchitect/Engineer’s final comments. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducibles and CADdisks (AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Makeall modifications to these reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove allsuperseded data to show the completed installation. The Record Drawings may be made fromthe originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with the Architect to have these reproduciblesmade from the originals. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disksproperly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property ofthe Owner.




1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under thisSection. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules andregulations of all Local, State, and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, Codes, Standards,recommended practices and manuals of the National Fire Protection Association, the InsuranceUnderwriter and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has beentested and accepted.

B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materialsand equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment.

C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect workand materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and makegood damage thus caused.

D. When open flame or spark producing tools such as blow torches, welding equipment, etc., arerequired in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor will be notified not less thantwenty-four (24) hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location where thework is to be performed.

E. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working firewatch where work is being performed and until it is completed.

F. All exposed piping in parking garages, warehouses and similar type occupancies shall bepermanently protected against physical damage from any type of vehicle.

1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit for approval, within thirty (30) days after signing the Contract and prior to submission ofany shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers, material, equipment and of Subcontractorsproposed to be used under this Section.

B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop drawings.All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete Specifications,including type of materials, operating pressures and temperatures, capacities, performance andpower requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted shallbe complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project.

C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, therequirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the shopdrawing review.

D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect. Suchcertification shall be made by the Owner, or Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a personduly authorized by the Owner to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certificationshall state that data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog dataand brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract




Documents in all respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.

E. It is intended that the Contractor submit complete and accurate data at the first submission. If theshop drawing is returned marked “Resubmit”, or “Not Accepted”, only one (1) additionalsubmission will be permitted.

F. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled asrequired, without invalidating the manufacturer’s warranty, so that it can be installed throughregular window, door and/or louver openings.

G. The shop drawings and manufacturer’s data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently inadvance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.

H. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer’soffice each time shop drawings, layout drawings and catalog data and brochures are submittedor resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor whenscheduling his work.

1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name or name of themanufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing astandard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previouslyapproved by the Architect.

B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered forconsideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term “approvedequal” appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by completespecifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipmentor process.

C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bearthe cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.

D. Manufacturer’s directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage and installation of anyequipment. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the ContractDrawings and the manufacturer’s requirements and obtain a written response prior to proceedingwith work. Should the Subcontractor fail to comply with this, he/she shall bear the costs of anycorrections which may be required.

E. The Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections andincidentals to complete the work under this Section.

F. All plumbing products submitted or utilized shall be Commonwealth of Massachusetts Board ofState Examiners of Plumbers and Gas Fitters approved as well as the Reduction of Lead inDrinking Water Act.




1.13 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas which will be occupied during theconstruction period. When an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be madeonly upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.

B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to thisschedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.

1.14 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL

A. Upon completion of all work, furnish in duplicate certificates of inspections from all inspectors andauthorities having jurisdiction, notarized letters from the manufacturers stating that authorizedfactory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment andfound same to be in satisfactory operating condition.

1.15 REMOVAL WORK

A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of service.

B. All existing equipment to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All existingequipment to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to the Owner in good condition ata location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removed from the premises.

C. Remove all abandoned piping and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilingor walls are removed all abandoned piping shall be removed and ends of live services capped.Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing inaccessible ceilings shall remainand ends capped and marked abandoned.

1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) issubstantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of itemsremaining to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work is not substantially complete, he willpromptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observeddeficiencies.

C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantialcompletion.

D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare aCertificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.

1.17 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the GeneralContractor written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed.

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.




3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencieslisted with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fullyoperational.

5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner’s personnel.

6. Work is complete and ready for Architect’s and/or his Engineer’s final review.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly suspendhis review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.

C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification offinal completion.

D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make asecond review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor listingobserved deficiencies.

E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.

1.18 REOBSERVATION

A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineerdue to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor’s claims on initial Architect and/or Engineer’sreview for Substantial Completion or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the amount ofArchitect and/or his Engineer’s compensation for additional services from final payment toSubcontractor.

1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personneldesignated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under thisSection. A letter with two (2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom theinstructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architectat the completion of the project.

B. Prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer’s catalogs, other similar data including the necessaryphotographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment and devicesfurnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete instructions forthe proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for lubrication andperiodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be specific for eachsystem and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual shall contain onlythat information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelated material shall bedeleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained. The materialshall be bound in notebook form and indexed.

C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s representative and servicecompany for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service foreach item of equipment can be readily obtainable.




1.20 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Make all final plumbing connections to all new as well as existing to be relocated equipment notfurnished as part of this Section, such as but not limited to Kitchen Equipment, MedicalEquipment, Laboratory Equipment or similar items requiring plumbing services. Provide all roughplumbing systems to these same items of equipment. Refer to the equipment shop drawings andmanufacturers’ requirements for final locations of connections prior to laying out or installing anywork. Furnish and install all traps with cleanouts and heavy-duty brass loose key angle valvesupply stop kits. Traps and angle valve kits shall include polished chrome-plated escutcheons.All supply stops shall have threaded or sweat solder inlet. Every faucet shall have a supply stopkit for each water supply. All exposed traps and supply stop kits shall be polished chrome-plated.

1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Installation of Plumbing equipment, accessories and components shall be in accordance with theSeismic Requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth (9th) Edition.Refer to Part Two (2) of the Specifications for further information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Type A:

Type K soft annealed copper tubing, one (1) piece with no joints between the connection to theexterior water supply and the first fitting within the building. Fittings shall be wrought copper joinedwith a silver brazing filler.

B. Type B:

Type K hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings joined with approved silversolder.

C. Type C:

Type L hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings joined with approved 95/5lead free tin antimony solder.

D. Type D:

No hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with approved stainless steel mechanical couplingswith neoprene gaskets.

E. Type E:

Extra heavy bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with neoprene resilient gaskets.

F. Type F:

Type DWV hard drawn seamless copper tubing with wrought copper drainage fittings joined with95/5 lead free tin antimony solder.




G. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Exterior Water Service Type A 2. Cold Water Inside Buried Type B 3. Cold Water Type C 4. Hot Water Type C 5. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Inside Buried Type E 6. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Within the Building Type D 7. Waste and Vent Smaller than 2 inches Type F

2.2 INSULATION

A. Type A: Owens Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II heavy density resin-bonded inorganic glass, allservice jacket, kraft reinforced foil vapor retarder jacket with two factory-applied pressure sensitiveadhesives for positive closure and vapor sealing. Turn all laps away from normal view.Circumferential joints shall be sealed with self-sealing butt strips. Valves and fittings shall beinsulated with Zeston Hi-Lo temperature insulation of thickness equal to adjacent piping andcovered with Zeston 2000 PVC fitting covers, U.L. 25/50 fire rated with approved vapor retardermastic compatible with the PVC applied around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation and onthe fitting cover throat overlap seam. Secure with pressure sensitive PVC; Z tape along thecircumferential edges. Extend tape over adjacent insulation with overlap on itself of at least 2inches.

B. Type B: Owens Corning Fiberglas ASJ heavy duty resin bonded inorganic glass, all service jacketwith longitudinal laps sealed with staples. Turn all laps away from normal view. Circumferentialjoints shall be sealed with self-sealing butt strips. Valves and fittings shall be insulated with ZestonHi-Lo temperature insulation of thickness equal to adjacent piping and covered with Zeston 2000PVC fitted covers, U.L. 25/50 fire rated, secured in place with tacking and finished with pressuresensitive PVC Z tape along the circumferential edges. Extend tape over adjacent insulation withoverlap on itself of at least 2 inches. All tacks and staples shall be finished over with white finish.

C. Type C: Insulate all exposed waste, cold water, hot water and tempered water pipe, valves andfittings beneath handicapped lavatory and sink installations with Plumberex: Handy-Shield Maxx.Installed Insulators Protectors shall meet ADA 2010 Technical requirements sec. 4.19.4, ADAAGsec. 606.5, ICC/ANSI A117.1 sec. 606.6, or GSA & DOD’s ABA 606.5. Insulation material shallcomply with IBC (International Building Code) Flame and Smoke Testing Standard ASTM E 84-07/ UL 723 Class A. Insulator Protectors shall be listed and meet UPC/IAPMO Standard PS 94-2008. Insulation material shall be soft 1/8”, non laminated flexible PVC with U/V inhibitedantimicrobial, antifungal properties, with high gloss color finish matching fixture. Adhesives,sewing threads, and two ply laminated materials are not allowed. ASTM C177 tested “R” value of0.504 for Thermal resistance and ASTM C518 “K” value of 0.358, Density-21.61 PCF for ThermalConductivity. One piece fusion molded universal design for changeable P-trap configurations.Exterior surfaces shall be smooth, nonabsorbent with no finger recessed indentations to eliminatedirt and grime and for easy cleaning. Weep hole shall be included for sanitary condensationdrainage and ventilation at the bottom of J-bend. Insulator Supply riser shall be min.15” in lengthand flexible for continuous covering of braided flexible water supplies. Dual fastening systemconsisting of fusion bonded Velcro fastener strips for full slit enclosure and tamper resistant, non-abrasive snap-locking fasteners. No cable tie fasteners allowed.




D. Insulation shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

Insulation System Thickness Type

Cold Water 1/2” A Hot Water (4” & smaller) 1” B Hot Water (Larger than 4”) 1-1/2” B Horizontal Conductor including Drain Body and Bend into Vertical 1/2” up to 6”

diameter and 1” above 6” diameter A

Exposed Cold Water, Hot Water and Waste Beneath Handicapped Lavatories and Sinks N/A C All Piping Systems to be Heat Traced 1” A

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Pipe hangers, pipe anchors, auxiliary steel, wood blocking and fixture supports shall be furnishedand set by this Contractor, and he shall be responsible for their proper and permanent location.This Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling. All buried hubless cast iron and hublesshigh silicon cast iron shall be supported.

B. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of approved hangersand supports. The hanging and support of all piping system shall conform to the ANSI/MSS-SP58 AND MSS-SP 69 latest edition. This Contractor shall furnish and install all required auxiliarysteel required for hanging of piping.

C. All horizontal piping shall be hung with approved adjustable malleable iron pipe hangers. Castiron soil pipe and high silicon acid-resistant pipe shall be supported at five (5) foot intervals exceptwhere ten (10) foot lengths of piping are used, then ten (10) foot intervals are acceptable.Hangers shall be provided at each joint and at each horizontal branch connection. Hangers shallbe adequate to maintain alignment, prevent sagging and shall be placed on or immediatelyadjacent to the coupling. Horizontal piping shall be braced against horizontal movement withsway bracing. Supports shall be placed directly beneath horizontal fittings that connect to thestack. Copper tubing 1-1/2 inch and larger shall be supported at ten (10) foot intervals. Coppertubing 1-1/4 inch and smaller shall be supported at six (6) foot intervals. Steel piping shall besupported at six (6) foot intervals for piping 1/2 inch and smaller, at eight (8) foot intervals for 3/4inch and one inch piping and at ten (10) foot intervals for piping 1-1/4 inch and larger. Plasticpiping shall be supported at 4-1/2 foot intervals for 1-1/2 inch piping, at five (5) foot intervals fortwo inch piping and six (6) foot intervals for piping three inch and larger.

D. Vertical cast iron piping and high silicon acid-resistant cast iron shall be supported at base, ateach story height and at ten (10) foot intervals. Vertical steel piping and copper tubing shall besupported at each story height and at not more than ten (10) foot intervals. Vertical plastic pipingshall be supported at each floor. Vertical glass piping shall be supported with padded riser clampsat each floor level.

E. Hangers for piping sizes four (4) inches and smaller shall be Carpenter & Paterson, No. 1A bandtype, Grinnell Company, Calco Steel Products Company or equal, black steel with hanger rodswith machine threads. Hangers for piping larger than four (4) inches shall be the adjustable clevis




hanger type, malleable iron with extension rod. Chain, strap, perforated bar or wire hangers will not be approved. Approved gang hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers on pipes running parallel to each other and close together. Where used for uninsulated copper tubing, all hangers shall be copper plated and chrome plated for chrome plated piping. Insulation shields shall be provided on all horizontal insulated piping at each hanger or support location. Insulation shields shall be galvanized steel, 180 degrees arc and centered on the hanger or support. On diameters 4 inches and smaller, shield shall be 12-inch long, 18 gauge steel. On diameters 5 inches and 6 inches, shield shall be 18-inch long, 16 gauge steel. On diameters 8 inches and 10 inches, shield shall be 24-inch long, 14 gauge steel. On diameters greater than 10 inches, shield shall be 24-inch long, 12 gauge steel. Structure attachments shall be as manufactured by Carpenter & Patterson and shall be suitable to carry the weight. Hanger assemblies in locations exposed to the weather shall utilize galvanized steel components. Example of such a location would be, but is not limited to, a parking garage that is open to the weather.

F. All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner and inaccordance with fixture manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Where chair carriers are required, they shall be completely concealed in the building constructionand shall rigidly support the fixture from the floor. Chair carrier shall support fixtures in such amanner that no part of the fixture will be supported by the wall or partition. Chair carriers shall befurnished complete with necessary bolts, nuts and washers as well as connecting nipples of theproper length with gaskets for the fixture connection. Provide auxiliary support assembly in widechase situations whenever the water closet coupling is of a length that the carrier manufacturerrecommends the auxiliary foot support directly behind the wall. All available or optional anchorfoot assemblies shall be utilized. Carriers must fit in available space and shall be of the specialnarrow type or compact style where necessary. Chair carriers for water closets and urinals shallinclude flushometer supply pipe support. Flushometer supply pipe shall always be provided witha concealed support regardless of if the design includes a carrier or not.

H. Wherever wood blocking is required to insure adequate support of fixtures and related piping, itshall be provided by this Contractor and it shall be fire treated.

I. All inserts in new concrete construction shall be capable of developing the full strength of the rodor bolt used in them and shall be either continuous insert type or malleable iron concrete insertsfor rod sizes 3/8 inch to 7/8 inch. Continuous inserts shall have anchors every 4 inches and shallextend 1-1/2 inches above the back of the insert and shall hook to provide anchor. All insertsshall be tied to the reinforcing steel rods with wire and properly sized reinforcing rods shall beinserted through the special holes, hooks or brackets provided in or on the inserts to securelyanchor insert to the structure.

J. Pipe alignment guides shall be split-sleeve type as manufactured by Broat Manufacturing, Inc.and shall be suitable for copper tubing.

2.4 SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND FIRESTOPPING

A. Sleeves shall be furnished and set by this Contractor and he shall be responsible for their properand permanent location. This Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling. Core openingsshall have link-seal fire-rated penetration closures.

B. This Contractor shall provide steel sleeves at all points where pipes and all other work under hischarge pass through masonry, concrete or wood. Sleeves shall have flanges or wings at mind-points to prevent sleeve from slipping through the floor or wall. Pipe sleeves shall be sufficientdiameter to provide approximately 1/4 inch clearance around the pipe or the insulation on




insulated systems. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with the surface of the walls. Sleeves in floors shall extend one inch above the floor and after installation of piping shall be packed, firestopped and made watertight. Sleeves in exterior walls shall have waterstop plates, shall end flush with the surface of the walls, shall have link-seal penetration closures and shall be of a diameter that is compatible with the Link Seal System.

C. Seal the sleeve penetrations with firestopping and smoke stopping systems as manufactured byDow Corning, Bio-Shield, Rectorseal Metacaulk, 3M, Hilti, Fyre Putty or equal. Where pipespenetrate fire rated construction, the openings shall be packed with the material and system thatshall maintain the integrity of the fire rating as detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

D. Pipe Sleeves shall be according to the following:

1. Sleeves on pipes passing through masonry or concrete construction shall be scheduled40 galvanized steel pipe.

2. Sleeves on pipes passing through wood or drywall partitions shall be 16 gaugegalvanized steel.

E. Whenever new penetrations to a previously poured slab are required for the installation of floordrains, shower drains, mop receptors, flush floor cleanouts or similar items of plumbing, thesepenetrations shall be totally sealed with a fire and water stop sealant. Sealant shall be DowCorning fire stop sealant, Catalog No. 2000. Hourly fire rating in hours must be meet therequirements of the slab being penetrated.

F. Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons with set screws for exposed piping in all areas. Inmechanical rooms use plain brass or cast iron escutcheons suitable for painting. All escutcheonsshall be sized to fit the bare pipe or insulation in a snug and neat manner. They shall be ofsufficient size to cover sleeves openings for the pipes and of sufficient depth to cover sleevesprojecting above floors.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Josam Manufacturing Company, Jay R. SmithManufacturing Company, Zurn Industries, Inc. or approved equal. The following series numbersare intended to establish a level of quality and comparison.

B. Type A: Josam Series 56010-2-22-41 coated cast iron floor cleanout.

C. Type B: Josam Series 58890-20 round stainless steel wall access cover, center screw and raisedhead bronze plug.

D. Type C: Josam Series 58540-20 raised head bronze NPT threaded plug for use in conjunctionwith standard pipe fittings.

E. Cleanouts shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Sanitary, Waste and Storm Systems Buried Type A 2. Sanitary, Waste and Storm Systems in Walls Type B 3. Sanitary, Waste and Storm Systems at Base of Stacks Type C




2.6 VALVES

A. All shut-off valves on cold water, hot water, and hot water recirculation piping from 3/4 inch up toand including 2 inch shall be Apollo Series 77-200, solder end, bronze body ball valve, chromeplated bronze ball, 600 psi WOG, full port ball valve.

B. All drain valves shall be 1/2 inch Apollo Model 78-103 with Watts No. 8A hose connection vacuumbreaker, cap with chain of length as required.

C. All ball valves for installation in insulated piping shall have valve extensions to suit installationthickness.

2.7 FLOOR DRAINS

A. All floor drains shall be the product of one manufacturer such as Jay R. Smith, Josam, Zurn, orapproved equal.

B. Floor drain Type A shall be Josam Series 30000-A-6S.

2.8 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems that requireaccessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.

B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose, but no less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particularattention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizesused will match the courses of brick or block.

C. Access doors shall be prime coated of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and manufacturedby Inland Steel Products Company “Milcor”, Miami-Carey or Walsh-Hannon- Gladwin,Incorporated “Way Loctor”. Type shall be based upon “Milcor” as follows:

1. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: Style ATR with 16 gauge frame, 18 gauge panel and flushscrewdriver operated cam locks.

2. Plastered Walls and Ceilings: Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flushscrewdriver operated cam locks.

3. Masonry Non-Rated Walls: Style M with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flushscrewdriver operated cam locks.

4. Fire Rated Walls and Ceilings: Style UFR fire rated with UL 1-1/2 hour “B” rating, 16gauge frame, 20 gauge sandwich type insulated panel, self-latching lock having interiorrelease mechanism, and key operated cylinder lock keyed as required to suitrequirements of the Architect.

5. Non-rated Drywall Walls: Style DW with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel, andscrewdriver operated cam locks.

D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a coloredbutton to indicate equipment above.




2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be products of Kohler, American Standard or Toto.. All exposed trim,fittings, valves and piping shall be polished chrome plated. All supply stop valves shall be heavyduty brass body and stem and shall have threaded or sweat solder inlet. Provide wallescutcheons. The following model numbers refer to Kohler Company and are intended toestablish a standard of quality:

B. P-1 Water Closet:

K-3420-EB vitreous china close coupled siphon jet elongated bowl with 52048 bolt caps, 12 inch roughing in, 1.5 gallons per flush, 15 inch high bowl. 81093 float valve with vacuum breaker, 81095 flush valve and K-9404 CP trip lever included with the tank. K-4650 solid plastic open front, white seat and cover. Cast brass heavy duty polished chrome-plated loose key angle valve stop with escutcheon and risers to suit. Closet flange, bolts and wax sealing ring to suit.

C. P-2 Lavatory:

K-2054 vitreous china 20 inch x 18 inch wall mounted lavatory with 4 inch faucet centers, drilled for concealed arm carrier. Symmons S-60-G-H metering faucet with temperature selection and barrier free operation with perforated offset strainer and 1-1/4 inch tailpiece. McGuire heavy duty polished chrome-plated cast brass angle valve kits, loose key, flexible risers, escutcheon. 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch polished chrome-plated cast brass adjustable “P” trap, cleanout plug, extension to wall with escutcheon. Concealed arm carrier with foot support to suit with 4 inch chrome-plated wall escutcheons. Insulate cold water, hot water and waste beneath lavatory.

D. P-3 Hose Bibb:

Chicago Faucet Model No. 952 polished chrome-plated inside sill faucet, 3/4 inch hose thread outlet, vacuum breaker, removable tee handle, 1/2 inch inlet, wall flange.

2.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS

A. All piping, except that piping which is within inaccessible chases, shall be identified with semi-rigid plastic identification markers equal to Seton Setmark pipe markers. Direction of flow arrowsare to be included on each marker. Each marker background shall be appropriately color codedwith a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe in conformance with the “Schemefor the Identification of Piping Systems” (ANSI 13.1-1981). Setmark snap-around markers shallbe used for overall diameters up to six inches and strap-around markers shall be used above sixinch overall diameters. Markers shall be located adjacent to each valve, at each branch, at eachcap for future, at each riser take off, at each pipe passage through wall, at each pipe passagethrough floors, at each pipe passage to underground and on vertical and horizontal piping at 20foot intervals maximum. All non-potable water lines and outlets shall be identified as “WaterSubject to Questionable Safety” in accordance with the requirements of the MassachusettsUniform State Plumbing Code. Piping supplying natural gas at a pressure greater than 1/2 psigor 14 inch water column shall be color coded yellow and labeled a minimum of every ten feet, atall changes in direction, on each side of a penetration and at each valve. The labels shall be




black lettering, capable of being read from a normal line of vision that indicates the type of gas and the pressure contained within.

B. All valves shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and letters carefully coordinated with avalve chart. Valve tags shall be 19 gauge polished brass, 1-1/2 inch diameter with stamped blackfilled letters similar to Seton S type 250-BL or approved equal. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch high fortype service and 1/2 inch for valve number. Tag shall be attached to valves with approved brass"S" hooks, or brass jack chain. Whenever a valve is above a hung ceiling, the valve tag shall belocated immediately above the hung ceiling.

C. Furnish a minimum of two typed valve lists to be framed under glass or Plexiglass. Each chartshall be enclosed in an approved .015 inch thick plastic closure for permanent protection. Valvenumbers shall correspond to those indicated on the Record Drawings and on the printed valvelists. The printed list shall include the valve number, location and purpose of each valve. It shallstate other necessary information such as the required opening or closing of another valve whenone valve is to be opened or closed. Printed framed valve lists shall be displayed in eachMechanical Room or in a location designated by the Owner.

D. Equipment nameplates shall be 3/4 inch by 2-1/2 inch long .02 inch aluminum with a black enamelbackground with engraved natural aluminum letters similar to Seton Style 2065-20. Nameplateshall have pressure sensitive taped backing.

E. Provide a brass wall plaque, minimum .020 inch thickness, secured to the exterior wall just abovethe grade line for all buried service entrances or exits. Samples of such are: Water ServiceBelow; Gas Service Below; Sanitary Sewer Below; Storm Sewer Below, Irrigation Water Below;etc.

2.11 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS

A. All water systems shall be disinfected in accordance with Local Public Health and Plumbing CodeRequirements.

2.12 TESTS AND APPROVALS

A. Pipe lines shall be blown or flushed clean, before piping tests are applied. All plumbing work shallbe tested as herein specified. No portion shall be covered, concealed, used or made inaccessibleto testing, inspection, repair, correction or replacement until tests thereof have been satisfactorilycompleted in the presence of the Architect's Authorized Representatives. The PlumbingSubcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the project as a whole.Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the tests until all parts of the work havewithstood them successfully.

B. Furnish all labor, material and services for testing, including testing plugs, pumps andcompressors; he shall make and remove all temporary piping connections required for the testsand shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests. Leave all work in good order, ready forfull use.

C. Tests on all plumbing systems shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the LocalPlumbing Code and the codes, standards, recommended practices and manuals of the NationalFire Protection Association.




2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Maintenance free water hammer arresters shall be furnished and installed at all locations in thewater systems where quick acting valves are installed as well as wherever water hammer mayoccur. Examples of such locations are as follows:

1. Flushometer valves.2. Self-closing and metering faucets.3. Prior to all pressure reducing valves.4. Prior to all in-line solenoid valves.5. Dishwashing Machines.6. All laundry equipment.7. Emergency showers.8. Sterilizer water supplies.9. Autoclaves.10. Can washers.11. Hose spray prerinse.12. Glasswashers, cagewashers and similar equipment.13. Knee or foot operated valves.14. Single handle faucets.15. Quarter turn faucets and valves.16. Shower control valves.

B. Water hammer arresters shall be as manufactured by Josam Manufacturing Company, Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company or Zurn Systems. Arresters shall be installed at each and everymultiple of fixtures or items as listed above, water hammer arresters may serve groups of fixtures.Sizing and placement shall be in accordance with PDI Standard PDI-WH-201 and themanufacturer’s recommendations. Provide access panels.

C. Water hammer arresters shall be as follows:

Type Fixture Unit Rating Model Option Model

1. SA “A” 1-11 Josam 75001 Jay R. Smith 5005 2. SA “B” 12-32 Josam 75002 Jay R. Smith 5010 3. SA “C” 33-60 Josam 75003 Jay R. Smith 5020 4. SA “D” 61-113 Josam 75004 Jay R. Smith 5030 5. SA “E” 114-154 Josam 75005 Jay R. Smith 5040 6. SA “F” 155-330 Josam 75006 Jay R. Smith 5050

2.14 VIBRATION ISOLATION & SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. General

1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the“equipment” as listed below.

2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint ofnon-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand thestipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component’s center of gravity.




3. Each and every support attachment to the structure of equipment that meets therequirements of this specification must be positive, including equipment that may beexcluded from auxiliary seismic bracing as noted in Part 3.

4. The work in this section includes the following:

a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.b. Equipment isolation bases.c. Piping flexible connectors.d. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.e. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.f. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.g. Equipment support stands, bases or rails.

5. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALLnon-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such asequipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within fivefeet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry ofservices through the foundation walls is included. Equipment referred to below is apartial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in thisspecification)

Compressors Piping Pumps (All types) Tanks (All types) Water Heaters

6. Life safety systems defined

a. All medical and life support systems

b. All systems involved with fire protection, service water supply piping andwater tanks.

c. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply.

7. Positive Attachment

a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge typeexpansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to abeam, a welded or through bolted connection to the structure.

8. Transverse Bracing

a Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of the pipe.

9. Longitudinal Bracing

a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe.

B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages

1. Internal and/or External Systems

a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieuof the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all




conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified per the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraints are in full compliance with these specifications. A copy of an in force Errors and Omissions Insurance Certificate must accompany the submittal. Letters from field offices or representatives are unacceptable.

b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shallbe borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance withthe preceding.

c. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entireunit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachmentand certification thereof shall be by this section.

C. Submittal Data Requirements

1. Submittals

a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to beutilized detailing compliance with the Specification. Reference “TYPE” as per“Products” Section of this Specification.

b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedulesshowing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.

2. Shop Drawings

a. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, structural membersizes and support point locations.

b. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details ofacceptable methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.

c. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflectiondata before condition is accepted for installation.

d. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, sizeand locations for each piece of equipment.

e. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locationsand types of restraints shown for all pipe. Rod bracing at various installationangles and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated.Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.

f. For ceiling suspended equipment design restraints for a minimum installationangle of 300 from vertical. Indicate maximum installation angle allowed forrestraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each allowableinstallation condition.




3. Seismic Certification and Analysis

a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipmentto the structure. Performance of all products (such as; strut, cable, anchors,clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer'sdata sheets or certified calculations.

b. For roof-mounted equipment both the seismic acceleration and wind loads (30psf) shall be calculated, the highest load shall be utilized for the design of therestraints and isolators.

c. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must bestamped by a professional engineer registered in the State were the projectis located.

(1) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materialsutilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detailanchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and weld length.

4. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit seismic design Errors and Omissionsinsurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer’s product liabilityinsurance certificates are not acceptable.

D. Manufacturer’s Responsibility

1. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the followingresponsibilities:

a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.

b. Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.

c. Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.

d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure properinstallation and performance of systems.

E. Related Work

1. Housekeeping Pads

a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the project structural engineer.Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by theConcrete section contractor.

b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor andsized to provide a minimum edge distance of 13 bolt diameters of clearance allaround the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.

2. Supplementary Support Steel

a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for allequipment and piping, including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified.




b. Where support for equipment requires stands, bases, rails, etc. these devices shallbe designed and fabricated by Seismic Restraint Supplier to ensure the seismiccapability of the entire installation.

3. Attachments

a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads,concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with therequirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.

F. Code Requirements

1. Seismic restraints as described herein shall be provided in accordance with theMassachusetts State Building Code 9th Edition or the applicable BOCA code.

G. Materials

1. Devices

a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be theproduct of a single manufacturer. NAI (Novia Associates, Inc.) is the basemanufacturer of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers areacceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design,performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.

2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types

a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, withoutfailure, the “G” forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculationsas described in the “Submittal Data Requirements” Section of theseSpecifications.

b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:

(1) Springs cadmium plated, zinc electroplated or powder coated.

(2) Hardware cadmium or zinc electroplated.

(3) All other metal parts hot spray, hot dipped galvanized or zincelectroplated.

c. All seismic restraint devices

(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuitisolation devices during normal operating conditions.

(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.

d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited.

3. Seismic Restraint Types




a. TYPE I: Same as TYPE B Isolator. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductileiron) are not acceptable.NAI TYPE RSM.

b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall incorporatea seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad limit stop.Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square metal tubing.Angle bumpers are not acceptable.NAI Type SS.

c. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems

(1) Vibration isolated systems shall be braced with multiple 7 x 19 strandgalvanized cable rope with approved attachment devices (such asthimbles and wire rope clips) to equipment and structure.

(2) Non-isolated systems shall be braced with structural steel strut type withapproved fastening devices to equipment and structure.

(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending ofhung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor’ssubmittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum ofthree ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of supportrods to angles is not acceptable.NAI Model “RBC”.

d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steelcasing.

(1) Mountings shall be fabricated to resist the wind or seismic forces.NAI Type RNM.

e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors forbolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type expansionbolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete anchor boltspacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published standards.

4. Vibration Isolator Types

a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator - Free Standing

(1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8:1at rated deflection.

(2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% ofthe rated deflection.

(3) Top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment locking capscrew.

(4) Minimum 1/4 inch thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup onunderside, unless designated otherwise.NAI Type SM.




b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator - Restrained

(1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features.

(a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventingmetal-to-metal contact.

(b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability.

(c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4 inch clearanceunder normal operation.NAI Type RSM.

c. TYPE C: Not Used.

d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator.

(1) Mountings shall be fabricated to resist the wind or seismic forces.NAI Type RNM.

e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator

(1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lowersupport rod from the hanger box.

(2) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load without failure.NAI Type NH.

f. TYPE F: Combination Spring/Elastomer Hanger Isolator

(1) Spring and neoprene elements in a steel hanger box with the features asdescribed for TYPE C and E isolators.NAI Type SNH.

H. Equipment Bases

1. Base Types

a. TYPE B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base

(1) Constructed of structural members as required to prevent base flexure atequipment startup and misalignment of driver and driven units. Perimetermembers shall be a minimum of 1/10th the longest unsupported span.

(2) Height saving brackets shall be used to reduce operating height andmaintain 1 inch operating clearance under base.NAI type SB.

b. TYPE B-2: Concrete Inertia Base

(1) Steel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases for pumps shall belarge enough to support elbows and/or suction diffusers. The base depth




shall be a minimum of 1/12 the longest unsupported span, but not less than 6 inches or greater than 12 inches. Forms shall be manufactured from structural steel channel sections and include concrete reinforcement consisting of steel bars welded in place on 8 inch centers both ways in a layer 1-1/2 inches above the bottom.

(2) Height saving brackets shall be used to maintain 1" clearance below thebase.

(3) Base shall be furnished with steel templates and anchor bolt sleeves tohold anchors while concrete is being poured.

(4) Isolators may be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of thebase construction or utilize height saving brackets set at the proper heightto maintain 1 inch clearance below the base. Base shall be furnished withsteel templates to hold anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete isbeing poured.NAI Type CIB

c. TYPE B-7 : Steel Rails

(1) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure duringoperation.

(2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.

(3) Rails shall be cross braced at support and equipment attachment pointswhen used in seismic zones.NAI Type SR

I. Flexible Connectors

1. All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shutoff valves; horizontal andparallel to equipment shafts whenever possible. Piping shall be supported and/oranchored to resist pipe movement beyond the allowable movement of the flexibleconnector. Installations must include check valves and/or other design and installationprecautions to reduce the threat to life safety when subjected to the specified seismicaccelerations.

2. TYPE FC-1: Spherical Elastomer connector

a. Manufactured of EPDM.

b. Sizes 2" and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with an external ringbetween spheres. Sizes larger than 20"may be single sphere.

c. Female threaded ends for sizes 3/4" to 1-1/2".

d. Connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the connectorunder pressure.

e. ASA 125# flanged connectors shall be rated for of 2100 F, 225 PSIG.




f. Control rods are required in unanchored installations where the installationexceeds the pressure limitation without control rods.

g. Connectors bolted to Victaulic type coupling or gate, butterfly or check valvesto have a minimum 5/8" flange spacer (by others) installed between theconnector and the coupling flange. Connectors must mate to a flat-facedflange in all instances.

3. TYPE FC-2: Flexible Stainless Steel Hose

a. Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor.

b. 2 inch diameter and smaller with male nipples, 2-1/2 inch and larger with fixedflat faced steel flanges.

(1) Lengths shall be: 9 inches for 2-1/2 inch through 4 inch, 11 inches for 5inch and 6 inch, 12 inches for 8 inch, 13 inches for 10 inch, 14 inchesfor 12 inch through 16 inch.

4. TYPE FC-4: Flexible bronze Braided Hose

a. Metal hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor. (Minimum 150PSI)

b. Copper tube ends.

J. Installation

1. General

a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordancewith the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.

b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment resultingin stress on equipment connections.

2. Equipment Installation

a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE A at the end of this section.

b. Additional Requirements:

(1) The minimum operating clearance under all bases shall be 1 inch.

(2) All bases shall be placed in position and supported temporarily byblocks or shims prior to the installation of the equipment, isolators andrestraints.

(3) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed withoutchanging equipment elevations.




(4) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load,the spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred fromthe blocks to the isolators.

(5) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there areno short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in alldirections.

(6) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.

(7) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this section must be properlydoweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structureto meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators tohousekeeping pads, see section Related Work.

3. Piping Isolation

a. Installation:

(1) General

(a) Hanger isolators shall be installed with the hanger box hung as closeas possible to the structure. (without touching).

(b) Hanger rods shall not short circuit the hanger box.

(2) All piping in mechanical equipment room(s) attached to rotating or reciprocatingequipment shall be isolated as follows:

(a) Water piping.

i. Water piping 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches shall be hung with TYPE Eisolators with 0.25 inch deflection.

ii. Water pipe larger than 2 inches shall be hung with TYPE Fisolators with 0.75 inch deflection.

iii. Horizontal floor or roof mounted water piping 1-1/4 inches to 2inches shall be supported by TYPE P isolators with a minimum0.3 inch deflection.

iv. Water pipe larger than 2 inches shall be supported by TYPE Bisolators with a minimum of 0.75 inch deflection.

v. Air piping and vacuum piping from compressor discharge toreceiver shall be suspended by TYPE E isolators with a minimum0.25 inch deflection or supported by TYPE P isolators with aminimum 0.3 inch deflection.

(3) Install TYPE FC-1 flexible connectors at all connections of pipe to externallyisolated equipment.




(4) Install FC-2 or 4 type connectors only at locations which exceed temperaturelimitations of FC-1 or service requires stainless steel or bronze construction flex.(Such as gas, fuel oil, steam or Freon)

4. Seismic Restraints

a. Installation

(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the requiredacceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipmentmovement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment mustbe positively attached to the structure.

(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independentlybraced with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolatedequipment and slack with 1/2 inch cable deflection for isolatedequipment. Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittalsand shop drawings. Equipment connected to ductwork weighing lessthan 75 lbs. is excluded.

(3) All horizontally suspended pipe shall use RESTRAINT TYPE III.Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE B at the end of thissection.

(4) For all trapeze supported piping the individual pipes must betransversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze support at thedesignated restraint locations.

(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the buildingstructure must not occur. Bracing may occur from:

(a) Flanges of structural beams.

(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.

(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concretestructures.

(6) Pipe Risers

(a) Where pipes pass through cored holes, holes must be packed withresilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of thisspecification and/or state and local codes. No additionalhorizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.

(b) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers through coredholes require a riser clamp at each floor level on top of the slabattached in a seismically approved manner for vertical restraint.

(c) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers in pipe shaftsrequire structural steel attached in a seismically approved manner




at each floor level and a riser clamp at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the structural steel. The riser clamp and structural steel must be capable of withstanding all thermal, static and seismic loads.

(7) All non-isolated floor or wall mounted equipment and tanks shall useRESTRAINT TYPE III or V.

(8) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismicforces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units center ofgravity to suitably resist “G” forces specified.

(a) Vertically mounted tanks or similar equipment may require thisadditional restraint.

(9) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a buildingor two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different modeduring an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete walland a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, pipes crossing a buildingexpansion joint.

b. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints on Non-Life Safety Systems:

(1) Piping

(a) All piping less than 2-1/2 inches diameter, except in mechanicalrooms where piping less than 1-1/4 inches is exempted.

(b) All clevis or single level trapeze supported piping suspended byhangers with positive attachment to the structure that are less than12 inches in length as measured from the top of the pipe to thepoint of attachment to the structure. If the 12 inch limit is exceededby any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is required for the run.

c. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment

(1) Piping

(a) Natural gas, medical gas, or any piping containing hazardous orcorrosive materials that is less than 1 inch nominal diameter.

K. Inspection

1. If in the opinion of the project engineer the seismic restraint installation does not meetwith the project requirements, an outside consultant will be retained to inspect, verifyand submit corrective measures to be taken. The consultant's fees and all workassociated with such a review shall be borne by the contractor.




TABLE A Vibration Isolation & Seismic Restraint Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT POINT

ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE

EQUIPMENT SIZE (2) (3) MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE

Air Compressors & Vacuum Pumps

Tanks To 10 hp

Floor

D 0.30 - - B 0.75 - -

Over 10 hp B 0.75 - - B 1.50 B-2

Unitary To 10 hp D 0.30 - - B 0.75 B-2 (1)

Over 10 hp B 0.75 - - B 1.50 B-2 (1)

Pumps

Base

Mounted

(4)

To 15 hp Floor D 0.30 B-2 B 0.75 B-2

15 - 30 hp Floor B 0.75 B-2 B 0.75 B-2

Over 30 hp Floor B 0.75 B-2 B 1.50 B-2

Inline All Floor - - - - - - D 0.30 - -

Ceiling - - - - - - F 0.75 - -

TABLE A NOTES:

GENERAL: ISOL = Isolator, DEFL = Deflection, All deflections indicated are in inches.

(1) Single stroke compressors may require inertia bases with thickness greater than 12 inch max. Asdescribed for base B-2. Inertia base mass shall be sufficient to maintain double amplitude of 1/4 inch.

(2) Equipment with less than 1/3 H.P. are excluded from vibration requirements. (Seismic requirements stillapply)

(3) For equipment with multiple motors, H.P. Classification applies to largest single motor.(4) Exclude B-2 Base for skid mounted pump sets.

EQUIPMENT ON CENTER SPACING (Max)

TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

PIPE 40 Feet 80 Feet

NOTE WELL

Projects that contain large pipe may require that the allowable spacing shown in this Table be reduced to minimize structural loading. All associated costs shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Close coordination and approval by the structural engineer is mandatory for all seismic point loads exceeding 2,000 lbs.

If in the opinion of the project engineer the seismic restraint installation does not meet with the project requirements, an outside consultant will be retained to inspect, verify and submit corrective measures to be taken. The consultant's fees and all work associated with such a review shall be borne by the contractor.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POTABLE AND NONPOTABLE WATER SYSTEMS

A. All copper tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall beinstalled without springing or forcing.

B. Branch lines from service or main lines may be taken off the top or bottom of main using suchcrossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes,fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2inch from finished coverings and such other work and not less than 1/2 inch between finishedcoverings on the different services.

C. All piping shall be supported from the building structure with pipe hangers. Every water supplyriser from the shower valve to the shower head, whether or not exposed, shall be securelyattached to the structure. In general, all lines shall be installed concealed above ceilings infinished spaces where they may occur.

D. All copper tubing shall be cut true with cutters; the ends shall be reamed out to the full insidediameter of the pipe. Cap all open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.

E. Provide water hammer arresters. Provide expansion loops. Balance hot water recirculatingsystems.

F. Provide valves on every branch, to group of fixtures and wherever indicated on the Drawings.

G. Pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a hose end drain valve,hose connection vacuum breaker with cap and chain at each low point in piping so that all partsof the systems can be drawn off.

3.2 SANITARY SYSTEMS

A. Soil, waste and vent piping inside the building shall be run as indicated on the Drawings, properlysecured to the building structure with iron hangers. Extend to roof all lines of soil, waste and ventpiping in stacks with all branches and fittings required and extension through roofs as requiredby the Local Plumbing Code. Where an end circuit vent pipe from any fixture or line of fixtures isconnected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall be at least 3 feet or sufficientlyabove the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of the vent line as a waste.

B. All changes in pipe size and direction on soil and waste lines shall be made with Y’s and

cleanouts, reducing fittings or recessed reducers. Y’s and 45 fittings, or 45 combination fittingsshall be used wherever possible. Use long sweep bends at the bottom of stacks.

C. All fixtures and drains on the sanitary drainage system shall be separately trapped and each trapshall be vented. Where trap seals are subject to evaporation, they shall be provided with a dripseal and with a water supply fed from an approved automatic priming device.

D. Sanitary long sweep bends and Y’s shall be used for connections to branch lines for fixtures andT.Y’s on vertical runs of pipe only. Long turn fittings shall be used wherever conditions permit.Short radius fittings may be installed where in conformity with the Plumbing Code. Furnish andinstall cleanouts at the bottom of all soil, and waste stacks, at every change in direction on soil,and waste piping. An end or dandy cleanout fitting the same size as the drain which it connectsshall be installed under all kitchen, kitchenette, coffee room or similar usage sinks. An approved




two-piece trap which can be disassembled to clean this drain may be used in lieu of the cleanout. Plug all temporary open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.

E. When installing a fitting or making repairs to an existing soil stack, waste stack, vent stack ordrain, said fittings or repairs shall be made of the same material as the existing stack or drainusing an approved joining method.

F. All individuals making pipe tie-ins to hospital waste and vent, mortuary waste and vents,laboratory waste and vents, dental waste and vents shall have the surface of the body andclothing protected by disposable or washable gowns similar or equal to gowns, gloves and facemasks worn by surgical staff.

3.3 INSULATION

A. All pipe covering and insulation shall be carefully applied by mechanics skilled in the trade.

B. Pipe coverings and insulation shall be installed on all piping, valves and fittings. Piping, valvesand fittings designated to be chrome-plated shall not be insulated except hot water, cold waterand waste beneath handicapped lavatories and sinks, which shall be insulated.

C. All systems shall be tested and approved prior to installing pipe covering and insulation.

D. Staples are not to be used on any insulation system utilizing a vapor barrier jacket.

E. All pipe covering and insulation shall pass through all walls, ceiling and floor continuously. Theonly area where the insulation shall not pass continuously shall be at riser clamps. Hangers shallbe installed with insulation shields on the outside of the insulation.

F. All references to hot water systems shall include hot water and tempered water at all temperaturesincluding the supply and the recirculation.

G. Insulation requirements apply equally to non-potable water systems as they do potable watersystems.

3.4 CLEANOUTS

A. All concealed cleanouts shall be set flush with walls or floors. Finish shall be protected duringconstruction with proper covering. Flush floor cleanouts shall be coordinated so as to not belocated beneath any partitions, casework nor beneath any non-portable equipment. Cleanoutsshall be iron body with heavy brass plug and raised nut, same size as pipe for piping up to four(4) inches and not less than four (4) inches in size for piping larger than four (4) inches and closedgas-tight. Floor cleanouts in carpeted areas shall have carpet cleanout markers. Floor cleanoutsshall not be located beneath partitions, casework, non-portable equipment or similar installationconditions.

3.5 VALVES

A. All valves furnished and installed under this Section shall be located in a manner to allow properaccess for service and repair.

B. In no case shall valve stem and handle on a gate or globe valve be installed below the center lineof the pipe it serves. Whenever a valve is provided for a future connection this valve shall be leftin the closed position.




3.6 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor; he shall be responsible forcorrectly setting these drains at the proper grade to assure proper drainage from all surroundingareas. Sizes of drains shall be the same size as the pipe it serves. Provide the floor drain witha trap primer connection wherever the floor drain is served by a trap primer.

3.7 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish and deliver access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems thatrequire accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system. Access panelsshall be installed by the appropriate trades.

3.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. All plumbing fixtures, except as otherwise noted, shall be furnished and installed by thisContractor; he shall be responsible for correctly setting these fixtures as shown on Architect’sPlans and interior elevations. All wall penetrations shall have polished chrome-platedescutcheons.

B. Fixtures designated for barrier free use shall be mounted in accordance with the Americans withDisabilities Act (ADA) as well as State and Local Codes as applicable, or whichever is stricter ifthere is a conflict. Water closet flush valve lever shall be mounted on the wide side of the toiletareas.

C. All lavatory controls, where applicable, shall be adjusted by the installing plumber prior to the finalinspection. Controls shall be set to deliver water at a maximum temperature of 110 degrees F.

3.9 VENTS THROUGH ROOF

A. All vents extending through the roof which serve the sanitary and waste systems shall extend noless than 18” and no more than 24” above the roof. Where roofs are used for any purpose otherthan weather protection such as gardens, sun decks, parking decks or similar purposes, the ventshall extend at least 8 feet above the roof and be increased one pipe size and this change in pipesize shall be made at least one foot below the roof. Offset all vents requiring same in order toavoid interference with HVAC units, to facilitate flashing conditions as well as maintain minimumrequired distance from all natural and mechanical fresh air inlets.

B. All gas vents shall run through the roof and shall extend above the roof and shall be provided with3/4” by 1” increaser when required, pipe nipple and Fisher Controls Model No. Y602-17 umbrellatype, weather proof bug vent. Off-set all vents to avoid interference with rooftop equipment, tofacilitate flashing as well as maintain minimum required distance from all natural and mechanicalfresh air inlets.

C. No vent terminal shall be located directly beneath any door, window, or other ventilating openingof the building or of an adjacent building, nor shall any vent terminal be within 10 feet horizontallyof such an opening unless it is at least 2 feet above the top of such opening.

D. Vent terminals shall be located at least 25 feet horizontally from all fresh air intakes.




E. All vents through sloping roofs shall be provided with a pipe support on the vertical pipe just priorto the roof penetration. This support shall be located between the exterior vent terminal and thefirst joint or fitting within the building.

3.10 ELECTRICAL ROOMS

A. Piping shall not be installed in or through Electrical Rooms, Electrical Closets, TransformerRooms, Telephone Rooms or Elevator Machine Rooms unless the piping is intended to servethese rooms. No piping shall be installed over electrical panels.

End of Section

\\fs3\g_drive\projects\2017-boston\m1052-016.00\specifications\plumbing\p spec cd set 10-24-18.docx



ELECTRICAL FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00 - page 1 of 3

Section 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL




C. Specification requirements for the Filed Sub-Bid “ELECTRICAL” includes all work of the following listed Specification Sections, in their entirety: 1. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Filed Sub-Bid Requirements 2. Section 26 00 01 Electrical 3. Section 28 31 00 Fire-Alarm

D. The work to be completed by the Filed Subcontractor for the work of this Section is shown on the following listed Drawings, not just those pertaining particularly to this Sub-Trade, unless specifically called out otherwise, regardless of where among the Drawings it appears:

Architectural Drawings: D1, A1 through A8 inclusive. Fire Alarm Drawings: FA0.1 and FA1.1. Electrical Drawings: E0.1 through E2.1 inclusive, ED1.1 and ED2.1.

E. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this Filed Subcontract.

F. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in INVITATION TO BID and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 1. The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope:

NAME OF SUB-BIDDER: __________________________________ SUB-BID FOR TRADE: ELECTRICAL

2. Each Sub-Bid submittal for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding Authority, as bound herein, accompanied with the required bid deposit.

G. Sub Sub-Bid Requirements: In accordance with Massachusetts General Law, Chapter 149, Section 44F, as amended, The Filed Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the “Form for Sub-Bids” the name and bid price of each person, firm or corporation performing each class of work or part thereof for which the Section of the Specifications for that Sub-Trade require such listing.



1. This filed trade requires that the following classes of work be listed in paragraph E under the conditions indicated herein. Class Of Work Reference Sections a. Fire alarm Section 28 31 00



B. Pre-Bid Conference: Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the Pre-Bid conference; refer to INVITATION TO BID for time and date.

1.3 SEQUENCING


B. Do not order or deliver any materials until all schedules and submittals, required in the listed Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2. Each Filed Subcontractor is responsible to provide, maintain and remove at dismantling, all tarpaulins and similar protective measures necessary to cover scaffolding for inclement weather conditions other than those required to be provided, maintained and removed by the General Contractor pursuant to



MGL (Refer to Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS and as additionally required for dust control).





End of Section




ELECTRICAL 26 00 01 - page i of 45

SECTION 26 00 01

ELECTRICAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS ...................................................................................... 2 1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ................................................................................. 2 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 3 1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES ................................................ 3 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................... 3 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 4 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................... 4 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ................................................................................. 4 1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 5 1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................ 5 1.13 GUARANTEE .................................................................................................................................. 6 1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................ 6 1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL .................................................................................................... 6 1.16 REMOVAL WORK .......................................................................................................................... 6 1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ....................................................................................................... 7 1.18 FINAL COMPLETION ..................................................................................................................... 7 1.19 REOBSERVATION ......................................................................................................................... 7 1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................ 8 1.21 IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................ 8 1.22 ASBESTOS REMOVAL (Short Form Version) ............................................................................... 9 1.23 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................................................................ 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 9 2.2 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS ......................................................................................................... 9 2.3 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS .......................................................... 9 2.4 WIREWAYS .................................................................................................................................. 10 2.5 WIRE AND CABLE ....................................................................................................................... 11 2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................................. 11 2.7 PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION .................................................... 12 2.8 EXISTING PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION .................................. 12 2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .......................................................................................................... 13 2.10 FUSES .......................................................................................................................................... 13 2.11 TOGGLE SWITCHES ................................................................................................................... 14 2.12 RECEPTACLES ............................................................................................................................ 14 2.13 DEVICE PLATES .......................................................................................................................... 15 2.14 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 15 2.15 LIGHTING FIXTURES .................................................................................................................. 17 2.16 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM ................................................................................... 19 2.17 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER ...................................................................................... 19 2.18 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TESTING ...................................................................................... 20



ELECTRICAL 26 00 01 - page ii of 45

2.19 DEMOLITION ................................................................................................................................ 20 2.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS .............................................................. 21 2.21 EMERGENCY INVERTER SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 30

PART 3- EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................ 31

3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 31 3.2 SLEEVING ................................................................................................................................... 31 3.3 GROUNDING ............................................................................................................................... 32 3.4 WIRING METHODS ..................................................................................................................... 34 3.5 WIRE AND CABLES .................................................................................................................... 36 3.6 PHASING AND COLOR CODING ............................................................................................... 37 3.7 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ................................................................................... 38 3.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 39 3.9 MOTORS AND CONTROLS ........................................................................................................ 40 3.10 COORDINATION WITH MECHANICAL WORK .......................................................................... 41 3.11 BUILDING RELATED SYSTEMS ................................................................................................ 41 3.12 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS ........................................................ 41 3.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION ...................................................................................................... 42 3.14 PAINTING .................................................................................................................................... 43 3.15 CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................................. 43



ELECTRICAL 26 00 01 - page 1 of 45

SECTION 260000

ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division1, General Requirements, as they apply to work specified in this Section.

B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which effect work of this Sectionwhether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades effecting or effected by work of this Section.Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment andsupplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as requiredby the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by theElectrical Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as specifiedherein to include the following items:

1. Panelboards – Lighting, Power and Distribution.2. Motor Controllers.3. Raceway Systems.4. Wireways.5. Outlets and Pull Boxes.6. Wire and Cable.7. Disconnect Switches.8. Fuses.9. Wiring Devices and Device Plates.10. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.11. Lighting Control Sensors.12. Telephone and Data Raceway System.13. Power and alarm wiring to include connections for heating, ventilating and air conditioning

system motors and equipment. All starters and line voltage thermostats will be furnishedto the Electrical Contractor for wiring, connections and mounting.

14. Power, control and alarm wiring to include connections for the Plumbing and FireProtection Systems Equipment shall be wired and connected by the Electrical Contractor.

15. Electrical wiring and connections for Owner Furnished Equipment.16. Supplementary Steel, Channel and Supports.17. Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals for Electrical Equipment.18. Nameplates, Labels and Tags.19. Testing.20. Temporary Lighting and Power.21. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.




1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under otherSections:

1. Cutting and Patching.2. Temporary Water, Heat and Fire Protection.3. Flashing and Caulking.4. Setting of Frames for Registers and Access Panels.5. Painting.6. Fire Protection.7. Plumbing.8. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.9. Telephone and data system cabling, outlet devices, cover plates, punch down blocks,

racks, patch panels, terminations, equipment and instruments are to be furnished andinstalled by others.

10. All automatic temperature control system components, wiring and interlock wiringassociated with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system will be furnished,mounted, wired and connected by the HVAC Subcontractor.

11. Mounting of electrical equipment having mechanical connections. Refer to work involvingmechanical trades.

12. Installation, wiring and connecting of automatic temperature controls unless otherwisenoted or specified shall be furnished by the HVAC Subcontractor and installed by theElectrical Subcontractor.

13. Starters and control devices for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment unlessotherwise noted or specified shall be furnished by the HVAC Subcontractor and installedby the Electrical Subcontractor.

14. Starters and control devices for plumbing equipment shall be furnished by the PlumbingSubcontractor and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor.

1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all-applicable Codes, Localand State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.

B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between theContract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.

C. In the event of a conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:

1. Massachusetts State Building Code.2. National Electric Code (NEC).3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (DEP).5. Local Ordinances, Regulations City of Lowell.6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).8. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).9. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS).10. Factory Mutual (FM).11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).




12. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION

A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipmentthat is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the workand to complete the project.

1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and locationof piping, conduit and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset andaccessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.

B. To carry out the intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete,approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge.

C. Where requirements of the plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most stringentrequirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of thework, which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer’sattention for direction as to what is provided.

D. Final location of lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches and control devices, etc. shall becoordinated with the Architectural Plans (i.e., Reflected Ceiling Plan). Additional offsets, fittings,etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.

E. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items (i.e., starters), theyshall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies arenot reported, the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete andoperable system.

F. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.

G. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatusand give information in advance to building openings into the work. Furnish and set in place allsleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.

H. Routing and locations of pipes, conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate thework with interferences anticipated and encountered. The Electrical Subcontractor shalldetermine the exact routing and location of his/her systems prior to fabrication and/or installationof any system component.

I. All distribution systems, which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam andcondensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other tradesas to the location of pipes, ducts and equipment and install work to avoid interferences.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepareCoordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment andlines.




B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AUTOCAD Release 2000 minimum orcompatible system. A disk and one (1) set of reproducibles (all-trade composite) shall be providedto the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = 1’-0” scale. Prepare and submit for review, at thatscale or larger, plans and sections of Electrical Rooms.

D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.

E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of theapproved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materialsand apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of theinstalled equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate thelocation, size, type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.

B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of thework installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if foundinaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings areaccurate and up-to-date.

C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked-up prints for review and comment.After review and comment, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the RecordDrawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously indicated, aswell as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the basis of theArchitect/Engineer’s final comments. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducibles and CADdisks (AutoCAD Release 2000 minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Makeall modifications to these reproducibles as shown on the marked-up prints. Remove allsuperseded data to show the completed installation. The Record Drawings may be made fromthe originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with the Architect to have these reproduciblesmade from the originals. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disksproperly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property ofthe Owner.

1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under thisSection. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules andregulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and regulationsof the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has beentested and accepted.

B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materialsand equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment.




C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect workand materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and makegood damage thus caused.

1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit for approval, within thirty (30) days after signing the Contract and prior to the submissionof any shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers of material and equipment and ofSubcontractors proposed to be used under this Section.

B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop drawings.All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete Specifications,including type of materials, electrical characteristics, capacities, performance and powerrequirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted includingwiring diagram shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project. Allextraneous material shall be deleted.

C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, therequirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the shopdrawing review.

D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect. Suchcertification shall be made by a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly authorizedto sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the data anddetails contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure has beenreviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all respects. Shopdrawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and will be returnedto the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.

E. It is intended that shop drawing data be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the shopdrawing is returned marked “Resubmit” only one (1) additional submission will be permitted.

F. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer’soffice each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures are submittedor resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered when scheduling the work.

G. The shop drawings and manufacturer’s data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently inadvance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.

H. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled asrequired, without invalidating the manufacturer’s warranty, so that it can be installed throughregular window, door, and/or louver openings.

1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name, or name of themanufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing astandard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previouslyapproved by the Architect.

B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered forconsideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term “approvedequal” appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete




specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process.

C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bearthe cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.

1.13 GUARANTEE

A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for material and equipment furnished underthis Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which themanufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against alldefects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing with the date ofSubstantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship whichmay develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas,materials and other systems resulting from such failures.

C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guaranteeperiod, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall beconsidered defective and shall be replaced.

1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas, which will be occupied during theconstruction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made onlyupon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.

B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to thisschedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.

1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL

A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from themanufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operationof their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition.

1.16 REMOVAL WORK

A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of servicein the adjoining buildings.

B. All existing equipment indicated to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.All existing equipment indicated to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to the Ownerin good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removedfrom the premises.

C. Remove all abandoned conduit and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilingsor walls are removed all abandoned duct, conduit and piping shall be removed and ends of liveservices capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing ceilings shallremain and ends capped and marked abandoned.




1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) issubstantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of itemsremaining to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work is not substantially complete, he willpromptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observeddeficiencies.

C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantialcompletion.

D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare aCertificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.

1.18 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the GeneralContractor written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed.

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencieslisted with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fullyoperational.

5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly suspendhis review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.

C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification offinal completion.

D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make asecond review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor listingobserved deficiencies.

E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.

1.19 REOBSERVATION

A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer,due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor’s claims on initial Architect and/or Engineer’sreview for Substantial Completion, or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the amount ofArchitect and/or his Engineer’s compensation for additional services from final payment toSubcontractor.




1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personneldesignated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under thisSection. A letter with two (2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom theinstructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architectat the completion of the project.

B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer’s catalogs, other similar data including thenecessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment anddevices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide completeinstructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions forlubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall bespecific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manualshall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelatedmaterial shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained.The material shall be bound in notebook form and indexed.

C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s representative and servicecompany for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service foreach item of equipment can be readily obtained.

1.21 IDENTIFICATION

A. All equipment shall be properly identified by means of clear and concise nameplates, tags, signsor directories.

B. Provide tags identifying each cable, wire or group of wire comprising a circuit or feeder in allpanelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, troughs and terminal boxes throughwhich such wires run and at equipment at which they terminate. Tags shall be flameproof linenfiber or pressure sensitive types. The circuit or feeder designation shall be as approved by theEngineer.

C. Provide three (3) ply black bake-lite nameplates with 1/4 inch high engraved white letters on thefollowing equipment indicating equipment name, operating voltage and the name of source.Wording of the nameplates shall be in conformance with the respective schedules and notes onthe Drawings.

1. Switchboards: Nameplates shall be provided on each device and/or compartment ofsame identifying the feeder or equipment served or the equipment container within thecompartment.

2. Motor Controls: Nameplates shall be provided identifying the control of each door ofsame identifying the unit controlled or protected by the starter, contactor or protectivedevice contained within same.

3. Lighting, Power and Distribution Panelboards: Nameplates shall be provided on theexterior of each panelboard identifying same. Nameplates shall read as indicated on theDrawings and shall be mounted on the exterior of the panelboard cabinet.

4. Nameplates shall be provided for each remote disconnect switch, starter, automatictransfer switch and control device identifying the units controlled or protected.




D. Provide typewritten directories under transparent plastic on inside face of doors of thepanelboards.

E. Provide a three (3) ply black bake-lite nameplate with ¼ inch high engraved white lettersidentifying the color codes or markings used to determine the phase and voltage of all conductorsconnected to the equipment.

1.22 ASBESTOS REMOVAL (Short Form Version)

A. Should this Subcontractor or any of its Sub-Subcontractors encounter any asbestos and/orasbestos related products or materials (the “asbestos materials”) during the performance.of itswork, this Subcontractor shall stop work immediately and so inform the General Contractor andthe Owner of the presence of asbestos.


A. Installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, accessories and components shall be inaccordance with the seismic requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code,Ninth (9th Edition). Refer to Part 2 of the Specifications for further information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All electrical products used on this project shall be new and conform, unless otherwise specificallynoted, to applicable standards as listed in CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES in Part 1and be approved for the service and application.

2.2 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS

A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards andspecifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp.,Wheatland Tube Co., or approved equal.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards andspecifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Triangle/PWC, Inc.,or approved equal.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards andspecifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp.,Triangle/PWC, Inc., and Wheatland Tube Co.

D. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized, spiral wrapped metallic conduit (Greenfield) or liquid-tightflexible metal conduit as herein specified for specific equipment.

2.3 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish and install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required forthe proper installation of all components of the Electrical System.




B. Outlet boxes shall, in general, be as follows:

1. Exposed, surface and pendant mounted outlet boxes or outlet boxes installed in normallywet locations shall be of the cast metal type with threaded hubs.

2. Recessed outlet boxes for dry locations shall be of the pressed sheet steel, zinc coated,cadmium plated type.

3. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are requiredby structural conditions and are especially approved by the Architect.

4. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inch octagonal except thatsmaller boxes may be used where required by the particular fixture to be installed. Flushor recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate outlet boxes where required by thefixture terminal temperature requirements.

5. Outlet boxes for general use, flush mounted in concrete work and walls in normally drylocations, shall be manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco or approved equal.

6. Outlet boxes for normally wet locations and surface or pendent mounted in all locations,shall be of the proper cast metal type and shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,Appleton, Red Dot, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.

C. Pull and junction boxes shall, in general, be as follows:

1. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet metal, ofnot less than minimum size required by the Electrical Code or other applicableSpecification "Standards" and shall be furnished with screw fastened covers. Boxesexceeding 48 inches in any direction shall be properly reinforced with angle ironstiffeners.

2. Pull and junction boxes to be installed in normally wet location areas shall be of the casttype with threaded hub and gasketed cover plate. The cast pull and junction boxes shallbe manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.

D. Fittings shall, in general, be as follows:

1. Adequate expansion fittings shall be used where crossing building expansion joints.Expansion fitting shall have grounding jumpers, and shall be manufactured by O.Z., Inc.or approved equal.

2. Sleeves and openings through fire-rated floors and walls in which cable or conduit passshall be sealed by UL Classified fire-stop fittings with elastomeric rings to seal off coldsmoke and toxic fumes. Fittings shall have heat-activated intumescent material whichexpands to fill the voids left by destroyed cable insulation. Fire-stop devices shall beO.Z./Gedney Fire-Seal fittings, with UL-classified hourly fire ratings equal to the fire ratingof the floor or wall through which the cables or conduit pass. Mineral wool or oakumstuffed in the penetration shall not be employed.

2.4 WIREWAYS

A. Wireways shall be of sheet steel with hinged spring latched covers, galvanized or painted toprotect against corrosion conforming to industry standards and specifications. All necessarybends, couplings, connectors, etc., shall be provided.




B. Wireway shall be suitable for lay in conductors with connector covers permanently attached sothat removal is not necessary to utilize lay in feature.

C. Interior parts shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and burrs.

D. Wireways shall be as manufactured by Square D Co. or approved equal.

2.5 WIRE AND CABLE

A. All wire and cable shall have copper conductors. Copper wires shall be soft drawn, annealed, 98percent conductivity, and insulated for 600 volts. All conductors larger than no. 10 AWG shall bestranded and shall be color-coded as specified below:

120/208 Volts Phase 277/480 Volts

Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green w/yellow trace

B. Wire sizes #14 through #6 AWG shall be type THHN-THWN; wire size #4 and larger shall be typeXHHW. Type SF-2 shall be used for connections to lighting fixtures.

C. Minimum wire size shall be no. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and no. 14 AWG for controlwiring. 120-volt branch circuits of more than 75 feet and 277-volt circuits of more than 150 feetfrom center of load to panel shall be no. 10 AWG.

D. All circuit phases shall be color coded at terminations, splices, and pull boxes with UL-listedelectrical plastic vinyl tape such as 3M Scotch Brand No. 35 color-coding tape.

E. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and lower (105°C rated and below), sizes #18 through#6 AWG, solid or stranded, shall be screw-on type pressure connectors (of the "SCOTCHLOK"type) incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated spring, insulated with a vinyl jacket having aflexible skirt. Connectors for larger size wires shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co.or approved equal. Connectors shall be listed per UL 486 for use with copper or aluminumconductors at 600 volts.

F. Flexible metal clad (MC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armorunacceptable) shall have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size insulated(green) ground conductor. Conductors shall be #12 AWG. minimum, type THHN asmanufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.

G. All cables in air plenum spaces that are not installed within protective conduit system shall be oftype approved for air plenum installation. This shall include signal and communication cables.

2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. All motor starters, three phase magnetic combination and single phase manual type shall ingeneral be furnished under Section 230000, but installed and wired under Section 260000.Disconnect switches, except as furnished under Section 230000, shall be furnished and installedunder Section 260000.




2.7 PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION

A. Panelboards shall be of the dead-front type manufactured in accordance with the UnderwritersLaboratories, Inc. Standard for panelboards and enclosing cabinets and so labeled.

B. Panelboards shall be suitable for 277/480 volts or 120/208 volts, three phase, four wire operationas scheduled on the contract drawings.

C. Interiors shall have copper or tin plated aluminum bus bars with mains arranged for a groundedsolid-neutral system with lugs only in the mains or main breakers as indicated.

D. In addition to the neutral bus, panelboards shall have a separate equipment ground bus andterminal strip. Neutral bus shall be insulated from the panel enclosure.

E. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type with bolted connections to the bus.The number and size of single, double, and three-pole circuit breakers indicated on the drawingsshall be provided. The design of the structure shall be such that the units may be removed withoutdisturbing adjacent sections, bus structure, or insulation.

F. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by handle automatically assuming a position between themanual "OFF" and "ON" positions. The individual breakers shall be calibrated and sealed toeliminate tampering or unauthorized changes in calibration. Breakers shall be interchangeableand capable of being operated in any position. Two and three-pole breakers shall be commontrip type so that an overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. All circuit breakers withtrip sizes larger than 100 ampere rating shall have interchangeable trips. No handle bar ties willbe allowed on multi-pole circuit breakers to accomplish either manual or automatic tripping.

G. The exact size of circuit breaker, to include minimum fully rated interrupting ratings, for eachpanelboard shall be determined from the panel schedules on the drawings. Each panelboard, asa complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the equipmentrating shown on the panel schedule or on the plans.

H. Branch circuit numbering is for identification and convenience only and is not intended todesignate connecting sequence. The Contractor is responsible for a proper load balance at eachpanel.

I. Panelboard cabinets shall be NEMA 3R fabricated from code gauge galvanized sheet steel andfurnished with surface trim. Trims shall be finished in gray enamel paint over a rust-inhibitingprime coat. A turned edge shall be provided around the front of the box for rigidity and attachmentof the front. Wiring gutters shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code. Trims shall be fittedwith hinged doors having combination lock and latch, with all locks keyed alike. A directory holderwith clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted on the inside of each door. Aneatly typed directory properly identifying each circuit shall be provided in the holder.Panelboards shall be so mounted that the distance from finish floor to the handle of the top mostcircuit breaker does not exceed 6 feet, 6 inches.

J. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer,Siemens, or Square D.

2.8 EXISTING PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION

A. The existing panelboards are suitable for 480/277 and or 208/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire operationas previously installed.




B. Where connections are made in existing panelboards, the panel index shall be revised to indicatethe new loads served. All existing panelboards that do not have a circuit directory card mountedin a frame with noncombustible plastic cover shall have one installed on the inside of the door.All directory cards shall be properly filled in, using a typewriter and indicating areas and devicesserved by each unit.

C. New circuit breakers added to existing panelboards shall be the same frame size and ainterrupting capacity as existing panelboards and circuit breakers.

2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Disconnect switches shall be of the fusible or non-fusible type as noted and equipped with anexternal lever or handle for manual operation. Each unit shall be enclosed in a code-gauge, sheetsteel cabinet with hinged door and catches and suitable for surface mounting as indicated on thedrawings. Neutral conductors shall be solid throughout.

B. Unless otherwise noted, switches shall be heavy-duty type HD - 600 volts in NEMA I enclosuresof the size indicated on the drawings or as required. NEMA Type 3R switches shall be providedwhere exposed to weather.

C. Disconnect switches for use as a motor disconnect shall be horsepower rated. Rating shall beequal to or larger than the motor served.

D. Provide Class R fuse clips for all disconnects where fuses are specified to be Class R in the fusesection of this specification.

E. A disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed for all power equipment as required by theElectrical Code, whether or not shown on the drawings.

F. Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Siemens, General Electric, Square D, orWestinghouse/Cutler-Hammer.

2.10 FUSES

A. Furnish and install all fuses of the ampere rating indicated. For equipment disconnect fuses,coordinate final fuse current rating selection with final equipment shop drawings and equipmentnameplate data.

B. Where the available fault current is less than 10,000 amperes, heating and small appliancedisconnect fuses shall be general purpose, one time, cartridge type, UL Class H.

C. Fuses for fused transformer disconnect switches shall be dual element fuses and shall be currentlimiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class RK-5, with short circuit interrupting capacity of 200,000amperes RMS.

D. Fuses for fused motor or HVAC equipment disconnect switches shall be dual element fuses andshall be current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class RK-1, with short circuit interruptingcapacity of 300,000 amperes RMS.

E. Provide compact space saving fuses where required to match the equipment manufacturer’s fusemounting provisions. Compact space saving fuses shall be dual element fuses and shall becurrent limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class J or UL Class CC (to match mountingprovisions) with short circuit interrupting capacity of 300,000 amperes RMS for Class J and200,000 amperes for Class CC.




F. Furnish to the Owner upon completion of construction and before final acceptance of the buildingone (1) complete set of three (3) fuses for each type installed in the building under this Contract.The spare fuses shall be turned over to an authorized representative of the Owner, designatedby the Architect, upon completion of the Construction Program.

G. All secondary system fuses, rated at 600 volts or less, shall be UL approved, be constructed inconformance with the applicable Standards set forth by NEMA and ANSI. All fuses 600 volts orless shall be manufactured by Cooper Bussmann or Ferraz-Shawmut.

2.11 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Toggle switches shall be of the totally enclosed, flush tumbler type of suitable capacity for theintended load and shall be “Specification Grade”.

B. Toggle switch bodies shall be high impact nylon, quiet indicating type with screw type terminals.Color selected by the Architect.

C. General lighting switches shall be 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-way or 4-way and be 20 ampere, 120/277volts AC rated as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton or approvedequal.

D. Dimmer switches shall be Lutron Nova Series, or approved equal, of wattage rating as indicatedon the Plans.

E. On finished walls, switches shall be flush-mounted. Where two (2) or more switches are shownat one location, they shall be installed under a common wall plate. All switches shall be mountedapproximately 4 feet above the floor and shall be located on the knob side of all doors.

2.12 RECEPTACLES

A. Faces shall be of high impact nylon, unless noted otherwise, supported by mounting yoke havingplaster ears and shall be “Specification Grade”. Receptacles shall be side or back wired with two(2) screws per terminal. All receptacles shall be the grounding type and shall be connected tometal mounting yoke. A terminal shall be provided for ground wire on all receptacles. Color asselected by the Architect.

B. Receptacles shall be as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell or approvedequal.

C. All receptacles unless specifically noted otherwise shall be as follows:

1. Convenience receptacles - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, 3-wire, U-Slotgrounded type.

2. Ground fault interrupter type - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, U-Slotgrounded type.

3. Weather proof - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, 3-wire, U-Slot grounded typewith die cast aluminum, weatherproof spring loaded lift cover and gasket and ground faultcircuit interrupter.

D. All receptacles, unless otherwise noted, shall be installed 18 inches above floor.




E. In general, receptacle circuits shall be independent of lighting circuits and shall not be controlledby lighting circuit breaker switches or lighting switches.

2.13 DEVICE PLATES

A. Device plates of the one-piece type shall be provided for all outlets to suit the devices installed.Plates on all finished walls shall be of stainless steel, 0.040 inch thick, provided with bevelededges. Plates on unfinished walls or fittings may be of zinc-coated sheet metal with countersunkheads of the same finish as the plate. Plates shall be of the same manufacturer as the devices.

2.14 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM

A. Furnish and Install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved system of heatingcables, components, and controls for all piping specifically indicated and shown on the Drawings.The system shall consist of, but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Electric heating cables.

2. Temperature controllers and auxiliaries.

3. Accessory materials such as banding, junction boxes, etc.

4. All required feeders to panelboards.

B. Equipment shall be XL-Trace as manufactured by Raychem, Thermon, or equal.

C. The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel-copper bus wiresembedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond totemperature all along its length, allowing the heating cable to be cut to length in the field. Theheating cable shall be covered by a radiation-crosslinked, modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Toprovide a ground path and to enhance the heating cable’s ruggedness, the heating cable shallhave a braid of tinned copper and an outer jacket of modified polyolefin, as required per section427.23 of the NEC-2014. For installation on plastic piping, the heating cable shall be appliedusing aluminum tape (AT-180).

D. In order to conserve energy and to prevent overheating, the heating cable shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor is defined as the percentagereduction, without thermostatic control, of the heating cable output going from 40° F pipetemperature operation to 150° F pipe temperature operation.

E. The heater shall operate on line voltages of 120 volts without the use of transformers.

F. The heating cable for metal-pipe freeze protection shall be sized according to the table below.(Heating cable selection based on fiberglass insulation on metal piping.




5XL-CR

Pipe Size (Metallic Pipe)

Insulation Thickness 0-1.5"

1.5"- 3.5" 4'' 6'' 8'' 10''

12"-16"

0.5''

1''

1.5''

2''

2.5''

3''

3.5''

8XL-CR

Pipe Size (Metallic Pipe)

Insulation Thickness 0-3" 3"-6" 8''

10"-14" 16''

18"-20" 24''

0.5''

1''

1.5''

2''

2.5''

3''

3.5''

* Insulation Requirements is based on Fiberglass or Mineral Wool!! Any change in insulation type or thickness will impact the heat trace system

* Based on maintaining 40º Fahrenheit with a minimum Ambient Temperature of -10º Fahrenheit

- Requires Single Run of Heater

- Insufficient Heater Output

G. The heating cable shall be XL-Trace cable as manufactured by Raychem Corporation, Thermon,or equal.

H. Power connection, end seal, splice, and tee kit components shall be applied in the field.

I. Heating cable circuit shall be protected by a ground-fault device for equipment protection. Thisrequirement is in accordance with section 427.22 of the NEC-2014.

J. All heating-cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as partof the system to provide (choose one: pipe freeze protection, flow maintenance). Componentenclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall notrequire the installing contractor to cut into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires.Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that us crimpsor terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. All components that make an electrical connectionshall be reenterable for servicing. No component shall use silicone to seal the electricalconnections. An exception will be made in areas where a conduit transition is required.




K. The system shall be controlled by a microprocessor based, multipoint heat trace controller. Thecontroller shall provide on/off control and monitoring for each circuit. Monitoring shall includeground fault, temperature, and current with a dry contact output for alarm. Controller shall bePentair Digitrace, C910 Series "single point controller" with ambient sensing temperature controlRTD-200.)

L. System must be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Apply the heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure-tested.Secure the heating cable to piping with fiberglass tape.

N. Apply “Electric Traced” labels to the outside of the thermal insulation.

O. After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heating cable totesting using a 2500-Vdc Megger, Minimum insulation resistance shall be 1000 megohms orgreater.

2.15 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Furnish and install all lighting fixtures and lamps complete with all accessories required for properinstallation and operation.

B. The lighting fixtures scheduled on the drawings are indicative of the general type desired and arenot intended to restrict selection of fixtures to the particular manufacturer indicated. Fixtures ofthe same design and equivalent light-distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equalfinish and quality will be acceptable if approved as equal by the Engineer.

C. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to check architectural drawings, prior toordering fixtures, and furnish the specified recessed fixtures with proper mounting arrangementto be compatible with the type of ceiling construction in which the fixture is to be mounted.

D The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compatibility between all fluorescentdimming ballasts, LED drivers, and dimming systems/switches included in the project scope. Thelighting submittal package shall include all standalone dimming switch and/or central dimmingsystem product data and a written statement that all components have been certified ascompatible by the manufacturers of the interconnected components.

E. Lamp ballasts and LED drivers shall meet the FCC standard for EMI/RFI (FCC 47 CFR Part 15or part 18, as applicable, Non-consumer), ensuring suitability for residential, commercial, andindustrial installations.

F. Manufacturer’s shop drawings for all lighting fixtures shall be submitted for approval prior topurchase via searchable PDF document.

1. Shop Drawings shall indicate complete details of fixtures, including UL listing, certificateof FCC compliance, manufacturer's catalog numbers for sockets, lamps, ballasts, LEDdriver, light shields, switches, metal gauges, type of wiring, finish color, texture, etc.

2. Fluorescent fixture shop drawings shall include; ballast manufacturer technical datainformation and catalog number, lamp manufacturer catalog number, together with astatement they are compatible when used together as an integral part of the fixture.




3. LED fixture shop drawings shall include; driver, LED module with nominal lumen valuesmanufacturer catalog number as well as technical data information together with astatement they are compatible when used together as an integral part of the fixture.

4. When ballast, lamp and LED driver data information is not included with fixture submittalthe entire or part of the light fixture package shall be subject to being rejected and requireresubmittal.

5. Where pertinent to proper installation or operation, Shop Drawings shall indicaterelationship between fixtures and adjacent elements of structure (walls, columns, ducts,openings, ceiling grid, etc.).

G. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks. No crossbars are permitted over light shields. Fixtures shallprovide for sufficient ventilation for lamps, ballasts or LED heat sinks. Size and location of ventholes shall be indicated on Manufacturer’s Drawings. Outdoor fixtures shall have wire meshscreens in the vent holes.

H. The Electrical Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the safe handling of all lighting fixtures,accessories and lamps until the final inspection has been made by the Engineer.

I. Special fittings and material that may be required to support fixtures shall be supplied as well assupports or grounds required to secure surface of pendent mounted fixtures on suspendedceilings. Fixtures shall be supported from the structural members, independent of furred orsuspended ceilings or roof deck. This support shall be in addition to regular fixture support bars,saddles, etc. Where duct work, pipes, type of building construction materials and structuralframing members provide obstruction or difficult support means, hanger rods shall be used inassociation with horizontal sections of steel support channels, in an approved manner. Steelsupport channels shall be Unistrut, Kindorf, or approved equal.

J. Fixtures, part or parts thereof (including lamps) determined to be defective, upon completion ofthe electrical installation, shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor.

K. Consult with the Ceiling Contractors and coordinate fixture locations and supports with thesuspended ceiling system.

L. Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be furnished and installed in eachfixture as indicated on the fixture schedule. Lamps shall be delivered to the project in the originalcartons and installed in the fixtures just prior to the completion of the work.

1. High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps (i.e. mercury vapor, metal halide and high-pressuresodium lamps) shall be suitable to the ballast serving lamps. Type O or PAR lamps shallbe provided in open fixtures.

2. All lamps shall be of same manufacturer, General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania, orapproved equal.

M. HID ballasts shall start lamps at temperature as low as minus 20F. Allowable line voltagevariation shall be plus or minus 10% except high-pressure sodium ballasts shall be plus or minus5%, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast shall have power factor of 90% or greater. Ballast shallbe fused:

1. Provide factory installed cartridge fuses for each ungrounded conductor.




2. Ampere rating of fuses shall be 500% of rated nominal current for 480 volt lighting circuitsand 300% for lighting circuits operating at circuit voltages less than 480 volts.

N. Provide manpower and tools for final adjusting of all adjustable fixtures. This operation shall takeplace immediately before the building is turned over to the Owner after regular working hourswhere required.

2.16 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install, outlet boxes and conduit stubs to ceiling withnylon bushing and pull wire leaving the entire installation ready for installation equipment andcables of the Telephone/Data Company.

B. In general, the telephone/data system raceways, outlets and terminal backboard locations shallbe as shown on the Drawings and as required by the Telephone/Data Company for the installationof cables and devices.

C. All work and the entire installation of same shall be coordinated with the Architectural/EngineeringCoordination Office of the Telephone/Data Company and the Electrical Contractor before the startof the construction and shall be in full conformance with their requirements andrecommendations.

D. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish a 1/4 inch nylon pull cord in each raceway to facilitate thepulling of cables in the future.

E. All wall and floor outlet cover plates shall be furnished by the Telephone/Data Company.

2.17 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER

A. Provide temporary feeders of sufficient capacity from the existing building distribution for the lightand power requirements of this building during the construction period.

B. Temporary light shall be based on one (1) 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 square feet of floorarea in the building and sufficient wiring outlets shall be installed to ensure proper lighting in allstairwells and public corridors. All pigtail type sockets required for the temporary general lightingshall be of the left hand screw type and all lamps shall be designed with a left hand screw threadto match the sockets. The temporary wiring and lamps required for this general lighting shall bepaid for under this Section, including the cost of lamp replacements.

C. Install and maintain on each area of renovation, a feeder of sufficient capacity for the requirementsof each floor and covering the entire length of the building and provide sufficient number of outlets,located at convenient points, so that extension cords of not over 50 feet will reach all workrequiring artificial light or power. Subcontractors of all other trades shall furnish their ownextension cords, sockets and lamps as may be required for their work and shall also pay the costof all temporary wiring of Construction Offices and Shanties used by them.

D. The General Contractor shall pay for all temporary wiring required for his Construction Officesand the Architect’s Field Office.

E. All temporary electrical work shall be furnished and installed in conformance with the NationalElectric Code and in accordance with the requirements of the local ordinances.

F. Any temporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required for the building during theconstruction period, other than mentioned above, shall be paid for under this Section.




G. All temporary electric work installed during the construction of this building shall be removed bythis Contractor. This includes all poles, transformers, meters, cables, conduits, panelboards,switches, branch circuits wiring, etc.

H. All temporary lighting required during the construction period shall be in accordance with theOccupational Safety and Health Administration's latest requirements of “Safety and HealthRegulations for Construction”. Provide the minimum lighting intensities in all areas of constructionas required by these regulations.

2.18 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TESTING

A. The Electrical Contractor shall, at the completion of his work and prior to final acceptance by theOwner, perform an infrared line scan of all major electrical equipment connections in the [mainswitchboard, distribution switchboard, power centers] to detect possible equipment highresistance connections.

B. This test shall be conducted with the system/equipment energized and operating under normalload utilizing a “Therm A Trace II” portable infrared scanning instrument and a photographicrecording accessory that uses a Polaroid SX-70 camera to obtain an instant full color hard-copyfor record and quantitative measurement evaluation using clear overlay print directly in degrees

C on a 100C scale with 25C background.

C. After the record measurements and hard-copy photographs have been analyzed, the ElectricalContractor shall retorque any loose or defective connections or components and take a secondrecorded measurement to insure a satisfactory and acceptable installation.

2.19 DEMOLITION

A. All demolition work, as indicated on the drawings, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor.Demolished items shall be removed from the premises by the General Contractor.

B. All existing lighting fixtures, devices, switches, wiring, etc. in renovated areas shall be demolishedunless otherwise noted or indicated on the drawings. Care shall be taken during demolition workto maintain the integrity of the existing raceway systems which may be reused as indicated below.

C. Care shall be taken to maintain existing feeder, branch circuit and auxiliary systems wiringpassing through renovated areas which serves existing equipment or areas which are to remainin operation.

D. Existing conductors and cables run above ceiling, not run in metal raceway and not teflon coated,shall be disconnected, removed and replaced so as to be suitable for air handling plenums, perlocal, state and national codes.

E. Existing feeder, branch circuit and auxiliary system (sound, fire alarm, clock, etc.) raceways,wiring, junction boxes, outlet boxes and pull boxes may be reused wherever possible.

F. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the mechanical integrity of any existingraceway systems that are to be reused. Where the existing raceway system does not meet therequirements indicated in the Electrical Specifications, Paragraph 3.05, WIRING METHODS, theraceway system shall be repaired and/or replaced before new wiring is installed.

G. All existing exposed raceways and raceway components that are not to be reused shall bedemolished. Where existing raceways are embedded in building construction, they shall be cutflush with finished surfaces and abandoned in place. All existing wiring shall be removed.




H. Where required, the existing raceway system shall be extended to new outlet/device locations asindicated on the drawings. In general, all new raceways in finished areas shall be run concealedin building construction, above hung ceilings, in masonry or stud walls, etc. Where required, newraceways run in the existing building may be run exposed. The contractor shall obtain approvalfrom the Architect regarding location and routing of any exposed raceways prior to installingsame.

I. Copies of drawings from which the existing buildings were constructed shall be made availableto the Contractor. Refer to specifications Section 01100 and “Instructions to Bidders” for moreinformation on drawings of the existing conditions.


A General

1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the"equipment" as listed below.

2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint ofnon-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand thestipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component’s center of gravity.

3. The work in this section includes the following:

a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.

b. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.

c. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.

d. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.

4. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as equipmentlocated in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five feet of thefoundation wall. Equipment buried underground are excluded but entry of servicesthrough the foundation walls are included. Equipment referred to below is a partial listof equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this specification)

Battery Chargers Battery Racks Bus Ducts Cable Trays Conduit Generators Light Fixtures Motor Control Centers Panelboards Switchboards Switchgear Transfer Switches Transformers Unit Substations Variable Frequency Drives

5. Life safety systems defined

a. All systems involved with fire protection systems.

b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply includingall generators, transfer switches, transformers, panelboards and all circuits to fireprotection, smoke evacuation and/or emergency lighting systems.




c. All medical and life support systems.

d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including conduit,dampers, etc.

6. Positive Attachment

a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge typeexpansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through boltedconnection to the structure.

7. Transverse Bracing

a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of theconduit, cable tray or busduct.

8. Longitudinal Bracing

a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the conduit, cable trayor busduct.

B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages

1. Internal and/or External Systems

a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu ofthe isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided allconditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide aletter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified perthe section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraintsare in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field offices orrepresentatives are unacceptable.

b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall beborne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with thepreceding.

c. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire unitassembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment andcertification thereof shall be by this section.

C. Submittal Data Requirements

1. Submittals

a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to beutilized detailing compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per"MATERIALS" Section of this specification.

b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedulesshowing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.




2. Shop Drawings

a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of acceptablemethods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.

b. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection databefore condition is accepted for installation.

c. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, sizeand locations for each piece of equipment.

d. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locationsand types of restraints shown for all conduits, bus duct and cable tray. Rodbracing and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated.Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.

e. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation angleallowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at eachallowable installation condition.

3. Seismic Certification and Analysis

a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipmentto the structure. All performance of products (such as; strut, cable, anchors, clips,etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer's data sheetsor certified calculations.

b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown inTable A acting through the equipment’s center of gravity.

c. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be stampedby a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts.

d. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials utilizedfor connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoringmethods, bolt diameter, embedding and/or weld length.

e. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors andOmissions insurance certificate must accompany submittals.Manufacturer’s product liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.

4. Manufacturer’s Responsibility

a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the followingresponsibilities:

(1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.

(2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.

(3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.

(4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insureproper installation and performance of systems.




(5) Certify correctness of installation upon completion.

D. Related Work

1. Housekeeping Pads

a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the Project Structural Engineer.Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by theConcrete Section Contractor.

b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor andsized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance allaround the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.

2. Supplementary Support Steel

a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for allequipment and piping, as required.

3. Attachments

a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads,concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with therequirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.

TABLE A

“G” FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS (SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV > 0.1 < 0.2)

CONDUIT, CABLE TRAY

and BUS DUCT

RIGIDLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

FLEXIBLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

ALL LIFE SAFETY

.25 .40 .40 .60

E. Materials

1. Devices

a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be theproduct of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base manufacturerof these specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptableprovided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design,performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.

2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types

a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, withoutfailure, the "G" forces as determined by the seismic certification andcalculations as described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS"section of these specifications.

b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:




(1) Springs cadmium plated, zinc electroplated or powder coat.

(2) Hardware cadmium plated.

(3) All other metal parts hot spray or hot dipped galvanized.

c. All seismic restraint devices

(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuitisolation devices during normal operating conditions.

(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.

d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited.

3. Seismic Restraint Types

a. TYPE I: Same as Type B. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductile iron)are not acceptable.Mason Ind. TYPE SLR.

b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shallincorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient padlimit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or squaremetal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable.Mason Ind. Type Z-1225/Z-1011.

c. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems.

(1) Vibration isolated systems braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanizedcable rope. Mason Industries Type SCB.

(2) Non-isolated systems braced with structural steel strut type with approvedfastening devices to equipment and structure.Mason Ind. Type SSB.

(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending ofhung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor’ssubmittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum ofthree ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of supportrods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall haveAnchorage Pre-approval “R” number from California OSHPD.Mason Ind. Model “SRC”.

(4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They shallbe special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in placeby bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall haveAnchorage Pre-approval “R” number from California OSHPD.Mason Ind. Model “CCB”.

d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steelcasing.




(1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number fromCalifornia OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic loadratings.Mason Industries Type RC or BR.

e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchorsfor bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge typeexpansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concreteanchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s publishedstandards.

4. Vibration Isolator Types

a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator - Free Standing

(1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8: 1 at rated deflection.

(2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% ofthe rated deflection.

(3) Ductile top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachmentlocking cap screw.

(4) Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside,unless designated otherwise.Mason Industries Type SLF.

b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator - Restrained

(1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features.

(a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventingmetal-to-metal contact.

(b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability.(c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance

under normal operation.(d) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from

California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismicload ratings.Mason Industries Type SLR, SSLFH.

c. TYPE C: NOT USED

d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steelcasing.

(1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number fromCalifornia OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic loadratings.Mason Industries Type RC or BR.




e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator

(1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lowersupport rod from the hanger box.

(a) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated loadwithout failure.Mason Industries Type HD.

F. Installation

1. General

a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance withthe manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.

b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment resultingin stress on equipment connections.

2. Equipment Installation

a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE B at the end of this section.

b. Additional Requirements:

(1) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed withoutchanging equipment elevations.

(2) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, thespring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from theblocks to the isolators.

(3) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there areno short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in alldirections.

(4) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.

(5) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this Section must be properlydoweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure tomeet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators tohousekeeping pads, See D. RELATED WORK.

3. Seismic Restraints

a. Installation

(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the requiredacceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipmentmovement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must bepositively restrained to the structure.




(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently bracedwith TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolated equipment andslack with ½" cable deflection for isolated equipment. Rod bracing shallbe installed as per approved submittals and shop drawings. Equipmentless than 50 lbs. is excluded.

(3) All horizontally suspended cable trays, bus duct and conduit shall useRESTRAINT TYPE III. Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLEC at the end of this Section.

(4) For all trapeze supported piping and conduit, the individual pipes andconduits must be transversely and vertically restrained to the trapezesupport at the designated restraint locations.

(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structuremust not occur. Bracing may occur from:

(a) Flanges of structural beams.(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete

structures.

(6) Conduit Risers

(a) Where conduits pass through cored holes, core diameters to bea maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. Cored holes mustbe packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in otherSections of this Specification and/or State and Local Codes. Noadditional horizontal seismic bracing is required at theselocations.

(b) Conduit risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at eachlevel on top of the slab attached in a seismically approvedmanner for vertical restraint.

(c) Conduit risers in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in aseismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser clampat each floor level on top of, and fastened to the structural steel.The riser clamp and structural steel must be capable ofwithstanding all static and seismic loads.

(7) Ceiling mounted panel light fixtures shall be attached to lay-in ceilings withearthquake clips or other approved means of positive attachment to T-barstructure.

(8) All non-isolated floor or wall-mounted equipment shall use RESTRAINTTYPE III or V.

(9) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic forces,restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units’ center of gravity tosuitably resist “G” forces specified.

(10) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a buildingor two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode




during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, bus duct, conduit, etc. crossing a building expansion joint.

b. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Non-Life Safety Systems:

(1) All conduit less than 2-1/2 inch diameter.

(2) All clevis or trapeze supported conduit, cable tray or bus duct suspendedby hangers with positive attachment to the structure that are less than 12inches in length as measured from the top of the conduit, cable tray orbus duct to the point of attachment to the structure. If the 12 inch limit isexceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is required for therun.

c. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment.

(1) Critical, Standby or Emergency power conduit less than 1 inch nominaldiameter.

4. Inspection

a. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraintdevices, the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner’sexpense to review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will becorrected immediately at the contractor’s expense.

TABLE B

Vibration Isolation & Seismic Restraint Requirements for Electrical Equipment

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

ATTACHMENT POINT

ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE

EQUIPMENT SIZE MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE

General Purpose Transformers - Dry Type All

Floor - - - - - - D 0.30 - -

Ceiling - - - - - - E 0.30 - -

Generators All Floor B 0.75 - - B 1.50 - -

TABLE B NOTES:

GENERAL : ISOL = Isolator, DEFL. = Deflection, All deflections indicated are in inches.




TABLE C SEISMIC BRACING TABLE

EQUIPMENT ON CENTER SPACING (Max) WITHIN EACH CHANGE

OF DIRECTION


CONDUIT 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet

BUS DUCT 30 Feet 60 Feet 4 Feet

CABLE TRAY 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet

2.21 EMERGENCY INVERTER SYSTEM

A. Furnish and install alternating current powered system of power and lighting capable of poweringthe total connected loads volt-amperes, as noted on the Drawings, for a period of ninety (90)minutes.

B. The system shall be approved for application in the State of Massachusetts and installed inaccordance with Article 700 of the National Electrical Code.

C. Utility input supply to the system to be 120 volts AC, 60 Hertz.

D. The system shall consist of a microprocessor controlled PWM bi-directional inverter/batterycharger.

E. The system charger shall be the temperature compensated, constant voltage type providingconstant current, float and equalize charging modes. The charger shall provide ample capacityto bring the system’s battery bank from fully discharged to fully charged condition withinacceptable UL 924 time standards.

F. The invertor utilized by the system shall deliver single phase, sinusoidal emergency power freefrom high voltage surges or frequency drift. Invertor start up and shut down shall be accomplishedby means of a highly reliable automatic transfer module capable of transferring 100% of thesystem’s rated capacity to the connected emergency load within one second of utility feature.Invertor output regulation shall be held to +10% -5% variance from nominal.

G. Emergency power source shall be provided by sealed maintenance-free lead-calciumVRLA/AGM. Battery warranty shall be for one full year with 9 year prorate.

H. The following features shall be provided with the system:

1. System status indicators and momentary test switch.2. One minute inverter re-transfer delay upon return of utility power.3. Field selectable 120 or 277volt.4. UL924 self testing and diagnostic.5. Summary alarm dry form C contacts.6. Electronics warranty: 3 years full parts and labor.7. UL924 listed.8. Red Enclosure.




9. Two (2) 20Amp output circuit breakes.10. Nema 2R drip top.

I. All wiring for the emergency lighting and exit signs shall be installed in conduits and shall be keptindependent of all other normal system branch wiring. All wiring shall be #10 AWG minimum.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to all drawings associated with the project, prior to the installation or roughing-in of theelectrical outlets, conduit and equipment, to determine the exact location of all outlets.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all the electrical equipment shall be madeaccessible, such as junction boxes, pull boxes, panelboards, switches, controls and such otherapparatus as may require maintenance and operation from time to time.

C. After installation, electrical equipment shall be protected to prevent damage during theconstruction period. Openings in conduits and boxes shall be closed to prevent the entrance offoreign materials.

D. Refer to Part 1 - General - for provisions governing work in existing buildings, including removalof existing equipment and advance notice of service interruption. Scope of demolition includesall existing electrical equipment located in the areas being renovated under this contract exceptexisting electrical circuits passing through these areas and supplying electrical equipment in otherareas of the existing building. This includes all existing conduit, wire, wiring devices, lightingfixtures, lighting panels, junction and pull boxes, etc., not being utilized under this contract, unlessotherwise noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shallvisit the site to determine the extent of this work. Used conduit, fittings, and other electricalequipment which has been removed shall not be reused in conjunction with the new work unlessspecifically indicated on the drawings. Removed fixtures shall be turned over to the Owner.

3.2 SLEEVING

A. Conduit and openings shall be laid out in advance to permit their provision in the work. Sleevesand conduit shall be set in forms before concrete is poured. Any extra work required wheresleeves or conduits have been omitted or improperly placed shall be performed at the expenseof the Contractor which made the error or omission.

B. Sleeves provided for conduit between floors and through fire walls, or smoke partitions shall beinstalled with approved packing between sleeves and conduit to provide for fire stop.

C. Where conduits pass through footings, beams, or slabs they shall be provided with waterproofsleeves.

D. Except as required below, sleeves shall be made of galvanized sheet metal to finish flush withbuilding finish lines.

E. Provide acoustic sealer in sleeves between occupied spaces. Sleeves installed in floors of toiletrooms and apparatus rooms shall extend two inches above the finished floor.




3.3 GROUNDING

A. General:

1. New separately derived systems and distribution systems, comprising of transformers,generators, uninterruptible power supplies, switchboards, distribution panels, all electriccircuits, raceways, cabinets, motors, boxes, devices, battery racks and non-currentcarrying metallic parts shall be grounded according to the latest edition of the ElectricalCode.

2. In general, the grounding shall be as specified hereinafter and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Equipment:

1. Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters’ Laboratories (groundingand bonding materials) shall conform to UL Standards and shall carry UL approval forgrounding and bonding applications.

2. Ground rods shall be “Copperweld” or approved equal, not less than 3/4 inch in diameterand eight feet along unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

3. Ground conductors shall be of electrical grade copper except where otherwise indicated.Grounding connectors shall be uninsulated unless otherwise specified.

C. Methods:

1. The ground connections of conductor system shall be made at the main serviceequipment and shall be extended to the point of the metallic water service. Mainconnections shall be made on the street side of any meters and flanged pipe.

2. Connections shall be made readily accessible for inspection. No connections shall bemade concealed in floors or walls.

3. In general, all connections shall be welded where safe to apply except that substantialmechanical connections shall be used where disconnection is required for test and wherecalled for on the Drawings.

4. All permanent grounding connections shall be by thermal welded connections. “Cadweld”or “Thermoweld” processes are approved.

5. All bus connections shall be made suitable clamp type copper connectors.

6. All equipment connections shall be made with clamp type copper connectors, BurndyType GBM or approved equal.

7. Connections to the cold water service pipes shall be with copper pipe clamp.

8. Connectors to CSST gas piping shall be by copper pipe clamp at the CSST connectionnut. Clamps shall not be applied to the tubing itself. When CSST is connected to rigidmetal gas piping that is already bonded, a second connection is not required.

9. Connections to building steel shall be welded.




D. Grounding Electrodes and Grounding Electrode Conductors

1. Grounding electrode conductors shall be as sized on the drawings or per NEC 250,whichever is more stringent.

2. Grounding electrode conductors shall be provided and connected as necessary for acomplete, interconnected, grounding electrode system, including:

a. Building steel – all steel buildings.

b. Domestic water service line – all buildings.

c. Fire protection water service line – all buildings.

d. Concrete encased grounding electrode – all new buildings or if available inrenovated buildings.

e. Ground ring – where shown on the drawings.

f. Rod and pipe electrodes – all buildings.

g. Other listed electrodes – where required.

h. Other local metal underground systems or structures – where available.

E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Conduits or raceways shall not be utilized as grounding conductors.

2. The neutral conductor of any system shall not be utilized as the grounding conductor.

3. In no system shall the conduit act the grounding means. A separate copper groundingconductor shall be installed with all feeders, subfeeders and branch circuit wiringsystems. The grounding conductor shall be type THWN-THHN-XHHW to match that ofthe normal current carrying conductors and size to comply with requirements of theElectrical Code and other governing agencies. The grounding conductor shall beproperly identified with green tape or insulation where visible in boxes or outlets.

4. Metallic piping systems such as water, gas, sewer, etc., shall be made electricallycontinuous by their connections or bonding jumpers. Each metallic pipe system and eachmetallic air duct system shall be bonded to the ground electrode network via a bondingjumper or an equipment grounding conductor where available and where allowed bycodes. A full size bonding jumper shall be provided across all meters.

5. Bonding jumpers to metallic piping systems shall be number 6 AWG, solid copper,minimum. Bonding jumper size across water meters shall match the grounding electrodeconductor size.

F. Equipment Grounding:

1. The frames of all electrical equipment including motors, panels, and lighting fixtures shallbe grounded to the equipment grounding conductor.




2. The equipment grounding conductor shall originate only at a point of supply such as atransformer or at a point where the system is grounded.

3. The equipment grounding conductor shall be run in the same raceway as the power leadsfeeding the equipment unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

4. The extra pole provided on all electrical outlets shall be grounded to the equipmentgrounding conductor.

5. Raceways equipped with friction grounds shall have the paint removed from the areas ofcontact.

6. Each panelboard shall be equipped with an insulated terminal strip for neutral conductorsand an equipment grounding stud or bus bonded to the panel case, each with sufficientterminals for the number of circuits, except as qualified for 3 phase balanced loads. Theequipment ground stud or bus shall be connected directly to ground via a greengrounding conductor. The point of grounding shall be at the point of supply which maybe distribution load center, the secondary of a lighting transformer, et al.

7. Conduit or raceways, where terminated at boxes, cabinets and panelboards by meansof locknuts and bushings, shall be terminated with double locknuts for all voltages.Enclosure panels at which conduit are terminated shall be securely bonded to the frameof the enclosure by means of bonding jumpers or by means of welding in those caseswhere the panels need not be removable.

8. Where conduits are stubbed up out of the floor into a panel with no bottom, groundingbushings shall be used. The ground conductor connecting the bushings to the groundstub on the panel shall be sized per Electrical Code Table 250.122.

9. Secondary neutral of all polyphase or center-tapped lighting and power transformersshall be connected directly to the ground. The connection at the primary point of supply,run in the same raceway as the supply leads. The secondary neutral shall be fullcapacity, full insulated conductor extended to insulated neutral terminal shall beconnected to the strips in the panelboard. All branch circuit neutral strips in thepanelboards.

10. Motor frames shall be grounded by the equipment grounding conductor run in the sameraceway as the power leads.

3.4 WIRING METHODS

A. Generally, unless specified below and approved by the authorities having jurisdiction, wiring shallconsist of insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.

B. Electrical metallic conduit may be used as permitted by State or Local Codes for feeders, branchcircuits, signal instrumentation and control circuits.

1. EMT may be used as permitted in ceiling or floor cavity spaces, void spaces of masonrywalls, in equipment rooms, in mechanical chases, in electrical chases, in closets, inexposed locations 8 feet above finished floor and where not subject to accidental damageor abuse. Where subject to accidental damage or abuse, install in rigid steel conduit orintermediate metal conduit.

2. Set screw connectors shall be galvanized steel, white metal is not acceptable.




C. Metal clad cable with a full size, insulated, separate ground wire may be used as permitted bystate and local codes for branch circuit wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studdedpartitions.

D. Flexible metal conduit of short lengths (maximum 18 inch) shall be provided at all motors andequipment subject to vibration or movement. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wetlocations.

E. All raceways shall be properly fastened in accordance with the applicable Articles of the ElectricalCode. Spacing between supports shall not exceed 7 feet unless specifically approved by theArchitect. Conduit installed above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the buildingstructure. Conduit supports fastened to the roof decking will not be allowed.

F. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight. Bends oroffsets shall be made with standard conduit ells; field bends shall be made with an approvedbender or hickey. Pipe threads cut in the field for exterior or underground use shall be paintedwith red lead or a similar approved substance before being made up.

G. Conduit terminals at cabinets and boxes shall be rigidly secured with locknuts and bushings asrequired by the Electrical Code and local authorities. On all conduit 1-1/4 inch trade size andlarger, bushings shall be insulated with double locknut.

H. Conduit fittings shall be galvanized treated or cadmium plated. Rigid steel conduit andintermediate metal conduit shall use only threaded connections. Steel supports or racks shall begalvanized steel channel and fittings, by Unistrut, Steel City or approved equal.

I. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch. Other sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings orrequired by the Electrical Code for number and size of conductors installed. No combining ofbranch circuit wiring beyond three phase wires and neutral wire will be allowed.

J. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically. The exact routing and means of support shall bedetermined in the field. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to thebuilding walls, structural members or architectural features.

K. All conduit ends shall be plugged or capped as soon as they are installed to prevent entrance ofmoisture or other debris during construction. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until theconduit system is complete in all details. All spare conduits shall have a nylon pull line inserted.

L. Expansion fittings shall be furnished and installed wherever building expansion joints occur.Expansion joints shall be provided for non-metallic conduit to compensate for thermal expansionand contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit, fittings and outlet boxessupported on walls, columns or steel work shall be held in place by caulking anchors,power-driven studs, expansion shields, beam clamps or concrete inserts. Nails or screws usedin conjunction with wood plugs in lieu of toggle or expansion bolts will not be accepted.

M. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in an approved manner, usingadapters or other materials and methods recommended or the purpose by the conduitmanufacturers.

N. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeders or branches except at outlets or accessiblejunction boxes. Splices in wire #8 AWG and smaller shall be standard pigtail, made mechanicallytight.




O. Wire #6 AWG and larger shall be connected to panels and apparatus by means of approved lugsor connectors. Connectors shall be mechanical type, sufficiently large to enclose all strands ofthe conductor and be securely fastened. All solderless connections and lugs shall be by Trego,Inc., Burndy, T&B or approved equal.

P. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner with mechanical type devices of a designthat will not cause separation of the cable strands or distortion of the cable. Joints and splicesshall be covered with good grade of splicing compound and plastic tape so as to form theequivalent of original insulation and covering.

Q. Wire and cable shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid mechanical injury tothe conductor, insulation, or covering.

R. All raceways shall be carefully cleaned, blown and swabbed dry inside before installation of wiresand cables. The Architect reserves the right to have all wiring in a raceway or raceways removedfor inspection should the presence of moisture or dirt be suspected in same at no additionalexpense to the Architect. If moisture or dirt is found in the raceway system during the inspectionof same, it shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried to the complete satisfaction of the Owner at noadditional expense to the Owner.

S. All vertical risers for lighting, power and auxiliary systems passing through floor slabs shall beproperly supported at each floor level.

T. Wiring shall not be pulled into a raceway system until it is mechanically complete in all details.The ends of the raceway shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust, moisture, or mortar, or plasterwhile building is under the process of construction.

3.5 WIRE AND CABLES

A. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner and be at least equivalent electricallyand mechanically to the conductor itself. Whenever the conductors is bared for splicing, it shallbe taped with a good grade of rubber splicing compound and friction or plastic tape so as to format least the equivalent of the original insulation and covering.

B. Splices and taps in wires #8 and larger shall be made with Burndy, Anderson or Kearneysolderless connectors designed for the purpose. The splices and taps shall be taped withapproved tapes providing insulation not less than that of the conductor. Splices shall bemechanically and electrically secure.

C. Pressure connectors with “wrap caps” or insulating caps of a type approved by the local inspectingauthorities may be used by joints on branch circuits with conductor sizes up to and including #10AWG. Connectors shall be manufactured by Buchanan, Eagle, Ideal, or approved equal.

D. Insulating compounds, unless indicated or specified otherwise, for cable joints, boxes, terminalsand other similar items, shall have bituminous base and shall be free from granular content,creosote alkali, acid, free of sulphur and water.

E. Conductors or cables shall not be pulled into the raceway systems until all work which couldcause injury to the conductors or insulation has been completed. A lubricant manufactured byIdeal, General Electric, Dow Corning or approval equal, shall be used when necessary for thepulling of conductors or cables into the raceway systems except that no pulling compound shallbe used for the isolated power system circuits.




F. Wires and cables shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid kinks, twists, andmechanical injury to the conductor, insulation or covering.

G. Where conductors are to be connected directly to devices with the use of terminal screws, suchas lighting switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices or screw type terminations the wiresshall be formed into a loop to fit around the screws in a clockwise direction so as to be tightlylocked in place with same.

H. At no time shall more than one (1) conductor terminate under or on terminal screw.

3.6 PHASING AND COLOR CODING

A. The insulation or covering of each wire or cable shall be color coded so as to provide for circuitidentification as specified below.

120/208 Volt Phase 277/480 Volt

Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green w/yellow trace

B. Color coding shall be achieved by one (1) of the following methods:

1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one (1) of thefollowing methods:

a. Color compounds.

b. Colored coatings.

2. When limited quantities of cable are involved, the Architect may permit the use of thefollowing methods in lieu of cable manufacturer’s color coding. Each cable must becoded at all terminal points, in all manholes, boxes or other similar enclosures by:

a. Spiral application of 3/4 inch wide, colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape,half-lapped for a distance of not less than 6 inches. To prevent unwinding, the lasttwo (2) wraps of taps shall be applied with no tension. The tape shall be appliedso as not to obliterate identification markings on the cable.

b. Application of three (3) 3/16 inch wide colored, fungus inert, self-extinguishing,self-locking, nylon cable ties spaced 3 inches apart. The ties shall be snuglyapplied with a special tool or pliers, and any excess removed.

C. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project.

D. Provide an engraved placard at each panelboard describing the phasing and color codingconvention for conductors originating at the panelboard.

E. In general, building load centers and panelboards shall be phased “A”, “B”, “C”, either top tobottom or left to right. The neutral, although it may be in different locations for different equipment,shall be identified.




F. Transformers in all systems shall be connected so that:

1. “A” Phase is terminated at “H1” connection.

2. “B” Phase is terminated at “H2” connection.

3. “C” Phase is terminated at “H3” connection.

4. “X1” connection shall be the “A” Phase.

5. “X2” connection shall be the “B” Phase.

6. “X3” connection shall be the “C” Phase.

G. Submit for approval all color coding, phase identification and positioning schemes that he intendsto use at all terminations, etc., before actual connections are made.

H. In the event that electrical conflicts arise in the field, they shall be referred to the Architectimmediately before the Contractor proceeds with the work. Physical orientation or placement ofconductors shall be secondary to the electrical consistency, integrity and continuity.

I. This Contractor shall be instructed by the Architect or the Utility Company as to the phaseidentification to make at the point of connection with the Utility Company supply and shallthereafter be responsible to carry out and maintain this consistent system of color coding, phaseidentification and positioning as herein specified or shown on the Drawings.

3.7 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for the properinstallation of all components of the electrical system.

B. The locations of all wall switch boxes shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings beforeinstallation of same. All switch boxes, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, shallbe opposite the hinged side of the door for all single doors.

C. Locations of outlets shown on Drawings are approximate. The Electrical Contractor shall studythe Building Plans in relating to the spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so thatreceptacles, switches, lighting fixtures devices or other electrical components are symmetricallylocated and mounted in or on the walls, ceiling and floor.

D. Outlet, junction or pull boxes, shown on the Drawings, that interfere with the installation ofmechanical equipment, structural or architectural features or that will be inaccessible due to thework of other trades shall be relocated accordingly as a part of construction conditionsencountered during the course of the construction program at no cost to the Owner.

E. All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall besupported by bar hangers in frame construction or shall be fastened directly with wood screws onwood, bolts with expansion shields on concrete or brick toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, andmachine screws or welded threaded studs on metal. Threaded studs of the proper type andholding capacity driven in by a power charge and provided with lock washers and nuts areacceptable for mounting of boxes on solid concrete walls or slabs. Preset inserts of the propertype and holding capacity shall be used in overhead slab construction wherever possible for thesupport of pull and junction boxes.




F. Feeders passing through pull or junction boxes shall be individually grouped and bound withty-raps. The feeders in each pull or junction box shall be properly tagged to clearly indicate theirelectrical characteristics, circuit number and panel designation. Cables shall be supported onsuitable racks within the boxes and arranged in an orderly manner.

3.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailedotherwise on the Electrical Drawings or Architectural Drawings. Notes or details on theArchitectural Drawings pertaining to mounting heights or locations of electrical equipment shallsupersede those noted below or detailed on the Electrical Drawings. If the mounting height ofany electrical component is questionable, obtain a clarification from the Architect beforeinstallation. All mounting heights shall comply with the Federal ADA (Americans with DisabilitiesAct) and the State of Massachusetts Publication 521 CMR: Architectural Barriers Board for(Buildings, Facilities, etc. for the Visually and Physically Handicapped).

1. Duplex Convenience Outlets, and Telephone Outlets: 18 inches (minimum) abovefinished floor to centerline unless noted by symbol, note or dimension on the Drawings.

2. Light Switches: 4’-0” (maximum) above finished floor to centerline.

3. Panelboards: 6’-6” (maximum) to top breaker above finished floor.

4. Disconnect switches, service switches and individually mounted starters and contactorsfor the control, operation or isolation of motorized equipment, electric heating units andthe panelboards 5’-0” minimum on the Drawings or as required to suite field installationconditions and with permission of the Architect.

5. Equipment located in lobbies shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or asdirected by the Architect.

6. Interior wall brackets shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or as directed bythe Architect.

B. All feeder, branch circuit or auxiliary system wiring passing through pull boxes or being made upin panels, distribution panels and auxiliary system terminal cabinets shall be properly grouped,bound and tied together in a neat and orderly manner, keeping with the highest standards of thetrade, with ty-raps.

C. Branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring shall be peeled out of the wiring gutters of the terminalcabinets and panels at 90 degrees to breakers and terminal lugs for connections to same.

D. All wall mounted duplex convenience and power receptacles shall be mounted vertically with thegrounding posts at the top of the device.

E. Provide information to the Contractor, for all required access panels in walls, ceilings and floors,for access to concealed electrical equipment, pull/junction boxes and fittings. The exact sizesand physical locations shall be to suit accessibility and construction conditions.

F. The exact location and mounting heights of all lighting fixtures located in mechanical equipmentspaces shall be coordinate in the field with the other Contractors, before installation of same, soas to avoid interference with ducts, piping and other mechanical equipment.




G. Reflected Ceiling Plans for any and all areas prepared by the Architect showing the location oflighting fixtures shall take precedence over the locations of same shown on the Lighting Plans ofthis Contract set of Electrical Drawings. Install the lighting fixtures in any given area to agree withthe Architect’s Reflected Ceiling Plans. Where quantities of light fixtures shown on theArchitectural Drawings deviate from those shown on Electrical Drawings, the Contractor shallnotify Architect.

H. Furnish and install all power and control and alarm wiring to include connections for plumbing andfire protection systems equipment to be wired and connected by the Electrical Contractor.

I. Obtain from Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection SpecificationSections complete wiring and connection diagrams of all equipment which is to be wired andconnected before installing raceways or wiring for same.

3.9 MOTORS AND CONTROLS

A. Motors, in general, will be furnished and installed under Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning,Plumbing and Fire Protection Sections unless specifically called out otherwise.

B. Starters and combination starters shall, in general, be furnished under the Heating, Ventilatingand Air Conditioning Section, but installed and wired under the Electrical Section. Disconnectswitches, except as part of packaged units, shall be furnished and installed under the ElectricalSection.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be ratedfor operation on 480 volts, three-phase, 60 hertz. All other motors shall be rated for operation on120 volts, single-phase, 60 hertz.

D. Manual motor starters shall be push-button or toggle operated with thermal overload protectionin each phase and mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

E. Each motor shall be provided with a disconnecting means under this Section of the specificationswhere required by the Electrical Code, even though not indicated. A circuit breaker or horsepowerrated switch in a panelboard will be acceptable as a disconnecting means if located within sightof the motor controller. For single-phase motors, a single or double pole tumbler or snap switch,rated only for alternating current, will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, providedthat the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the rating of the controlledequipment. Switches shall be horsepower rated and shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.

F. Each motor controller and disconnect switch or separately enclosed circuit breaker shall beidentified as to the equipment which it serves.

G. Motor starters shall be mounted on a new 3/4 inch exterior grade plywood mounting boardfinished to match starter enclosures. These shall be mounted at 60 inches above finished flooron solid walls or columns in spaces not normally occupied. Obtain approval of starter locationsfrom the Architect.

H. Carefully check electrical connections and sizing of motor circuit protection and prevent damageto motors and equipment due to incorrect direction of rotation caused by faulty electricalconnections or incorrectly sized circuit protection.

I. Final connection to all motors shall be made with flexible conduit (minimum 16 inch long) withgreen ground wire installed.




3.10 COORDINATION WITH MECHANICAL WORK

A. All safety disconnect switches shown on the electrical drawings shall be furnished, installed andpower wired under this Section. Safety disconnect switches for mechanical equipment indicatedon the electrical drawings are sized in accordance with the requirements for a representativemanufacturer’s make and model suitable for the design requirements. The equipment ultimatelypurchased may vary from these ratings. Verify voltage and current ratings of all motor drivenmechanical equipment as purchased to confirm the correct electrical ratings for safety disconnectswitches and necessary overcurrent devices prior to the procurement of such items andsubmission of shop drawings.

B. It is the intent that all power wiring including disconnecting devices be accomplished under thisSection and all control devices under Heating, Ventilating, Air and Air Conditioning and PlumbingSections. All motor starters and contactors for the heating, ventilating, air conditioning andplumbing equipment shall be furnished under their respective Sections and installed and powerwired under this Section.

C. It is not the intent of the Plans and Specifications to cover all details of the wiring requirements ofthe mechanical systems, the type of information to be determined will include motor rotation,individual fuse sizes, exclusive for a particular manufacturer of system, equipment mounting, etc.The intent is to show and/or describe major portions of the system together with a systemdescription of operation, to indicate feeder size and branch circuit protection, starter size, locationof equipment and circuit origination.

3.11 BUILDING RELATED SYSTEMS

A. Furnish and install all required over current protection, disconnect and/or safety switches, motorcontrols, except as specifically noted, conduit, wire, boxes, fittings, wiring and accessories as maybe required for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning and plumbing systems as shown onthe Drawings and herein specified.

B. Determine by thorough investigation of all applicable Contract Plans and Specifications, thepower and control requirements of the heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbingequipment shown on the Plans and/or called for in the Specifications.

C. The entire system shall be complete and operable in every respect to the intent of the Plans andSpecifications. The installation shall conform to all Local, State and National Codes, ordinancesand requirements.

D. It is not the intent of the Plans and Specifications to cover all details of the wiring requirements forthe mechanical systems, the type of information to be determined will include motor rotation,motor interlocking, individual fuse sizes, control wiring, exclusive for a particular manufacturer ofsystem, equipment mounting, etc. The intent is to show and/or describe major portions of thesystem together with a system description of operation, to indicate feeder size and branch circuitprotection, starter size, electrical interlocks, location of equipment and control point and circuitorigination.

3.12 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish and install all supplementary steel, channels and supports required for the properinstallation, mounting and support of all lighting fixtures and electrical equipment to be installedunder this Contract, as required.




B. All supplementary steel, channels and supports shall be furnished, installed and secured with allfittings, support rods and appurtenances required for a complete support or mounting system.

C. Supplementary steel and channels shall be firmly connected to the building construction in amanner approved by the Architect prior to the installation of same. Submit to the Architect, viathe Contractor, the locations proposed for using supplementary steel and channels for the supportof equipment, fixtures and raceways. The submittal shall indicate the mounting methods, sizeand details of the supports, channels and steel; it shall indicate also that weight which thesupports, channels and supplementary steel is to carry.

D. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be of sufficientstrength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the channel andsupplementary steel manufacturer’s requirements for loading.

E. All supplementary steel and channels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallelto the walls, floor and ceiling construction. All turns shall be made with 90 degrees and 45degrees fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation conditions.

F. All supplementary steel, channels, supports, and fittings, shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories,Incorporated, approved, be galvanized steel and be manufactured by Steel City, Unistrut,Power-Strut, T. J. Cope, Chalfant or approved equal.

3.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes,standards or authorities having jurisdiction. An approved independent electrical testing companyshall conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and allauthorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least 48 hours prior to testing orinspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.

B. Test reports shall be submitted for approval and shall include certification by the testing companythat each piece of equipment tested is suitable for energization or indicate corrective actionrequired. Equipment shall be re-tested upon correction of deficiencies.

C. For products where medium voltage equipment and/or conductors are included in the scope,submit copies of the approved test reports to the AHJ prior to equipment energization inaccordance with NEC 110.41. The approved test report shall include verification that all protectivedevices have been set in accordance with the coordination study and that all equipment is insatisfactory condition for energization in accordance with the testing requirements and thereferenced NETA standards.

D. Prior to the date of acceptance, furnish the Architect with certificates of testing and inspection forall Electrical systems indicating the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction and conformancewith all requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical andelectrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and groundof not less than the values recommended by the manufacturers.

F. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections.

G. Lighting fixtures shall be tested with specified lamps in place for not less than ten hours; thefixtures may be checked in sections.




H. Testing recommended by manufacturers shall be required; this requirement may be waived bythe Architect. As a minimum, the contractor shall include testing per the ANSI approvedANSI/NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment andSystems, 2009 Edition (ANSI/NETA ATS-2009). The testing scope shall include all testsidentified in the following sections of the ANSI/NETA ATS-2009 where they are applicable to theequipment to be installed under the Contract.

NETA Section Equipment Include Optional Tests

7.3.2 Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum No

7.13 Grounding Systems

I. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be correctedpromptly and retested. Defective material shall be replaced at no additional expense to theOwner.

J. Provide all temporary connections, necessary testing equipment, labor and materials, requiredfor the testing of the systems and equipment. All systems shall be prepared for testing andprotected from damage. The cost of all tests shall be included in the contract price.

K. Verify and correct as necessary the following: voltages, tap settings, trip settings, and phasingon all equipment from the secondary distribution system to points of utilization. Secondaryvoltages shall be tested at the bus in the main switchboard, at panelboards, and at such otherlocations on the distribution systems as necessary. Secondary voltages shall be tested underno-load and full-load conditions.

L. Measure minimum and maximum voltages, and voltage between phase wires and neutral, andimmediately deliver to the Architect a report on all voltage measurements.

3.14 PAINTING

A. All equipment installed under this Section shall have as a minimum a shop coat of non-lead graypaint. Finish painting where required shall be done under other Sections.

3.15 CLEANING UP

A. Upon completion of all installation, lamping, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portionsof the electrical installation and completely remove all exposed labels, markings, and foreignmaterial.

B. The interior of all boxes and cabinets shall be left clean; exposed surfaces shall be cleaned andplated surfaces polished.

C. Repair damage to finish surfaces resulting from work under this section.

D. Remove material and equipment from areas of work and storage areas.

End of Section

\\fs3\g_drive\projects\2017-boston\m1052-016.00\specifications\electrical\e spec - 100% cd - 10-24-18.docx-



FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - page i of i

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE ALARM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS ....................................................................................... 1 1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES .................................................................................. 2 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION ........................................................................................................... 2 1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES ................................................. 2 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................ 3 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 3 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS ............................................................................ 4 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY .................................................................................. 4 1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 5 1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS ................................................................................. 5 1.13 GUARANTEE ................................................................................................................................... 6 1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK ......................................................... 6 1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL ..................................................................................................... 6 1.16 REMOVAL WORK ........................................................................................................................... 6 1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ........................................................................................................ 7 1.18 FINAL COMPLETION ...................................................................................................................... 7 1.19 REOBSERVATION .......................................................................................................................... 7 1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................. 7 1.21 IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................. 8 1.22 ASBESTOS REMOVAL ................................................................................................................... 8 1.23 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................................................................. 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 9 2.2 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS ........................................................................................................... 9 2.3 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS ........................................................... 9 2.4 WIREWAYS ................................................................................................................................... 10 2.5 WIRE AND CABLE ........................................................................................................................ 10 2.6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – EXTENSION ......................................................................................... 12 2.7 DEMOLITION ................................................................................................................................. 17 2.8 FIRE STOPPING ........................................................................................................................... 18 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ............................................................... 18

PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 27

3.1 SLEEVING ..................................................................................................................................... 27 3.2 GROUNDING ................................................................................................................................. 27 3.3 WIRING METHODS ....................................................................................................................... 28 3.4 WIRE AND CABLES ...................................................................................................................... 29 3.5 COLOR CODING ........................................................................................................................... 30 3.6 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ..................................................................................... 30


FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - page ii of ii

3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................ 31 3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS .......................................................... 32 3.9 TESTING AND INSPECTION ........................................................................................................ 32 3.10 PAINTING ...................................................................................................................................... 33 3.11 CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................................... 33


FIRE ALARM 28 31 00 - page 1 of 1

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division

1, General Requirements, as they apply to work specified in this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which effect work of this Section

whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades effecting or effected by work of this Section.

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and

supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as required by the drawings and details and as specified herein.

B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the

Electrical Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein under to include the following items:

1. Raceway Systems. 2. Wireways. 3. Outlets and Pull Boxes. 4. Wire and Cable. 5. Extension of Existing Fire Alarm System. 6. Alarm wiring to include connections for heating, ventilating and air conditioning system

equipment, elevator controller and smoke exhaust system. 7. Power, control and alarm wiring to include connections for the Fire Protection Systems

Equipment shall be wired and connected by the Electrical Contractor. 8. Supplementary Steel, Channel and Supports. 9. Supervision and approval of Excavation and Backfilling for Fire Alarm Work. 10. Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals for Fire Alarm Equipment. 11. Nameplates, Labels and Tags. 12. Testing. 13. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other

Sections: 1. Cutting and Patching. 2. Temporary Water, Heat and Fire Protection. 3. Temporary Light and Power. 4. Excavation and Backfill. 5. Foundations and Trenching.



6. Concrete Bases for Equipment. 7. Flashing and Caulking. 8. Painting. 9. Plumbing. 10. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 11. Electrical. 12. All automatic temperature control system components, wiring and interlock wiring

associated with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system will be furnished, mounted, wired and connected by the HVAC Contractor.

13. Mounting of electrical equipment having mechanical connections. Refer to work involving mechanical trades.

14. Installation, wiring and connecting of automatic temperature controls unless otherwise noted or specified.

1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all-applicable Codes, Local

and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations. B. The Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between

the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc. C. In the event of a conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply. D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable: 1. Massachusetts State Building Code, CMR 780 9th Edition 2. International Building Code 2015 Edition 3. National Electric Code (NEC), as amended by CMR 527, CH. 12 4. All requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction 5. National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, 2013 Edition. 6. Massachusetts Architectural Access Board, CMR 521 7. Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations, CMR 527 8. Massachusetts Elevator Regulations, CMR 524 9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 10. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). 11. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce (CS). 12. Factory Mutual (FM). 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 14. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.5 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment

that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project.

1.6 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location

of piping, conduit and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and accessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.



B. To carry out the intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete, approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge.

C. Where requirements of the plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most stringent

requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of the work, which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer’s attention for direction as to what is provided.

D. Final location of system components, accessories and control devices, etc. shall be coordinated

with the Architectural Plans. Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.

E. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items (i.e., duct smoke

detectors), they shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not reported, the Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and operable system.

F. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades. G. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus

and give information in advance to building openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.

H. Routing and locations of pipes, conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the

work with interferences anticipated and encountered. The Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall determine the exact routing and location of his/her systems prior to fabrication and/or installation of any system component.

I. All distribution systems, which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and

condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to the location of pipes, ducts and equipment and install work to avoid interferences.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare

Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment and lines.

B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum or

compatible system. A disc and one (1) set of reproducibles (all-trade composite) shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = 1’-0” scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that

scale or larger, plans and sections of Electrical Rooms. D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the other trades (Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical and Fire Alarm) so they can indicate their work.

E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS



A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders, instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate the location, size, type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.

B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the

work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are accurate and up-to-date.

C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked up prints for review and comment.

After review and comment, these marked up prints shall be used in the preparation of the Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the basis of the Architect/Engineer’s final comments. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducibles and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2014 minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the completed installation. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disks properly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.

D. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and/or CAD disks properly titled and dated

to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices, detailed shop drawings bearing the stamp of the

Fire Alarm Contractor’s Registered Engineer, riser diagrams, and any other information relating to the work under this Section that is required by the Authorities to obtain a permit. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building.

B. The Fire Alarm Contract Drawings can be made available to the Fire Alarm contractor by the

Engineer to assist the Contractor with the permitting process. A nominal fee of $250 per sheet up to a maximum fee of $2500 will be charged to the Fire Alarm contractor for the Drawings. The cost shall be paid solely by the Fire Alarm contractor, and shall be included as part of this contract. This expense shall not be billed to the Owner.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has been

tested and accepted. B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials

and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment. C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect work

and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and make good damage thus caused.



1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for requirements, all of which shall

be included as part of this Specification. B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop drawings.

All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete Specifications, including type of materials, electrical characteristics, capacities, performance and power requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted including wiring diagram shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project. All extraneous material shall be deleted.

C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the

requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the shop drawing review.

D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect. Such

certification shall be made by a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.

E. It is intended that shop drawing data be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the shop

drawing is returned marked “Resubmit” only one (1) additional submission will be permitted. F. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer’s

office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered when scheduling the work.

G. The shop drawings and manufacturer’s data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in

advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary. No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.

H. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as

required, without invalidating the manufacturer’s warranty, so that it can be installed through regular window, door, and/or louver openings.

1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions regarding substitution of

materials as it relates to this project. B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for

consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term “approved equal” appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process.

C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear

the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.



1.13 GUARANTEE A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for requirements, all of which shall

be included as part of this Specification. B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all

defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing with the date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems resulting from such failures.

C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee

period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced.

1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas, which will be occupied during the

construction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made only upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.

B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this

schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project. 1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from the

manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition.

1.16 REMOVAL WORK A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of service

in the adjoining buildings. B. All existing equipment indicated to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.

All existing equipment indicated to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removed from the premises.

C. Remove all abandoned conduit and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilings

or walls are removed all abandoned duct, conduit and piping shall be removed and ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing ceilings shall remain and ends capped and marked abandoned.



1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is

substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items remaining to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work is not substantially complete, he will

promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.

C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial

completion. D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a

Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions. 1.18 FINAL COMPLETION A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the

General Contractor written certification that: 1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies

listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully

operational. 5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review. B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly suspend

his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor. C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of

final completion. D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a

second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor listing observed deficiencies.

E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals. 1.19 REOBSERVATION A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer,

due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor’s claims on initial Architect and/or Engineer’s review for Substantial Completion, or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect and/or his Engineer’s compensation for additional services from final payment to Subcontractor.

1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Furnish in accordance with DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, operating and

maintenance manuals and forward to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner.



B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer’s catalogs, other similar data including the

necessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelated material shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained. The material shall be bound in notebook form and indexed.

C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s representative and service

company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for each item of equipment can be readily obtained.

D. Training: The Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a

period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the Owner's designated personnel on the operation and routine maintenance of the system.

1.21 IDENTIFICATION A. All equipment shall be properly identified by means of clear and concise nameplates, tags, signs

or directories. B. Provide tags identifying each cable, wire or group of wire comprising a circuit in all control panels,

annunciators, pull boxes, troughs and terminal boxes through which such wires run and at equipment at which they terminate. Tags shall be flameproof linen fiber or pressure sensitive types. The circuit of feeder designation shall be as approved by the Architect.

C. Provide tags indicating address and loop number of each detector, module etc. on the device. D. Provide three (3) ply black bake-lite nameplates with 1/4 inch high engraved white letters on the

following equipment. Wording of the nameplates shall be in conformance with the respective schedules and notes on the Drawings.

1. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s), Notification Power Extender Panels and Fire Alarm Terminal

Cabinets: Nameplates shall be provided on the exterior of each panel and terminal cabinet door identifying same. Nameplates shall read as indicated on the Drawings and shall be mounted on the exterior of the panel and terminal cabinet doors 1/3 of the way down from the top of same.

2. Nameplates shall be provided for each remote operating station, disconnect switch,

starter, and pilot light and control device identifying the units controlled or protected. 1.22 ASBESTOS REMOVAL A. Should this Subcontractor or any of its Sub-Subcontractors encounter any asbestos and/or

asbestos related products or materials (the “asbestos materials”) during the performance of its work, this Subcontractor shall stop work immediately and so inform the General Contractor and the Owner of the presence of asbestos.




A. Installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, accessories and components shall be in accordance with the seismic requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Ninth Edition (9th Edition). Refer to Part 2 of the Specifications for further information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products used on this project shall be new and conform, unless otherwise specifically noted,

to applicable standards as listed in CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES in Part 1 and be approved for the service and application.

2.2 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and

specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or approved equal.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and

specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Triangle/PWC, Inc., or approved equal.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and

specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel Corp., Triangle/PWC, Inc., and Wheatland Tube Co.

D. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized, spiral wrapped metallic conduit (Greenfield) or liquid-tight

flexible metal conduit as herein specified for specific equipment. 2.3 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS A. Furnish and install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for

the proper installation of all components of the Fire Alarm System. B. Outlet boxes shall, in general, be as follows: 1. Exposed, surface and pendant mounted outlet boxes or outlet boxes installed in normally

wet locations shall be of the cast metal type with threaded hubs. 2. Recessed outlet boxes for dry locations shall be of the pressed sheet steel, zinc coated,

cadmium plated type. 3. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required

by structural conditions and are especially approved by the Architect. 4. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inch octagonal except that

smaller boxes may be used where required by the particular fixture to be installed. Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate outlet boxes where required by the fixture terminal temperature requirements.

5. Outlet boxes for general use, flush mounted in concrete work and walls in normally dry

locations, shall be manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco or approved equal.



6. Outlet boxes for normally wet locations and surface or pendent mounted in all locations, shall be of the proper cast metal type and shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Red Dot, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.

C. Pull and junction boxes shall, in general, be as follows: 1. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet metal, of

not less than minimum size required by the Electrical Code or other applicable Specification "Standards" and shall be furnished with screw fastened covers. Boxes exceeding 48 inches in any direction shall be properly reinforced with angle iron stiffeners.

2. Pull and junction boxes to be installed in normally wet location areas shall be of the cast

type with threaded hub and gasketed cover plate. The cast pull and junction boxes shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.

D. Fittings shall, in general, be as follows: 1. Adequate expansion fittings shall be used where crossing building expansion joints.

Expansion fitting shall have grounding jumpers, and shall be manufactured by O.Z., Inc. or approved equal.

2. Sleeves and openings through fire-rated floors and walls in which cable or conduit pass

shall be sealed by UL Classified fire-stop fittings with elastomeric rings to seal off cold smoke and toxic fumes. Fittings shall have heat-activated intumescent material which expands to fill the voids left by destroyed cable insulation. Fire-stop devices shall be O.Z./Gedney Fire-Seal fittings, with UL-classified hourly fire ratings equal to the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the cables or conduit pass. Mineral wool or oakum stuffed in the penetration shall not be employed.

E. All fire alarm outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted RED. 2.4 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be of sheet steel with hinged spring latched covers, galvanized or painted to

protect against corrosion conforming to industry standards and specifications. All necessary bends, couplings, connectors, etc., shall be provided.

B. Wireway shall be suitable for lay in conductors with connector covers permanently attached so

that removal is not necessary to utilize lay in feature. C. Interior parts shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and burrs. D. Wireways shall be as manufactured by Square D Co. or approved equal. 2.5 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable shall have copper conductors. Copper wires shall be soft drawn, annealed, 98

percent conductivity, and insulated for 600 volts and shall be color-coded as specified below: 120/208 Volts Phase Black A Red B



Blue C White Neutral Green Ground B. Wire sizes #14 through #6 AWG shall be type THHN-THWN. Conductors installed in conduit

lines below grade shall be type USE. C. Fire-protective signaling wiring shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code, Article 760, Fire

Prevention Systems for Building Fire Alarm Systems, and as indicated on the Drawings. All wires for the local fire alarm system shall be color-coded and sized as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system, and shall be installed as recommended in drawings. The combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables installed in conduit shall not exceed the percentage of fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9 of the Electrical Code.

D. Minimum wire size shall be no. 12 AWG for power and no. 14 AWG for control wiring. 120-volt

branch circuits of more than 100 feet from center of load to panel shall be no. 10 AWG. E. All circuit phases shall be color coded at terminations, splices, and pull boxes with UL-listed

electrical plastic vinyl tape such as 3M Scotch Brand No. 35 color-coding tape. F. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and lower (105°C rated and below), sizes #18 through

#6 AWG, solid or stranded, shall be screw-on type pressure connectors (of the "SCOTCHLOK" type) incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated spring, insulated with a vinyl jacket having a flexible skirt. Connectors for larger size wires shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co. or approved equal. Connectors shall be UL-listed for use at 600 volts.

G. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and below used in manholes and hand-holes shall be

of the waterproof type and shall be made with 3M Scotch kit waterproof direct burial splice connectors.

H. Flexible metal clad (MC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armor

unacceptable) shall have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size insulated (green) ground conductor. Conductors shall be #12 AWG. minimum, type THHN as manufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.

I. Armored (AC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armor unacceptable) shall

have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size insulated (green) ground conductor. Conductors shall be copper #12 AWG. minimum, type THHN as manufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.

J. All cables in air plenum spaces that are not installed within protective conduit system shall be of

type approved for air plenum installation. This shall include signal and communication cables. 1. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be

mounted upon and terminations made in terminal cabinets. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted.

2. All wiring types and sizes shall be as follows or as otherwise required by the equipment

manufacturer: a. Addressable loop wiring shall be via #16 AWG (minimum). b. Initiation Zone Circuit Wiring shall be via#14 AWG (Minimum)



c Visual notification appliance circuits shall utilize a minimum #14 AWG d. Audio circuits shall utilize #16 twisted shielded pairs. 3. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated

branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled "FIRE ALARM".

K. All cables for fire alarm system between different floors shall be twisted pair, per NFPA 70 Article

760, classification CI or CIC for power limited fire alarm service, UL listed as type FPL, and complying with the requirements in UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hr rating. Shielding shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. The CIC cable shall be manufactured by Pyrotenax or approved equal.

L. Fiber Optic Network Communication Wiring: The fire alarm system network shall support a UL

Listed fiber optic cables with following specifications: 1. Size: 62.5 micrometers/125 micrometers 2. Type: Multimode, Dual fiber, plenum rated. 3. Distance: Maximum 10dB total attenuation between network nodes. 4. Connector type: ST 2.6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – EXTENSION A. General: The present building is equipped with an existing fire alarm system The new fire alarm

system scope of work shall be an extension of this system, integrated to provide a complete complex system.

1. Furnish and install an addition to the existing fire alarm system according to the following

Specification. The system shall be wired, connected, tested and left in first class operating condition. The equipment and completed installation shall be in compliance with local and national codes, authorities having jurisdiction and in accordance with applicable sections of the latest edition of NFPA 72 for auxiliary fire alarm systems. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated and shall meet Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), NFPA72 and with the approval of the State Fire Marshal.

2. The installing contractor shall determine through a load test if additional power

requirements are needed for the added notification appliances shown on the Contract Drawings. If additional power is required, furnish and install extra power supplies as required to power the added notification appliances.

3. The installing contractor shall determine through inspection the compatibility of the

existing system’s visual notification appliances to synchronize with new devices, and shall report to the Architect/Engineer of any compatibility issues prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not reported, the Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and operable system.

4. All new equipment shall be provided by the manufacturer of the existing equipment for

complete number compatibility with the existing system and to provide one (1) manufacturer with total responsibility for the entire system operation, warranty and



maintenance. No other manufacturer will be considered acceptable. Match existing devices to whatever extent is possible.

5. All final connections, programming, testing and adjusting of the system shall be done

under the direct supervision of the system supplier and existing system maintenance vendor. After completion of the installation, a trained technician employed by the system supplier shall demonstrate the system to be in satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and shall make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative as a result of this demonstration.

6. Warrant the new equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship and

within one (1) year from date of installation, and repair or replace all or any part of the equipment found to be defective at no cost to the Owner.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following minimum qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in the fire alarm system design. b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum level III. 2. System Shop Drawings are required to be submitted for approval, containing the

following information: a. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this project, including

method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

b. Complete system drawings drawn using AutoCAD 2014 or compatible version, to

a scale no less than 1/8”=1’-0” showing all system components by:

(1) Locations and addresses of alarm initiation devices, audio and visual

devices, status monitoring devices, and auxiliary control devices. (2) Conduit layout and size (3) Location of end of line devices (4) Point-to-point wiring with number/size/type of conductors c. A detailed list of each new piece of equipment with model numbers for each

component. d. Manufacturer's Specification Sheets on each item of equipment. e. Confirmation that the manufacturer's representative will provide jobsite

supervision during the installation of the system, perform the final testing of the system and instruct the operating personnel on the operation of the system.

f. Detailed one (1) line schematic wiring diagrams of the system and its

interconnecting wiring. Typical wiring diagram will not be accepted. All data



submitted shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project. All extraneous material shall be deleted.

g. Provide revised battery and circuit calculations reflecting all new and existing

devices. Circuit calculations shall demonstrate proper consideration of wire size, circuit loading and spare capacity allowances.

h. Shop Drawings that are submitted for approval without all of this information will

not be considered for approval. C. Operation: 1. The activation of any manual fire alarm station or the automatic actuation of any thermal

detector, ceiling smoke detector, sprinkler system water flow switch or any other approved alarm initiating device shall immediately result in the following:

a. The existing city master box shall trip, causing the local Fire Department to be

notified. b. The zone in alarm shall light its respective alarm lamp or display the appropriate

alarm message on the system LCD at the fire alarm control panel and at all remote fire alarm annunciators.

c. All audible alarm signals (existing and new) shall sound, and all visual units shall

flash in a synchronized fashion, except for duct smoke detector activation. d. All smoke doors (existing and new) shall automatically close. e. Upon activation of an elevator lobby smoke detector or other designated recall

device, recall all elevators to the ground floor or an alternate level as required by the local authority having jurisdiction. Provide for shunt tripping of elevator power as shown and in accordance with applicable codes.

2. Duct smoke detectors shall activate a supervisory alarm and shall activate damper

control circuits as indicated in addition to their fire alarm system function. D. Equipment: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panel: a. Modify and expand the existing fire alarm control panel to provide for proper

system operation from both new and existing devices. Provide new control panel modules incorporated into the existing cabinets, with 100 percent extra cabinet capacity for future system expansion capability. The operating controls and zone and supervisory indicators shall be located behind a locked door with a full size tempered glass viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, all zone locations shall be identified and the panel shall be provided with a set of permanently mounted operating instructions.

b. The panel shall contain the following modules. (1) A control module shall be provided to act as a central processing and

indicating location for the fire alarm system. It shall include acknowledge, reset, LED test and trouble silence switches, annunciator trouble, system



trouble and earth LED's and a trouble zone alert and an alphanumeric LCD.

(2) A control module shall be provided with an alarm resound feature to

permit subsequent alarms to resound the signals. c. Provide Class A analog/addressable signaling line circuit interface cards with two

(2) electrically supervised, normally open circuits, monitoring for alarm (shorts), trouble (opens) and ground faults. The modules shall provide alarm and trouble LED's, LED test (from control), alarm annunciator outputs and alarm resound with flasher acknowledge (from control). They shall allow the mixing of smoke detectors, heat detectors, flow switches and other initiation devices on the same loop, without the use of limiting resistors at manual stations and detectors and without using a separate source of power for the detectors.

d. Provide adequate power supply module supplying 6 amperes each of continuous

filtered power. The power supply shall be capable of furnishing the system power and power for devices such as duct smoke detectors, auxiliary relays, door holders, and notification appliances, etc. It shall contain a normal power LED, battery trouble LED and power supply trouble LED, all viewable on front of enclosure. Where power supplies are in separate or remote enclosures, they shall be supervised by the FACP for loss of AC power, battery fail, and ground fault, and each notification appliance circuit served shall be individually supervised.

e. Provide terminal connectors and harnesses for field connections of remote

annunciators, or for the modules' auxiliary contacts. Each connector shall have provisions for at least sixteen (16) separate points and shall be fastened securely on the rack end.

f. Provide any and all modules and modifications including system programming to

the fire alarm control panel necessary for proper system operation. g. Provide new battery calculations for fire alarm control panel and all notification

power extender panels (existing and new) and replace existing batteries per new calculations, if required. The batteries shall support 60 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. Provide increased capacity of 20% for safety and battery degradation

3. Remote Annunciators: a. Modify the existing annunciators to provide capacity for the new fire alarm zones. b. Provide additional modules for zone annunciation to match existing. 4. Notification Power Expander Panel: a. The NPE shall offer up to 6.0 amps or 8.0 amps of regulated 24-volt DC power. It

shall include an integral charger designed to charge 18.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby with 15 minutes of alarm output. Provide 20% increased capacity for battery degradation. The standby batteries shall be gelled-electrolyte type, maintenance free.

b. The NPE shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification

Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay.



c. It shall provide four Class A Notification Appliance Circuits and each circuit shall

be provided with 25% spare capacity. 5. Audio Visual Alarm Signals: a. Furnish and install combination audio/visual alarm assemblies, except where

noted. b. Audible signals shall match existing and produce a sound output of 85dba at 10

feet, or 15dba above ambient; whichever is greater. c. Audible signals: provide multi-tapped Cone Speakers where shown and required.

Speaker shall have 1 and 2 watt settings. The minimum reverberant sound output shall be 87dbA at 10’ at the 1 watt setting. All speakers shall be tapped at 1 watt minimum.

d. Provide xenon strobe visual signals with a minimum effective intensity of 15

candela or otherwise shown or required in accordance with UL1971, ADA and NFPA72.

6. Programmable Modules: a. Furnish and install addressable monitor modules to monitor waterflow, tamper or

other related dry contact status inputs. b. Furnish and install addressable control modules to provide programmable

auxiliary contact outputs from the system. Each contact shall be rated for 2 amps @24VDC or .5 amps @ 120VAC.

E. Installation: 1. Furnish and install, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all wiring, conduit and

outlet boxes required for the installation of the complete system as specified and described herein and as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that any new work or wiring performed within the new area shall in no way impair or adversely affect the performance of the existing building's fire alarm system in areas adjacent to the new area.

2. All wiring shall be of the same approved type as used for electric light and power wiring

and shall meet the requirements of National Electric Codes. The sizes of the different wires shall be no smaller than #14 AWG. Color codes shall be used throughout. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall test free from grounds or crosses between conductors. The wiring color code system shall be carried right through all equipment.

3. Final connections between the new equipment, the wiring system (and the existing

equipment) shall be made under direct supervision of a Factory-Trained Manufacturer’s Representative.

F. Manufacturer's Guarantee and Final Test: 1. The Installing Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent

mechanical and electric defects for a period of one (1) year from date of final test and acceptance form.



2. The manufacturing, supplying and servicing company of the previously specified system

shall be a single responsibility. All equipment shall carry the original manufacturer’s label, part number and UL/FM listing. Multiple suppliers will not meet the intent of a single responsibility for the total system concept.

3. The manufacturer of this equipment shall maintain local offices within fifty (50) miles of

installation for prompt and efficient service when required. Manufacturers without local service facilities and equipped accordingly shall not be considered equal under these Specifications.

4. Provide a complete final test and recertification of the modified system if accordance with

NFPA72 and UL procedures. The tests shall be witnessed and conducted under the direction of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. A complete test report, riser diagram, address directory and as-built drawings and UL certificate shall be provided as part of the final as-built documentation.

2.7 DEMOLITION A. All demolition work, as indicated on the drawings, shall be performed by the Fire Alarm

Contractor. Demolished items shall be removed from the premises by the General Contractor. B. All existing devices, wiring, etc. in renovated areas shall be demolished unless otherwise noted

or indicated on the drawings. Care shall be taken during demolition work to maintain the integrity of the existing raceway systems which may be reused as indicated below.

C. Existing conductors and cables run above ceiling, not run in metal raceway and not teflon coated,

shall be disconnected, removed and replaced so as to be suitable for air handling plenums, per local, state and national codes.

D. Existing fire alarm system raceways, wiring, junction boxes, outlet boxes and pull boxes may be

reused wherever possible. E. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the mechanical integrity of any

existing raceway systems that are to be reused. Where the existing raceway system does not meet the requirements indicated in the Fire Alarm Specifications, Paragraph 3.05, wiring methods, the raceway system shall be repaired and/or replaced before new wiring is installed.

F. All existing exposed raceways and raceway components that are not to be reused shall be

demolished. Where existing raceways are embedded in building construction, they shall be cut flush with finished surfaces and abandoned in place. All existing wiring shall be removed.

G. Where required, the existing raceway system shall be extended to new outlet/device locations as

indicated on the drawings. In general, all new raceways in finished areas shall be run concealed in building construction, above hung ceilings, in masonry or stud walls, etc. Where required, new raceways run in the existing building may be run exposed. The contractor shall obtain approval from the Architect regarding location and routing of any exposed raceways prior to installing same.

H. Copies of drawings from which the existing buildings were constructed shall be made available

to the Contractor. Refer to specifications Section 01100 and “Instructions to Bidders” for more information on drawings of the existing conditions.



2.8 FIRE STOPPING A. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 tested

assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. B. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having

local jurisdiction. C. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data for each material including

the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the

firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements.

E. Cast-in place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non-

combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open systems), conduit, or Fire Alarm cable bundles penetrating concrete floors.

F. Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel

conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products shall be used:

1. Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Fire Foam 3. Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. Elastomeric Firestop Sealant G. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet

boxes, the following product shall be used: 1. Firestop Putty Pad H. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 which is

equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-

penetration materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General 1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the

"equipment" as listed below.



2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint of non-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component’s center of gravity.

3. The work in this section includes the following: a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment. b. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. c. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. d. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 4. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL non-

structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground are excluded but entry of services through the foundation walls are included. Equipment referred to below is a partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this specification)

a. Battery Chargers b. Battery Racks c. Conduit d. Control Panel(s) 5. Life safety systems defined a. All systems involved with fire protection systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including

all generators, transfer switches, transformers, panelboards and all circuits to fire protection, smoke evacuation and/or emergency lighting systems.

c. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including conduit,

dampers, etc. 6. Positive Attachment a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge type

expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through bolted connection to the structure.

7. Transverse Bracing a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of the

conduit. 8. Longitudinal Bracing



a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the conduit. B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages 1. Internal and/or External Systems a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu of

the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified per the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraints are in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field offices or representatives are unacceptable.

b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall be

borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with the preceding.

c. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire unit

assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment and certification thereof shall be by this section.

C. Submittal Data Requirements 1. Submittals a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be

utilized detailing compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per "MATERIALS" Section of this specification.

b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules

showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment, referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.

2. Shop Drawings a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable

methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included. b. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection data

before condition is accepted for installation. c. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size

and locations for each piece of equipment. d. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locations

and types of restraints shown for all conduits, bus duct and cable tray. Rod bracing and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated. Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.

e. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation angle

allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each allowable installation condition.



3. Seismic Certification and Analysis a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment

to the structure. All performance of products (such as; strut, cable, anchors, clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer's data sheets or certified calculations.

b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown in

Table A acting through the equipment’s center of gravity. c. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped

by a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts. d. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials utilized

for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedding and/or weld length.

e. An in force, $ 500,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors and Omissions

insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer’s product liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.

4. Manufacturer’s Responsibility a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the following

responsibilities: (1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. (2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified. (3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections. (4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure

proper installation and performance of systems. (5) Certify correctness of installation upon completion. D. Related Work 1. Housekeeping Pads a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the Project Structural Engineer.

Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the Concrete Section Contractor.

b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor and

sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.

2. Supplementary Support Steel a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all

equipment and piping, as required.



3. Attachments a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads,

concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.

TABLE A

“G” FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS

(SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV > 0.1 < 0.2)

CONDUIT

RIGIDLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

FLEXIBLY MOUNTED

EQUIPMENT

ALL LIFE SAFETY

.25

.40

.40

.60

E. Materials 1. Devices a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be the

product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base manufacturer of these specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design, performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.

2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without

failure, the "G" forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculations as described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS" section of these specifications.

b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows: (1) Springs cadmium plated, zinc electroplated or powder coat. (2) Hardware cadmium plated. (3) All other metal parts hot spray or hot dipped galvanized. c. All seismic restraint devices (1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuit

isolation devices during normal operating conditions. (2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure. d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited. 3. Seismic Restraint Types



a. TYPE I: Same as Type B. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductile iron) are not acceptable. Mason Ind. TYPE SLR.

b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall incorporate

a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. Mason Ind. Type Z-1225/Z-1011.

c. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems. (1) Vibration isolated systems braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized

cable rope. Mason Industries Type SCB. (2) Non-isolated systems braced with structural steel strut type with approved

fastening devices to equipment and structure. Mason Ind. Type SSB. (3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of

hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor’s submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from California OSHPD. Mason Ind. Model “SRC”.

(4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They shall

be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from California OSHPD. Mason Ind. Model “CCB”.

d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel

casing. (1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from

California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. Mason Industries Type RC or BR.

e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors for

bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published standards.

4. Vibration Isolator Types a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator - Free Standing (1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8

: 1 at rated deflection. (2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% of

the rated deflection. (3) Ductile top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment

locking cap screw.



(4) Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside,

unless designated otherwise. Mason Industries Type SLF. b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator - Restrained (1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features. (a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing

metal-to-metal contact. (b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability. (c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance under

normal operation. (d) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from

California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. Mason Industries Type SLR, SSLFH.

c. TYPE C: NOT USED d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel

casing. (1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval “R” number from

California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings.

Mason Industries Type RC or BR. e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator (1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lower

support rod from the hanger box. (a) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load without

failure. Mason Industries Type HD. F. Installation 1. General a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with

the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data. b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment resulting

in stress on equipment connections. 2. Equipment Installation a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE B at the end of this section. b. Additional Requirements:



(1) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed without changing equipment elevations.

(2) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the

spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators.

(3) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are

no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all directions.

(4) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring. (5) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this Section must be properly

doweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to housekeeping pads, See D. RELATED WORK.

3. Seismic Restraints a. Installation (1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,

anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the required acceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipment movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers (restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must be positively restrained to the structure.

(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently braced

with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolated equipment and slack with ½" cable deflection for isolated equipment. Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals and shop drawings. Equipment less than 50 lbs. Is excluded.

(3) All horizontally suspended cable trays, bus duct and conduit shall use

RESTRAINT TYPE III. Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE C at the end of this Section.

(4) For all trapeze supported piping and conduit, the individual pipes and

conduits must be transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze support at the designated restraint locations.

(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structure

must not occur. Bracing may occur from: (a) Flanges of structural beams. (b) Upper truss chords in bar joists. (c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete

structures. (6) Conduit Risers



(a) Where conduits pass through cored holes, core diameters to be a

maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. Cored holes must be packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other Sections of this Specification and/or State and Local Codes. No additional horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.

(b) Conduit risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at each level

on top of the slab attached in a seismically approved manner for vertical restraint.

(c) Conduit risers in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in a

seismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser clamp at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the structural steel. The riser clamp and structural steel must be capable of withstanding all static and seismic loads.

(7) Ceiling mounted panel light fixtures shall be attached to lay-in ceilings with

earthquake clips or other approved means of positive attachment to T-bar structure.

(8) All non-isolated floor or wall-mounted equipment shall use RESTRAINT

TYPE III or V. (9) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic forces,

restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units’ center of gravity to suitably resist “G” forces specified.

(10) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building

or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, bus duct, conduit, etc. crossing a building expansion joint.

b. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Non-Life Safety Systems: (1) All conduit less than 2-1/2 inch diameter. (2) All clevis or trapeze supported conduit, cable tray or bus duct suspended

by hangers with positive attachment to the structure that are less than 12 inches in length as measured from the top of the conduit, cable tray or bus duct to the point of attachment to the structure. If the 12 inch limit is exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is required for the run.

c. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints on Life Safety Equipment. (1) Critical, Standby or Emergency power conduit less than 1 inch nominal

diameter. 4. Inspection a. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint

devices, the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner’s



expense to review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be corrected immediately at the contractor’s expense.

TABLE C SEISMIC BRACING TABLE

EQUIPMENT

ON CENTER SPACING (Max)

WITHIN EACH CHANGE

OF DIRECTION


CONDUIT

40 Feet

80 Feet

10 Feet

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVING A. Conduit and openings shall be laid out in advance to permit their provision in the work. Sleeves

and conduit shall be set in forms before concrete is poured. Any extra work required where sleeves or conduits have been omitted or improperly placed shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor which made the error or omission.

B. Sleeves provided for conduit between floors and through fire walls, or smoke partitions shall be

installed with approved packing between sleeves and conduit to provide for fire stop. C. Where conduits pass through footings, beams, or slabs they shall be provided with waterproof

sleeves. D. Except as required below, sleeves shall be made of galvanized sheet metal to finish flush with

building finish lines. E. Provide acoustic sealer in sleeves between occupied spaces. Sleeves installed in floors of toilet

rooms and apparatus rooms shall extend two inches above the finished floor. 3.2 GROUNDING A. All systems shall test free of grounds. Exception: Parts of circuits or equipment that are intentionally and permanently grounded to

provide ground fault detection, noise suppression, emergency ground signaling and circuit protection grounding.

B. Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters’ Laboratories (grounding and

bonding materials) shall conform to UL Standards and shall carry UL approval. C. Ground conductors shall be of electrical grade copper except where otherwise indicated.

Grounding connectors shall be uninsulated unless otherwise specified. D. Connections shall be made readily accessible for inspection. No connections shall be made

concealed in floors or walls.



3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Generally, unless specified below and approved by the authorities having jurisdiction, wiring shall

consist of insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. B. Electrical metallic conduit may be used as permitted by State or Local Codes for feeders, branch

circuits, signal instrumentation and control circuits. 1. EMT may be used as permitted in ceiling or floor cavity spaces, void spaces of masonry

walls, in equipment rooms, in mechanical chases, in electrical chases, in closets, in exposed locations 8 feet above finished floor and where not subject to accidental damage or abuse. Where subject to accidental damage or abuse, install in rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.

2. Set screw connectors shall be galvanized steel, white metal is not acceptable. C. Metal clad cable with a full size, insulated, separate ground wire may be used as permitted by

state and local codes for branch circuit wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studded partitions.

D. Dual rated FPLP/MC Multi-Conductor Fire Alarm and Control Metal-Clad cable with full size

insulated separator ground wire may be used as permitted by State and Local Codes for fire alarm wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studded partitions.

E. Flexible metal conduit of short lengths (maximum 18 inch) shall be provided at all equipment

subject to vibration or movement. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations. F. All raceways shall be properly fastened in accordance with the applicable Articles of the Electrical

Code. Spacing between supports shall not exceed 7 feet unless specifically approved by the Architect. Conduit installed above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the building structure. Conduit supports fastened to the roof decking will not be allowed.

G. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight. Bends or

offsets shall be made with standard conduit ells; field bends shall be made with an approved bender or hickey. Pipe threads cut in the field for exterior or underground use shall be painted with red lead or a similar approved substance before being made up.

H. Conduit terminals at cabinets and boxes shall be rigidly secured with locknuts and bushings as

required by the Electrical Code and local authorities. On all conduit 1-1/4 inch trade size and larger, bushings shall be insulated with double locknut.

I. Conduit fittings shall be galvanized treated or cadmium plated. Rigid steel conduit and

intermediate metal conduit shall use only threaded connections. Steel supports or racks shall be galvanized steel channel and fittings, by Unistrut, Steel City or approved equal.

J. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch. Other sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings or

required by the Electrical Code for number and size of conductors installed. K. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically. The exact routing and means of support shall be

determined in the field. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the building walls, structural members or architectural features.



L. All conduit ends shall be plugged or capped as soon as they are installed to prevent entrance of moisture or other debris during construction. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the conduit system is complete in all details. All spare conduits shall have a nylon pull line inserted.

M. Expansion fittings shall be furnished and installed wherever building expansion joints occur.

Expansion joints shall be provided for non-metallic conduit to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit, fittings and outlet boxes supported on walls, columns or steel work shall be held in place by caulking anchors, power-driven studs, expansion shields, beam clamps or concrete inserts. Nails or screws used in conjunction with wood plugs in lieu of toggle or expansion bolts will not be accepted.

N. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in an approved manner, using

adapters or other materials and methods recommended or the purpose by the conduit manufacturers.

O. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeders or branches except at outlets or accessible

junction boxes. Splices in wire shall be standard pigtail, made mechanically tight. P. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner with mechanical type devices of a design

that will not cause separation of the cable strands or distortion of the cable. Joints and splices shall be covered with good grade of splicing compound and plastic tape so as to form the equivalent of original insulation and covering.

Q. Wire and cable shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid mechanical injury to

the conductor, insulation, or covering. R. All raceways shall be carefully cleaned, blown and swabbed dry inside before installation of wires

and cables. The Architect reserves the right to have all wiring in a raceway or raceways removed for inspection should the presence of moisture or dirt be suspected in same at no additional expense to the Architect. If moisture or dirt is found in the raceway system during the inspection of same, it shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried to the complete satisfaction of the Owner at no additional expense to the Owner.

S. All vertical risers for power and auxiliary systems passing through floor slabs shall be properly

supported at each floor level. T. Wiring shall not be pulled into a raceway system until it is mechanically complete in all details.

The ends of the raceway shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust, moisture, or mortar, or plaster while building is under the process of construction.

3.4 WIRE AND CABLES A. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner and be at least equivalent electrically

and mechanically to the conductor itself. Whenever the conductors is bared for splicing, it shall be taped with a good grade of rubber splicing compound and friction or plastic tape so as to form at least the equivalent of the original insulation and covering.

B. Pressure connectors with “wrap caps” or insulating caps of a type approved by the local inspecting

authorities may be used by joints on branch circuits with conductor sizes up to and including #10 AWG. Connectors shall be manufactured by Buchanan, Eagle, Ideal, or approved equal.

C. Insulating compounds, unless indicated or specified otherwise, for cable joints, boxes, terminals

and other similar items, shall have bituminous base and shall be free from granular content, creosote alkali, acid, free of sulphur and water.



D. Conductors or cables shall not be pulled into the raceway systems until all work which could

cause injury to the conductors or insulation has been completed. A lubricant manufactured by Ideal, General Electric, Dow Corning or approval equal, shall be used when necessary for the pulling of conductors or cables into the raceway systems except that no pulling compound shall be used for the isolated power system circuits.

E. Wires and cables shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid kinks, twists, and

mechanical injury to the conductor, insulation or covering. F. Where conductors are to be connected directly to devices with the use of terminal screws, and

other wiring devices or screw type terminations the wires shall be formed into a loop to fit around the screws in a clockwise direction so as to be tightly locked in place with same.

G. At no time shall more than one (1) conductor terminate under or on terminal screw. 3.5 COLOR CODING A. Color coding shall be achieved by one (1) of the following methods: 1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one (1) of the

following methods: a. Color compounds. b. Colored coatings. 2. When limited quantities of cable are involved, the Architect may permit the use of the

following methods in lieu of cable manufacturer’s color coding. Each cable must be coded at all terminal points, in all manholes, boxes or other similar enclosures by:

a. Spiral application of 3/4 inch wide, colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape,

half-lapped for a distance of not less than 6 inches. To prevent unwinding, the last two (2) wraps of taps shall be applied with no tension. The tape shall be applied so as not to obliterate identification markings on the cable.

b. Application of three (3) 3/16 inch wide colored, fungus inert, self-extinguishing,

self-locking, nylon cable ties spaced 3 inches apart. The ties shall be snugly applied with a special tool or pliers, and any excess removed.

B. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project. C. Submit for approval all color coding, phase identification and positioning schemes that he intends

to use at all terminations, etc., before actual connections are made. D. In the event that electrical conflicts arise in the field, they shall be referred to the Architect

immediately before the Contractor proceeds with the work. Physical orientation or placement of conductors shall be secondary to the electrical consistency, integrity and continuity.

3.6 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for the proper

installation of all components of the electrical system.



B. The locations of all wall boxes shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings before installation of same. All boxes, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, shall be opposite the hinged side of the door for all single doors.

C. Locations of outlets shown on Drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall study the Building

Plans in relating to the spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures devices or other electrical components are symmetrically located and mounted in or on the walls, ceiling and floor.

D. Outlet, junction or pull boxes, shown on the Drawings, that interfere with the installation of

mechanical equipment, structural or architectural features or that will be inaccessible due to the work of other trades shall be relocated accordingly as a part of construction conditions encountered during the course of the construction program at no cost to the Owner.

E. All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall be

supported by bar hangers in frame construction or shall be fastened directly with wood screws on wood, bolts with expansion shields on concrete or brick toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on metal. Threaded studs of the proper type and holding capacity driven in by a power charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable for mounting of boxes on solid concrete walls or slabs. Preset inserts of the proper type and holding capacity shall be used in overhead slab construction wherever possible for the support of pull and junction boxes.

3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailed

otherwise on the Fire Alarm Drawings or Architectural Drawings. Notes or details on the Architectural Drawings pertaining to mounting heights or locations of electrical equipment shall supersede those noted below or detailed on the Fire Alarm Drawings. If the mounting height of any electrical component is questionable, obtain a clarification from the Architect before installation. All mounting heights shall comply with the Federal ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) and the State of Massachusetts Publication 521 CMR: Architectural Barriers Board for (Buildings, Facilities, etc. for the Visually and Physically Handicapped).

. 1. Fire Alarm Signals: (Speaker/Strobes) 6’-8” above finished floor or 6” below ceiling to the

bottom of the strobe lens, whichever is lower. B. Provide information to the Contractor, for all required access panels in walls, ceilings and floors,

for access to concealed electrical equipment, pull/junction boxes and fittings. The exact sizes and physical locations shall be to suit accessibility and construction conditions.

C. Furnish and install all power and control and alarm wiring to include connections for plumbing and

fire protection systems equipment to be wired and connected by the Contractor. D. Obtain from Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection Specification

Sections complete wiring and connection diagrams of all equipment which is to be wired and connected before installing raceways or wiring for same.

E. As a minimum, fire alarm speakers with multiple power tap settings shall utilize the 1 Watt setting.

Using power tap settings lower than 1 Watt must be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.



3.8 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install all supplementary steel, channels and supports required for the proper

installation, mounting and support of all lighting fixtures and electrical equipment to be installed under this Contract, as required.

B. All supplementary steel, channels and supports shall be furnished, installed and secured with all

fittings, support rods and appurtenances required for a complete support or mounting system. C. Supplementary steel and channels shall be firmly connected to the building construction in a

manner approved by the Architect prior to the installation of same. Submit to the Architect, via the Contractor, the locations proposed for using supplementary steel and channels for the support of equipment, fixtures and raceways. The submittal shall indicate the mounting methods, size and details of the supports, channels and steel; it shall indicate also that weight which the supports, channels and supplementary steel is to carry.

D. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be of sufficient

strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the channel and supplementary steel manufacturer’s requirements for loading.

E. All supplementary steel and channels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel

to the walls, floor and ceiling construction. All turns shall be made with 90 degrees and 45 degrees fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation conditions.

F. All supplementary steel, channels, supports, and fittings, shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories,

Incorporated, approved, be galvanized steel and be manufactured by Steel City, Unistrut, Power-Strut, T. J. Cope, Chalfant or approved equal.

3.9 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes,

standards or authorities having jurisdiction. Conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least 48 hours prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.

B. Prior to the date of acceptance, furnish the Architect with certificates of testing and inspection for

all systems indicating the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction and conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and

electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground of not less than the values recommended by the manufacturers.

D. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections. E. Testing recommended by manufacturers shall be required; see Fire Alarm System. F. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected

promptly and retested. Defective material shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner.

G. Provide all temporary connections, necessary testing equipment, labor and materials, required

for the testing of the systems and equipment. All systems shall be prepared for testing and protected from damage. The cost of all tests shall be included in the contract price.



3.10 PAINTING A. All equipment installed under this Section shall have as a minimum a shop coat of non-lead gray

paint. Finish painting where required shall be done under other Sections. 3.11 CLEANING UP A. Upon completion of all installation, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the fire

alarm installation and completely remove all exposed labels, markings, and foreign material. B. The interior of all boxes and cabinets shall be left clean; exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and

plated surfaces polished. C. Repair damage to finish surfaces resulting from work under this section. D. Remove material and equipment from areas of work and storage areas.

END OF SECTION \\Fs3\g_drive\Projects\2017-Boston\M1052-016.00\Specifications\Fire\FA Spec - 100% CD - 10-24-18.docx



STORM DRAIN UTILITIES

33 40 00 - Page 1 of 5

Section 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1- GENERAL


A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.

B. All Work shall comply with the standards and specifications of the Massachusetts Plumbing Code, Boston Public Works Department and the Boston Water and Sewer Commission.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the Work of this Section, including but not limited to the following:

1. Modifications to existing underdrain system within the field

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections:

1. Section 312000 - Earth Moving

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Drainage Piping: System of drain pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for the following:

1. Drainage piping

2. Couplings

3. Clean outs (Include frames, covers, and grates.)

C. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.

D. As-built drawings of all storm drain improvements including materials used, pipe connections, and rim and invert information.



33 40 00 - Page 2 of 5


A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.

B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate.

C. Comply with the requirements of the Massachusetts Plumbing Code and the Boston Water and Sewer Commission.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

B. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.

B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services.

1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with interior building sewerage systems as needed.

B. Coordinate with other utility work.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: bell-and-spigot ends, for gasket joints. Pipe shall be perforated with standard pattern per ASTM D2729.



33 40 00 - Page 3 of 5

2.2 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

a. Manhole Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

1) Invert Slope: 2.5 percent (1:40) through manhole.

b. Manhole Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

1) Slope: 1 inch per foot (1:12).

2.3 FLEXIBLE SEWER COUPLINGS

A. Rubber Sleeve and Steel Band; Fernco, E.J. Prescott, or approved equal.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. All cleanouts shall be as depicted on the plans.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 Earth Moving.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 Earth Moving. Arrange for installation of warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.

1. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.



33 40 00 - Page 4 of 5

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install piping on properly compacted crushed stone bedding material wrapped in geotextile fabric.

C. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated.

F. Extend piping and connect to stadium drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

G. Pipe shall be laid so that perforations point down.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. Join and install pipe and fittings according to the manufacturers written recommendations.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: Install pipe and fittings with elastomeric seals in conformance with ASTM D2321.

C. Flexible Sewer Couplings: Install couplings per manufacturers written specifications.

D. Cleanouts: Install Cleanouts per manufacturers written specifications

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated.


A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the Work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.



33 40 00 - Page 5 of 5

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.

2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever Work stops.

3. Flush all new piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris.

B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

f. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

1) Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

C. Test new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.

2. Schedule tests, and their inspections with the Engineer and Architect. Provide at least 24-hours advance notice.

3. Submit separate reports for each test.

4. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Replace leaking piping using new materials and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

End of Section
